JP2019209183A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can suppress occurrence of defects compared to the prior arts.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a game board in which a game using game balls is performed on the front side; a frame main body to which the game board is detachably attached from the front; and a game ball supply unit provided on the rear side of the frame main body for receiving the game balls from the outside of the game machine to guide them to the downstream side. The game ball supply unit includes: a ball storage unit for receiving the game balls from the outside of the game machine; and a ball guiding unit for guiding the game balls stored in the ball storage unit to the downstream side and having a discharge hole that allows foreign matters to fall. A plurality of boards are provided on the rear side of the game machine, and a specific board out of the plurality of boards is arranged on the rear side of the game machine, so as to be positioned in the front side with respect to the ball guiding unit.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 18

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine including a tank rail for guiding a game ball from a ball tank to the downstream side has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). The tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball.

JP 2013-215440 A (FIG. 2)

  By the way, in the above gaming machine, if foreign matter falling from a hole provided in the tank rail adheres to the gaming board disposed below the tank rail, an electrical trouble occurs, causing a malfunction in the gaming machine and causing malfunctions, etc. It was.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, The place made into the objective is providing the game machine which can suppress generation | occurrence | production of a malfunction compared with the past.

  Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A game board where a game ball is played on the front side, and
A frame body to which the game board is detachably attached from the front;
A gaming machine that is provided on the rear side of the frame main body, and that receives a gaming ball from outside the gaming machine and guides it downstream,
The game ball supply unit
A ball reservoir for receiving game balls from outside the gaming machine;
A ball guiding portion formed with a discharge hole that can guide the game ball stored in the ball storing portion to the downstream side and allow foreign substances to fall;
A plurality of boards are provided on the rear side of the gaming machine,
The specific board located below the discharge hole among the plurality of boards is arranged to be located in front of the discharge hole on the rear side of the gaming machine,
Further, below the discharge hole, a hole lower member having an upper surface portion for receiving the foreign matter dropped from the discharge hole is located,
The upper surface portion of the lower hole member is provided above the specific substrate positioned in front of the discharge hole.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects as compared with the conventional game machine.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the door frame in the up-down direction center, and was seen from the top. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the door-frame lower unit at the center of the left-right direction, and was seen from the right. (A) is a perspective view which shows the state which moved the 1st movable part of the door frame production | presentation apparatus to the raising end, (b) is the state which moved the production operation part to the raising end from the state of (a). It is a perspective view shown. (A) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing the lower front speaker grille, the grill decoration frame, and the lattice decoration part in (a). (A) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of a door frame, (b) is an enlarged front view shown in the state which removed the grille decoration frame and the lattice decoration part in (a). It is a top view of a door frame lower unit showing a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate of the door frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the surrounding light area | region in a door frame. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between the door frame effect display apparatus and effect operation part in a door frame effect apparatus, (b) is decoration of the effect operation part by the effect image of a door frame effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the collaboration effect by the effect image of a door frame effect display apparatus, and the movable effect of an effect operation part. It is a front view of a main part frame in the state where a game board was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame of the state which removed the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame of the state which removed the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is a rear view of the payout device for explaining the rotation position of the payout blade. It is a rear view of the payout device for explaining ball clogging and ball omission prevention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper direction in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. to the ball tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled Fig.42 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour path in the main body frame upper part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of a tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side. It is the figure which expanded a part of sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line of Fig.40 (a), and is a schematic diagram of the structure of a metal powder countermeasure. It is the structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is the structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the structure of the metal powder countermeasure of the state which removed the game board. It is a front view of the main body frame of the state which attached the game board. It is a front view of a main part frame in the state where a game board was removed. (A) It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame of the state which removed the game board from the lower right front, (B) The perspective view which looked at the main body frame of the state which removed the game board of the modification from the lower right front. (A) When the game board is removed from the main body frame, the portion where the upper decoration portion of the door frame is located corresponding to the position where the tank rail hangs down in the opening of the game board mounting portion when viewed from the front is indicated by the hatched portion It is the figure shown, (B) is a figure which shows typically the side view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left side. (A) It is a top view which shows typically the tank rail seen from upper direction, (B) It is a front view which shows typically the tank rail seen from the front of the pachinko machine. (A) It is a top view which shows typically the tank rail seen from upper direction, (B) It is a front view which shows typically the tank rail seen from the front of the pachinko machine. (A) It is the front view which looked at the inner side of the 2nd rail cover from the front, (B) The inner side of the 2nd rail cover in the state which inclined the pachinko machine so that the side part in which a ball guidance unit is provided may become a lower surface FIG. It is a front view of the back surface side of the pachinko machine for demonstrating area | regions A and B. FIG. It is a division | segmentation perspective view of the pachinko machine at the time of providing a drawer connector. (A) It is a side view of the main body frame for demonstrating the position of a drawer connector at the time of non-mounting of a game board, (B) at the time of mounting of a game board. It is a front view of the back side of a pachinko machine when an external terminal plate is provided below the tank rail. It is a side view of the main body frame for demonstrating the position of the external terminal board at the time of mounting | wearing of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame at the time of providing a protrusion part from the left front. (A) It is a side view of the main body frame for demonstrating the position of the protrusion part at the time of non-mounting of a game board, (B) at the time of mounting of a game board. It is a front view of the game board which made the game panel etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 67 viewed from the right front. FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 67 viewed from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of the routing of the wiring from the function display unit in the main control board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel or the like is transparent. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the back. FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming board showing the gaming panel in an opaque state and showing a gaming nail in which a gaming unit circulates by cutting a front unit parallel to the surface of the gaming panel and an obstacle nail. FIG. 78 is an enlarged front view of a distribution passage group in the upper right corner in FIG. 77. FIG. 78 is an enlarged front view of an attacker unit at a lower right corner in FIG. 77. (A) is the principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory different from FIG. 78 etc., (b) is further embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory different from (a). FIG. (A) is the principal part enlarged view which shows the embodiment of the distribution channel group of the center character further different from FIG. 80, (b) is principal part expansion which shows the embodiment of the distribution channel group of the center character further different from FIG. FIG. It is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment of the distribution channel group of the center role further different from FIG.80 and FIG.81. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back 1st production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back 1st production unit of the back unit from the back. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the light-guide plate in a back 1st production unit, and a decoration board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd production unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd production unit of the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back 2nd stage production unit mainly for every structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back 2nd production unit mainly for every structure and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows the drive mechanism in a back 2nd stage production unit. (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the some rotation decoration body in a back 2nd stage production unit. (E)-(g) is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the several rotation decoration body in the back second stage production unit continuing from FIG. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED in a back 2nd stage unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back third production unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back third production unit of the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back third presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back third presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. It is a front view which shows the drive mechanism and decoration board | substrate in a back third stage production unit in the state which moved the left side ring decoration body and the right side ring decoration body to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit is revolved 15 degrees while rotating in the clockwise direction from the normal state. It is a front view which expands and shows the lower part of a game board in the state which moved the special rotation decoration body in the back 2nd stage unit to the specific position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the upper vertical ring decoration body and the lower vertical ring decoration body in the back third stage production unit to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the left side ring decoration body and the right side ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. It is the front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the upper vertical ring decoration body, the lower vertical ring decoration body, the left horizontal ring decoration body, and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third stage production unit to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the upper vertical ring decoration body and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the middle of the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board showing an example of the effect image on the effect display device when a problem occurs in the back third effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows an example of the shadow effect performed during the light emission effect in a back unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in the state where the game board faces from the door window of the door frame. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2A is an enlarged view of a part of a region where an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and FIG. 2B is a view of the enlarged view seen from the right side of the main control board. It is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate in which lead type electronic components are replaced with a predetermined area and SMD type electronic components are gathered in a predetermined area. Lead type electronic components are integrated with alternative SMD type electronic components. It is the schematic (b) which shows the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the board | substrate reduced in size. It is a figure which shows the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the enlarged view of FIG. It is a perspective view of the main control board box of a main control unit. It is a figure (a) which shows the surface (mounting surface) of a setting change board, and a figure (b) which shows the back (solder side) of a setting change board, and a game in the state where a main control board box was attached to a game board It is a figure (c) which shows the lower part of the left view of a board. It is the modification 1 (a) which shows the lower part of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board, and the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board It is the modification 2 (b) which shows the lower part of the left view of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 118. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value confirmation display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. It is a flowchart which shows a continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control part of FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the dispensing control unit power-on process following FIG. 125; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electrically-powered object control processing which are performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing for jackpot types. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big prize opening opening / closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd receiving port opening / closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment, and a normal electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process at the time of main control side power-on. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine at the time of power activation of the pachinko machine. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine during setting change of a set value. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine in the confirmation display of a set value. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the confirmation display of a setting value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of the cheating during the setting change of a setting value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of the fraudulent act in the confirmation display of a setting value. It is a time chart which shows the transmission timing of the command at the time of power activation of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process at the time of main control side power-on. It is a time chart which shows the transmission timing of the game information command at the time of power activation of a pachinko machine. It is a time chart which shows the case where a warning alert | report is extended and performed after completion | finish of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. It is a time chart which shows the case where the initial operation | movement of an effect member is performed after completion | finish of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the monitoring state of the fraud during the setting change of a setting value, and the confirmation display of a setting value. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a table showing the transition of the fluctuation pattern table after power-on of the pachinko machine, It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects based on the fluctuation pattern, A variation pattern table C used when the number of variations of the special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine is 500 times, It is a specific example of the roulette effect as the suggestion effect A2. It is a table which shows the modification of the change of the fluctuation pattern table after power-on of a pachinko machine. It is a circuit diagram explaining the outline | summary of the circuit structure of a power supply board. It is the perspective view which expanded the power supply board partially. FIG. 172 is a view on arrow B in FIG. 172. It is the silk printing (the 1) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is the silk printing (the 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is a figure which shows a specific electronic component by the arrangement | positioning method among several electronic components which have the same shape. Examples (a) and (b) in which the fusing confirmation area is difficult to use, examples (part 1) (c) and (d) in which the fusing confirmation area can be used, and examples in which the fusing confirmation area can be used (part 2) 2) (e) and (f). Examples (part 1) (a) and (b) in which the fusing confirmation region can be used, and examples (part 2) (c) and (d) in which the fusing confirmation region can be used. It is a figure which shows the fuse which blows most easily among three fuses by the arrangement | positioning method. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
An overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after being disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven. In addition, what consists of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is called a front frame.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 is an outer frame that connects the upper ends of the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20 with the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically. An upper part 30, an outer frame lower part 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20, an outer frame upper hinge part 50 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper part 30, An outer frame lower hinge portion 60 attached to the lower right side of the frame left portion 10 and the upper left end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower portion 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60 are connected to the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame 4. The lower hinge portion 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  The door frame 3 includes a game window 201 for closing the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly visible from the front side, and an upper plate 130 for storing the game ball B for being shot into the game area 5a. And a lower plate 140, and a handle 111 operated by the player to drive the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 into the game area 5a. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The door frame 3 is attached by a main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape opened forward. The main body frame 4 includes a game board mounting portion 301 that holds the game board 5 so as to be detachable from the front, a main body frame upper hinge part 510 provided at the upper left end of the front view, and a main body provided at the lower end of the left side. A frame lower hinge portion 520, a ball launching device 540 that is provided on the right side below the game board mounting portion 301 and is used to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the upper plate 130 and the lower plate The payout device 580 for paying out the game ball B to 140, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are provided.

  The main body frame 4 has a main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a main body frame lower hinge portion 520 attached to the outer frame 2 by an outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and an outer frame lower hinge portion 60 so as to be openable and closable. The door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable via the upper frame hinge portion and the lower door frame hinge portion.

  The game board 5 is detachably attached to the game board attachment portion 301 of the main body frame 4. Although not shown in the drawing, the game board 5 is a general winning opening, a first start opening for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B , A gate unit, a second start opening, a special winning opening, and an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying effect images.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a square frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20 which are separated from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20 are connected to each other. The outer frame upper portion 30, the outer frame lower portion 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left portion 10 and the outer frame right portion 20, and the outer frame upper hinge attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper portion 30. Part 50, and a lower part of the right side of outer frame left part 10 and an outer frame lower hinge part 60 attached to the upper left end of outer frame lower part 40.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge part 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge part 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 can support the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[3. Door frame]
The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front view of a door frame in the pachinko machine. 6 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame viewed from above by cutting at the center in the vertical direction.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front. It has been. The door frame 3 stores a game window 201 for closing the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be shot from the front side, and a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a. A tray 130 and a handle 111 operated by a player to drive the game ball B in the upper tray 130 into the game area 5a are provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and includes various decorative portions. Some of these various decorative portions are not subjected to decorative plating at all, and some are subjected to decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so that electromagnetic noise may enter.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the various decorative portions, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are made of metal door frames in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3 to be described later via wiring not shown. Electrically connected to the reinforcing unit (Some decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via a wiring (not shown). Some are attached and electrically connected to the door frame reinforcement unit). Thereby, electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative portions is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative portions from entering the substrate ground.

  In addition, electromagnetic noise that has entered the decorative parts of the various decorative parts that are decorated on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to a metal door frame reinforcing unit via a wiring (not shown), and a door frame metal grounding described later. It is transmitted to the frame ground substrate 559 via the wire, and is transmitted from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the pachinko machine 1. That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcement unit is a frame ground on the door frame side.

  The door frame 3 is a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit (not shown) whose front view extends vertically and a portion from the lower end to a height of about ¼ of the total height on the front surface of the door frame base unit. A door frame lower unit 100 provided, a door frame upper unit 200 provided above the door frame lower unit 100 and in front of the door frame base unit, a main body frame upper hinge portion 510 of the main body frame 4, and The main body frame lower hinge portion 520 includes a door frame upper hinge portion and a door frame lower hinge portion (not shown) that are rotatably supported.

  The door frame base unit includes a door frame base (not shown) having a gaming window 201 that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates back and forth, and a rear side of the door frame base. A door frame main relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the rear view in the lower part, a door frame sub relay board (not shown) attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board, and a door frame sub relay board A rear relay board (not shown) attached to the left in the rear view, a door frame relay board cover (not shown) for covering the door frame main relay board and a part of the door frame sub relay board from the rear side, and the rear handle relay A post-handle relay relay board cover (not shown) for covering the board from the rear side and a cable cover (not shown) for covering a wiring cable (not shown) are provided.

  The door frame base unit includes a metal frame-like door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) attached to the rear side of the door frame base and a metal door frame upper hinge assembly attached to the door frame reinforcement unit. A solid body 120 and a door frame lower hinge member 125, and a metal opening / closing cylinder lock 127 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit are provided.

  The door frame reinforcing unit is attached to the rear side of the door frame base to reinforce the door frame base and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 127 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The door frame reinforcing unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to give rigidity, and is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559 via a door frame metal ground wire (not shown). Connected. The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown).

  The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a handle 111 that can be operated by a player to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, a bulge portion 120 that bulges forward, and a bulge portion 120. An upper plate 130 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a lower plate 140 for storing the game ball B provided below the upper plate 130, A door frame effect device 150 that is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion and presents a predetermined effect to the player, and a game ball B that is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and is placed in the upper plate 130 is placed in the lower plate. The upper dish ball removal button 124 to be released to the ball, the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and the door frame sub provided behind the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126. Provided in front of display unit 185 and bulge 120 It includes a lower front speaker 191, a being.

  The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 includes a gaming window 201 whose inner periphery is reverse U-shaped so that the inside of the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 can be viewed from the front, and a transparent closed glass that closes the gaming window 201. 205, a door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 provided along the inner periphery of the gaming window 201, a door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 provided outside the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, and a door frame. A door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covering the upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220; and an upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230. Yes.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a ball feeding unit (not shown) for sending the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 one by one to the ball launcher 540 of the main body frame 4. The ball feeding unit includes a ball feeding solenoid 105 (see FIG. 67) controlled by the firing control unit 372 of the payout control board 370.

[3-1. Door frame lower unit]
Next, the door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a sectional view of the door frame lower unit cut from the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 12A is a perspective view showing a state where the first movable part of the door frame effect device is moved to the rising end, and FIG. It is a perspective view which shows a state. FIG. 13A is an enlarged front view in the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and FIG. 13B is an enlarged front view showing the state in which the lower front speaker grill, the grill decoration frame, and the lattice decoration portion are removed in FIG. .

  The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 is also disposed below the game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 so as to be visible from the front. The door frame lower unit 100 is provided at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and a handle unit 110 that can be operated by the player to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, and above and to the left of the handle unit 110. And a bulging portion 120 that bulges forward with respect to a surface that closes the front surface of the main body frame 4.

  Further, the door frame lower unit 100 is provided so as to surround the device arrangement portion 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and an upper plate 130 for storing the game ball B, and a center in the left-right direction below the upper plate 130. A lower frame 140 for storing the game ball B provided on the left side, and a door frame effect device that is provided on the device arrangement unit 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and can present a predetermined effect to the player 150, a door frame sub-display unit 185 provided in the upper right corner in a front view, and a lower front speaker unit 190 provided in front of the bulging unit 120.

[3-1a. Handle unit]
The handle unit 110 of the door frame lower unit 100 includes a handle 111 that can be grasped and rotated by a player, a handle cover 112 provided on the front side of the handle 111, and a handle 111 that rotatably supports the handle 111. The handle base 113 is provided. In addition, the handle unit 110 is provided in the handle base 113, and a handle rotation detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 67) that detects the rotation angle of the handle 111 and that the player is touching the handle 111. A handle touch sensor 115 to be detected, a handle return spring (not shown) that urges the handle 111 counterclockwise, and a single button 116 that can be pressed by the player are provided.

  The handle unit 110 is inclined so that the rotation axis of the handle 111 moves to the right as it goes forward. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 111 of the handle unit 110, and can perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable. The handle unit 110 is configured such that the handle base 113 can be expanded and contracted in the direction in which the rotation shaft of the handle 111 extends, and can be held at a desired expansion and contraction position. Thereby, since the position of the handle 111 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted, the handle 111 can be operated at a position where the player can easily operate.

  The handle 111 is supported on the handle base 113 so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range. The handle 111 has a plurality of (here, four) protrusions that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction and protrude from the outer peripheral surface. The handle cover 112 has translucency and can be decorated with various colors by a plurality of full-color LEDs arranged on the rear side.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 114 of the handle unit 110 is a variable resistor whose internal resistance changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 111. The driving force of the firing solenoid 331 in a ball launching device 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 that changes due to the rotation operation of the handle 111, and the game ball has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 111. B can be driven into the game area 5a.

  The handle touch sensor of the handle unit 110 detects the electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 and the like. When the player touches the handle 111 or the like, the electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 or the like changes. Therefore, whether or not the player is touching the handle 111 by detecting the electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 or the like by the handle touch sensor. Detect. In the present embodiment, when the handle 111 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 115 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 is accepted, and the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 111 is received. Thus, the driving of the firing solenoid 331 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven.

  That is, even if the player does not touch the handle 111 and tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 111 by some method, the handle touch sensor 115 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 331 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 111 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  When the player presses the single button 116 of the handle unit 110 while the handle 111 is being rotated, the firing control unit 372 of the payout control board 370 stops driving the firing solenoid 331. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 111, launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily. Then, by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 116, the game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength before the single button 116 is operated.

[3-1b. Bulge]
The bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 is formed in a T-shape with a short axis extending in the front view, and the shape in plan view has a rear end side in the left-right direction of the door frame 3. It is formed in an isosceles trapezoidal shape so that the width becomes narrower toward the front with a full width (see FIG. 10 and the like). The bulging portion 120 bulges forward slightly longer than half the full width in the left-right direction. The upper surface of the bulging portion 120 is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so as to be positioned downward as it goes forward.

  In the left-right direction, the bulging portion 120 has a central portion that is obtained by dividing the entire width of the door frame 3 into three parts that bulge forward over the entire height from the lower end to the upper surface of the door frame 3, and the remaining portions (both left and right sides) ) Bulges forward from the top to about 部位 part of the total height from the lower end to the upper surface of the door frame 3. Thereby, the shape of the bulging portion 120 in a front view is a T-shape. The bulging portion 120 has a speaker mounting opening 120a that is squarely opened at the lower center of the front surface. The lower front speaker unit 190 is attached to the speaker attachment opening 120a.

  In addition, the bulging portion 120 has a sound emitting slit 120b and a heat radiating slit extending vertically on both left and right sides of a portion extending vertically in the T-shape when viewed from the front (the portion where the speaker mounting opening 120a is opened). 120c. The sound emission slit 120b is for releasing sound from a lower front speaker 191 to be described later. Further, the heat radiating slit 120c is for releasing heat from the first elevating drive motor 175b, the second elevating drive motor 182 and the lower front speaker 191 etc. in the door frame effect device 150 described later.

  The bulging portion 120 includes a bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 provided at the upper edge of the front surface, a bulging portion lower decoration portion 122 provided at the lower edge of the front surface, and a rear end at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. A device arrangement portion 123 provided so as to protrude forward from the side, an upper plate ball removal button 124 provided on the upper surface for releasing the game ball B in the upper plate 130 to the lower plate 140, and an upper plate ball A ball lending button 125 and a return button 126 provided behind the unplug button 124 are provided.

  The bulging part upper decoration part 121 and the bulge part lower decoration part 122 are milky white with translucency, and are formed in a semi-columnar shape. The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 extends along the upper edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120, and is provided so as to decorate the upper edge of the front side of the upper plate 130 to be described. The bulging part upper decoration part 121 has a plurality of LEDs 121a therein (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 121a are arranged in a line in the extending direction of the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121. The plurality of LEDs 121a are full-color LEDs.

  The upper decoration part 121 of the bulge part is located in the upper part where the distance between the two rear ends separated in the left-right direction is separated in the left-right direction in the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 of the door frame upper unit 200 described later. This is the same as the interval between the lower ends of the decorative portion 212. The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is formed so as to coincide with the upper inner decoration portion 212 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and forms one continuous decoration with the upper inner decoration portion 212. Yes. The bulging part upper decoration part 121 and the upper inner decoration part 212 constitute a first peripheral light area LA1 that decorates the periphery of the game window 201 with light emission.

  The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 decorates the upper side of the upper peripheral wall 134 of the upper plate 130 and raises the front wall (front peripheral wall 134) of the upper plate 130. The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is configured such that a part of the light from the LED 121 a is irradiated into the upper plate 130 (in the storage region 131), and a game stored in the storage region 131. The sphere B can be illuminated and decorated.

  The bulging portion lower decoration portion 122 extends along the lower edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120. The bulging part lower decoration part 122 has a plurality of LEDs 122a therein (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 122 a are arranged in a line in the extending direction of the bulging portion lower decoration portion 122. The plurality of LEDs 122a are full-color LEDs.

  The device arrangement part 123 is formed in a shape in which the shape in plan view is a combination of a rectangle that is long on the left and right and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the rectangle as the base. In the device arrangement portion 123, the width in the left-right direction on the rear end side is about ½ of the total width of the door frame 3. The device disposition portion 123 is open on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and is formed in a container shape extending from above to the inside of the bulging portion 120.

  The upper dish ball removal button 124 is provided on the right corner of the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 on the right side of the upper dish 130. When the upper dish ball removal button 124 is pressed downward, the game ball B stored in the upper dish 130 can be discharged from the outlet 136 to the lower dish 140. While the upper plate ball removal button 124 is pressed, the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is released to the lower plate 140, and when the pressure is released, it moves upward and returns to the original state. Release to the lower pan 140 is stopped.

  The top ball removal button 124 has a square outer shape. The upper tray ball removal button 124 has a light emitting decoration portion 124a that emits light by an LED disposed below. The light emitting decoration portion 124 a is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 124. By causing the light emitting decoration portion 124a to emit light, it is possible to lightly decorate the upper dish ball removal button 124.

  The ball lending button 125 is disposed behind the upper dish ball removal button 124 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The ball lending button 125 has a circular outer shape. The return button 126 is arranged on the right side of the ball lending button 125 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The return button 126 has an outer shape of a regular triangle.

  The ball lending button 125 is used to push a predetermined number of game balls B up by inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing it. It is supplied into the tray 130 and the game ball B is lent out to the player. When the return button 126 is pressed, the cash or the prepaid card that has been rented out is deducted and returned to the ball lending machine. Note that the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed on the door frame sub-display unit 185.

[3-1c. Top plate]
The upper plate 130 of the door frame 3 is recessed downward on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and has a storage area 131 in which the game ball B is stored. The storage area 131 is connected to the front area 131a on the front side of the device arrangement portion 123 (a part surrounded by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 15) and the side areas 131b on both the left and right sides of the apparatus arrangement portion 123. (Part surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 15).

  The front region 131a has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. The left side region 131b extends in the front-rear direction so that the width in the left-right direction becomes narrower from the rear end side toward the front front region 131a side. The right side region 131b extends in the front-rear direction so that the width in the left-right direction becomes wider toward the middle from the front region 131a side on the front end side, and then the width becomes narrower toward the rear end side. It extends. The upper plate 130 (storage region 131) is formed so as to surround the front side and the left and right outer sides of the device placement unit 123.

  The upper plate 130 includes a bottom wall 132 that forms a bottom surface, a rear peripheral wall 133 that rises upward from the rear end of the bottom wall 132, and a front peripheral wall that rises upward from the front end of the bottom wall 132. 134, a supply port 135 opening forward at the rear end of the left side region 131b, a delivery port 136 opening forward at the rear end of the right side region 131b, and a delivery port 136 , And an alignment portion 137 that aligns the game balls B toward the delivery port 136.

  The bottom wall 132 of the upper plate 130 is inclined so as to become lower from the supply port 135 side toward the delivery port 136. The front peripheral wall 134 and the rear peripheral wall 133 rise substantially vertically. The surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 are formed in a mirror shape. In the upper plate 130, a storage region 131 is formed by the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134. The depth of the upper plate 130 (height from the bottom wall 132 to the upper ends of the rear peripheral wall 133 and the front peripheral wall 134) is formed deeper than the diameter of the game ball B even at the shallowest part (near the supply port 135).

  The supply port 135 is for supplying the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the main body frame 4 into the storage area 131. The delivery port 136 is for sending the game ball B stored in the storage area 131 from the storage area 131 to the ball launcher 540 and the lower plate 140. The alignment portion 137 is bent downward so that the bottom wall 132 is lowered toward the delivery port 136 in the vicinity of the boundary between the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in the device arrangement portion 123 that combines the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in plan view. ing.

  Moreover, the upper plate 130 includes a stored light emitting decoration portion 138 having a plurality of LEDs 138 a that can irradiate light into the storage region 131. The plurality of LEDs 138 a of the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 are provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 and have a height that is substantially parallel to the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133 above the half of the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom wall 132. Is provided. These LEDs 138a are full color LEDs. By causing the LED 138a of the stored light emitting decoration unit 138 to emit light, the game ball B stored in the storage area 131 or the storage area 131 can be decorated with light emission.

  The upper plate 130 is provided with a bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 of the bulging portion 120 at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134, and the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 raises the front end side of the storage region 131, so that more The game ball B can be stored. Further, the upper plate 130 is configured such that a part of the light from the LED 121 a of the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is irradiated into the storage region 131, and the light from the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is also emitted. The game ball B in the storage area 131 is illuminated and decorated.

  The upper plate 130 has a front area 131a on the front side of the device arrangement portion 123 where the door frame effect device 150 is arranged, and side areas 131b on the left and right outer sides, and the door frame effect device 150 is provided by the front area 131a. Since the game ball B can be stored further forward than the game ball B, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen by the player. In the upper plate 130, the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a are regions that extend in the front-rear direction, so that the game balls B stored in the side region 131b are also added to the front region 131a. It can be easily seen from the player side.

  Therefore, it becomes easy to see the game ball B in the upper plate 130, so that the player can be conscious of the storage amount of the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is advanced by the progress of the game. Even if the amount of storage decreases due to consumption of the player, it is easy for the player to recognize the decrease in the storage amount and the game ball B can be replenished into the upper plate 130. The game ball B can be prevented from disappearing from the upper plate 130, the interruption of the game can be prevented suddenly, the disappointment of the player due to the interruption of the game can be prevented, and the interest of the player in the game can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the upper plate 130, the game balls B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, so that the player can see the line of sight from the game area 5a. By simply dropping it onto the device 150, it is possible to immediately recognize whether or not there is a game ball B in the front area 131a, and it is not necessary for the player to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper plate 130. It becomes possible to make it easy for the player to concentrate on the game, and to make the game enjoyable and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the upper plate 130, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 is sent out of the storage area 131 from the outlet 136 through the front area 131a. When the game ball B in the dish 130 is consumed, the game ball B flows in front of the eyes (front area 131a), and it is easy for the player to recognize the consumption speed, consumption amount, and the like of the game ball B. And the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

  In addition, the upper plate 130 is provided with a stored light emitting decoration portion 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131, and light from the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 (LED 138 a) is reflected upward by the game ball B. The game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be shining and decorated with light from the light emitting decoration part 138, and the player can enjoy the light decoration of the game ball B. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130, and the amount of storage of the game ball B in the upper plate 130 can be confirmed to achieve the same effect as described above. it can.

  Further, in the upper plate 130, the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, the front peripheral wall 134 and the like are formed in a mirror shape, so that the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 are Since it passes on the peripheral wall of 130, the player can be given an illusion that the game ball B is also stored beyond the peripheral wall, and it appears that many game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. be able to.

  Further, in the upper plate 130, the alignment portion 137 is provided in the vicinity of the delivery port 136 so that the game balls B are aligned, so that the game ball B can be prevented from being clogged in the vicinity of the delivery port 136. The game balls B stored in the tray 130 can be smoothly sent from the outlet 136 to the ball launcher 540 and the lower tray 140. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the game ball B being clogged, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the upper plate 130, the delivery port 136 disposed in the right side region 131b is visible from the front, so that the game ball B can be seen from the delivery port 136 that could not be seen with a conventional pachinko machine. The state of being sent out can be seen, the player can be surprised, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[3-1d. Lower plate]
The lower plate 140 is provided below the upper plate 130 on the left side of the central portion of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, and is formed in a shallow dish shape that opens upward. An interval is provided between the lower plate 140 and the upper plate 130 (the lower surface of the left portion of the bulging portion 120) so that the player's hand can be inserted. The lower plate 140 has a front surface formed in substantially the same shape as the front surface of the bulging portion 120 in plan view.

  The lower dish 140 is formed at the lowest part of the bottom wall. The lower dish ball hole 141 (see FIG. 9) that can be opened and closed and the lower dish ball hole 141 are opened and closed to open the lower dish 140 inside the lower dish 140. A lower tray ball removal button 142 for discharging the game ball B downward, and a full tank detection sensor 143 (see FIG. 67) for detecting that the lower plate 140 is filled with the game ball B. doing.

  The lower ball 140 is supplied with the game ball B in the upper plate 130 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 124. In addition, the lower tray 140 is supplied with the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 in a state where the game balls B are full in the upper tray 130. When the inside of the lower plate 140 is filled with the game balls B, the full tank detection sensor 143 detects that the lower plate 140 is full. When the full plate of the lower plate 140 is detected, the game ball B by the payout device 580 is detected. Is temporarily suspended. Thereafter, when the full tank in the lower plate 140 is eliminated (the full tank detection sensor 143 is not detected), the temporary stop of the dispensing is canceled.

  The lower dish ball removal button 142 is provided on the front surface of the lower dish 140 and has an outer shape of a square. When the lower dish ball removal button 142 is pressed backward, the lower dish ball removal hole 141 is opened and the lower dish ball removal button 142 is held in a pressed state. When the lower dish ball removal button 142 is further pushed backward in this state, the lower dish ball removal hole 141 is closed and the lower dish ball removal button 142 moves forward to return to the original state.

  The lower dish ball removal button 142 has a light emitting decorative portion 142a that emits light by an LED (not shown). The light emission decoration part 142a is arrange | positioned so that the right-and-left both sides and upper side of the lower dish ball extraction button 142 may be enclosed. By causing the light emitting decoration part 142a to emit light, the lower dish ball removal button 142 can be decorated with light emission. For example, in a “big hit” game in which a large number of game balls B are paid out, the player can be directed to the lower plate 140 by decorating the lower plate ball removal button 142 with the light emitting decoration unit 142a. Then, by operating the lower tray ball removal button 142, the game ball B in the lower tray 140 can be discharged to a lower dollar box or the like, and the lower tray 140 becomes full and the payout of the game ball B is temporarily stopped. Can be avoided.

[3-1e. Overall configuration of door frame directing device]
The door frame effect device 150 is arranged in the device arrangement unit 123 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The door frame effect device 150 includes a transparent device cover 151 that closes the device arrangement portion 123 that is open upward, a door frame effect display device 152 that is provided so as to be visible from the front through the device cover 151, A lower speaker unit 153 provided in front of the door frame effect display device 152; a first movable portion 155 provided in front of the lower speaker unit 153 so that its upper surface can be moved up and down above the device cover 151; One movable portion 155 is provided so that it can be lifted and lowered, an effect operation portion 160 that can be pressed by the player, a first lifting mechanism 170 that raises and lowers the first movable portion 155, and a second lift that raises and lowers the effect operation portion 160. And a mechanism 180.

[3-1e-1. Device cover]
The device cover 151 is formed in a shape in which the shape in plan view is the same as that of the device placement unit 123, and is a combination of a rectangular shape that is long to the left and right and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the rectangle as the bottom. The device cover 151 has an opening 151a that is largely opened in an isosceles trapezoidal shape in an isosceles trapezoidal part, and an inclination that is bent and inclined so that the rear end side is near the center in the front-rear direction in a square part The surface portion 151b and a plurality of grill holes 151c penetrating in a hexagonal shape in the vicinity of the front end of the quadrangular portion are provided. The entire device cover 151 is inclined so that the front end side is lowered. The first movable portion 155 is inserted through the opening 151 a of the device cover 151.

  In the device cover 151, the upper end of the inclined surface portion 151 b coincides with the lower end of the door frame upper cover 232 of the door frame upper unit 200. Further, the device cover 151 is inclined such that the front side of the inclined surface portion 151b is lowered toward the front. Thereby, even if the game ball B is placed on the upper surface of the device cover 151, it can roll forward and be released into the upper plate 130.

[3-1e-2. Door frame effect display device]
In the door frame effect display device 152, the display screen for displaying the effect image is formed in a rectangular shape that is long to the left and right, and the length in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than ½ of the full width of the door frame 3. The door frame effect display device 152 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower side is positioned forward with respect to the upper side. That is, the door frame effect display device 152 is directed to the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The door frame effect display device 152 has an upper side located at a height near the upper end of the door frame lower unit 100, and a lower side located at a lower level than the bottom surface of the front region 131 a in the upper plate 130. The door frame effect display device 152 has an upper side located near the rear end of the door frame lower unit 100 (device cover 151) and a lower side located near the front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. The door frame effect display device 152 is a liquid crystal display device with a screen ratio of 16: 9.

[3-1e-3. Lower speaker unit]
The lower speaker unit 153 includes a pair of lower speakers 153a that are spaced apart from each other left and right, a lower speaker base 153b to which the pair of lower speakers 153a are attached, and a lower speaker base 153b that is attached to the lower speaker 153a. A lower speaker decoration portion 153c for decorating the outer periphery and the space between the lower speakers 153a. The pair of lower speakers 153a are tweeters that output a high-frequency sound.

  The lower speaker base 153b has a front surface that is inclined so that the rear side is located above the front side, and a rear surface that extends downward from the rear side of the front surface perpendicularly to the front side. It is formed in a container shape that is open to the left and right. In addition, the lower speaker base 153b has a circular attachment hole formed in the front face so as to be separated from the left and right. The front surface of the lower speaker base 153b is inclined at an angle smaller than the horizontal angle of the door frame effect display device 152 (see FIG. 11 and the like).

  The lower speaker decoration portion 153c is attached to the front surface of the lower speaker base 153b, and a plurality of annular portions disposed on the outer periphery of the lower speaker 153a and a plurality of lower speakers 153a disposed between the pair of lower speakers 153a. And an arcuate portion. The lower speaker decoration portion 153c has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by causing an LED (not shown) mounted on the lower speaker decoration board to emit light.

  The lower speaker unit 153 is attached to the inside of the lower speaker base 153b so that the pair of lower speakers 153a faces forward from the attachment holes of the lower speaker base 153b. As a result, the pair of lower speakers 153 a are directed near the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The lower speaker unit 153 has an upper end located at a height slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction of the door frame effect display device 152 and a lower end located at a height slightly lower than the lower end of the door frame effect display device 152. Yes.

  The lower speaker unit 153 has a front end positioned forward from the rear end of the opening 151a of the device cover 151 (slightly rearward from the effect operation unit 160), and a rear end of the lower speaker unit 153 is a front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. Located in the vicinity. The lower speaker unit 153 can be viewed through the transparent device cover 151. Further, the sound output from the pair of lower speakers 153a can be radiated well to the outside (outside the pachinko machine 1) through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable part main body 156.

  In addition, the lower speaker unit 153 decorates the lower speaker decoration portion 153c with a light emitting decoration of the lower speaker decoration board 153c by using an LED of a lower speaker decoration board (not shown), so that the speaker grille of the lower speaker 153a and the lower speaker 153a 156 and the player can show the player the luminous decoration inside the speaker, which has not been seen with conventional pachinko machines.

[3-1e-4. First moving part]
The first movable portion 155 includes a container-shaped transparent first movable portion main body 156 that is open at the rear and lower sides, a first movable portion base 157 attached to the lower side of the first movable portion main body 156, a first A first movable portion cover 158 attached to the upper surface of one movable portion main body 156 and a first movable portion decorative board 159 attached to the inner side surface of the first movable portion main body 156 are provided (FIG. 11). And FIG. 12). The first movable portion 155 is disposed in the opening 151 a of the device cover 151. The first movable portion 155 is supported by the first elevating mechanism 170 so as to be movable up and down, and is moved up and down by the first elevating mechanism 170.

  The first movable portion main body 156 has a shape in plan view similar to the shape of the opening 151a of the device cover 151, and a combination of a square that is long on the left and right and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the rectangle as the base. It is formed into a shape. The first movable portion main body 156 is open at the rear and lower sides with an upper wall shaped like a combination of a quadrangle and an isosceles trapezoid and a side wall extending downward from the side of the upper wall excluding the rear side. It is formed in a container shape. The upper wall (upper surface) of the first movable portion main body 156 is inclined so that the front side is lowered, and is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is raised.

  The first movable portion main body 156 includes an opening 156a that penetrates in a rectangular shape that is long to the left and right in the vicinity of the front end of the upper wall, and a plurality of grilles that penetrate in a hexagonal shape in a portion excluding the opening 156a on the upper wall. It has a hole 156b and a plurality of through holes 156c arranged in a circumferential direction on the side wall and penetrating in a square shape. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 is inserted into the opening portion 156a. The through hole 156c is formed to have a size such that the LED 159a mounted on the first movable part decorative substrate 159 faces the outside.

  The first movable part base 157 is formed in a flat plate shape that is long on the left and right. The first movable part base 157 is formed so that the width in the front-rear direction is shorter than the width in the front-rear direction at the opening 156 a of the first movable part main body 156. The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 so that the front end is substantially in the same position as the front end of the opening 156a of the first movable portion main body 156. The first movable part base 157 is attached to the first movable part main body 156 in a horizontal state. The first movable portion base 157 has a pair of lifting sliders 172 of the first lifting mechanism 170 attached to the lower surface, and a second lifting base 181 of the second lifting mechanism 180 attached to the upper surface.

  The first movable portion cover 158 has the same outer shape as the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156 and has the same size. The first movable portion cover 158 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening frame portion 158a corresponding to the opening portion 156a of the first movable portion main body 156, and a plurality of louver portions 158b extending in the left-right direction and spaced apart in the front-rear direction. ,have. The first movable part cover 158 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The opening frame portion 158 a of the first movable portion cover 158 has a lower end protruding downward from the lower end of the louver portion 158 b and is inserted into the opening portion 156 a of the first movable portion main body 156. An effect operation unit 160 is inserted into the frame of the opening frame 158a.

  The louver portion 158b of the first movable portion cover 158 is formed in a triangular shape such that the portions excluding the left and right end portions extend with a certain width, and the left and right end portions spread obliquely forward. . The plurality (here, five) of louver portions 158b are provided in the front-rear direction with a space slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored between the louver parts 158b. Incidentally, there is one game ball B between the first louver parts 158b from the front, two game balls B between the second louver parts 158b, and the third louver parts 158b. Three game balls B can be stored in between (see FIG. 15).

  The first movable portion decorative substrate 159 has a plurality of LEDs 159a mounted on the front surface. The plurality of LEDs 159 a are arranged at positions corresponding to the through holes 156 c of the first movable part main body 156. The first movable portion decorative substrate 159 is attached to the inside of the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156, so that the plurality of mounted LEDs 159a face outward from the through hole 156c in the side wall. The LED 159a of the first movable part decorative substrate 159 is a full color LED.

  When the LED 159a emits light when the first movable portion 155 is lowered (normal state), the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 is formed between the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 and the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156. Through the gap, the upper part of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 can be illuminated. Further, when the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 causes the LED 159a to emit light with the first movable portion 155 raised, the first movable portion main body 156 can be illuminated and decorated, Light can be emitted forward (player side).

[3-1e-5. Production control unit]
The effect operation unit 160 is a so-called push button that is provided so as to be movable up and down with respect to the first movable unit 155 and that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 160 is supported by the second lifting mechanism 180 so as to be lifted and lowered by the second lifting mechanism 180 (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  The production operation unit 160 has a translucent pressing operation unit 161 having “PUSH” characters formed on the upper surface, and an operation in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An operation unit movable base 163 having a pressing operation unit 161 and an operation unit decoration substrate 162 attached to the upper surface, the operation unit movable base 163 supported to be movable up and down, and a lower surface of the second lifting mechanism 180. The operation unit base 164 attached to the first movable unit 155 via the (second lifting base 181), the operation unit spring urging the operation unit movable base 163 upward, and the biasing force of the operation unit spring And a pressing detection sensor 165 (see FIG. 67) that detects the pressing operation unit 161 that has moved downward.

  The pressing operation unit 161 is a rectangle that is long on the left and right, and the letters “PUSH” are formed in a relief shape on the top surface. The pressing operation portion 161 is formed so that the outer peripheral shape is slightly smaller than the inside of the opening frame portion 158 a in the first movable portion cover 158.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the operation unit decoration substrate 162 are full-color LEDs. The operation unit decoration board 162 includes a first LED that emits light upward and a second LED that emits light outward along the upper surface of the operation part decoration board 162. The operation unit decoration substrate 162 can cause the pressing operation unit 161 (characters “PUSH”) to emit light by causing the first LED to emit light. Further, by emitting light from the second LED, the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 can be decorated with light emission, and when the effect operation unit 160 is at the lower end, the opening frame unit 158a of the first movable unit cover 158 is provided. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The operation unit movable base 163 is formed in a box shape that is long on the left and right sides with the lower part opened. The operation unit movable base 163 is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 161. A pressing operation unit 161 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit movable base 163 so as to sandwich the operation unit decoration substrate 162. The operation unit base 164 is inserted into the operation unit movable base 163 from below.

  The operation unit base 164 has a size that can be inserted into the operation unit movable base 163 and has a box-shaped part that is long on the left and right, and the same position as the outer periphery of the operation unit movable base 163. It is comprised by the flange-shaped site | part which protrudes outward. The operation unit base 164 supports the operation unit movable base 163 so as to be movable up and down within a predetermined range. A second lifting mechanism 180 is attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 164.

  The operation spring has an upper end in contact with the lower surface of the upper wall of the operation unit movable base 163 and a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the lower wall of the operation unit base 164. The press detection sensor 165 is attached to the inside of the operation unit base 164, and detects a detection piece (not shown) of the operation unit movable base 163, thereby performing a pressing operation of the press operation unit 161 via the operation unit movable base 163. Detect.

[3-1e-6. First lifting mechanism]
As shown in FIG. 11, the first elevating mechanism 170 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 and is for elevating the first movable portion 155. The first elevating mechanism 170 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction and extends vertically, and the pair of elevating rails 171 are guided by the pair of elevating rails 171 in the vertical direction. A slider 172, a connecting portion 173 that connects the pair of elevating sliders 172, and one end rotatably attached to the elevating slider 172, and the other end rotatably attached to the bulging portion 120 A pair of elevating arms 174, a first elevating drive mechanism 175 for rotating the pair of elevating arms 174, a first elevating detection sensor 176 for detecting the elevating position of the elevating slider 172 (first movable portion 155), It has.

  The pair of elevating rails 171 are separated from each other at an interval longer than the length in the left-right direction of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). The pair of elevating rails 171 are attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 so as to extend vertically. Each of the pair of lift sliders 172 has an upper end attached to the lower surface of the first movable part base 157 of the first movable part 155 and a lower end attached to the connecting part 173.

  The pair of lift arms 174 are attached to the corresponding lift slider 172 so that the front end sides of the lift arms 174 can rotate about the axis extending in the left-right direction and can slide in the longitudinal direction of the lift arms 174. . The pair of lifting arms 174 has a rear end attached to the bulging portion 120 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction. Each of the pair of lifting arms 174 has a slit 174a extending in the longitudinal direction at a position closer to the front end with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction.

  The first lift drive mechanism 175 is provided for each of the pair of lift arms 174. That is, a pair of first elevating drive mechanisms 175 are provided. The first lifting mechanism 170 rotates the pair of lifting arms 174 in the direction in which the front end sides of the pair of lifting arms 174 move upward by the first lifting drive mechanism 175, respectively, so that the distal ends of the pair of lifting arms 174 The first movable unit 155 (the production operation unit 160) can be moved up and down through a pair of lift sliders 172 to which are attached.

  The first elevating drive mechanism 175 will be described in detail. The first elevating drive mechanism 175 is slidably inserted into the slit 174a of the elevating arm 174 and revolves around the axis extending in the left-right direction. A pin 175a and a first lifting drive motor 175b for revolving the first lifting pin 175a are provided. More specifically, the first elevating drive mechanism 175 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 and extends in the front-rear direction and in the up-down direction, and extends in the left-right direction to the drive base 175 c. A spur-gear-like elevating gear 175d, which is rotatably attached to the periphery of the shaft and has a first elevating pin 175a attached at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft, meshes with the elevating gear 175d. And a drive gear 175e attached to the rotary shaft of one lifting drive motor 175b.

  In the present embodiment, two first elevating drive motors 175b are attached to the drive base 175c, and the drive gear 175e attached to the rotation shaft of each first elevating drive motor 175b is attached to the elevating gear 175d. They are meshing with each other. That is, one lifting gear 175d is rotated by two first lifting drive motors 175b.

  When the first elevating drive mechanism 175 rotates the drive gears 175e attached to the respective rotation shafts of the two first elevating drive motors 175b in the same direction, the elevating gears engaged with the respective drive gears 175e. As 175d rotates, the first elevating pin 175a revolves around the axis of the elevating gear 175d. As the first elevating pin 175a revolves, the first elevating pin 175a slides in the slit 174a of the elevating arm 174 and presses the inside of the slit 174a in the vertical direction, so that the elevating arm 174 is on the rear end side. It rotates (rotates) around the center. Thereby, since the front end side of the raising / lowering arm 174 moves to an up-down direction, the 1st movable part 155 can be raised / lowered via the raising / lowering slider 172 to which the front end side of the raising / lowering arm 174 is attached.

  The first raising / lowering detection sensor 176 enters a detection state when the pair of raising / lowering sliders 172 are positioned at the lower moving ends (lowering ends). That is, the first lifting detection sensor 176 detects that the first movable portion 155 is located at the lower end via the lifting slider 172.

[3-1e-7. Second lifting mechanism]
The second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the upper surface of the first movable part base 157 in the first movable part 155, and also supports the operation part base 164 of the effect operation part 160 so as to be movable up and down, A second elevating drive motor 182 attached to the second elevating base 181, a second elevating pin 183 attached to the rotating shaft of the second elevating drive motor 182 and revolving at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft; The second elevating pin 183 is slidably inserted, and the elevating transmission piece 184 having a slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction and having the upper part attached to the operation unit base 164, and the second elevating base 181 (production operation unit 160) And a second lift detection sensor 180a that detects the lifting and lowering.

  The second elevating base 181 of the second elevating mechanism 180 has a direction in which the axis of the operation unit base 164 extends in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 (an inclined axis that is positioned forward as it goes upward). ) So that it can be raised and lowered.

  When the second elevating mechanism 180 revolves the second elevating pin 183 by the second elevating drive motor 182, the second elevating pin 183 slides in the slit 184 a of the elevating transmission piece 184 and moves the inner surface of the slit 184 a up and down. The lifting / lowering transmission piece 184 moves in the vertical direction by pressing in the direction. Since the operation part base 164 of the effect operation part 160 is attached to the lifting / lowering transmission piece 184, the effect operation part 160 can be raised and lowered via the lifting / lowering transmission piece 184.

  In the second lifting mechanism 180, the second lifting pin 183 is positioned in the vicinity of the rear end of the slit 184 a extending in the front-rear direction when the lifting transmission piece 184 (the effect operation unit 160) is positioned at the lower end. Yes. That is, the second raising / lowering pin 183 is located at the bottom dead center. In order to raise the lifting transmission piece 184 from this state, the second lifting drive motor 182 causes the second lifting pin 183 to revolve so as to have a forward movement vector. Accordingly, the second elevating pin 183 slides forward in the slit 184a, the second elevating pin 183 presses the inner surface of the slit 184a upward, and the elevating transmission piece 184 moves upward. Become.

  When the line that connects the center of the second lifting pin 183 and the center of revolution passes the center axis of the slit 184a by further revolving the second lifting pin 183, the second lifting pin 183 moves up the inner surface of the slit 184a. Slid backward in the slit 184a. When the second elevating pin 183 reaches the vicinity of the rear end of the slit 184a, the driving of the second elevating drive motor 182 is stopped and the revolution of the second elevating pin 183 is stopped. In this state, the second elevating pin 183 is located at the top dead center, and the elevating transmission piece 184 is located at the ascending end.

  When a force is applied to move the lifting / lowering transmission piece 184 downward by pressing the presentation operation unit 160 in a state where the lifting / lowering transmission piece 184 (effect operation unit 160) is positioned at the rising end, Since the second elevating pin 183 is located at the top dead center, no force in the front-rear direction acts on the second elevating pin 183. Accordingly, since the second elevating pin 183 does not revolve, the elevating transmission piece 184 does not move downward.

  In addition, when the effect operation unit 160 is pressed with the lifting / lowering transmission piece 184 positioned at the ascending end, the player operating in front of the effect operation unit 160 operates, so the effect operation unit 160 On the other hand, in addition to the downward movement vector, the backward movement vector acts. On the other hand, in the state of the rising end, since the second lifting pin 183 is located at the rear end of the slit 184a, even if a backward movement vector acts on the second lifting pin 183 via the slit 184a, The second elevating pin 183 contacts the rear end of the slit 184a to prevent the second elevating pin 183 from revolving, and the elevating transmission piece 184 does not move downward. Can be maintained.

  The second lift detection sensor 180a is in a detection state when the second lift base 181 is positioned at the downward movement end (downward end). That is, the second lifting detection sensor 180a detects that the effect operation unit 160 is located at the lower end via the second lifting base 181.

[3-1f. Door frame sub display section]
The door frame sub-display unit 185 is arranged on the right side of the door frame effect display device 152 in the door frame effect device 150 and behind the upper dish ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126. The door frame sub-display unit 185 includes three 7-segment LEDs arranged on the left and right. The door frame sub-display unit 185 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower end side is positioned forward with respect to the upper end side. The lower end of the door frame sub-display portion 185 is disposed at the same height as the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 from which the upper dish ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 protrude.

  The door frame sub-display unit 185 covers a frame-shaped sub-display unit decoration frame 186 that decorates the outer periphery of three square 7-segment LEDs, and covers the three 7-segment LEDs and the sub-display unit decoration frame 186. And a transparent sub-display portion cover 187 that is inclined at the same angle as the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151.

[3-1 g. Lower front speaker unit]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 13, the lower front speaker unit 190 has a lower front speaker 191 mounted behind the speaker mounting port 120a of the bulging portion 120, and a plurality of grill holes through which the speaker mounting port 120a passes. A lower front speaker grille 192 that is closed, a horizontal grid-shaped grill decoration frame 193 that is disposed in front of the lower front speaker grille 192 and is attached to the front surface of the bulging portion 120, and each grid in the grill decoration frame 193 A bar-shaped lattice decoration portion 194 disposed on the rear side of each portion, and a lattice decoration LED 195 provided at both ends of each lattice decoration portion 194 to light-decorate the lattice decoration portion 194.

  The lower front speaker 191 is a woofer that outputs a low-frequency sound. The lower front speaker grille 192 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120. The lower front speaker grill 192 is a punching metal.

  The grill decoration frame 193 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The grill decoration frame 193 is a plurality of frames arranged by connecting a rectangular frame portion along the inner periphery of the speaker mounting opening 120a of the bulging portion 120 and two sides extending vertically from the top and the bottom of the frame portion. And a lattice portion. In the lattice portion extending to the left and right of the grill decorative frame 193, the portions (general portions) excluding the left and right ends extend with a certain width, and the both ends in the left and right directions are inclined downward toward the ends. It is formed in a trapezoidal shape extending with a certain width after spreading.

  The lattice decoration part 194 has translucency, and is formed in a column shape that is long on the left and right. The left and right ends of the lattice decoration part 194 are located on the rear side of the trapezoidal part of the lattice part in the grill decoration frame 193, and the remaining parts are located below the general part of the lattice part. Thereby, the lattice decoration part 194 can visually recognize the site | part except the both ends from the front. The plurality of lattice decoration portions 194 are provided in front of the lower front speaker grille 192. The lattice decoration LED 195 is a full color LED.

  The lower front speaker unit 190 can output a low frequency (low frequency) sound among the sounds to be output by the lower front speaker 191. Since this lower front speaker unit 190 faces forward from the front surface of the bulging portion 120 bulging forward, it gives sound pressure to the player seated on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be made. In addition, the lower front speaker unit 190 can appropriately decorate the lattice decoration portion 194 by causing the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 195 to emit light appropriately, and can also be installed in the grill decoration frame 193 via the lattice decoration portion 194 (lower front speaker). The front side of the grill 192 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
Next, the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame base unit will be briefly described. The cylinder lock 127 is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown), cooperates with the locking unit 650, opens and closes the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame. 4 is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 127 includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction, a metal key hole 128 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a key hole 128 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. And a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that rotates together with a regular metal key that is inserted into the frame.

  The cylinder main body of the cylinder lock 127 has a rear end attached to the front piece portion through the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear. The rotation transmitting member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and from the rear end toward the front side at a position facing the central axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the metal transmission cylinder 654 of the metal locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear. By inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the key hole 128) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated. When the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 are in contact with each other when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the cylinder lock 127 and the locking unit 650 are electrically connected.

  Note that when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the cylinder lock 127 is made of a regular metal The key is inserted into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotated in a predetermined direction (a direction corresponding to the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction). An attendant such as a game hall clerk, when inserting a regular metal key into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127, causes electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge by charging itself through the regular metal key. Thus, it is transmitted to the cylinder lock 127. Therefore, in the present embodiment, various substrates (for example, a substrate having a power supply line and a substrate ground line) are not disposed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127 in order to prevent intrusion of electromagnetic wave noise.

[3-2. Door frame upper unit]
Next, the door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10 and FIG. FIG. 14A is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the door frame, and FIG. 14B is an enlarged front view showing the state where the grill decoration frame and the lattice decoration part are removed in FIG. The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 has a game window 201 that allows the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the front when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. And a door frame upper unit base 202 formed in an inverted U shape with an inner periphery that becomes a gaming window 201 open downward and an outer periphery that is long and square in the front view, and a door frame upper unit base 202. And a transparent closing glass 205 that closes the inverted U-shaped inner periphery (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202.

  The door frame upper unit 200 includes a door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 provided in a band shape along the inverted U-shaped inner periphery of the gaming window 201 on the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and a door frame upper unit. The door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 provided outside the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 on the front surface of the base 202, the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, and the door frame covering the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220. An upper outer edge decoration unit 230 and an upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 are provided.

[3-2a. Door frame upper unit base]
The door frame upper unit base 202 forms the rear surface of the door frame upper unit 200 (see FIG. 10). The door frame upper unit base 202 has a flat plate shape and is formed in a gate shape opened downward. The door frame upper unit base 202 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer periphery is long vertically when viewed from the front, and has an inverted U shape whose inner periphery is opened downward. The size of the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 is formed larger than the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged on the rear side.

[3-2b. Closed glass]
The closing glass 205 is detachably provided at the rear end of the door frame upper unit base 202 so as to close the inner periphery (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202 (see FIG. 10). . The closing glass 205 is arranged so that the game area 5a prevents the game ball B from dropping out of the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. It is for closing the front side. The closing glass 205 is a transparent tempered glass.

[3-2c. Door frame upper interior decoration unit]
The door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 extends along the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 with a constant width and protrudes forward along the wall-shaped upper inner base 211 and the upper inner base 211. A semi-cylindrical upper inner decoration portion 212 that extends and is provided at the front end of the upper inner base 211, and an upper inner portion that is provided behind the upper inner decoration portion 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 213a mounted on the front surface. And a decorative substrate 213.

  The upper inner base 211 is formed in an inverted U shape when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper inner base 211 has a pair of portions extending in a straight line shape in an inverted U shape extending vertically in a vertical direction, and a portion extending in a semicircular arc shape in an inverted U shape is directed upward. Curved to protrude forward. The upper inner base 211 is formed to be opaque. The distance in the left-right direction at the lower end of the upper inner base 211 coincides with the distance between the rear ends separated from the left and right of the bulged portion upper decorative portion 121 in the bulged portion 120 of the door frame lower unit 100.

  The upper inner decoration portion 212 is milky white with translucency and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The upper inner decoration board 213 is attached to the upper inner base 211, and a plurality of LEDs 213 a mounted on the front surface are arranged along the upper inner decoration portion 212. The plurality of LEDs 213a on the upper inner decorative substrate 213 are full-color LEDs. By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 213a on the upper inner decorative substrate 213, the upper inner decorative portion 212 can be illuminated.

  The door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 is formed so that the lower end of the upper inner decoration portion 212 coincides with the rear end of the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 of the bulging portion 120 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Thus, the upper inner decoration part 212 and the bulging part upper decoration part 121 form one continuous decoration.

  The upper interior decoration portion 212 of the door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 is surrounded by a first peripheral light area LA1 (indicated by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 16) that illuminates and decorates the game window 201 around the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121. Part). In addition, since the upper inner decoration portion 212 is formed in milky white, the light from the plurality of LEDs 213a can be reduced and emitted outward, so that the gaming window surrounded by the upper inner decoration portion 212 It is possible to prevent the inside of 201 from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the gaming area 5a can be viewed in a good state from the front through the gaming window 201.

[3-2d. Door frame upper exterior decoration unit]
The door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 has a rear end attached to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, protrudes forward, and has a plurality of protruding bases 221 arranged at intervals in the vertical direction. The upper outer top decorative portion 222 provided at the front end of the protruding base 221, the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 disposed between the protruding bases 221, and the rear of the upper outer top decorative portion 222, respectively. The upper outer top LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 disposed behind the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 are provided.

  The protruding base 221 has an isosceles triangle shape when viewed from the side. The protruding base 221 extends in the left-right direction from the outer peripheral surface of the upper inner base 211 to the vicinity of the left and right side pieces of the door frame upper unit base 202 and is formed to extend outward from the upper inner base 211. The protruding base 221 has a front end protruding forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the portion in contact with the upper inner base 211.

  The plurality of upper outer top decoration portions 222 are formed in a columnar shape extending in the left-right direction, and both left and right ends are formed in a hemispherical shape. The upper outer top decorative portion 222 is formed such that the outer diameter of the cylinder is about 1/3 of the outer diameter of the upper inner decorative portion 212. Each of the upper outer top decorative portions 222 is formed to have a length corresponding to the length in the left-right direction of the protruding base 221 provided. These upper outer top decoration parts 222 have translucency.

  The upper outer valley decoration portion 223 includes a portion (vertical surface portion) extending in parallel with the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 between the protruding bases 221, and a lower surface and an upper surface of the protruding base 221 from the upper and lower sides of the portion. And a portion (slope portion) extending obliquely to the vicinity of the front end of the protruding base 221. The upper outer valley decoration portion 223 has a mirror-like plating layer on the surface (front surface). Further, the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 is formed with a square opening at a portion extending in parallel with the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 so that the upper outer valley LED 225 disposed rearward faces forward. ing.

  The upper outer top LED 224 is a full color LED. The upper outer valley LED 225 is a high-luminance full color LED.

  The door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 can cause the upper outer top decoration portion 222 to emit light by appropriately causing the upper outer top LED 224 to emit light. Further, the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 can cause the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 to emit light by appropriately causing the upper outer valley LED 225 to emit light, and the upper outer top decoration portion 222 that is separated in the vertical direction. Brighten up between each other.

  The upper outer top decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 of the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220 emit light decoration around the gaming window 201 outside the first peripheral light region LA1 (FIG. 16). In FIG. 2, a part surrounded by a two-dot chain line is formed. Further, the upper outer top decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 of the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220 have their front ends positioned behind the front end of the upper inner decorative portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decorative unit 210. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer top LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 to the gaming window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decoration portion 212, so Even if the valley decoration portion 223 is decorated with light emission, it is possible to prevent the inside of the gaming window 201 from being difficult to see due to glare, and the gaming area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the gaming window 201.

[3-2e. Door frame upper outer edge decoration unit]
The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 includes a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged along the outer peripheral edge (left and right sides and upper side) of the door frame upper unit base 202, and the outer periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202. A door frame upper cover 232 which is attached to the edge and covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220; and an opaque decoration portion 233 provided on the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. ing. The plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame upper cover 232 connects the pair of side walls extending forward from the portions near the left and right ends of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the upper sides of the pair of side walls, and near the upper end of the door frame upper unit base 202. It is composed of an upper wall that extends forward from the site, and a front wall that connects the front side of the pair of side walls and the front side of the upper wall, and is formed in a box shape with the rear and lower sides open. Has been. The door frame upper cover 232 is entirely transparent.

  The door frame upper cover 232 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the upper inner decoration portion 212 such that the front end of the side wall is located slightly forward of the front end of the upper inner decoration portion 212. Specifically, the front end of the side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 extends vertically from the lower end to a height near the upper end of the inverted U-shaped linear portion of the gaming window 201, and from there, the door frame upper unit base 202 It is curved and extended in an arc shape so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward to substantially the same height as the state. Further, the front ends of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232 are curved so that the portions that are curved in an arc shape upward are closer to each other as they go upward.

  The door frame upper cover 232 has a pair of speaker mounting openings 232a to which the grill decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 and the like are mounted at the left and right corners of the upper portion of the front wall.

  The opaque decorative portion 233 is provided on the outer side surfaces of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. In the opaque decorative portion 233, a slit 233a extending in the front-rear direction is formed at the same height as the protruding base 221 in the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220. A part of the transparent side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 faces outward through the slit 233a of the opaque decorative portion 233.

  The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 so as to be visible from the front by a door frame upper cover 232. Further, the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 causes the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 to emit light appropriately, so that the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the outer edge of the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232 (each of the side wall and the upper wall). The front end of the light emitting device can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, since the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 has the opaque decoration portions 233 on both the left and right outer sides, the light from the upper outer top LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 is transmitted to this pachinko. Irradiation to other players sitting in front of other pachinko machines arranged adjacent to the machine 1 can be prevented.

  A plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 (outer edge of the front end of the door frame upper cover 232) of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 are arranged in a third peripheral light area LA3 (light emitting decoration outside the second peripheral light area LA2 around the gaming window 201). A portion surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 16 is configured. Further, the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 are disposed on the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, that is, behind the front end of the upper inner decoration portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer edge LED 231 to the gaming window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decoration portion 212. Even if the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are caused to emit light, the inside of the gaming window 201 remains inside. It is prevented from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 in a good state.

[3-2f. Upper speaker unit]
The upper speaker unit 240 closes the speaker mounting port 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 in front of each upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker 241 that is respectively mounted near the left and right corners of the front upper portion of the door frame upper unit base 202. An upper speaker grill (not shown), a horizontal grid-shaped grill decoration frame 243 disposed in front of the upper speaker grill and attached to the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232, and substantially the same as each grid portion in the grill decoration frame 243 A bar-shaped lattice decoration portion 244 disposed behind the upper speaker grill at intervals, and a lattice decoration LED 245 provided at the outer end in the left-right direction of each lattice decoration portion 244 for illuminating and decorating the lattice decoration portion (see FIG. 14).

  Each of the upper speakers 241 is attached obliquely at the center in the left-right direction of the door frame upper unit 200 so as to face slightly downward. The upper speaker 241 is attached to the rear of the adjacent upper outer top decorative portion 222 in the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220. The upper speaker 241 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds in the entire range from low to high. The upper speaker grille is attached to the inside (rear surface of the front wall) of the door frame upper cover 232. The upper speaker grill is a punching metal.

  The grill decoration frame 243 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The grill decoration frame 243 is arranged such that a frame portion having a shape along the inner periphery of the speaker mounting opening 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 is connected to two sides extending in the vertical direction of the frame portion so as to be separated vertically. And a plurality of lattice portions. The grid portion extending to the left and right of the grill decorative frame 243 has a portion (general portion) excluding the end on the outside in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 extending with a certain width, and the end on the outside in the left-right direction. Is formed in a trapezoidal shape extending at a certain width after obliquely spreading downward toward the end.

  The lattice decoration part 244 has translucency and is formed in a column shape that is long on the left and right. The lattice decoration portion 244 can be viewed from the front through the upper speaker grille. The lattice decoration LED 245 is a full color LED.

  The upper speaker unit 240 is close to the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and can output high-quality stereo sound to the player. In addition, the upper speaker unit 240 can appropriately decorate the lattice decoration portion 244 by causing the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 245 to emit light appropriately, and can also be provided in the grill decoration frame 243 via the lattice decoration portion 244 (in the upper speaker grille). The rear side) can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the upper speaker unit 240, the upper outer top decoration portion 222 disposed in the upper speaker grille (grill decoration frame 243) is located in front of the upper speaker 241 when viewed from the front. That is, the lattice decoration portion 244 and the upper outer top decoration portion 222 that can emit light are arranged between the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker grille. Thereby, when the upper outer top decoration part 222 and the lattice decoration part 244 are light-decorated, it is possible to show the player the effect that the inside of the speaker grille is light-decorated, which has not been seen with conventional pachinko machines. .

[3-3. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the overall configuration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16. FIG. 15 is a plan view of the door frame lower unit showing a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate of the door frame. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a surrounding light region in the door frame. The door frame 3 allows most of the front surface including the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 while the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed. be able to. Further, the front side of the game board 5 (game area 5a) can be closed by the closing glass 205 of the game window 201.

  In the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 16 and the like, a bulging part upper decoration part 121 and an upper inner decoration part 212 are connected in an annular shape, and an upper plate 130, a door frame effect device 150, and A game window 201 and the like are arranged. In other words, the upper plate 130, the door frame effect device 150, the game window 201, and the like are surrounded by the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121, the upper inner decoration portion 212, and (first ambient light area LA <b> 1). Furthermore, the outer side of the upper inner decoration part 212 is surrounded by the upper outer top decoration part 222 and the upper outer valley decoration part 223 (second peripheral light area LA2) and the upper outer edge LED 231 (third peripheral light area LA3). Yes. In other words, the gaming window 201 is triple surrounded by the three peripheral light areas of the first peripheral light area LA1, the second peripheral light area LA2, and the third peripheral light area LA3.

  The door frame 3 is formed so that the storage area 131 of the upper plate 130 surrounds the front side and the left and right sides of the door frame effect device 150, and the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 is It distribute | circulates along a front-end edge, and is sent to the exterior (the lower pan 140 or the ball | bowl launching device 540) from the delivery port 136. FIG.

  In the normal state, the door frame 3 is such that the first movable portion 155 and the effect operation portion 160 of the door frame effect device 150 are located at the lower moving end (lower end), respectively. In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156) is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151a of the device cover 151. Further, in the effect operation unit 160, the pressing operation unit 161 is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the first movable unit main body 156 through the opening 156 a of the first movable unit main body 156.

  The door frame 3 is provided with a bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper plate 130 over the entire length. The upper end of the wall for storing the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is raised by the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121. The upper end on the front side (front region 131a side) of the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is higher than the front end on the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 (first movable portion 155) in the normal state. Thereby, when the inside of the upper plate 130 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B overflow to the door frame effect device 150 side, and the upper plate 130 is filled with the game balls B to the player. Can be easily recognized, and the game ball B can be prevented from spilling forward from the upper plate 130.

  In the door frame 3, an upper dish ball removal button 124, a ball lending button 125, and a return button 126 are gathered at the right corner on the right side of the upper dish 130 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The surface on which the upper plate ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are provided is provided at a position higher than the upper plate 130 and lower than the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 and forward. It is inclined to become lower. Accordingly, when the game ball B is placed on the surface on which the upper dish ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are provided, the game ball B is formed by the surface and the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121. Can roll to the upper plate 130 side and be discharged into the upper plate 130.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 is formed in a mirror surface, the surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 constituting the upper plate 130 (that is, the inner surface of the upper plate 130) are formed in a mirror shape. Since the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 are transferred to the inner surface of the upper plate 130, the reflected game balls B can be seen, so that the player feels as if many game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. And the volume of the upper plate 130 can appear to be large.

  As for the door frame 3, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 in the upper plate 130 first rolls forward in the left side region 131b and then enters the front region 131a to enter the front region 131a. Roll right inside. Then, after entering the right side area 131b from the right end of the front area 131a and rolling backward in the right side area 131b, the player moves the flow of the game ball B that is sent out from the outlet 136 to the outside. (See FIG. 15). At this time, since the game ball B circulates in the front area 131a closer to the player in front of the door frame effect device 150, the game ball B in the front area 131a can be seen well, and the inside of the upper plate 130 The amount of storage of the game ball B at can be easily confirmed.

  Moreover, in the door frame 3, since the delivery port 136 is provided in the rear end of the right side area 131b where the game ball B rolls backward in the upper plate 130, the delivery port 136 can be visually recognized from the player side. it can. Thereby, it is possible to show the player how the game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 from the outlet 136 (upper plate 130), which could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines.

  The door frame 3 can visually recognize the pair of lower speakers 153a through the transparent device cover 151 and the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156, and visually recognizes the door frame effect display device 152 behind the lower speakers 153a. be able to. In the door frame 3, the upper end of the door frame effect display device 152 is close to the upper end of the door frame lower unit 100, that is, the lower end of the game window 201. As a result, the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 are brought close to each other, so that the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 constitute one screen. Can be displayed.

  In the door frame effect display device 152 arranged behind the effect operation unit 160, the door frame 3 has its lower side positioned below the upper front end of the effect operation unit 160 and the upper side is the upper front end of the effect operation unit 160. The upper part of the door frame effect display device 152 is made higher than the effect operation unit 160. Thereby, compared with the case where the whole door frame effect display device 152 is made lower than the effect operation unit 160, the door frame effect display device from the player side even if the door frame effect display device 152 is brought closer to the effect operation unit 160. 152 can be easily seen. Further, since the depth in the front-rear direction applied to the door frame effect display device 152 can be reduced, the amount of bulging forward of the bulging portion 120 can be suppressed, so that the player is pressed by the bulging portion 120. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling, and it is possible to entertain the game in a comfortable state for the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a door arranged obliquely behind the effect operation unit 160 so that the vertical projection range VP of the display screen (a range between two dashed lines in FIG. 11) is in the vicinity of the effect operation unit 160. Since the frame effect display device 152 is provided, when the door frame effect display device 152 is viewed from the player side, the effect operation unit 160 can be seen near the outer edge on the lower side of the door frame effect display device 152. By displaying an effect image that decorates the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame effect display device 152, the effect operation unit 160 can be decorated with the effect image, and the effect operation unit can be changed by changing the effect image. The decoration of 160 can be changed variously, and it can make a player hard to get tired.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 has the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152 visible in the vicinity of the effect operation unit 160, the effect operation unit can be displayed without displaying the image of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame effect display device 152. Since an image such as an arrow or a hand directed to 160 can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 160, the player's line of sight can be immediately directed to the effect operation unit 160. Further, it is possible to make it difficult to delay the operation timing of the production operation unit 160, and it is possible to entertain a player participation type production in which the player operates the production operation unit 160 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower front speaker grill 192 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and an upper speaker grill of the upper speaker unit 240, so that the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 are forward (in the player side) in a normal state. ) Is difficult to see.

[3-4. Measures against electromagnetic noise on door frame]
Next, noise countermeasures for the door frame 3 will be briefly described. As described above, the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame base unit (not shown) having a quadrangular and frame shape whose front view extends vertically. As described above, the door frame base unit is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically and has a gaming window 201 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A metal frame-like door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) attached to the door, a metal opening / closing cylinder lock 127 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit, and the like. As described above, the door frame reinforcing unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to give rigidity, and the main body frame via a door frame metal ground wire (not shown). 4 is electrically connected to a frame ground substrate 559 included in the frame 4. That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcement unit is a frame ground on the door frame side. The frame ground substrate 559 is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding (earthing) the island equipment of the game hall. Is electrically connected to the ground.

  As described above, some of the various decorative portions provided on the door frame 3 are not subjected to decorative plating at all, while others are provided with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit via the door frame reinforcing unit and a wiring (not shown) or a metal conduction plate (not shown). Yes. For this reason, for example, when a player touches a decorative portion on which decorative plating has been applied, static electricity charged to the player is electrostatically discharged and transmitted as electromagnetic wave noise from the player to the door frame reinforcement unit via the decorative portion. From the door frame reinforcing unit, the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the frame ground substrate 559, and the island facility ground wire (not shown) are guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed.

  In a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, as described above, the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 come into contact with each other. When the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 while an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4, for example, A staff member of a game hall clerk or a person who possesses a setting key to be described later (a limited person who can check the current setting value in addition to changing the setting value) When the lock unit 650 in 4 is touched, the charged static electricity is discharged to an attendant such as a game hall clerk or a person holding a setting key, which will be described later, and the staff of the game hall clerk or the setting key, which will be described later, becomes electromagnetic noise. Possess From the door frame reinforcement unit 650 to the door frame reinforcement unit, and from the door frame reinforcement unit through the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the frame ground board 559, and the island equipment ground wire (not shown) It is guided to earth and removed.

[3-5. Lighting effect on door frame]
Next, the light emission effect by the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 includes an upper plate 130, a door frame directing device 150, a game window 201, and the like. It is surrounded by a region LA1). The plurality of LEDs 121a of the bulging part upper decoration part 121 and the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decoration part 212 are arranged in a line in the extending direction. Thereby, the circumference | surroundings of the game window 201 grade | etc., Can be light-decorated by light-emitting the some LED121a and LED213a suitably. At this time, if the plurality of LEDs 121a and the LEDs 213a are caused to emit light in order, the player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which light rotates around the game window 201.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 includes the upper outer top decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 (second ambient light area LA2) disposed outside the upper inner decorative portion 212, the upper outer top LED 224 is provided. The upper outer valley decoration portion 222 and the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 are decorated with light emission by the upper outer valley LED 225, so that the outer side of the first peripheral light area LA1 can be decorated with light emission, and the outside of the game window 201 is doubled. It is possible to show the player the light emission effect to be decorated with light.

  Since a plurality of upper outer top decoration portions 222 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, it is possible to show the player a light effect such as a level meter by sequentially emitting light from one side in the vertical direction. . For example, when a chance comes, the expected value for the game can be shown to the player as a level meter, or can be shown to the player as a sound meter that matches the output music.

  Moreover, since the upper outer valley decoration part 223 is formed in the shape of a mirror surface, the upper outer valley decoration part 222 is made to shine more strongly than the upper inner decoration part 212 by causing the upper outer valley LED 225 to emit light. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Since the door frame 3 includes a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged on the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202, the upper outer edge LEDs 231 emit light so that they can be seen in the past pachinko machines 1. The player can show the player the light emission effect that the outer edge of the door frame 3 (the third peripheral light area LA3) emits.

  And in the door frame 3, since it has the triple surrounding light area of 1st surrounding light area LA1, 2nd surrounding light area LA2, and 3rd surrounding light area LA3 in the outer side of the game window 201, respectively. Various light emission effects such as turning around the game window 201, light emission effects going from the outside to the game window 201, light emission effects going from the game window 201 to the outside, etc. Can show the player a light-emitting effect.

  Further, in the door frame 3, the lattice decoration LED 195 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the lattice decoration LED 245 of the upper speaker unit 240 are appropriately caused to emit light so that the lattice portion (lattice decoration portion 194) of the grill decoration frame 193, the grill The player can have a light emitting effect that makes it possible to decorate the lattice portion (lattice decorative portion 244) of the decorative frame 243 and make the grill decorative frame 193 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grill decorative frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 stand out. Can show.

  Further, in the door frame 3, a lower speaker decoration portion 153 c of the lower speaker unit 153, a lattice decoration portion 244 of the upper speaker unit 240, a plurality of upper outer top LEDs 224, and a grill decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 in the upper outer valley LED 225 ( The upper outer apex LED 224 and the upper outer trough LED 225 located behind the upper speaker grill) are caused to emit light, whereby the upper speaker 241 and the pair of the lower speaker 153a and the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156 are The space between the upper speaker grille can be decorated with light emission, and the player can be shown a light emission effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines where the space between the speaker and the speaker grille is decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the door frame 3, the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 is provided with the plurality of LEDs 138 a of the stored light emitting decoration portion 138. It is possible to decorate the game ball B that is being illuminated. For example, since the plurality of LEDs 138a are caused to emit light in a state where the game ball B is not stored in the upper plate 130, and the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is formed in a mirror shape, the entire inside of the upper plate 130 is dazzling. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that is decorated with light emission, and for the player who is selecting a pachinko machine to play, the upper plate 130 of the pachinko machine 1 shines brightly, so the interest in the pachinko machine 1 Can be strongly attracted.

  Since the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 is provided above the bottom wall 132 of the upper plate 130 above the half of the outer diameter of the game ball B, a plurality of game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. The LED 138a is caused to emit light, and the light is applied to the upper half side of the game ball B and reflected upward, so that the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 shines brightly. You can show them.

  In addition, when the bulging part upper decoration part 121 is light-decorated, a part of the light is also irradiated into the upper plate 130, so that the bulging part upper decoration part 121 also causes the upper plate 130 or the upper plate 130 to It is possible to show the player the light emission effect that the stored game ball B emits and decorates.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a light emitting decoration portion 124a surrounding the upper dish ball removal button 124 and a light emission decoration portion 142a surrounding the lower dish ball removal button 142. By causing the light emitting decoration portion 124a of the dish ball removal button 124 and the light emission decoration portion 142a of the lower dish ball removal button 142 to emit light, the upper dish ball removal button 124 and the lower dish ball removal button 142 can be illuminated. Accordingly, when a large number of game balls B are paid out, such as during a “hit” game, the upper plate 130 and the lower plate 140 are made to play the game balls B by causing the upper plate ball removal button 124 and the lower plate ball removal button 142 to emit light. So that the player can operate the upper dish ball removal button 124 and the lower dish ball removal button 142 so as to avoid being full.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment can show the player various lighting effects, and by appropriately combining them, the player can present more various effects to the player. Can be entertained and the player can be made hard to get bored.

[3-6. Production of door frame production device]
Next, the production of the door frame 3 by the door frame production device 150 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the door frame effect display device and the effect operation unit in the door frame effect device, and FIG. 17B is an illustration of the effect operation unit based on the effect image of the door frame effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of decoration, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the collaboration effect by the effect image of a door frame effect display device, and the movable effect of an effect operation part.

  In the normal state of the door frame effect device 150, the first movable portion 155 and the effect operation portion 160 are located at the lower moving end (lower end), respectively. In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156) is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151a of the device cover 151. Further, in the effect operation unit 160, the pressing operation unit 161 is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the first movable unit main body 156 through the opening 156 a of the first movable unit main body 156. Even in this normal state, the pressing operation unit 161 in the effect operation unit 160 can be pressed.

  When the first LED of the operation unit decoration board 162 is caused to emit light in a normal state, it is possible to show the player the light emission effect that the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 emits and decorates. Further, when the second LED of the operation unit decoration board 162 is caused to emit light in a normal state, a light emission effect in which the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable unit cover 158 surrounding the outer side of the pressing operation unit 161 is decorated with light emission is played. You can show them. With these light-emitting effects, the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 161, and the player's participation type effect that operates the pressing operation unit 161 by urging the player to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161. Can make it easier to participate.

  Further, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable part decoration substrate 159 are caused to emit light in a normal state, the rear peripheral wall 133 and the first movable part main body 156 of the upper plate 130 via the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 It is possible to decorate the space. That is, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the vicinity of the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 is decorated with light emission.

  When a predetermined sound is output from the pair of lower speakers 153a in this normal state, the sound is radiated to the player side through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable portion main body 156. It is possible to make the player listen to an acoustic effect in which sound can be heard from the direction of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). Accordingly, the player's interest can be attracted to the pressing operation unit 161 by the sound from the lower speaker 153a, and the player is prompted to press the pressing operation unit 161 to operate the pressing operation unit 161. It is possible to facilitate participation in a player participation type production.

  Further, in a normal state, the door frame effect device 150 can visually recognize the door frame effect display device 152 from the player side through the device cover 151 and is displayed on the door frame effect display device 152. A player can be entertained by the effect image (see FIG. 17A and the like).

  The door frame effect device 150 revolves the first elevating pins 175a by the four first elevating drive motors 175b of the first elevating mechanism 170 in a normal state, and thereby via the pair of elevating arms 174 and the elevating slider 172. It is possible to show the player a movable effect that the first movable unit 155 moves to the upward moving end (upward end) together with the effect operating unit 160. As a result, the first movable portion 155 pops upward together with the effect operation portion 160, so that the player can be surprised and the player can be strongly urged to press the pressing operation portion 161. At the same time, as the first movable portion 155 is raised, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game.

  In a state where the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, as shown in FIG. 12A, the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 becomes visible from the player side. In this state, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable part decoration board 159 are caused to emit light, the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 is decorated with light emission. Therefore, when the first movable part 155 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end while the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 is decorated with light emission, an effect is produced in which the first movable part 155 rises from the light. Can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

  Further, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable portion decorative board 159 are caused to emit light while the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, a part of the light is applied to the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130. Since it is irradiated, a plurality of LEDs 159a can also show the player a light-emitting effect that makes the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 shine, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, since the first movable portion 155 can be moved up and down by the four first lifting drive motors 175b, the first movable portion 155 is vibrated by repeating the forward / reverse rotation in small increments. Can be made. Thereby, when the player touches the first movable portion 155 or the effect operation portion 160 while the first movable portion 155 is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. In addition, if the first movable unit 155 is vibrated at the timing when the production operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is pressed, the operational feeling of the press operation can be increased or decreased, thereby changing the player. Can be entertained.

  Further, when the first movable portion 155 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end side, the plurality of grill holes 156b formed in the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156 move upward, and thus the plurality of grill holes 156b. And the volume of the space between the pair of lower speakers 153a increases. As a result, the volume between the lower speaker 153a and the grill hole 156b changes, so that the natural vibration of the part changes and the resonance frequency of the sound output from the lower speaker 153a changes. The player can listen to the sound effect in which the tone color of the sound radiated to the player side through the grill hole 156b changes.

  Further, when a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the first movable portion 155 from the descending end to the ascending end, the upper portion of the first movable portion 155 is moved to the door frame effect display device 152. It looks like it covers the bottom of the display screen. Accordingly, when the first movable part 155 is moved to the rising end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the first movable part 155, so that the first to the player. The rise of the movable part 155 can be noticed, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

  At this time, for example, an effect image in which the first movable part 155 is lifted by a predetermined character, an effect image in which the predetermined character is lifted by the rising of the first movable part 155, etc. on the door frame effect display device 152, etc. By displaying, it is possible to show the player the collaboration effect by the movable effect of the first movable part 155 and the effect image, and the player can be greatly enjoyed.

  Further, when the second elevating pin 183 is revolved by the second elevating drive motor 182 of the second elevating mechanism 180 in the normal state, the door operation effect device 150 is moved upward through the elevating transmission piece 184. It is possible to show the player a movable effect of moving to the moving end (rising end). Thereby, since the upper surface of the press operation part 161 of the production | presentation operation part 160 will be in the state protruded largely upwards rather than the upper surface of the 1st movable part 155, it attracts a player's interest strongly to the press operation part 161. The player can strongly urge the player to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161, and the pressing operation unit 161 is lifted to make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game.

  In the state where the production operation unit 160 is moved to the ascending end, as shown in FIG. 12B, the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 on the lower side of the pressing operation unit 161 is exposed to the outside. In this state, when the second LED of the operation unit decoration board 162 is caused to emit light, it is possible to show the player the light emission effect that the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 emits and decorates. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 160 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end while decorating the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 of the effect operation unit 160, the effect operation unit 160 rises from the light. Can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 160 can be moved up and down by the second elevating drive motor 182, the production operation unit 160 can be vibrated by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation in small increments. . Accordingly, when the player touches the effect operation unit 160 while the effect operation unit 160 is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. Further, if the effect operation unit 160 is vibrated at the timing when the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is pressed, the operation feeling of the press operation can be increased or decreased to change the player. Can entertain.

  Further, when a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the production operation unit 160 from the descending end to the ascending end, the upper part of the production operation unit 160 displays the display screen of the door frame production display device 152. Looks like it covers the bottom. Thus, when the effect operation unit 160 is moved to the rising end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the effect operation unit 160, and thus the effect operation unit 160 is provided to the player. Can be noticed, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  At this time, for example, an effect image (see FIG. 17B) that decorates the periphery of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame effect display device 152, an effect that the effect operation unit 160 is lifted by a predetermined character. By displaying an image, an effect image in which a predetermined character is lifted by the ascent of the effect operation unit 160 (see FIG. 17C), and the like, a collaboration effect by the movable effect and the effect image of the effect operation unit 160 is displayed. Can be shown to the player, and the player can be greatly enjoyed.

  The production operation unit 160 can be moved to the rising end while the first movable portion 155 is in the lowered end, and can be raised while the first movable portion 155 is in the raised end state (FIG. 12B). State). For example, after moving the first movable part 155 from the descending end to the ascending end, the effect operating unit 160 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end, so that the player can create a movable effect in which the effect operating unit 160 rises in two stages. Can show. As a result, the production operation unit 160 rises in two stages. Therefore, when the production operation unit 160 is operated by the player, a “hit” game is started (a special lottery result is “hit”). It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game, and to allow the player to operate the effect operation unit 160 and entertain the player participation type effect.

  As described above, the door frame effect device 150 can present the player with various effects such as the light emission effect, the movable effect, the image effect, the player participation type effect, and the sound effect, as described above. By appropriately combining them, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and entertain the player.

[3-7. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame effect device 150 is arranged on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 provided in front of and below the game area 5a where the game is performed. Since the front region 131a on the front side of the device placement unit 123 and the left and right side regions 131b are provided with the upper plate 130 having the storage region 131 of the game ball B surrounding the device placement unit 123, the front The game balls B are stored in front of the door frame effect device 150 by the region 131a, and the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen from the player. In addition, since the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a are regions that extend in the front-rear direction, in addition to the front region 131a, the game balls B stored in the side region 131b are also viewed from the player side. It can make it easy to visually recognize.

  Therefore, it becomes easy to see the game ball B in the upper plate 130, so that the player can be conscious of the storage amount of the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is advanced by the progress of the game. Even if the amount of storage decreases due to consumption of the player, it is easy for the player to recognize the decrease in the storage amount and the game ball B can be replenished into the upper plate 130. The game ball B can be prevented from disappearing from the upper plate 130, the interruption of the game can be prevented suddenly, the disappointment of the player due to the interruption of the game can be prevented, and the interest of the player in the game can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the game balls B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, so that the player can look at the door frame effect from the game area 5a. By simply dropping it onto the device 150, it is possible to immediately recognize whether or not there is a game ball B in the front area 131a, and it is not necessary for the player to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper plate 130. It becomes possible to make it easy for the player to concentrate on the game, and to make the game enjoyable and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the supply port 135 is arranged on the left side of the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a and the delivery port 136 is arranged on the opposite right side, the front region 131a is fed from the supply port 135. Since it is provided in the middle of the outlet 136, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 is sent out of the storage area 131 from the outlet 136 through the front area 131a. When the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is consumed by playing a game, the game ball B flows in front of the eyes (front area 131a), and the consumption speed, consumption amount, etc. of the game ball B to the player Can be easily recognized, and the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

  Further, since the supply port 135 is disposed on the left side of the left and right side regions 131b of the device placement unit 123 and the delivery port 136 is disposed on the right side, the space between the supply port 135 and the delivery port 136 is determined in the left-right direction. Therefore, the storage area 131 also increases in the left-right direction, so that the storage amount of the game ball B in the upper plate 130 can be increased. Accordingly, since a large number of game balls B can be stored in the upper plate 130, it is possible to allow the player to play without worrying about the storage amount of the game balls B, and to concentrate the player on the game. The game can be more enjoyed and the player can immediately recognize whether or not the game ball B is present in the front area 131a simply by dropping the line of sight from the game area 5a to the lower door frame effect device 150. It is not necessary for the player to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper plate 130, making it easier for the player to concentrate on the game and making the game enjoyable and less interesting. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, a stored light emitting decoration portion 138 that irradiates light into the storage region 131 of the upper plate 130 above the half of the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom surface (bottom wall 132) of the upper plate 130 is provided. Since the light from the LED 138a of the stored light emitting decoration unit 138 is irradiated to a portion above the half of the game ball B stored in 131, the light from the stored light emitting decoration unit 138 is emitted by the game ball B. Can be reflected upward. Therefore, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be shining and decorated with light from the stored light emitting decoration unit 138, and the player can enjoy the light decoration of the game ball B. In addition, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130, and the amount of the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be confirmed to achieve the same effect as described above. Can play.

  Further, since the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, the rear peripheral wall 133 facing the front of the upper plate 130 emits light by causing the LED 138a of the stored light emitting decorative portion 138 to emit light. It is possible to show the player a luminous decoration that cannot be seen with conventional pachinko machines, to surprise the player, and to direct the player's interest to the upper plate 130 (storage area 131), The player can confirm the storage amount of the game ball B, and the effects described above can be surely achieved. At this time, since the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is formed in a mirror shape, the light from the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 or the light from the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 reflected by the game ball B is By reflecting on the inner surface, the sparkling feeling in the storage area 131 by the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 can be further increased, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the alignment portion 137 is provided in the vicinity of the delivery port 136 so that the game balls B are aligned, the game ball B can be prevented from being clogged in the vicinity of the delivery port 136 and stored in the upper plate 130. The game ball B that is being played can be smoothly delivered from the outlet 136 to the ball launcher 540 and the lower plate 140. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the game ball B being clogged, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the delivery port 136 arranged in the side region 131b of the upper plate 130 is visible from the front, the game ball B is sent out from the delivery port 136 that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines. The situation can be seen, the player can be surprised, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, since the front area 131a in the storage area 131 in which the game ball B is stored is provided on the front side of the apparatus arrangement section 123, the game ball B is placed on the door frame effect device 150 provided in the apparatus arrangement section 123. Even if the ball rolls forward and falls, it falls into the front region 131a, and the game ball B can be prevented from falling forward from the bulging portion 120.

  Further, since the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, the front peripheral wall 134, and the like of the upper plate 130 are formed in a mirror shape, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 are transferred to the upper plate 130. Therefore, the player can have an illusion that the game ball B is stored on the other side of the peripheral wall, and the player seems to have a lot of game balls B stored on the upper plate 130. Can do.

  Further, since the storage light emitting decoration portion 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131 is provided, the light from the storage light emission decoration portion 138 or the light from the storage light emission decoration portion 138 reflected by the game ball B is By reflecting on the inner surface of the dish 130, the glittering feeling in the storage area 131 by the stored light emitting decoration part 138 can be further increased, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the door frame effect device 150 is arranged in the device arrangement unit 123 of the bulging portion 120, the player can be entertained by the effect by the door frame effect device 150, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game is suppressed. Can be made.

  In the above embodiment, as the storage area 131 in which the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is stored, the front area 131a in front of the device arrangement portion 123 (door frame effect device 150) and the left and right sides of the device arrangement portion 123. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front region in front of the device placement unit 123 and the one side region on the left side of the device placement unit 123 are not limited to this. It is good also as what was comprised with the back area | region of the back of the apparatus arrangement | positioning part 123. FIG. Alternatively, a front area 131 a in front of the device placement section 123, two side areas 131 b on the left and right sides of the device placement section 123, and a back area behind the device placement section 123 (the device placement section 123 is It is good also as what is provided in the island shape in the top plate 130). Note that the back region of the storage region 131 may have a tunnel shape in which the game ball B is not visible from the player side. Further, the back area of the storage area 131 may pass between the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect operation unit 160 in the door frame effect device 150.

  In the above embodiment, the upper plate 130 has a mirror-like inner surface. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inner surface of the upper plate 130 may be a non-mirror surface.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the storage light emitting decoration portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the storage light emission decoration portion 138 is provided on the front peripheral wall 134. Anyway.

  In the above embodiment, in the first movable portion 155 of the door frame effect device 150, a certain number of game balls B are formed on the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 by the plurality of louver portions 158b of the first movable portion cover 158. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 is inclined so that the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 is lowered toward the upper plate 130. The game ball B placed on the upper plate 130 may be rolled to prevent the game ball B from being stored on the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 (does not continue to be placed).

[4. Body frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 4 and 18 to 39. The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by driving the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side (the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3). The game ball B used in the game is discharged to the back of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall).

[4-1. Overall structure of main frame]
As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge portion 510 which is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge portion of the door frame 3, and a main body frame base unit 500. A main body frame lower hinge portion 520 that is attached to the lower end of the left side of the front frame and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge portion 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge portion of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. I have.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is made of a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500, A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and a reverse L attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. A character-shaped payout base unit 550, a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 550 for paying out the game ball B to the player side (the upper plate 130 and the lower plate 140), and a main body frame base A power supply board 630 including a power switch 630a that is attached to the lower side surface of the unit 500 as viewed from the rear and that can turn on the pachinko machine 1 A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 and a plurality of slits 641 that cover the rear side of the game board 5 attached to a main body frame base 501 to be described later and extend vertically are penetrated. A back cover 640, and a metal locking unit 650 which is attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view and locks the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. I have.

  In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the game board 5 inserted into the game board mounting portion 301 of the main body frame base 501, which will be described later, moves forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 to be regulated are attached to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of a main body frame base 501 described later of the main body frame base unit 500 and the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. The unauthorized insertion of the tool into the inside (game board 5) is prevented.

  The main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 is recessed backward in the range of about 3/4 of the total height from the top to the bottom in the front view, and the game board 5 is detachably inserted from the front side. A mounting portion 301 is provided. The ball launcher 540 is mounted at a position below the game board mounting portion 301 on the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  Further, the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 has a door frame opening for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. A switch 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 4 a is released from the pressing and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4 a is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 has a main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached. It is attached. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 4 b is released so that the opening of the main body frame 4 can be detected. A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4 b is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

  The door frame opening switch 4a and the main body frame opening switch 4b are configured to open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and to the outer frame 2 due to the input of an electrical signal by the opening / closing operation by the locking unit 650. It does not detect the opening of the main body frame 4, but detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 independently of the opening / closing operation by the locking unit 650. ing. Further, the door frame opening switch 4a and the main body frame opening switch 4b are not arranged in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127, and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is not affected by electromagnetic noise entering the cylinder lock 127. The door frame opening switch 4a is arranged at a position below the cylinder insertion port to be inserted, and below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached, below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached. A body frame opening switch 4b is arranged on the rear surface. Thus, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the cylinder lock 127, the signal transmission lines from the door frame opening switch 4a and the main body frame opening switch 4b are not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5, and a game board mounting portion 301 into which the game board 5 is detachably inserted from the front side is formed on the main body frame base 501. Has been.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front and extends upward in the shape of a groove that opens upward, and a first rail cover that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 554, a second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and a ball stopper attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 The material 557, the external terminal plate 558 disposed above the tank rail 553 and attached to the payout base 551, and the board housing formed in the payout base 551 corresponding to the front of the external terminal plate 558 (front of the pachinko machine 1). Frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the portion 551aa. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side, and can transmit various information to the hall computer. The frame ground substrate 559 is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (earthing) the island facilities of the game hall.

  The payout base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left and right directions with a substantially constant width, and a width in the front and rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. A left side plate portion 551b extending substantially downward with substantially the same width, and a right side plate portion 551c extending in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a with the same width as the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially constant rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A back plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end of the width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left plate portion 551b, and the left plate portion 551b From the front of the lower side to the right Includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape. In addition, on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, a flange portion 551da is formed in the left-right direction so as to protrude rearward at a portion separated by a predetermined length from the lower side.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout unit 560 was guided by a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and a single guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the payout device 580 for paying out the game balls B one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the upper full tank And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and the speaker unit 620a attached to the lower side of the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501. Base unit 620b, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the right side after the front view of the power supply unit 620c, and a left side after the front view of the power supply unit 620c. And an interface unit 620e attached thereto.

  The base unit 620b includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a rear base 626 attached to the rear side of the front base 625 and attached with the power supply unit 620c on the rear surface.

  The power supply unit 620c includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 (not shown) of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with.

  The payout control unit 620d has a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the right side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control accommodated in the payout control board box 632. A substrate 633. The payout control board box 632 includes a transparent cover body and a transparent base body. The payout control board 633 is accommodated in the payout control board box 632 and is configured as a caulking case. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Thus, the instructed number of game balls B are to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202).

  The payout control board box 632 includes a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The payout control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. As described above, since the cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently formed, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the payout control board 633 (whether unauthorized modification has been performed or unauthorized Whether or not an IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the payout control board box 632. The payout control board box 632 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body. When the payout control board box 632 is closed using a single sealing mechanism, the payout control board box 632 In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and a trace of opening and closing of the dispensing control board box 632 can be left. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover an unauthorized opening and closing of the dispensing control board box 632, and the deterrent against fraud to the dispensing control board box 632 is enhanced.

  Further, the payout control board 633 includes an RWM clear button 633z having a pressing operation unit having a plurality of functions, in addition to an error LED display (not shown) that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, a lead type is adopted as the RWM clear button 633z, and each lead of the RWM clear button 633z is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633. The pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed from an opening formed in the transparent cover body, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is in a state where the payout control board 633 is accommodated in the payout control board box 632. Can be pressed.

  The RWM clear button 633z is provided in the RAM built in the payout control MPU that is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and in the main control MPU that is a microprocessor provided in the main control board that controls game contents (game progress). A function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the built-in RAM, a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value, and an error LED display It also has a function as an error cancel switch for canceling an error. In other words, in the present embodiment, the setting change function (function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the setting value) related to the game specifications is separate from the main control board that controls the game contents (game progress). It is mounted on a dispensing control board 633 which is a board. Further, the separate substrate may not be the payout control substrate 633, the substrate not accommodated in the substrate case, the substrate accommodated in the substrate case, and the substrate accommodated in the substrate case configured as a caulking case. Can be considered. However, since the setting change function (function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value) is an important function as a gaming machine, higher security is desirable, and the board case is more suitable than the board that is not stored in the board case. The board that is housed has higher security, and the board with higher security is the board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case. Since the payout control board 633 is a board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case, it can be said that the security is high. The main control board 1310 for controlling the game content (game progress) is attached to a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 as will be described later, while the payout control board 633 is a main body. Being attached to the frame 4 also contributes to improving security.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the left side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. The interface board cover 636 is attached to the board base 634 as described above.

  The interface board 635 is connected to one end of a connection cable from the main body frame 4 side. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board for controlling game contents (game progress), a peripheral control board for controlling the progress of production, and the like. It is connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the front view of the interface board 635 so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

  The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted and attached to the game board attachment portion 301 of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 from the front. The back cover 640 is attached so that the right side in the front view is rotatable around a vertically extending axis at the right end of the rear face of the main body frame base 501, and the left side in the front view is the back cover attachment portion of the payout base 551. 551i and a back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600 are pivotally supported so as to be opened and closed. A locking screw 642 is provided on the left side of the back cover 640 and corresponding to the back cover mounting portion 601 a of the upper full ball path unit 600. The left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, and the lock screw 642 is screwed to the back cover attachment portion 601a. The cover 640 is fixed. The back cover 640 can rotate about 180 degrees from a closed state that covers the rear side of the game board 5 to an open state that opens the rear side of the game board 5.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending in the up / down / left / right direction is bent forward, and its rear surface is substantially the same as the rear surface of the payout base 551 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on the surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of heat radiation slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the slit 641 is not formed at all in a region corresponding to a later-described main control board box attached to the rear side of the game board 5.

  By the way, the game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 fall off with the metal powder being peeled off from the game balls B due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. For this reason, if it will be in the state where the metal powder produced by abrasion of the game ball B adheres in the tank rail 553 in which the game ball B rolls in the downstream direction, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is hindered. This makes it difficult to smoothly supply the game ball B toward the downstream side, and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is stopped.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front), and the metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B Is configured to be removed from the tank rail 553. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the tank rail 553 by naturally falling from the tank rail 553 to the outside via the notch 553aa, and the tank rail. The metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the tank rail 553 due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling in the 553 falls from the tank rail 553 to the outside via the notch 553aa, and thus metal. The powder can be removed from the tank rail 553, and a metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 by inserting a cotton swab into the cutout portion 553aa by an attendant such as a game hall clerk. It is possible to remove the metal powder from the tank rail 553 by performing the operation of removing.

  In addition, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged opposite to the island facilities in the game hall, and the game balls B discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are polished by a ball polishing device and re-used by the ball lifting device. Since it is supplied to the ball tank 552, the temperature in the island equipment of the game hall is extremely higher than the indoor temperature of the game hall. For this reason, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 has various substrates provided in the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. In order to release the heat generated from the light emitting means such as the outside to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, as described above, a plurality of heat radiation slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically are formed. Further, since the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, metal powder generated due to wear of the game ball B dropped through the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 enters the back side of the game board 5. Although it is difficult to completely prevent this, the metal powder can be prevented from entering the back side of the game board 5.

  In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, a plurality of types of wirings for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part. Accordingly, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558. That is, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes a non-connected wiring and is suspended from the upper part of the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row across the back of the island facilities in the game hall, the unconnected wiring is provided with various boards, various motors, various solenoids and other electric drive sources, various LEDs and various lamps. Touching the light emitting means such as a short circuit may cause a short circuit (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, many of the back cover 640 are bent at or near the front end of the unconnected wiring, and the front end of the unconnected wiring is caught by the slit 641. Since it is difficult to invade toward the back side, a short circuit (short circuit) can be prevented.

  Of the various substrates provided in the game board 5, the substrate near the back cover 640 (excluding a relay substrate such as a panel relay substrate 1410 described later) is molded from a non-conductive resin that constitutes a substrate box. Even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and comes into contact with the cover body, the substrate covered with the cover body is not affected at all. . A relay board such as a panel relay board 1410 to be described later is a board that relays between one board and another board. Therefore, the relay board is an assembly of various connectors, and has a wiring pattern for electrically connecting the various connectors. It is formed not on the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board on which various connectors that face the back cover 640 are mounted, but on the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board opposite to the surface facing the back cover 640. The surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the relay board are of a predetermined color (for example, green, yellow, red, blue, black, except for through-holes that can be soldered by inserting pin terminals of various connectors. Etc.) and the wiring pattern is covered with a predetermined color resist and is not exposed. That is, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and comes into contact with the relay board, the relay board is not affected at all.

  As described above, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 has a protective cover that can protect the rear side of the game board 5 by covering the rear side of the game board 5. And a plurality of heats emitted from light emitting means such as various substrates, various motors and various solenoids, and various LED and various lamps provided on the gaming board 5 by covering the rear side of the gaming board 5 The heat radiation function that can be released to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the slit 641 and the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B that has fallen through the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is the back surface of the game board 5 Metal powder intrusion suppression function that can suppress the intrusion to the side, and various boards, various motors and various solenos provided in the game board 5 with the unconnected wiring suspended from the inside of the island equipment of the game hall Electrical driving source such as de, has a protective wall function that can prevent touching the light emitting means such as various LED and various lamps.

  The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 650 includes a metal unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of metal door frame flanges 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3, and a unit. A plurality of metal outer frame collars 653 projecting rearward from the base 651 and lockable with the outer frame 2, and a metal transmission cylinder for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 vertically. 654, a metal lock spring 655 that urges the door frame collar 652 downward and the outer frame collar 653 upward, and a metal that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward. The outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is formed in a U-shape with the right side of the front view open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated. In addition, the locking unit 650 includes a plurality (two) of (three) door frame hooks 652 that are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The outer frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame cage 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

  The metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 500 to give rigidity, and via a body frame metal ground wire (not shown), The frame ground substrate 559 described above is electrically connected. The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown). A description will be given later of the fact that the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 500 to impart rigidity.

[4-3. Measures against electromagnetic noise on the body frame]
Next, noise countermeasures of the main body frame 4 will be briefly described. As described above, the main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base unit 500. The reverse L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side, and the game ball B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player side (upper plate 130 or lower plate 140) A payout unit 560 for paying out, a power supply board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, a board unit 620 having a payout control board 633, and the like are provided.

  As described above, the main body frame base unit 500 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material, and includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in front view. As described above, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 functions as a main body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500 to provide rigidity, and via a main body frame metal ground wire (not shown). Are electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame ground substrate 559 provided in the main body frame 4. That is, in this embodiment, the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is a frame ground on the main body frame side. In addition, the ball tank 552 is electrically connected to a frame ground substrate 559 described above via a ball tank ground wire (not shown). Further, a ground connection terminal (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 described above via an interface ground wire (not shown). In addition, a ground connection terminal (not shown) provided on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 described above via a power supply ground line (not shown). This frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via an unillustrated island facility ground wire.

  As described above, as countermeasures against noise in the main body frame 4, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, and the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620, respectively. , The tank tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, the corresponding ground wires (not shown) from the power board 630 in the board unit 620, the frame earth board 559, and the island equipment ground wire (not shown) It is guided to earth and removed.

[4-4. Frame ground substrate]
Next, the frame ground substrate 559 will be briefly described. As described above, the frame ground substrate 559 is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island equipment of the game hall, and includes a plurality of ground terminals. The first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) is electrically connected as an interface ground to a ground connection terminal provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 via an interface ground wire (not shown). The second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal in the island facility of the game hall through an unillustrated island facility ground wire as the island facility ground. The terminal (ball tank ground terminal) is a ball tank ground, and one end of a ball tank ground wire (not shown) is attached to a metal plate (not shown) disposed on the entire bottom of the ball tank 552 by a metal screw (not shown). The other end of the tank ground wire is electrically connected. A base terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) is a main body frame metal ground, and a main body frame metal grounding wire (not shown) is attached to a metal main body frame reinforcement frame 530 of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 by a not shown metal screw. One end is attached and the other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected, and the fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal) serves as a power source ground for the power supply in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. It is electrically connected to a ground connection terminal provided on the substrate 630 via a power supply ground wire (not shown), and the sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) is an illustration of the door frame 3 as a door frame metal ground. One end of the metal ground wire (not shown) is attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit of the door frame base unit with a metal screw (not shown). Rutotomoni, the other end of the door frame metal ground wire is intended to be electrically connected.

  In the circuit of the frame ground substrate 559, a third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) as a sphere tank ground is electrically connected to one end of a first resistor (not shown), and the other end of the first resistor serves as a power source ground. A fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal), a second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as an island equipment ground, and a first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as an interface ground, respectively. A fourth ground terminal (body frame metal ground terminal) as a frame metal ground and a sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as a door frame metal ground are electrically connected to one end of a second resistor (not shown). In addition, the other end of the second resistor is a fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal) as a power ground, and a second ground terminal (island ground terminal) as an island ground. ), And it is electrically connected to the first ground terminal (interface earth terminal) as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the first resistor and the other end of the second resistor are electrically connected. In the present embodiment, 510 ohm (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the first resistor and the second resistor.

  The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as the interface ground is connected to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire. The electromagnetic wave noise that is guided and removed to the third earth terminal (ball tank earth terminal) as the ball tank earth is passed through the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire. The electromagnetic wave noise that is guided and removed to the ground of the island facility in the game hall and flows to the fourth ground terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) as the main body frame metal ground is the second ground terminal (island) as the island facility ground. The equipment ground terminal) and the island equipment ground wire are led to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall and removed, and the fifth as a power supply ground The electromagnetic wave noise that flows to the ground terminal (power supply ground terminal) is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) and the island facility ground wire as the island facility ground, and removed. The electromagnetic wave noise flowing through the sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as the door frame metal ground is connected to the game hall via the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire. It is led to the earth of the island facility and removed.

  Incidentally, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The game tank B is supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are ground in the island facility of the game hall or rub against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 and are charged and discharged electrostatically, thereby releasing electromagnetic noise. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game ball B can be retained and in the vicinity thereof.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is likely to accumulate, and the ball tank 552 which is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise as a result of the static electricity being easily accumulated. A third ground terminal (sphere tank ground) as a sphere tank ground is provided on the frame ground substrate 559 to the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4 in the vicinity of the unit 560. Terminal) and a fourth ground terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) as a main body frame metal ground through the first resistance and the second resistance, respectively, and gradually attenuate electromagnetic wave noise to attenuate high voltage instantaneously. The second earth terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as an island equipment ground via the island equipment ground wire. And so that it can lead to ground Le island equipment. In other words, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 or the dispensing unit 560 that is likely to accumulate static electricity is transmitted from the frame ground substrate 559 via the ball tank 552 or the metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 as a frame ground called a frame ground. By guiding to the ground of the island facility of the game hall, electromagnetic noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be removed by flowing to the ground of the island facility of the game hall. Thus, in this embodiment, the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a main body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500 to give rigidity.

  In addition, as described above, various decorative portions included in the door frame 3 may be provided with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity. The decorative portion to which the decorative plating is applied is electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3 and the door frame reinforcing unit via a wiring (not shown) or a metal conduction plate (not shown). Has been. For this reason, for example, when a player touches a decorative portion on which decorative plating is performed, static electricity charged to the player is discharged electrostatically and is transmitted as electromagnetic wave noise from the player to the door frame reinforcing unit via the decorative portion. In addition, staff members such as game hall clerk and those who have the setting keys described later (a limited person who can check the current setting value in addition to changing the setting value) When the lock unit 650 in the frame 4 is touched, as described above, the static electricity charged to the staff of the game hall clerk or the person holding the setting key described later is electrostatically discharged, and the staff of the game hall clerk as electromagnetic wave noise. Or, a person having a setting key, which will be described later, is transmitted to the door frame reinforcing unit via the locking unit 650.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, with respect to the door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3, the frame ground substrate 559 has a sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as the door frame metal ground. Through the second resistor, electromagnetic wave noise is gradually passed and attenuated to suppress high voltage instantaneous discharge, and from the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) as the island equipment ground via the island equipment ground wire. Can be led to the earth of the island facilities of the game hall. In other words, a decorative part plated with decoration, a player, an attendant such as a shop hall clerk, or a person who possesses a setting key to be described later (in addition to changing the setting value, checking the current setting value being set) Electromagnetic noise from a limited number of persons who can perform such operations as a frame ground called a frame ground is guided through the door frame reinforcement unit from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall. Personnel with decorations plated, players, shop hall clerk, etc., or those who have setting keys (to be described later) (in addition to changing setting values, checking current setting values that have been set, etc.) Electromagnetic noise from a limited number of people who can do this can be removed by flowing it to the earth of the island facility in the game hall.

[4-5. Detailed configuration at the top of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 40A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 41 is an enlarged view showing the upper part in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 42 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front top with the tank rail and the like assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 42 (b) is a perspective view seen from the bottom front. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 42 (a) as seen from the front. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 47 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 and the hinge rotates. A frame-like main body frame base 501 that can be attached and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped payout that is attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. A base 551, a ball tank 552 which is attached to the dispensing base 551 and extends upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and a groove which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward The tank rail 553 extending to the left in the shape of the tank, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail spaced from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the rail 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a tank rail A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551, and for paying out the game ball B to the player side; It is equipped with.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a quadrilateral shape in plan view that extends in the left-right direction, and is inclined from the bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in front view, and the front and rear sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape that is open on the upper side. Has been. The ball tank 552 stores a game ball B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f is approximately 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the end of the left wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right wall 552e side). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view and a downstream side extending to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. The main guiding portion 553a extends to the left after extending from the right end to the position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to the position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. .

  In the main rail 553a, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed. Is formed at a height that allows only one to be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  Further, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left-right direction at the bottom of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a in a front view (in the present embodiment, approximately Three rectangular cutout portions 553aa having a predetermined interval (in this embodiment, approximately 10 mm) are formed. Due to the rectangular cutout portion 553aa, the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a has a thickness of the rear wall (about 2.5 mm in this embodiment) from the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a to the front, about 7 mm, A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate on the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a is formed on the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a upward from the bottom surface (in the present embodiment). , About 2.5 mm), a rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a horizontal length of about 30 mm is formed, and these rectangular holes are formed to communicate with each other.

  The game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 fall off due to the metal powder being peeled off from the game balls B due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is attached to the main guiding portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is hindered, so that the game ball B is smoothly moved downstream. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B, and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a, and the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by naturally falling from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa, The metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. The metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a by the wear of the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a by inserting a cotton swab into the cutout portion 553aa by a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall. It is possible to remove the metal powder from the main guiding portion 553a by performing the work of removing the removed metal powder.

  The tank rail 553 extends above the main guiding portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that changes in width so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Yes. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is in a line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight gap between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature that is curved on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B that circulates in the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulge portion 553b that abuts. It will change to various directions, and generation | occurrence | production of a spherical bite can be suppressed in the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B that circulates in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clumps) to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. Since the direction in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed is dispersed is dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be made easy to escape, and it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging (ball balls) to occur.

  The tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material (polycarbonate resin or the like) so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clog) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gear, belt, etc. can be confirmed while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. It is possible to achieve the same effects as the effects.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side becomes the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side becomes higher. Extending from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side being low And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a side opposite the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j in between, are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a that can be connected to the electrical wiring from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), the upper surface being the overflow surface portion And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

  The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a flat plate shape from the position lower than the distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the entire length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m has a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the outer frame upper member 30 and the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are both higher in the left and right direction than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, and extend in a strip shape in the front-rear direction. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552 f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the bypass passage 552g and the left end of the bypass passage 552g coincide with each other in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, a container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and the passage surface 552h is inclined so that the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lowered. And a weir portion extending upward from the end opposite to the left side wall 552d on the passage surface 552h to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g has a left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank shape in the left-right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the rear end being slanted so that the distribution direction thereof is perpendicular to the slant rear end. The rear end of the bypass passage 552g that extends obliquely extends substantially parallel to the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends obliquely (the direction in which the game balls B flow in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is wide in the tank rail 553. Can receive a game ball B from Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B moves from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the rear end that extends obliquely allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball scum in the tank rail 553.

  Further, the part for guiding the game ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that lies under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening portion 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). (Height) is not exceeded. Accordingly, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearwardly can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill rearward from the tank rail 553.

  The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape that extends to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d inside the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in a front view of the front wall 552b extending from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position in the vicinity of about ½ of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, From there, it is formed in a shape extending in parallel with the rear wall 552c from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width.

  The spherical tank 552 includes a right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape described above in a plan view, and a straight line connecting the end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side of the right end side. The enclosed region has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. Further, the ball tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction and the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir 552i of the bypass passage 552g. Part 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges (the main body frame base 501) of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c. The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the upper step).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled with each other, the upstream end (the right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank shape in the left-right direction in a plan view and a portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of a portion extending obliquely of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge part 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 so as to be lowered stepwise from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553 and then rises to the left along the tank rail 553 (the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to the rear and then extends backward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is attached in a state where a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can hold the tip of the electric wiring by opening the holding portion by operating a lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

  Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged such that the overflow end portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lowered at the rear end side, as indicated by white arrows in FIG. The left step 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side is lowered in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the upper overflow edge 552f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper end edges. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the overflow surface portion 501m and discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 45). Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent further increase of the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball play) due to the engagement between the game balls B.

  Since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 46, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the backward pushing force from acting strongly on the game ball B in the ball tank 552 by the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the game balls B from pressing strongly in the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing the overflow portion 552f from the ball tank 552 and flowing into the overflow surface portion 501m is left on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and moves the ball It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed and bitten by the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the game balls B can be blocked. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end is provided at the bottom of the tank rail 553, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are in an aligned state, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided, so that the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a is increased. Since they are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) The plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction in FIG. 1 are circulated downstream through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  In addition, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be moved away from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a. The game ball B does not cause a problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of electrical wiring.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is stored in the ball tank 552. Even if it jumps at the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 45) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. However, as shown in FIG. 45, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g due to their inclination, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4 to cause a problem. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the game ball B circulates from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes through the lower side of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, the game ball is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

  In addition, the ball tank 552 is composed of an electric conductor (in this example, molded with conductive synthetic resin), whereas the tank rail 553 is insulated from a peripheral control board box of a peripheral control unit 1500 described later. It is comprised by the body (in this example, it shape | molds with a nonelectroconductive synthetic resin). In the present embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity, so that the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 falls from the notch 553aa. Are attached to the peripheral control board box having the same polarity as the tank rail 553. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B moves to the tank rail 553 without adhering to the ball tank 552, adheres to the tank rail 553, and stays in the tank rail 553, and further adheres to the tank rail 553. When the metal powder of the game sphere B falls from the notch 553aa, it adheres to the peripheral control board box having the same polarity as the tank rail 553 (for example, the upper surface of the peripheral board box).

[4-6. Metal powder countermeasure configuration]
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is an enlarged schematic diagram showing a part of a cross section cut along the line CC in FIG.

  As described above, the peripheral control unit in which the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the notch portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is disposed below the tank rail 553. If it adheres to 1500, an electrical trouble may occur, causing a malfunction in the peripheral control unit 1500 or causing a malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with an IC such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM described later, and the peripheral data ROM board described later is provided with an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. The pin spacing of these ICs is reduced, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is narrowed, and the distance between the various connectors is narrowed by increasing the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, since the distance between the connector and the special connector is also narrow, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 48, a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, it is shifted backward (in this embodiment, about one half of the diameter of the game ball B). Are displaced by a distance dimension of.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape that is bent a plurality of downwards. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 48, a first flange portion 551da extending rearward of the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the lower end portion of the top plate portion is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. . When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first flange 551da.

  Thereby, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. Yes. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa by the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is covered with the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa and entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is suppressed. The occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the sphere B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the contact portion with the first flange portion 551da so that the back cover 640 covers at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the state assembled to the main body frame 4. The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa and adheres to the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is removed from the top plate portion. When the metal powder falls from the first flange 551da of 551a, this metal powder is behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the base unit 1502, and from the first flange 551da of the top panel 551a. The metal powder of the game ball B is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 is suppressed. It can be done.

  As described above, the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 640 of the payout base 551 are made of the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a bag or cover that can be used. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first flange 551da is provided below the notch 553aa, not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened, the main hook 551aa is interposed via the notch 553aa. The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to the first flange portion 551da, and the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. When the metal powder falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and eventually the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a via the notch 553aa, the peripheral control unit The metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the peripheral control board 1510 while preventing entry into the 1500 cover body 1501. So that the generation of electrical trouble can be suppressed by.

  In the above-described example, the upper end portion of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first flange portion 551da when assembled to the main body frame 4, but the upper end portion of the back cover 640 and the first flange portion are in contact with each other. The portion 551da may be disposed apart from the portion 551da. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa through the cooperation of the back cover 640 and the first flange portion 551da enters the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The arrangement form of the back cover 640 and the first brim portion 551da is not limited as long as the entry is suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notches 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600 is displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in this embodiment, about 2 minutes of the diameter of the game ball B). 1 (by shifting the distance dimension of 1) (that is, the peripheral control unit 1500 is not disposed directly below the notch 553aa), the game ball B from the tank rail 553 It is effective in measures against metal powder that can prevent electrical troubles caused by metal powder.

  The plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, whereas the upper side, the left side, and the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). However, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the cover body 1501.

  Of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, one or a combination of them except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even if configured in this way, the foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, electrical troubles due to foreign matters falling on various substrates in the peripheral control substrate box 1505 can be prevented. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553 can be prevented. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is passed through the ventilation hole 1501az. When foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B falls and enters the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, the foreign matter caused by the fallen foreign substance on various boards This is because the probability of occurrence of trouble increases.

  Further, when the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the heat radiation function is compensated by increasing the number of ventilation holes 1501 provided on the other surface or increasing the area of the ventilation holes 1501. May be. Thereby, it can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505, and it can suppress that electrical troubles, such as thermal runaway, generate | occur | produce.

  Moreover, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 in the state attached to the pachinko machine 1 is in a substantially horizontal state. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa and adheres to the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the metal powder may be retained on the upper surface of the cover body 1501. it can. Thus, the metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from entering the cover body 1501. Note that a part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be inclined as long as the metal powder of the game ball B is not dropped toward the ventilation hole 1501az formed in the cover body 1501.

  Moreover, you may make it attach the 1st collar member 551a arrange | positioned under the tank rail 553 to the top-plate part 551a as another member (another structural component).

  In addition, when the upper part and the rear part of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are covered by the first flange part 551da of the top plate part 551a and / or the back cover 640, or the saddle-shaped main guide part 553a of the tank rail 553 When the plurality of cutout portions 553aa and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged to be shifted in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a are provided. If the probability that the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the main guiding portion 553a toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is low, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 Parts (for example, the corners of the cover body 1501 and most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 May the ventilation holes 1501az provided at equal) the ventilating hole 1501az is formed.

  The technical idea is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa and entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Compared to a conventional pachinko machine, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a corner portion of the cover body 1501 and most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 are closed, but the ventilation holes 1501az are not provided. The one provided with the ventilation holes 1501az in the case of being formed corresponds to this technical idea.

  The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 has a plurality of slit holes. In addition, the cover body 1501 has seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume control switch and seven connectors, which will be described later, provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 along the lower side. Volume adjustment holes are formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. In the state in which the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, gaps are formed between the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, respectively, and a gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed in the cover body 1501. The volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume adjustment hole. In addition, in a state where a liquid crystal output board (to be described later) is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board and two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed from these two connector holes.

  The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is a shield plate accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. 1540 az is formed through a plurality of ventilation holes 1540 az, and the above-described gaps (the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, the gaps formed, The volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the volume control hole formed in the cover body 1501, the gap formed in the liquid crystal output board, and the two connectors formed in the cover body 1501. Through the hole and the gap formed in the hole)

  Incidentally, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in air outside the peripheral control unit 1500, heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is affected by the air flow and moves toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. Various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 due to an electrical trouble (short circuit) due to the sucked metal powder. A malfunction (failure) will occur.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), a first ball portion 551da is formed along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, so that a game ball It can be configured to have a function as a bag for preventing heavy metal powder of B metal powder from being sucked into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 from a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, the same cutout portion, hole, or groove as the cutout portion 553aa may be formed in the ball path on which the game ball B rolls. Specifically, in the ball guide unit 570 having one guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, as shown in FIG. 33, the metal of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a. A notch, hole, or groove that can remove powder from the guide passage 570a to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33, a payout device 580, a substrate unit 620, and the like are disposed below the ball guiding unit 570. The payout device 580 includes a substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The board unit 620 includes the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. 34, on which various boards are arranged. Therefore, when a notch, hole, or groove is formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the B metal powder from adhering to various substrates disposed below the induction unit 570. Therefore, a hook-like member can be formed to protrude rearward along the upper side of the payout device rear cover 582 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 27, or formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves to be formed and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the dispensing device 580 is mounted can be configured to be shifted. It can also be configured. Also, the hook-shaped member is moved backward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. The position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be formed. It is possible to configure by shifting the positions of these, or by adopting both.

  Next, another configuration of the present invention in which an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B can be avoided (hereinafter referred to as “the metal powder countermeasure according to the second to fifth embodiments”). Will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. FIG. 49 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. 49 to FIG. 51, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 48 (hereinafter referred to as “the configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only a portion of the game board 5 necessary for explanation is represented as a cross-sectional view.

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (as described above) The pachinko machine 1 is formed in a stepped shape that is bent a plurality of downwards in accordance with the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear) and the lower end portion of the top plate portion 551a is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. A first flange portion 551da extending rearward is configured.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is the front of the top plate portion 551a. A plurality of downwardly bent steps are formed from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), and the lower end of the top plate portion 551a is extended to the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Although constituting the first flange portion 551da, the first flange portion 551da is not extended so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553, but to the effort (in front of the pachinko machine 1) (see FIG. 48). In the example shown, only the notch portion 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is provided.

  On the other hand, the upper end portion of the back cover 640 is bent toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (in the direction of the game board 5) when assembled to the main body frame 4, and is formed in a bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. A second collar part 640a is provided extending directly below the notch part 553aa, and the second collar part 640a is in contact with the first collar part 551da of the top plate part 551a. Further, the rear end surface of the back cover 640 is arranged further to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 than the rear surface of the tank rail 553.

  Thus, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the first collar portion 551da is configured to constitute the collar portion alone, whereas the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment is configured. The configuration is different in that the first collar portion 551da and the second collar portion 640a are connected to form a collar portion together.

  In addition, if the 1st collar part 551da and the 2nd collar part 640a connect and it comprises a collar part together, the length of the 1st collar part 551da and the 2nd collar part 640a, ie, a collar part, is set. The ratio of each occupying and the position at which the first collar portion 551da and the second collar portion 640a abut are not limited to those described above. For example, the first flange portion 640a is extended to the vicinity of the front surface of the tank rail 553, and the second flange portion 640a is extended to the vicinity of the front surface of the tank rail 553 to be brought into contact with the first flange portion 640a (the tank rail 553). The metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa and received by the second flange portion 640a. May be.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, the same effects as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a at the first flange 551da disposed below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached, or it can be received and attached at the second flange 640 a of the back cover 640. Further, since the rear surface of the back cover 640 is extended so as to cover at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the assembled state in the main body frame 4, the main surface is notched through the notch 553aa. The metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the guiding portion 553a to the outside and adhered to the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a or the second flange portion 640a of the back cover 640, When falling from the second flange 640a of the back cover 640, this metal powder is behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (after the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the side) is prevented from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and thus the notch 5. The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through 3aa is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B is applied to the peripheral control board 1510. The occurrence of electrical trouble due to adhesion can be suppressed.

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (as described above) The pachinko machine 1 is formed in a stepped shape that is bent a plurality of downwards in accordance with the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear) and the lower end portion of the top plate portion 551a is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. A first flange portion 551da extending rearward is configured, and a back cover 640 is provided behind the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 without the top plate portion 551a.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as shown in FIG. The back plate upper portion 551d is configured such that the rear end portion of the top plate portion 551a is bent downward and extends. The lower end portion of the back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the upper end portion of the back cover 640. Note that the length of the upper portion 551d of the back plate is not limited to the example shown in FIG. As shown in the drawing, the peripheral control unit 1500 may be extended to the upper side without extending to the position covering the back of the cover body 1501.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the back cover 640 alone covers at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, whereas In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the back plate upper part 551d and the back cover 640 are coupled to cover at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 together. Is different.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, the same effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a at the first flange 551da disposed below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached, or it can be received and attached at the second flange 640 a of the back cover 640. Further, since the back plate upper part 551d and the rear surface of the back cover 640 are connected to each other so as to cover at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the assembled state in the main body frame 4. The metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa and adhered to the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the second flange portion 640a of the back cover 640 is This metal powder is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) when it falls from the first flange part 551da of the part 551a or the second flange part 640a of the back cover 640. It is suppressed that it falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the displayed effect display device 1600) In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal of the game ball B is suppressed. The occurrence of electrical trouble due to the powder adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (as described above) The pachinko machine 1 is formed in a stepped shape that is bent a plurality of downwards in accordance with the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear) and the lower end portion of the top plate portion 551a is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. A first flange portion 551da extending rearward is configured.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is formed on the top plate portion 551a. It is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a and has a predetermined distance dimension from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a to the lower side (in this embodiment, a distance dimension that is approximately one half of the diameter of the game ball B). ). That is, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to protrude downward as compared with the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a.

  In addition, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper side of the back cover 640 is greatly bent forward and formed. The front surface is disposed in parallel with the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and abuts in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a disposed so as to protrude downward compared to the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. It is in a state. Further, a portion where the front surface of the second flange portion 640a and the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a are in contact with each other is arranged so as to be largely displaced forward from the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

  Thus, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the first collar portion 551da is configured to constitute the collar portion alone, whereas the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment is configured. The configuration is different in that the first flange portion 551da is not provided and the second flange portion 640a is configured to constitute the flange portion alone.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the same effects as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is the upper side of the back cover 640 disposed below the tank rail 553. The side can be received and attached to the upper surface of the second flange portion 640a formed by being largely bent toward the front. Further, since the rear surface of the back cover 640 is extended so as to cover at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the assembled state in the main body frame 4, the main surface is notched through the notch 553aa. When the metal powder of the game ball B that falls from the guide portion 553a to the outside and adheres to the second heel portion 640a of the back cover 640 falls from the second heel portion 640a of the back cover 640, the metal powder falls on the game board 5 Falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa By suppressing the entering into the cover body 1501 of control unit 1500, the metal powder of the game ball B is adapted to the generation of electrical trouble by adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the first flange portion 551da is configured by the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of the members attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 such as the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, or the members attached to the main body frame base unit 500 You may make it comprise 1st collar part 551da by either of them.

[4-7-1. Confirmation of dust when game board is attached / detached 1]
As described above in part, conventionally, foreign particles such as metal powder and dust can be smoothly dropped from the discharge hole 553aa provided in the tank rail, so that the game ball can flow smoothly on the tank rail, but it has been dropped. Due to the foreign matter adhering to the control board or the like disposed below, there is a problem that a trouble occurs in the gaming parts, causing a malfunction in the gaming machine or malfunctioning. Specifically, the metal powder generated by the game ball flowing down on the tank rail falls from the discharge hole 553aa of the tank rail and adheres to a predetermined part (connector part or the like) of the control board disposed below. Thus, an electrical trouble may occur in the control board, which may hinder the progress of the game in the gaming machine. In addition, there is a problem that foreign matter falls downward from the discharge hole 553aa of the tank rail that is not a replacement target due to vibrations or the like that occur in the work of exchanging to a new game board (removal of the game board etc.), for example, If foreign matter in the tank rail falls downward due to vibration generated when the game board is attached, there is a possibility that the operation of the game machine on the new game board may be hindered. In order to cope with such a problem, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game board 5 is attached and detached, the presence state of foreign matters such as metal powder and dust of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 (on the lower surface of the tank rail 553) It is possible to easily confirm the accumulation state of foreign matters and the adhesion state of foreign matters on the side surface of the tank rail 553, and to cope with the problem (removal of foreign matters, etc.) before a failure occurs. This example will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, 35, 19 to 22, 35, and 52 to 56 in addition to the above-described drawings. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure with the game board 5 of this example removed, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example attached. FIG. 54 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example removed, and FIG. 55A shows the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example removed as viewed from the lower right front. 56A is a perspective view of the tank rail 553 that hangs down in the opening (opening top) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4. It is the figure which showed the location where the upper decoration part X of the door frame 3 is located corresponding to the location with the hatched portion, and FIG. 56 (B) is a diagram schematically showing a side view of the pachinko machine 1 viewed from the left side. It is.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached to the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 are provided with permeable parts. Specifically, the entire payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin (colorless and transparent synthetic resin in this embodiment), and the entire payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 are transmitted. ing. Also, a ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 and having a single guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner is transparent as a whole. It is made of a synthetic resin (a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in the present embodiment), and is configured so that the entire guide passage 570a (or a part thereof) may pass therethrough. Further, the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the entire ball tank 552 that are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 are made of an opaque synthetic resin (in this embodiment, black). Synthetic resin), and these are configured not to transmit.

  Further, in the tank rail 553 of this example, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the payout base 551, a portion that overlaps with the payout base 551 in the front-rear direction from the side where the payout base 551 is located (the front side of the pachinko machine 1). (A part that is directly supported) and a part that does not overlap the dispensing base 551 in the front-rear direction from the side where the dispensing base 551 is located (the front side of the pachinko machine 1) (not directly supported and hollow) (Refer to FIG. 54). In this example, these parts of the tank rail 553 are made visible through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 formed with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side. The presence of metal powder and dust in the tank rail 553 can be confirmed, and it is possible to prevent the game operation from being hindered after replacement with the new game board 5.

  In the following, the metal powder in the tank rail 553 is looked up by looking up from above the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side. The details of the confirmation of the presence of foreign matter such as dust and the like will be described.

  As described above, FIG. 53 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example attached thereto, and FIG. 54 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example removed. is there. In FIG. 55 (A), as is clear from FIG. 53, an opening of the game board mounting portion 301 formed with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is formed. The tank rail 553 is arranged so that at least a part of the tank rail 553 is positioned in the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. That is, in this example, the tank rail 553 is arranged so that the tank rail 553 hangs down and faces the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. However, if the entire tank rail 553 faces the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the area of the tank rail 553 that can be visually recognized through the opening increases, and a person who confirms even a place unnecessary for confirming the presence of foreign matter is confirmed. In this example, in view of speeding up the confirmation of the presence of foreign matter, in this example, the presence of foreign matter in the tank rail 553 is emphasized rather than the entire tank rail 553. Only the specific parts that need to be confirmed (in this example, the bottom surface and the side surface of the tank rail 553 in the vicinity of the part where the discharge hole 553aa for dropping the foreign material is formed) of the game board mounting portion 301 are viewed in front view. It is arranged so as to hang down from the top of the opening.

  54 and 55A, the right side portion of the tank rail 553 that hangs down and faces the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 is a portion that does not overlap with the above-described payout base 551 in the front-rear direction. When the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed in front view, the tank rail 553 formed of a transparent synthetic resin is directly seen. It can be visually recognized, and the inner surface side (the bottom surface and the inside of the side surface) of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. Further, the left side portion is a portion where the tank rail 553 and the payout base 551 described above overlap in the front-rear direction (a portion that is directly supported), and when viewing the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view, The tank rail 553 formed of the transparent synthetic resin can be visually recognized through the dispensing base 551 formed of the transparent synthetic resin, and the inner surface side (the bottom surface and the inner side of the side surface) of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. ing. In this way, in this example, not only the tank rail 553 but also the portion where the tank rail 553 is attached is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the region for checking the presence of foreign matter in the tank rail 553 is not limited. I have to.

  Further, in this example, in the state in which the game board 5 is attached as shown in FIG. 53, the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 is completely closed in consideration of the decorativeness, so that the tank from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 It is impossible to check the presence of foreign matter in the rail 553. However, by forming a transparent synthetic resin on the entire payout base 551 and tank rail 553, the main body frame 4 can be attached from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 even when the game board 5 is attached. It is possible to check the presence of foreign matter in the tank rail 553 from the side when the door is opened and closed forward about the left side when viewed from the front.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the upper side in the vertical direction of the tank rail 553), the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g of the game board is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, so when looking up above the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the second rail cover 555 located on the back of the tank rail 553, and the first rail The cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the bypass passage 552g are visible through the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 formed of a transparent resin. In this way, the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the bypass passage 552g are located at the position where the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is visible at the back of the tank rail 553. By looking up at the upper inside, the presence of foreign matter accumulated in the tank rail 553 becomes clear by a member formed of opaque resin, and the presence of foreign matter can be easily confirmed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 and removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game operation from being hindered after replacement with the new game board 5.

  In the above example, the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 are entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin. However, as long as the inside of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed, other forms may be used. Good. For example, while the payout base 551 is formed of an opaque resin, the entire tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent resin, and an opening is provided in a part of the payout base 551 formed of an opaque resin, and the tank is passed through the opening. It is good also as a structure which enables confirmation of the inside of the rail 553. FIG.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the sphere tank 552 is formed of a transparent resin as described above, but in this example, the sphere tank 552 is further configured by “electrical conductor having conductivity”. Has been. Specifically, in this example, the entire ball tank 552 is molded from a synthetic resin having conductivity. On the other hand, the tank rail 553 formed of a transparent resin is formed of an insulator having no conductivity (in this example, it is molded of a non-conductive synthetic resin). In addition, the ball tank 552 is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559, and the electromagnetic noise that has entered the ball tank 552 is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall to be removed. Thereby, the static electricity of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is removed (the charge is eliminated), and foreign particles such as metal powder adhered to the game ball B can be dropped, and the metal powder dropped from the game ball B Therefore, foreign matter such as metal powder can be moved from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 as the game ball B flows down.

  Further, as described above, the tank rail 553 has a plurality of cutout portions 553aa so that foreign matters such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B can be dropped to the outside. However, since the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator, foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B adheres to the tank rail 553 and stays in the tank rail 553. As described above, since the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator, foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B can be attached to the tank rail 553, and the metal powder and dust can be retained as described above. In addition to facilitating the confirmation of the presence status of the game object, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the game ball B falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and eventually falls from the game ball B. The foreign matter such as the metal powder is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the electric trouble caused by the foreign matter such as the metal powder falling from the game ball B adheres to the peripheral control board 1510. Can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to the tank rail 553, the flange (the first flange 551da and / or the second flange 640a) and the back cover 640 provided below the tank rail 553 are also insulators ( Polycarbonate resin or the like). That is, when the tank rail 553, the collar part (the first collar part 551da and / or the second collar part 640a) and the back cover 640 are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, when foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B falls from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, the collar portion having the same polarity as the tank rail 553 (the first collar portion 551da and / or the second collar portion). 640a) and the back cover 640 are attached with foreign matter such as metal powder by electrostatic force.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulating material (in this example, it is molded from a non-conductive synthetic resin), so that it falls from the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553. In addition to the fact that foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the tank rail 553 by electrostatic force, the foreign matter such as metal powder attached to the tank rail 553 falls from the notch 553aa. Even if there is a foreign object such as a metal powder that has fallen, it is made of an insulator (in this example, it is molded with a non-conductive synthetic resin), and the first collar part 551da and / or the second collar part 640a And can be attached to the upper surface of the back cover 640 or the like by electrostatic force, and foreign matter can be prevented from being scattered outside. Thereby, in addition to facilitating the confirmation of the presence of the metal powder and dust described above, foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to prevent the foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the game ball B from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder dropped from the game ball B. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the foreign matter such as adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator (in this example, it is molded with a non-conductive resin). As another example, a transparent insulating sheet is provided inside the tank rail 553. Further, foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 may be attached to the tank rail 553 by electrostatic force and fastened.

  In the above example, the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the bypass passage 552g in the ball tank 552 are formed of an opaque resin. The second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, and the ball rectifying member 556 formed of an opaque resin through the tank rail 553 formed of a transparent resin are shown. At least one of the members visually recognized through the tank rail 553 formed of a transparent resin is formed of an opaque resin or metal, an opaque seal is attached to the surface, or a paint is applied. The back portion of the lever may be difficult to visually recognize (including those that are unclear). That is, most of the foreign materials such as metal powder and dust accumulate on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, so when checking the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, An opaque resin or the like that is visible through the transparent bottom surface of the tank rail 553, such as the outside of the left side wall portion of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 52 (the side wall portion on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the tank rail 553) in FIG. A member formed of metal or the like may be provided. In FIG. 52, the left side wall portion of the tank rail 553 (the side wall portion on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the tank rail 553) itself is made of an opaque resin or metal. You may comprise as another member, such as.

  Moreover, when providing the above-mentioned collar part (1st collar part 551da and / or 2nd collar part 640a) under the tank rail 553, these collar parts (1st collar part 551da and / or 2nd collar part 640a). ) May be formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Thereby, when the game board 5 is removed, the metal powder and dust in the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized through the collar part (first collar part 551da and / or second collar part 640a) formed of a transparent synthetic resin. become. Further, the entire back cover 640 may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin, or only a part of the back cover 640 including the portion constituting the second flange portion 640a may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin. May be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 53, the game board 5 can be removed from the front side of the main body frame 4 with the back cover 640 closed. is there. 52 and 54, in the state where the game board 5 is detached from the main body frame 4, the first saddle portion 551da is constituted by a member attached to the main body frame base unit 500. Even in the removed state, the hook (the first hook 551da in the example shown in FIG. 52, but in the other embodiments described above, the second hook 640a or the first hook 551da and the second hook 640a correspond) is the tank. Since it remains below the rail 553, the metal powder and dust falling from inside the tank rail 553 are received by the hook part (first hook part 551da and / or second hook part 640a) and used in a gaming device such as a connector located below. It is possible to suppress the falling and adhering and prevent the game operation from being hindered after replacement with a new game board 5.

  Further, when the tank rail 553 is confirmed through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side as shown in FIG. In the tank rail 553 formed of the metal powder and dust adhering to the flange (the first flange 551da and / or the second flange 640a) formed of the transparent synthetic resin and the transparent synthetic resin Since both the metal powder and the dust can be visually recognized, the presence of the metal powder and the dust can be collectively confirmed. Further, it is formed of an opaque synthetic resin through a collar part (first collar part 551da and / or second collar part 640a) formed of a transparent synthetic resin and a tank rail 553 formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Members such as the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, and the ball rectifying member 556 can be visually recognized. Therefore, the second rail cover 555 formed of an opaque synthetic resin, and the first rail cover 554 and the ball rectifying member 556, metal powder and dust adhering to the collar (first collar 551da and / or second collar 640a), and metal powder and dust accumulated in the tank rail 553 It becomes clear that the presence of metal powder and dust can be easily confirmed, and that there is no problem in game operation after replacement with a new game board 5. It can be prevented.

  The tank rail 553 formed of transparent synthetic resin and the member formed of opaque synthetic resin are the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 detachably attached from the front side. It is sufficient that the tank rail 553 is at least partially overlapped with the tank rail 553 to be visible when the tank rail 553 is confirmed through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301. It changes depending on the person who confirms the presence of metal powder and dust, such as a store clerk. That is, when a store clerk pierces his head into the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 and looks up directly from the position directly below the tank rail 553, the first position provided above the tank rail 553 is provided. When the two rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, and the ball rectifying member 556 overlap with the tank rail 553, and the tank rail 553 is looked up from the outside of the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the tank rail 553 A member provided at an upper portion of the rear side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1) or the rear side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1) is a member overlapping the tank rail 553. Thus, a person who confirms the presence of metal powder and dust can visually recognize the opaque member overlapping the tank rail 553 by appropriately changing the peeping position, thereby clearly showing the presence of the metal powder and dust. This makes it easy to check the presence of metal powder and dust.

  Further, as described above, when the game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed, when looking up above the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the first rail located at the back of the tank rail 553 The cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are visible through the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 formed of a transparent resin. 45, each of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 is formed with a locking portion 555a having a locking hole, and the tank rail 553. By attaching a locking projection 553c formed on the outside of the side wall portion into a locking hole formed in the locking portion 555a, it is detachably attached to the tank rail 553.

  Then, when the game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 is removed, the upper side of the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is looked up, and the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 formed of a transparent resin are displayed. Through the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, the locking portions 555a (all the locking portions 555a can be visually recognized), Some locking portions 555a of the locking portions 555a may be visible) and locking projections 553c formed on the tank rail 553 (all locking projections 553c may be visible) Some locking protrusions 553c of the locking protrusions 553c may be visible). Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 formed with the game board 5 removed. Thus, it is possible to confirm the locking state between the locking portion 555a and the locking projection 553c, and to prevent an abnormality from occurring in the spherical flow path in the tank rail 553.

  When the game ball B is present in the tank rail 553, the rearward view of the game ball B is hindered, but a locking projection 553c is formed on the outside of the side wall portion of the tank rail 553, and the first The rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553 in a state in which the respective locking portions 555a sandwich the passage of the tank rail 553. In other words, in a state where the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553, the viewing is not hindered by the game ball B located in the tank rail 553. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are provided with at least a part of a locking part 555a and at least a part of a locking protrusion 553c formed on the tank rail 553. Yes. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to the tank rail 553 in a state where the tank rail 553 is attached. The locking part 555a (all or part of the locking part 555a provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to the tank rail 553) and the outer side wall part of the tank rail 553 on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided. The locking protrusions 553c (all or a part of the locking protrusions 553c provided on the outside of the side wall portion of the front side of the pachinko machine 1 in the tank rail 553 may be a part) are the game balls B located in the tank rail 553 The visual recognition is not hindered.

  Further, when the game ball B does not exist in the tank rail 553, the inner side (the lower surface in the vertical direction) of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 is transparent. It is possible to see through the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 formed of a simple resin, and the inner side surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 Surface) can be checked for adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder and dust. Thereby, the state of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 can be easily confirmed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 and removed when the game board 5 is replaced with a new game board 5 or the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of abnormality in the spherical flow path in the tank rail 553.

  Further, as described above, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the tank rail 553 is arranged so as to hang down in the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting part 301 in a front view. Then, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 under conditions other than the presence confirmation of the presence of metal powder and dust, the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized in the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301. For this reason, if there is an opportunity to display only the main body frame 4 before the game board 5 is changed or when the model is announced, the pachinko machine 1 may lose its decorative properties. In order to avoid this, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the tank rail 553 is arranged so as to hang down in the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. Alternatively, the door frame 3 may be configured so as to cover a portion where the tank rail 553 hangs down.

  Specifically, the upper decoration part X is provided on the upper part of the door frame upper unit 200 provided on the front surface of the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, for example, on the upper part of the glass window of the door frame 3, By providing the front end side of the upper decorative portion X so as to hang down from the rear end side of the upper decorative portion X, the hanging portion on the front end side of the upper decorative portion X is in the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 in front view. For example, it is possible to cover all or part of the region where the tank rail 553 hangs down (opening top). FIG. 56 (A) corresponds to the location where the tank rail 553 hangs down in the opening (opening top) of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4. It is the figure which showed the location where the upper decoration part X of the door frame 3 is located by the shaded part. Thereby, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 under conditions other than confirmation of the presence of metal powder and dust, the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed in front view by closing the door frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be made decorative on the occasion that only the main body frame 4 is displayed before the game board 5 is changed or when the model is announced, etc. It can be suppressed from being lost.

  Further, the upper decoration portion X is provided so that the hanging portion on the front end side protrudes into the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, in other words, into the opening of the game window 201, but as shown in FIG. The rear end side of X is provided so that the lower end portion is located outside the game window 201 and has a predetermined width dimension in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, and is equal to the width dimension on the rear end side of the upper decoration portion X. Since the front end side of the upper decoration part X is suspended at a position away from the game window 201 to the front of the pachinko machine 1, the game board 5 is attached to the game board attachment part 301 and is played as the original pachinko machine 1. When the player sits on the game window 201, the player who faces the game window 201 can visually recognize the entire game area 5 a of the game board 5 from between the upper decoration portion X and the game window 201. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board attachment portion 301 and played as the original pachinko machine 1, the game of the upper decoration portion X of the player facing directly in a state of being seated on the game window 201 by the hanging portion on the front end side. A pachinko machine in which all or part of the tank rail 553 is covered with a hanging portion on the front end side of the upper decoration part X when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 without disturbing the visual recognition of the game area 5a of the board 5. Loss of the decorativeness of 1 can be suppressed.

[4-7-2. Dust confirmation when removing / installing game board 2]
In the above example, the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the presence of metal powder and dust in the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. A configuration in which the presence of metal powder or dust that falls from the tank rail 553 and adheres to the upper surface of the collar part (first collar part 551da and / or second collar part 640a) can be confirmed with emphasis not on the inside of the tank 553. Is illustrated.

  That is, in this example, the tank rail 553 shown in FIGS. 52, 54, and 55B is formed of an opaque synthetic resin (black resin in this example), while the collar (see FIG. In the example shown, the first collar 551da, but in the other embodiments described above, the second collar 640a or the first collar 551da and the second collar 640a) is made of a transparent synthetic resin. . In addition, the back cover 640 may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin in all parts, or only a part of the part including the part constituting the second flange part 640a of the back cover 640 is transparent. It may be formed of a synthetic resin. Further, when making the tank rail 553 opaque, the tank rail 553 is not limited to being made of an opaque synthetic resin, and the tank rail 553 is made of an opaque metal or the like, or the tank rail 553 has an opaque surface or inner surface. Other configurations may be adopted as long as they are made non-permeable (including those made to be unclear) by attaching an appropriate seal or applying a paint.

  And in this example, the collar part (in the example shown in FIG. 52, the first collar part 551da, but in the other embodiments described above, the second collar part 640a or the first collar part 551da and the second collar part 640a correspond). The part located below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 can be seen through the opening of the game board mounting part 301 formed with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the presence of metal powder and dust that has dropped and adhered to the heel portion (first heel portion 551da and / or second heel portion 640a) from the tank rail 553, and the new gaming board 5 It is possible to prevent troubles in game operation after the replacement.

  Hereinafter, by looking up from above the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, The details of confirming the presence of foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that have dropped and adhered to the first flange 551da and / or the second flange 640a) will be described.

  FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the main body frame with the game board of another example removed as viewed from the lower right front. As described above, in this example, the tank rail 553 is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, and is arranged so as to hang down in the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. Further, the payout base 551 to which the tank rail 553 is attached is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a part of the payout base 551 constituting the first flange portion 551da is formed in a front view in the same manner as the tank rail 553. It arrange | positions so that it may hang down in the opening (opening upper part) of the attachment part 301, and may face.

  The tank rail 553 has a plurality of notches 553aa, and the metal powder and dust in the tank rail 553 are made of a transparent synthetic resin provided below the tank rail 553. It is made to fall to the first hook part 551da. When the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is visually recognized in front view, the upper surface of the payout base 551 formed of a transparent synthetic resin can be visually recognized, and below the notch portion 553aa of the first flange portion 551da. It is possible to confirm the presence of metal powder or dust adhering to the part.

  Further, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is visually recognized in front view, the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized through the payout base 551 formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Since the tank rail 553 is made of an opaque synthetic resin, when looking up above the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the tank rail 553 formed of an opaque synthetic resin located behind the payout base 551. By virtue of this, the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the first flange 551da becomes clear, it becomes easy to check the presence of foreign matter, and troubles in game operation occur after replacement with a new game board 5 Can be prevented.

  In the above-described example, all of the tank rail 553 is formed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the back portion (including a portion in which the tank rail 553 is unclear), but is not limited thereto, and at least the first flange portion 551da located below the first flange portion 551da. It is difficult to see the back part by forming the part facing the surface with opaque synthetic resin or metal, pasting an opaque seal on the surface of the part facing the first flange 551da, or applying paint. What is necessary is just to make it (including what makes it an unclear state). For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 and the left side wall portion of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 52 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) are formed of an opaque synthetic resin, metal, etc. An opaque seal is applied to the bottom surface of the rail 553 or the left side wall portion of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. 52 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) or the like. Therefore, it may be made difficult to visually recognize the back portion (including those that make the back portion unclear).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 53, the game board 5 can be removed from the front side of the main body frame 4 while the back cover 640 is closed. is there. Further, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. 52 and 54, the first saddle portion 551da remains below the tank rail 553, so that metal powder and dust falling from the tank rail 553 can be removed. It is possible to prevent the first saddle portion 551da from catching and adhering to a gaming device such as a connector located below, and to prevent the game operation from being hindered after replacement with a new gaming board 5.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the sphere tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are formed of an opaque resin as described above. It is comprised by the electric conductor which has.

  Specifically, in this example, the entire ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are molded from a resin having conductivity. Further, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559, and the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall and removed. It has come to be. As a result, in addition to facilitating confirmation of the presence of the metal powder and dust as described above, the static electricity of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 is removed (discharged), and the game ball B Since foreign matter such as metal powder adhered to the ball can be dropped from the game ball B, and foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B is difficult to adhere to the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, the ball As the game ball B flows down from the tank 552 to the tank rail 553, foreign objects such as metal powder move, and foreign particles such as metal powder in the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are actively dropped from the notch 553aa. Can do.

  On the other hand, in this example, the collar part (first collar part 551da and / or second collar part 640a) and the back cover 640 provided below the tank rail 553 are configured by an insulator made of a transparent synthetic resin. As a result, in addition to facilitating the confirmation of the presence of the metal powder and dust, foreign matter such as metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is caused by electrostatic force. It can be attached to the upper surface of the first cover 551da and / or the second cover 640a, the back cover 640, and the like, and foreign matter can be prevented from being scattered outside.

  That is, foreign matter such as metal powder of the game ball B is positively removed from the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, while foreign matter such as metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. The foreign body such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B is covered with the cover body of the peripheral control unit 1500 in order to adhere and fasten the hook part (first hook part 551da and / or second hook part 640a) or the upper surface of the back cover 640. 1501 and the base body 1502 are prevented from falling, and foreign matters such as metal powder enter the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and eventually foreign matters such as metal powder adhere to the peripheral control board 1510. The occurrence of electrical troubles can be suppressed.

  In the above example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are molded from a synthetic resin having conductivity. Metal, conductive rubber or the like may be used. When metal is used for a part or all of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be neutralized in a very short time. On the other hand, when a synthetic resin or conductive rubber having conductivity is used for a part or all of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, a longer period is required than when a metal is used. The tank rail 553 is gradually discharged. In this way, when a synthetic resin or conductive rubber having conductivity is used for part or all of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be gradually neutralized. Therefore, it is difficult for electric discharge to occur, and it is possible to prevent the electronic components mounted on various substrates from being affected.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the tank rail 553 has a notch 553aa, whereas the ball tank 552 has no notch. Although details will be described later, a substrate accommodated in the substrate case is disposed below the tank rail 553 in which the notch 553aa is formed, and a vent hole is not formed on the upper surface of the substrate case. It is like that. On the other hand, not only the substrate accommodated in the substrate case but also the substrate not accommodated in the substrate case is arranged below the ball tank 552 in which the notch is not formed. In other words, the substrate that is not accommodated in the substrate case is disposed below the ball tank 552 in which the notch is not formed, so that the metal powder of the game ball B drops and adheres to the substrate, and consequently the substrate. The occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the substrate not accommodated in the case can be suppressed. Note that the substrate case that accommodates the substrate disposed below the ball tank 552 in which the notch is not formed may have a vent hole formed on the upper surface of the substrate case. The air holes may not be formed on the upper surface of the glass.

  Further, in this example, a hook part (first hook part 551da and / or second hook part 640a) and a back cover 640 are provided below the ball tank 552 in which notches are not formed, and are accommodated in the substrate case. The non-substrate is disposed in a space formed by the collar part (first collar part 551da and / or second collar part 640a) and the back cover 640. Therefore, even if a small amount of metal powder falls from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the lower side of the ball tank 552, the flange portion (the first flange portion 551da and / or the first flange portion) formed of an insulator is used. Since it can be attached and fastened to the second base part 640a) and the back cover 640, the metal powder of the game ball B is prevented from adhering to the substrate that is not accommodated in the substrate case, thereby suppressing the occurrence of electrical trouble. it can.

  Also, a base (first base 551da and / or second base 640a) and a back cover 640 are provided below the tank rail 553 where the notch part 553aa is formed, and the substrate accommodated in the base case. Is disposed in the space formed by the collar part (first collar part 551da and / or second collar part 640a) and the back cover 640. And since the metal powder falling from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 remains attached to the flange portion (first flange portion 551da and / or second flange portion 640a) made of an insulator and the back cover 640, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B entering the board case and eventually the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition, since a vent hole is not formed on the upper surface of the substrate case that accommodates the substrate disposed below the tank rail 553 in which the cutout portion 553aa is formed, the game ball that has temporarily dropped from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 The metal powder of B falls below the collar (first collar 551da and / or second collar 640a) without adhering to the collar (first collar 551da and / or second collar 640a). However, the metal powder of the game ball B can be received on the upper surface of the substrate case, and adhesion to the substrate can be suppressed. Note that the substrate case that accommodates the substrate disposed below the tank rail 553 in which the notch 553aa is formed may be formed of an insulator. In this case, the metal powder of the game ball B is placed on the substrate case. Can be attached to the upper surface of the board case, so that the entry of the metal powder of the game ball B into the board case is suppressed, and electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the board can be prevented. Can be suppressed.

  In this way, the tank rail 553 is configured to positively drop the metal powder of the game ball B from the notch 553aa, and the substrate below the tank rail 553 is arranged in a state of being accommodated in the substrate case, Further, the upper and rear sides (the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) of the board case are covered with a collar part (first collar part 551da and / or second collar part 640a) made of an insulator and a back cover 640, so that the game ball B It is possible to prevent the metal powder from entering the board case of the board disposed below the tank rail 553, and the game powder B is electrically connected to the board. Occurrence of troubles can be suppressed.

  In the above-described example, the third embodiment shown in FIG. 50 has been described. However, similar to the third embodiment, the first embodiment in which the collar portion is configured only by the first collar portion 551da has the same operations and effects. . The same effect can be obtained in the second embodiment in which the collar portion is configured by the first collar portion 551da and the second collar portion 640a, and in the fourth embodiment in which the collar portion is configured by only the second collar portion 640. .

  Specifically, in the second embodiment in which the collar portion is composed of the first collar portion 551da and the second collar portion 640a, the collar portion is composed of the first collar portion 551da and the second collar portion 640a as shown in FIG. Constitute. In this example, the payout base 551 constituting the first collar 551da and the back cover 640 constituting the second collar 640a are formed of a transparent synthetic resin. In addition, the first brim portion 551da and the second flange portion made of a transparent synthetic resin provided below the tank rail 553 from the notch portion 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 to the metal powder and dust in the tank rail 553. It is made to fall on the collar part comprised with the collar part 640a.

  When the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is visually recognized in a front view, the upper surface of the heel portion composed of the first heel portion 551da and the second heel portion 640a formed of a transparent synthetic resin is visible. In addition, it is possible to check the presence state of metal powder, dust, and the like attached to a portion below the cutout portion 553aa of the first flange portion 551da and the second flange portion 640a.

  Further, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 is passed through the payout base 551 formed of a transparent synthetic resin or the back cover 640 formed of a transparent synthetic resin. It can be visually recognized. Since the tank rail 553 is made of an opaque synthetic resin, when looking up above the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the tank rail 553 is made of an opaque synthetic resin located behind the payout base 551 and the back cover 640. The presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surface of the first collar 551da and the second collar 640a becomes clear by the tank rail 553, making it easy to check the presence of foreign matter and the new game board 5 It is possible to prevent the game operation from being hindered after the replacement.

  In the above-described example, all of the tank rail 553 is formed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the back portion (including a portion in which the tank rail 553 is unclear), but is not limited thereto, and at least the first flange portion 551da located below the first flange portion 551da. And / or a part facing the second collar part 640a is formed of an opaque synthetic resin or metal, or an opaque seal is pasted on the surface of the part facing the first collar part 551da and / or the second collar part 640a. What is necessary is just to make it difficult to visually recognize the back part (including what makes it unclear) by putting on or applying paint. For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 and the left side wall portion of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 49 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) are formed of an opaque synthetic resin, metal, etc. An opaque seal is applied to the bottom surface of the rail 553 or the surface of the left side wall portion of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. 49 (the side wall portion on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the tank rail 553) or paint is applied. Therefore, it may be made difficult to visually recognize the back portion (including those that make the back portion unclear).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. is there. In addition, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. Metal powder and dust to be received by the first heel part 551da and / or the second heel part 640 and can be prevented from falling down and attaching to a gaming device such as a connector located below, and after replacement with a new gaming board 5 It is possible to prevent troubles in game operation.

  In the above-described example, the first flange portion 551da and the second flange portion 640a constituting the flange portion are all formed of a transparent synthetic resin. However, it falls from the tank rail 553 onto the flange portion. If it is possible to confirm the presence of metal powder or dust adhering to the upper surface of the collar, one of the first collar 551da and the second collar 640a is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the other is opaque. You may make it form with a synthetic resin, and form a part of 1st collar part 551da and a part of 2nd collar part 640a with a transparent synthetic resin, and form the remainder with an opaque synthetic resin. Also good. For example, a payout base 551 (a whole or part of the payout base 551 and at least the first hook 551da is made of a transparent synthetic resin, which constitutes the first hook 551da provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to the tank rail 553. And the back cover 640 constituting the second collar part 640a (all or part of the back cover 640, and at least the second collar part 640a is made of an opaque synthetic resin). May be formed of an opaque synthetic resin. In this case, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the payout base 551 formed of a transparent synthetic resin is seen through the first base. The presence state of the metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surface of the first hook part 551da and the second hook part 640a can be confirmed.

  Moreover, in 4th Embodiment which comprises a collar part only by the 2nd collar part 640a, as shown in FIG. 51, a collar part is comprised only by the 2nd collar part 640a. In this example, the payout base 551 and the back cover 640 constituting the second flange 640a are formed of a transparent synthetic resin. In addition, the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 is used to form metal powder and dust in the tank rail 553 from a second flange 640a formed of a transparent synthetic resin provided below the tank rail 553. Drop it on the buttocks.

  When the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is visually recognized in a front view, the upper surface of the collar portion formed by the second collar portion 640a formed of a transparent synthetic resin can be visually recognized. It is possible to confirm the presence state of metal powder, dust, and the like attached to a portion below the notch 553aa.

  Further, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 is passed through the payout base 551 formed of a transparent synthetic resin or the back cover 640 formed of a transparent synthetic resin. It can be visually recognized. Since the tank rail 553 is made of an opaque synthetic resin, when looking up above the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the tank rail 553 formed of an opaque synthetic resin located behind the back cover 640 is used. As a result, the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the second saddle portion 640a becomes clear, it becomes easy to check the presence of foreign matter, and the game operation is hindered after replacement with a new game board 5. Can be prevented.

  In the above example, all of the tank rails 553 are formed so as to make it difficult to see the back of the tank rail 553 (including those that make it unclear), but this is not limiting, and at least the second flange 640a located below the tank 553 It is difficult to visually recognize the back part by forming the part facing the surface with opaque synthetic resin or metal, pasting an opaque seal on the surface of the part facing the second collar 640a, or applying paint. What is necessary is just to make it (including what makes it an unclear state). For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 and the left side wall portion of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 51 (the side wall portion on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the tank rail 553) are formed of opaque synthetic resin, metal, etc. An opaque seal is pasted on the bottom surface of the rail 553 or the surface of the left side of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. 51 (the side wall on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the tank rail 553), paint is applied, etc. Therefore, it may be made difficult to visually recognize the back portion (including those that make the back portion unclear).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 51, the game board 5 can be removed from the front side of the main body frame 4 while the back cover 640 is closed. is there. 51 and 54, the second saddle portion 640a remains below the tank rail 553 even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, so that metal powder and dust falling from the tank rail 553 can be removed. It is possible to prevent the second saddle portion 640 from receiving and adhering to a gaming device such as a connector located below, and to prevent a game operation from being hindered after replacement with a new gaming board 5.

  In the above-described example, the payout base 551 and the second collar part 640a constituting the collar part are all formed of a transparent synthetic resin. However, the tank is dropped from the tank rail 553 onto the collar part. If it is possible to confirm the presence of metal powder or dust adhering to the upper surface of the part, one of the dispensing base 551 and the second flange part 640a is formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the other is formed of an opaque synthetic resin Alternatively, a part of the payout base 551 and a part of the second flange 640a may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the rest may be formed of an opaque synthetic resin. For example, a portion provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 relative to the tank rail 553 in the payout base 551 and a portion facing the notch 553aa in the back cover 640 constituting the second flange 640a are transparent. The remaining portion may be formed of an opaque synthetic resin. In this case, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the transparent synthetic resin of the payout base 551 is formed. The presence state of the metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surface of the 2nd collar part 640a through the site | part formed by can be confirmed.

[4-8-1. Metal powder fall promotion 1]
The pachinko machine 1 of this example is characterized by the shape of the tank rail 553 and the position where the cutout portion 553aa is formed so that the metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B are actively dropped from the cutout portion 553aa. Has to have. Hereinafter, this will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45 and FIG. 57A is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail 553 viewed from above, and FIG. 57B is a front view schematically showing the tank rail 553 viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (A), the tank rail 553 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a first bent portion 553da and a second bent portion 553db. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57, the tank rail 553 has an axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side (upstream side, the right end side shown in FIG. 57A) to the left in the front view of the pachinko machine 1. A first bent portion 553da that extends from the right end to the position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel to the left side and then moves backward as it goes to the left is formed, and from the first bent portion 553da to the left and right A second bent portion 553db is formed which extends obliquely to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the direction and then moves to the left and thus in a direction parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. It is formed so as to extend to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from 553 db. Thereby, the game ball guided from the ball tank 552 rolls in a crank shape in the tank rail 553.

  Further, as described above, the tank rail 553 has a plurality of cutout portions 553aa. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, six rectangular cutout portions 553aa having a predetermined length in the left-right direction (in the present embodiment, about 30 mm) have a predetermined interval (in the present embodiment, about 10 mm). Is formed.

  Specifically, in the first bent portion 553da, the rear side portion of the main guide portion 553a (in this example, the bottom surface and the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a) and the second bent portion 553db in front of the main guide portion 553a. The rear side (in this example, the bottom surface and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a) and the front side in front view (in this example, the bottom surface and the front wall of the main guiding portion 553a) and the rear side portion of the main guiding portion 553a (the front side) In the example, a notch portion 553aa is formed in the bottom surface and the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a. Further, in the first bent portion 553da, the cutout portion 553aa is formed only in the inner portion of the bent passage, whereas in the second bent portion 553db, the inner and outer portions of the bent passage are formed. Cutout portions 553aa are formed at these two locations.

  As described above, the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 enters the tank rail 553 from the opening 552k formed on the downstream side. Further, the opening 552k is greatly opened on the rear side of the spherical tank 552 when viewed from the front. That is, the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 flow down toward the tank rail 553 toward the left rear side as viewed from the front. Further, as the game ball B flows down, foreign substances such as metal powder in the ball tank 552 move in the left rear direction in the front view, that is, in the vicinity of the first bent portion 553da. In this way, metal powder, dust, and the like are collected in the vicinity of the first bent portion 553da, and in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, foreign substances such as metal powder collected in the vicinity of the first bent portion 553da are collected in the first bent portion. It is made to fall from the notch part 553aa formed in 553da, and to remove out of the tank rail 553.

  Further, foreign matter such as metal powder that has not dropped from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the first bent portion 553da and foreign matter such as metal powder that has occurred in the tank rail 553 pass through the tank rail 553 in the first bent portion 553da. It moves in the left rear direction when viewed from the front together with the game ball B flowing down toward the downstream side. Further, the game ball B flowing down in the tank rail 553 contacts the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bent portion 553da, and changes the rolling direction along the inner wall of the tank rail 553. Further, the game ball B that rolls in the tank rail 553 advances straight until it comes into contact with the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bent portion 553da. The reaction force that acts is increased.

  The game ball B comes into contact with the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bent portion 553da and rolls along the inner wall of the tank rail 553 while receiving a large reaction force from the inner wall of the tank rail 553. By rubbing against the inner wall of the tank rail 553, metal powder or dust attached to the surface of the game ball B is peeled off.

  In this way, at the second bent portion 553da of the tank rail 553, the game ball B is rubbed against the inner wall of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder, dust, etc. attached to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off. . Further, metal powder, dust, or the like that is not attached to the game ball B in the tank rail 553 moves in the second bent portion 553da direction together with the game ball B that rolls in the second bent portion 553da direction. . That is, metal powder, dust, and the like are collected near the second bent portion 553da of the tank rail 553.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to molding the tank rail 553 into a bent shape so that metal powder, dust, etc. gather at the second bent portion 553da, the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a in the second bent portion 553da is formed. By forming the notch portion 553aa so as to be sandwiched, the metal powder, dust, etc. collected in the second bent portion 553da are dropped to the outside of the tank rail 553. Therefore, the metal powder and dust adhering to the game ball B rolling in the tank rail 553 and the metal powder and dust existing in the tank rail 553 without adhering to the game ball B are actively tanked. It can be dropped out of the rail 553 and removed from the tank rail 553. The second bent portion 553da only needs to form a cutout portion 553aa at least on the outer portion (rear side in front view) of the passage. Alternatively, foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that collects on the cutout portion 553aa may be discharged.

  In the above example, the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db are formed with the cutout portion 553aa. However, the cut portion is cut into at least one of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. The notch portion 553aa may be formed. Further, even when the cutout portion 553aa is not formed in any of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db, the cutout portion 553aa is provided downstream of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. After collecting foreign substances such as metal powder and dust at the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db, the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db may be discharged from the cutout portion 553aa formed on the downstream side. That is, by forming the cutout portion 553aa on the downstream side of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db, the metal peeled off from the surface of the game ball B by the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. Any foreign material such as powder or dust may be used as long as it can drop out of the tank rail 553 from a notch 553aa formed downstream of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. The entry of metal powder, dust, or the like into the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the rail 553 is suppressed, so that it is possible to prevent the game operation from being hindered.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the tank rail 553 is configured by an insulator. However, the tank rail 553 is configured by an electrical conductor such as a synthetic resin having electrical conductivity, and is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559. The electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 may be guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall to be removed. In this case, since the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B is easily peeled off, the metal adhering to the surface of the game ball B at the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db of the tank rail 553. The powder can be reliably peeled off and dropped from the cutout portion 553aa to the outside of the tank rail 553, so that entry of metal powder or dust into the guide passage 570a can be suppressed, and troubles in game operation can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, the flange (first flange 551da and / or the second flange 640a) and the back cover 640 formed of a transparent material are provided below the tank rail 553. When the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as synthetic resin having conductivity, the tank rail 553 is in an opaque state, so that the game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is provided. In the removed state, the presence state of the metal powder and dust attached to the hook part (first hook part 551da and / or second hook part 640a) through the opening of the game board mounting part 301 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 is confirmed. In this case, it is possible to make the presence of the metal powder and dust clear and facilitate the confirmation of the presence of the metal powder and dust.

  Further, as described above, since the flange portion (first flange portion 551da and / or second flange portion 640a) and the back cover 640 are made of an insulator (polycarbonate resin or the like), the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is used. The metal powder of the dropped game ball B can be attached and fastened to the heel part (first heel part 551da and / or second heel part 640a), the upper surface of the back cover 640, and the like. As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from falling. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to entering the cover body 1501 and, in turn, the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, in the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. 33, a single guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner is provided with a transparent material ( (Polycarbonate resin or the like). In this case, it is possible to confirm metal powder, dust, or the like that has entered the guide passage 570a without being discharged from the notch 553d of the tank rail 553. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 to which the payout unit 560 (the ball guiding unit 570) is attached is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, From the front of the pachinko machine 1 with the detachably attached game board 5 removed, metal powder, dust, etc. that have entered the guide passage 570a through the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 can be confirmed.

  A member made of an opaque synthetic resin is arranged on a part or all of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 of the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570, or a part of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 of the guide path 570a. Alternatively, an opaque seal may be attached to the entire surface, or a paint may be applied to make the back part difficult to see (including those that are unclear). When the metal board or the dust that has entered the guide passage 570a from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is confirmed with the game board 5 that is detachably attached to the pachinko machine 1 being checked, the inside of the guide path 570a Since the presence of the metal powder and dust that has entered becomes clear, it becomes easy to confirm the entry of the metal powder and dust into the guide passage 570a, and the game operation is hindered after replacement with a new game board 5. It can be prevented in advance.

  Further, a member made of an opaque synthetic resin is disposed on a part or all of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 of the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570, or a part of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 of the guide path 570a. Alternatively, the payout unit 560 (the ball guiding unit 570) can be attached without sticking an opaque seal all over or applying paint to make the back part difficult to see (including those that are unclear). The back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 may be made of an opaque synthetic resin. In this case, when the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the guide passage 570a Since the presence of metal powder and dust existing in the area becomes clear, it is easy to confirm the entry of the metal powder and dust into the guide passage 570a, which hinders game operation. It is possible to prevent Jill.

[4-8-2. Metal powder fall promotion 2]
Next, a description will be given of a first modification of the aspect in which the metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B are positively dropped from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Hereinafter, it will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45 and FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B). 58A is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail 553 viewed from above, and FIG. 58B is a front view schematically showing the tank rail 553 viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. The first modified example described below is combined with the above-described aspect in which the metal powder or dust of the game ball B is positively dropped due to the shape of the tank rail 553 and the position where the notch 553aa is formed. Or may be performed alone.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (A), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in order from the upstream side. ing. As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the tank rail 553 has a flow path through which the game ball B circulates at a portion where the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the second rail cover 555 are attached. The height is such that the height of the game ball B decreases toward the downstream end (left end), and the height at which only one game ball B can circulate at the downstream end (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B). Is formed.

  Note that the ball rectifying member 556 is formed with a ball pressing portion 556a that protrudes downward (toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553). The ball holding portion 556a protrudes to a position where the distance from the bottom surface of the tank rail 556 is slightly shorter than the outer shape of the two game balls B, and the game ball passes under the ball rectifying member 556 in an overlapping state. B always comes into contact with the ball pressing portion 556a. Further, when the upper game ball B of the game balls B stacked in two layers comes into contact with the ball holding portion 556a, the upper game ball B cannot flow down to the downstream side.

  On the other hand, the game ball B in the lower layer of the game balls B stacked in two layers can flow down to the downstream side even when the upper game ball B is in contact with the ball holding portion 556a. The lower game ball B flows down toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 when the lower game ball B flows downstream with the game ball B in contact with the ball holding portion 556a. The metal powder, dust, and the like attached to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off by the impact at the time of dropping. That is, the upper game ball B of the game balls B passing through the tank rail 553 in a state of being overlapped with the two layers contacts the ball holding portion 556a of the ball rectifying member 556 and falls toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. As a result, metal powder, dust and the like adhering to the surface are peeled off. At this time, foreign matters such as metal powder and dust that have fallen off from the game ball B fall on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (B), a notch 553aa is formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball rectifying member 556, so that the game ball B passing below the ball rectifying member 556 is held by the ball holding member. By falling toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 in contact with the portion 556a, foreign matters such as metal powder and dust that have been peeled off from the game ball B can be dropped from the cutout portion 553aa. In addition, the game ball B that has come into contact with the ball holding portion 556a falls to the upstream side of the tank rail 553 as shown in FIG. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the cutout portion 553aa on the upstream side of the ball pressing portion 556a is formed larger than the cutout portion 553aa provided on the downstream side of the ball pressing portion 556a. Thereby, foreign matters such as metal powder and dust that have fallen off from the game ball B falling in contact with the ball pressing portion 556a can be dropped from the cutout portion 553aa on the upstream side of the pressing portion 556a. .

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game ball B passes below the ball rectifying member 556, the game ball B is brought into contact with the ball pressing portion 556a and dropped toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. The metallic powder and dust adhered to the surface of the sphere B are peeled off so that the metallic powder and dust are dropped from the notch 553aa formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the sphere rectifying member 556. It has become. That is, from the notch portion 553aa formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball rectifying member 556 by peeling off the metal powder or dust attached to the surface of the game ball B passing under the ball rectifying member 556. By dropping it immediately, metal powder, dust and the like can be positively removed from the tank rail 553. Thereby, entry of metal powder, dust, or the like into the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress occurrence of trouble in game operation.

  Further, after the metal powder and dust are peeled off from the game ball B passing under the ball rectifying member 556, the peeled metal powder and dust are formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball rectifying member 556. Since it can be immediately dropped from the cutout portion 553aa, it is possible to suppress reattachment of metal powder, dust, or the like to the game ball B.

  Further, the game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 overlap in a plurality of layers. The game balls B that overlap three or more layers come into contact with a first rail cover 554 provided on the upstream side of the ball rectifying member 556. By contacting the first rail cover 554, three or more layers are played. The game ball B of the player falls and overlaps the two layers. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a notch 553aa is also formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the first rail cover 554 as shown in FIG. When a foreign object such as metal powder or dust is peeled off from the game ball B that has been changed to a state where the two layers are overlapped, the metal powder or dust is dropped from the notch 553aa.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game balls B stacked in a plurality of layers are gradually broken down and changed into a single layer. In addition, by removing foreign particles such as metal powder and dust that have been peeled off when the game balls B stacked in a plurality of layers are broken down to make the layers thinner, the tank rails 553aa are removed to remove the tank rails. Intrusion of foreign matter such as metal powder and dust into the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the 553 is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of trouble in game operation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), depressions 554a, 555b, and 556b are formed on the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. . The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 from the game ball B that abuts on the upstream end of the ball rectifying member 556. When a foreign substance such as metal powder or dust moves on the upper surface of the substrate, the recesses 554a, 555b, and 556b receive and fasten. As a result, when foreign matters such as metal powder and dust move from the inside of the tank rail 553 to the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 outside the tank rail 553, these foreign matters are moved. Can be secured to the top surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 so as not to fall. That is, foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has moved from the inside of the tank rail 553 to the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 outside the tank rail 553 is covered by the cover body of the peripheral control unit 1500. 1501 and the base body 1502 are prevented from falling, and as a result, entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, so that the foreign matter such as metal powder or dust adheres to the peripheral control board 1510. The occurrence of general troubles can be suppressed.

  The tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as a synthetic resin having electrical conductivity and is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559, so that the electromagnetic noise that has entered the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be reduced. It may be removed by guiding it to the earth of the island facility. In this case, since the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B is easily peeled off, the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B passing under the ball rectifying member 556 is surely peeled off and cut. It can be dropped out of the tank rail 553 from the notch 553aa, it is possible to suppress the entry of metal powder, dust and the like into the guide passage 570a, and to prevent the game operation from being hindered. Moreover, since the static electricity of the game ball B that is in contact with the tank rail 553 can be removed, it is possible to suppress the reattachment of the metal powder peeled off from the surface of the game ball B to the game ball B.

  Further, when the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as an opaque synthetic resin having conductivity, the front of the pachinko machine 1 is removed with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side. The presence of metal powder and dust when checking the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the heel part (first heel part 551da and / or second heel part 640a) through the opening of the game board mounting part 301 This makes it easier to check the presence of metal powder and dust.

  In addition, the sphere straightening member 556 (may be all or part (or at least the sphere pressing portion 556a)) may be formed of an electrically conductive material such as an opaque synthetic resin having electrical conductivity and electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559. By connecting, the electromagnetic wave noise of the ball rectifying member 556 (may be all or part (or at least the ball holding portion 556a)) may be guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. In this case, it is possible to suppress adhesion of metal powder, dust, or the like peeled off from the game ball B to the ball pressing portion 556a.

  Further, as described above, since the collar part (first collar part 551da and / or second collar part 640a) and the back cover 640 are made of an insulator (transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin), the ball rectifying member 556 is used. The metal powder, dust, etc. that are peeled off from the game ball B passing below and dropped from the notch 553aa are applied to the upper surface of the collar (first collar 551da and / or second collar 640a), the back cover 640, and the like. Can be attached and fastened. As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from falling. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to entering the cover body 1501 and, in turn, the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, in the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. 33, a single guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner is provided with a transparent material ( By molding with polycarbonate resin or the like, metal powder or dust that has entered the guide passage 570a without being discharged from the notch 553d of the tank rail 553 may be confirmed. In this case, with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side removed, from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the payout base 551 molded by a transparent synthetic resin from the opening of the game board attachment part 301. Metal powder, dust, and the like that have entered the guide passage 570a can be confirmed, and can also be confirmed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-8-3. Metal powder fall promotion 3]
Next, a description will be given of a second modification of the aspect in which the metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B are positively dropped from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45 and FIGS. 57 (A) and (B). As described above, FIG. 57A is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail 553 viewed from above, and FIG. 57B is a front view schematically showing the tank rail 553 viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. The second modification described below is a mode in which the metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B are positively dropped due to the shape of the tank rail 553 and the position where the notch 553aa is formed. It may be performed in combination with one or both of the one modification, or may be performed alone.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a tank inner step 552m is formed on the ball tank 552, and a tank rail inner step 553m is formed on the tank rail 553. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 57 (A) and (B), an in-tank step portion 552m is formed along the edge of the opening 552k of the ball tank 552, and the first bent portion of the tank rail 553 is formed. A tank rail step 553m is formed on the upstream side of 553da. The in-tank step portion 552m and the in-tank rail step portion 553m are inclined at an angle larger than the inclination angle of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Specifically, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined at an angle X, the step portion 553m in the tank rail is inclined at an angle Y, the step portion 552m in the tank is inclined at an angle Z, and the step portion 553m in the tank rail is inclined. And the inclination angle Z of the step 552m in the tank are larger than the inclination angle X of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the inclination angle Z of the in-tank step portion 552m is larger than the inclination angle Y of the in-tank rail step portion 553m. It should be noted that the inclination angle Y of the tank rail step 553m may be larger than the inclination angle Z of the tank step 552m, or the tank rail step 553m inclination angle Y and the tank interior You may comprise so that the inclination angle Z of the level | step-difference part 552m may become the same angle.

  When the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 into the tank rail 553, the flow velocity is increased by the step portion 552 in the tank and falls to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Further, foreign matters such as metal powder and dust attached to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off by the impact at this time and fall to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Then, foreign matters such as metal powder and dust that have fallen to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the step 552 in the tank move downstream in the tank rail 553 as the game ball B flows.

  In addition, a tank rail step 553m is formed on the downstream side of the tank step 552. Then, the game ball B flowing down the tank rail 553 has a rolling speed increased at the step portion, and metal powder or dust adhering to the surface of the game ball B due to an impact when falling on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 Peels off and falls to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. As described above, the in-tank rail step portion 553m is formed on the upstream side of the first bent portion 553da. And as above-mentioned, notch part 553aa is formed in 1st bending part 553da.

  That is, foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has fallen on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the step 552 in the tank and collected on the first bent portion 553da, or metal that has fallen on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the step 553m in the tank rail. Foreign matter such as powder and dust falls from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the first bent portion 553da.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 is provided with the in-tank step portion 552m, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the in-tank rail step portion 553m. The foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the game ball B is peeled off and dropped onto the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, and the dropped metal powder and dust and other foreign matter are collected in the first bent portion 553da. It can be dropped from a notch 553aa formed in one bent portion 553da. That is, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are formed so as to pass through the tank step 552m and the tank rail step 553m. By removing the foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the sphere B and dropping it from the notch 553aa formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, the metal powder and dust are actively removed from the tank rail 553. To do. Thereby, entry of metal powder, dust, or the like into the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress occurrence of trouble in game operation.

  In the above example, the game ball B that flows into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 is dropped at two step portions of the tank step portion 552m and the tank rail step portion 553m. It is possible to peel off foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the substrate at a high rate.

  In the above example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are provided with stepped portions, respectively, but a plurality of stepped portions may be provided only on one of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. Only one step portion may be provided on one of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553.

  Further, the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as a synthetic resin having electrical conductivity, and is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559, and electromagnetic noise that has entered the tank rail 553 is grounded to the ground of the island facility in the game hall. You may make it guide and remove and the effect which peels off the metal powder, dust, etc. which are adhering to the above-mentioned game ball B can be heightened by comprising in this way. That is, when the game ball B flows into the tank rail 553, static electricity is removed and the adsorption force of metal powder, dust, etc. is weakened, and in this state, the step 553m in the tank rail is passed. The metal powder or dust attached to the surface of the game ball B easily peels off due to an impact when passing through the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to increase the probability that metal powder, dust, and the like are peeled off from the game ball B and to drop the tank rail 553 from the cutout portion 553aa, and it is possible to suppress entry of metal powder, dust, and the like into the guide passage 570a. At the same time, it is possible to prevent troubles in game operation. Moreover, since the static electricity of the game ball B that is in contact with the tank rail 553 can be removed, it is possible to suppress the reattachment of the metal powder peeled off from the surface of the game ball B to the game ball B.

  Also in this example, the pachinko machine with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is formed by configuring the tank rail 553 with an electrically conductive material such as an opaque synthetic resin having conductivity. When checking the presence of metal powder and dust attached to the heel part (first heel part 551da and / or second heel part 640a) through the opening of the game board mounting part 301 from the front of 1, It is possible to make the presence of dust clear and facilitate the confirmation of the presence of metal powder and dust.

  In addition, the metal powder or dust that has fallen out of the tank rail 553 from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the first bent portion 553da is made of an insulator (transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin). Since the first ball portion 551da and / or the second rib portion 640a) and the upper surface of the back cover 640 can be attached and fastened, the metal powder of the game ball B is covered with the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The metal powder of the game ball B enters the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and consequently the metal powder of the game ball B enters the peripheral control board 1510. The occurrence of electrical troubles due to adhesion can be suppressed.

  Further, the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 may be formed of a transparent material (polycarbonate resin or the like). In this case, the guide passage 570a is not discharged from the cutout portion 553d of the tank rail 553 and enters the guide passage 570a. You can check the metal powder and dust that have entered. In addition, confirmation of the metal powder, dust, etc. which entered the guide passage 570a is performed by opening the game board mounting portion 301 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the game board 5 which is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed. It is also possible to confirm through the payout base 551 molded with a transparent synthetic resin from the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-9. Suppression of metal powder movement when tilting gaming machines]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the movement of the metal powder is suppressed when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 35, 42 to 45, and 59. FIG. 59A is a front view of the inside of the second rail cover 555 as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the inner side of the 2nd rail cover 555 in the made state.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is connected to the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 at the most downstream portion (the lower right end portion in the drawing in FIG. 35) of the tank rail 553, and passes through the tank rail 553. The game ball is guided to the ball guidance unit 570.

  Further, the tank rail 553 has a groove shape that is open upward, and forms a channel that slopes downward in the figure toward the most downstream portion. It is designed to change the direction.

  The second rail cover 555 provided at the uppermost end of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 has a curved inner wall on the downstream side (lower right in the figure), and the inner wall on the downstream side of the second rail cover 555. And the inner wall on the downstream side (the right end portion in the drawing) of the tank rail 553 are arranged so as to be continuous to form the wall portion on the downstream side (the right end portion in the drawing) of the tank rail 553. That is, the curved upstream portion of the second rail cover 555 serves as the ceiling of the tank rail 553, and the curved downstream portion serves as the side wall of the vertical passage that is the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553. It has become.

  As described above, the second rail cover 555 can be attached to and detached from the tank rail 553. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, the second rail cover 555 is formed with a locking portion 555a having a locking hole so as to face the side wall portion of the second rail cover 555, and the side wall of the tank rail 553 is formed. Locking protrusions 553c are formed on the outside of the portions so as to correspond to the locking portions 555a of the second rail cover 555, respectively. Then, as shown in FIG. 44, the second rail cover 555 is covered from above the tank rail 553 so that the tank rail 553 is inserted between the side walls of the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553 is locked. The second rail cover 555 is locked to the tank rail 553 by press-fitting the protrusion 553c into the locking hole formed in the locking portion 555a of the second rail cover 555.

  When a load exceeding a predetermined value acts in a direction in which the side wall portion of the second rail cover 555 is separated from the groove portion of the tank rail 553 when the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 are in the locked state, The side wall portion of the two rail cover 555 is deformed, and the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released. In addition, the aspect which latches the above-mentioned 2nd rail cover 555 with respect to the tank rail 553 is an example, and if the 2nd rail cover 555 is attached to the tank rail 553 so that attachment or detachment is possible, it will be limited to this. For example, the second rail cover 555 may be screwed to the tank rail 553 with a screw.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 35, when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (the right side portion in FIG. 35) where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided is downward, the second rail cover 555 It constitutes the wall on the extension line of the bottom. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (the right side portion in FIG. 35) where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided is downward, the metal powder accumulated on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 Foreign matters such as dust and dirt move toward the most downstream side of the tank rail 553 and come into contact with the inner wall side of the second rail cover 555 provided on the most downstream side of the tank rail 553.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the removable second rail cover 555 is provided at the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 to constitute the wall portion of the tank rail 553, and the side portion on which the ball guiding unit 570 is provided ( Since the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the right side in FIG. 35 is downward, the second rail cover 555 receives metal powder and dust accumulated on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion on which the guide unit 570 is provided (the right side portion in FIG. 35) is downward, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are directed toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553. The moving metal powder and dust can be received by the second rail cover 555, and the entry to the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is suppressed. Kill.

  A recess 555 c is formed on the inner wall of the second rail cover 555. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the bottom portion of the portion that bears the side wall of the vertical passage at the end portion (right end portion in the drawing) of the second rail cover 555 and the portion that bears the ceiling of the tank rail 553 are provided. A recess 555c is formed. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side (the right side in FIG. 35) where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided is downward, the vertical direction of the second rail cover 555 as shown in FIG. The part that bears the side wall of the passage becomes the lower surface, and foreign matters such as metal powder and dust that move toward the most downstream side in the tank rail 553 are formed on the inner wall of the part that bears the side wall of the vertical passage of the second rail cover 555. To enter the recessed portion 555c. That is, by tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the side portion on which the ball guiding unit 570 is provided (the right side portion in FIG. 35) is downward, metal powder or dust that moves in the tank rail 553 toward the downstream portion side. Such foreign matter is received and fastened by a concave portion 555c formed at a portion serving as a side wall of the vertical passage of the second rail cover 555. Thereby, it can suppress that the metal powder and dust which move toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 from the inside of the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 enter the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570.

  In the present example, the second rail cover 555 is formed with the bottomed recess 555c. That is, a through hole is formed in a portion that bears the side wall of the vertical passage at the end portion (right end portion in the drawing) of the second rail cover 555 and a portion that bears the ceiling of the tank rail 553, and the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (right side in FIG. 35) is downward, foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has moved toward the most downstream side in the tank rail 553 is secondly removed. The metal may move from the through hole formed in the inner wall of the rail cover 555 to the outside of the tank rail 553, and thereby move from the inside of the tank tank 552 or the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553. It is possible to suppress powder and dust from entering the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570.

  Further, since the second rail cover 555 is detachably provided to the tank rail 553, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (the right side portion in FIG. 35) where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided is downward. In this state, the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 are released from the locked state, and the second rail cover 555 is released, so that the metal received by the second rail cover 555 and attached to the second rail cover 555 Powder and dust can be removed from the tank rail 553, and the metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 when the pachinko machine 1 is normally erected enter the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570. This can be suppressed.

  The second rail cover 555 can be reused by discarding the attached metal powder or dust and cleaning it. Thus, metal powder, dust, and the like in the tank rail 553 can be easily removed from the tank rail 553 by removing the second rail cover 555.

  That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is removed from the island facility of the game store, the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 are released from the locked state, and the second rail cover 555 is detached so that the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 is removed. By tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the wall part (the side part where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side part in FIG. 35)) is downward, the wall part of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted. Metal powder and dust moving from the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 can be discharged from the portion of the second rail cover 555 where the wall portion is missing.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is removed from the island facility of the amusement store and moved, the wall portion on the most downstream side of the tank rail 553 on which the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side on which the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided). By tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the portion (the right side in FIG. 35) is downward, the metal powder and dust moving from the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 are removed. The second rail cover 555 can be received, and in this state, the second rail cover 555 is released by releasing the locking state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553. The metal powder and dust that are received and adhered to the second rail cover 555 can be removed from the tank rail 553.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second rail cover 555 is released by releasing the locking state of the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553, thereby providing the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1. The metal powder or dust in the tank rail 553 that has moved can be easily removed from the tank rail 553 by tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the side portion (right side in FIG. 35) is downward. . Further, it is possible to suppress the metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 from entering the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 when the pachinko machine 1 is normally erected.

  In the above example, the second rail cover 555 is provided so that the inner wall on the downstream side of the second rail cover 555 and the inner wall on the downstream side of the tank rail are continuous. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a step may be provided between the inner wall on the downstream side of the second rail cover 555 and the inner wall on the downstream side of the tank rail 553, and in particular, the inner wall of the second rail cover 555 is located outside the inner wall of the tank rail 553. When the level difference is provided, the most downstream wall portion of the tank rail 553 on which the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side portion on which the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side portion in FIG. 35)). When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted such that the inner wall of the second rail cover 555 is depressed below the inner wall of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted downward, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 Metal powder and dust moving toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 from the inner rail of the second rail cover 555 can be received and fastened. -The release of the second rail cover 555 by releasing the locking state between the tank rail 553 and the tank rail 553, so that the metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 and attached to the second rail cover 555 are stored in the tank. It can be removed from the rail 553.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 35, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the wall part at the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 on which the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side part on which the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (FIG. 35 When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the right side)) is on the lower side, various boards, connectors, and the like are not positioned below the second rail cover 555. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an external terminal plate 558 is provided at a predetermined distance above the tank rail 553 and the second rail cover 555 in FIG. 35, and the tank rail 553 and the second rail cover 555 are provided. A payout control board box 632 for accommodating the payout control board 633, an interface board 635, and the like are provided at a predetermined distance below.

  As described above, the most downstream wall portion of the tank rail 553 where the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side portion where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side portion in FIG. 35)) is downward. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted, various boards and connectors are not positioned below the second rail cover 555, so that the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released. With the second rail cover 555 detached, the most downstream wall of the tank rail 553 (the side where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35)) is downward. When the machine 1 is tilted, the wall part at the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 (the side part where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side part in FIG. 35)) When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted such that the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 are unlocked and the second rail cover 555 is detached while the pachinko machine 1 is tilted downward, the ball tank 552 and the tank The metal powder or dust that moves from the rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 is prevented from dropping toward various boards or connectors and adhering to the various boards or connectors, and is caused by the metal powder. Electrical trouble (short circuit) can be avoided. In particular, when metal powder or dust falls toward the interface board 635 that is not accommodated in the board case, the metal powder or dust is likely to adhere to the interface board 635 and an electrical trouble (short circuit) is likely to occur. Is effective in avoiding electrical trouble (short circuit).

[4-10. Positional relationship between tank rail notch and various substrates]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front), and the metal generated due to wear of the game ball B Although it is configured so that foreign matters such as powder can be removed from the tank rail 553, the back side of the game board 5 is further provided with respect to some of the plurality of boards disposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Among them, the substrate installation mode on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 has a unique configuration so as to be hardly affected by foreign matters such as metal powder falling from the tank rail 553. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the pachinko machine 1 of this example is viewed from the back side, the tank rail 553 is provided on the upper right side of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (upper right side of the back surface of the main body frame 4). Yes. A plurality of notches 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front). A foreign object is removed from the tank rail 553 so that the game ball B can flow smoothly on the tank rail 553.

  FIG. 60 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 of the present example when viewed from the back side, and is located at the leftmost end of the cutout portions 553aa provided in the tank rail 553 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side. While drawing a virtual line in the vertical direction so as to pass through the left side of the cutout part 553aa, the left and right direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 is divided by the virtual line, and the right area with the virtual line as a boundary is the area A, FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a left region as a region B with a virtual line as a boundary. In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, the tank rail 553 having the cutout portion 553aa is present above the region A. Therefore, the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided in the region A. It is an area that is easily affected by the falling of foreign matter such as metal powder (a high possibility of falling foreign matter). On the other hand, since there is no tank rail 553 having the notch 553aa and only the ball tank 552 having no notch 553aa above the region B, the region B has a tank compared to the region A. This is a region that is not easily affected by the falling of foreign matter such as metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the rail 553 (a low possibility of falling foreign matter). Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the opening / closing shafts of the main body frame 4 (the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520) are provided at the right end portion of the region A. Thereby, the region B (the region B closer to the open end side than the region A) farther from the opening / closing axis of the main body frame 4 than the region A is externally compared to the region A when the main body frame 4 is opened. It is an easily accessible area. In addition, the region A closer to the opening / closing axis of the main body frame 4 than the region B (the region A farther from the open end side than the region B) is accessed from the outside compared to the region B when the main body frame 4 is opened. It is a difficult area.

  In each of the area A and the area B, a plurality of boards are arranged on the back side of the game board 5 (the back side of the game panel 1100) in such a manner that the mounting surface of the electronic component can be visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Yes. Among these, in the area A, the panel relay board 1700A is arranged, whereas in the area B, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control unit 1300. A main control board 1310 is arranged. As will be described in detail later, the panel relay board 1700A is mounted in such a manner that each connector is exposed to the outside. There is a need to be provided in the difficult region B. The panel relay board 1700A includes a peripheral control board 1510 and various sensor bodies and movable bodies controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, various sensors provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, a drive motor, a speaker, etc.). Is connected to each member by wiring (harness etc.), but it is easy to connect and disconnect these wirings by providing them in the area B that is easily accessible from the outside. There is an advantage that can be made. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 give priority to the panel relay board 1700A being provided in the region B. Thus, it is provided in a region A that is easily affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. However, although the area A is an area that is easily affected by the falling of foreign matter such as metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, it is difficult to access from the outside, so the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit 1500 By providing the substrate 1510, the panel drive substrate 1720 of the drive substrate unit 1700, and the main control substrate 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in the region A, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed on these substrates.

  First, on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100), in order from the top, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board of the main control unit 1300. 1310 is provided in such a manner that the mounting surface of the electronic component is visible from behind the pachinko machine 1. Each of the substrates disposed in the region A is stored in a substrate box (a box-shaped box including a box body and a cover body formed of a non-conductive resin constituting the substrate box). Therefore, in the region A, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like are kept by the board box for foreign matters such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 while maintaining the difficulty of access from the outside. It is possible to prevent the substrate from directly adhering to the substrate and to reduce the risk of failure of the substrate, which is important for game control. Note that a plurality of minute ventilation holes are formed in each of the board boxes in which the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are accommodated. However, these ventilation holes are not provided on the upper surface of the substrate box in a state where each substrate box is attached to the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from entering through the ventilation holes. ing.

  Further, in the area A, the main control board 1310 among the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100) is the tank rail 553. It is provided at a position farthest from the notch 553aa. Between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310, a peripheral control unit 1500 having a peripheral control board 1510 and a drive board unit 1700 having a panel drive board 1720 are provided. Is provided. For this reason, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is less likely to adhere to the main control board 1310 than other boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, which is useful for controlling the game. The most important failure risk of the main control board 1310 can be reduced.

  The above-described main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 are arranged such that not only the area A but also a part thereof is located in the area B in consideration of the ease of confirmation from the outside. However, even in the case where the board is provided over the area A to the area B in this way, electronic parts having high importance (for example, main control MPU and peripheral control MPU) among electronic parts mounted on the board are used. It is desirable to arrange on the region B side to enhance safety. Further, as long as a part of the substrate is located in the region A, the entire substrate is accommodated in the substrate box, and foreign matters such as metal powder dropped from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 are attached. It is preferable to prevent this. In this embodiment, since the main control board 1310 has a higher confirmation frequency than the peripheral control board 1510 or the like, the area extending from the area A to the area B is larger than that of the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, as described above, the main control board 1310 is arranged so as to straddle the area A and the area B. However, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 may be changed illegally. In consideration of making it difficult, it is arranged on the region A side that is difficult to access from the outside when the main body frame 4 is opened. However, as described above, the region A is a region that is more susceptible to foreign substances such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 as compared to the region B. In addition to accommodating the control board 1310, the setting key cylinder is arranged on the main control board 1310 so that the setting key cylinder in the region A is located at a position avoiding the position immediately below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. It is preferable to do. Specifically, the tank rail 553 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of notch portions 553aa that are spaced apart (separated) in the left-right direction, and the distance between the notch portions 553aa is set as a key cylinder. The setting key cylinder is disposed on the main control board 1310 so that the setting key cylinder is positioned immediately below the portion of the tank rail 553 where the notch 553aa is not provided. Is preferred. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the danger that foreign matter such as metal powder falls from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 to the setting key cylinder to cause an abnormality while making an illegal act on the setting key cylinder difficult.

  Also, if the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a located in the area A due to the inconvenience of the hall manager or the like, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen adheres to the setting key. There is a danger of causing some kind of abnormality. In order to suppress such a risk, in this embodiment, in addition to the arrangement of the setting key cylinder described above, the setting key insertion / removal operation (insertion / removal operation) with respect to the setting key cylinder is performed with respect to the main control board 1310. It is configured such that it can be made only in a posture (a posture parallel to the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1) in which both side portions of the portion (a portion other than the insertion portion inserted into the setting key cylinder) face the left-right direction. As a result, at the end of at least the work related to the setting change or the work related to the setting confirmation, both sides of the gripping portion of the setting key are oriented in the left-right direction. Even if it is left as it is inserted, it is possible to reduce the possibility that foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen will accumulate on the setting key.

  In the area B, on the back side of the game board 5 (the back side of the game panel 1100), the panel relay board 1710A is provided so that the mounting surface of the electronic component can be visually recognized from the back of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is not mounted with a CPU like the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, and is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510. This panel relay board is mainly used to electrically connect various sensor bodies and movable bodies (for example, various sensors, drive motors, speakers, etc. provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5). By making electrical connections of productions in a concentrated manner to 1710A, productivity at the time of gaming machine manufacture is improved, and when any abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, identification of the cause part and electrical disconnection are performed. This facilitates the convenience of manufacturing and inspection of the pachinko machine 1. Moreover, since the panel relay board 1710A is connected to each member by wiring (harness etc.), a plurality of connectors as connection terminals for connecting these wirings are mounted corresponding to the number of wirings connected to each board. Has been. Each of these connectors is preferably mounted so as to be exposed to the outside in consideration of the convenience described above. From this point, the panel relay board 1710A is box-shaped like the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. It is a board | substrate which is not accommodated in this board | substrate box and the exposed part (exposure degree) with respect to the exterior is high compared with another board | substrate.

  In addition, it is preferable that the panel relay board 1710A of the present embodiment is mounted in the form exposed to the outside in consideration of convenience as described above, and the connection mode change (connector mounting) at the time of game machine design In consideration of the high cost due to the change in the number, etc., it is not housed in a box-like board box such as the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting surface of the electronic component on the back cover 640 is covered. I am doing so. In other words, when the back cover 640 is opened, the mounting surface of the electronic component is entirely exposed behind the pachinko machine 1. In addition, if the high cost due to the change in connection mode (change in the number of connectors mounted, etc.) at the time of game machine design is not taken into consideration, a simple cover with each connector portion opened only in consideration of the above convenience The panel relay substrate 1710A may be covered with a body, and only the connector portions may be exposed.

  As described above, the region B is a region that is less susceptible to the influence of foreign matters such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 as compared to the region A. In this embodiment, a panel relay board 1710A is provided in such a region B. Specifically, the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are located over the areas A and B. However, the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is entirely located on the area B side. It is arranged to fit in. By doing so, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 adheres even to the panel relay substrate 1710A that is exposed to the outside (exposed degree) higher than other substrates. And the risk of failure of the panel relay board 1710A can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, the panel relay board 1710A according to the present embodiment is arranged so that the entire panel relay board 1710A can be accommodated on the region B side. Further, the side end of the panel relay board 1710A is arranged as far as possible from the area A. Like to do. That is, the panel relay board 1710A of the present embodiment has a side (long side) in the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular panel relay board 1710A so that the entire panel relay board 1710A surely fits in the area B side and is separated from the area A by a predetermined distance. (Side part) is arranged in the vertical direction. Thereby, the panel relay substrate 1710A is separated from the region A by a predetermined distance, and it is possible to reliably prevent foreign matters such as metal powder from dropping from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and adhering to the exposed portion of the panel relay substrate 1710A. Like that.

  In this embodiment, in order to preferentially remove foreign matter from the tank rail 553, the pachinko machine 1 is viewed slightly from the center in the left-right direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the back side. An imaginary line is set at the shifted position and the area of the area A is larger than the area of the area B. However, the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the tank rail 553 in a state of being viewed from the back side. The area of the region A is smaller than the area of the region B as long as an imaginary line is drawn in the vertical direction so as to pass through the left side of the cutout portion 553aa located at the leftmost position among the cutout portions 553aa. The virtual lines may be set as described above, or the virtual lines may be set so that the areas A and B are set so that the area of the region A and the area of the region B are substantially the same. Further, in the case where not only the tank rail 553 but also the ball tank 522 is provided with a notch portion that plays the same role as the notch portion 553aa, the pachinko machine 1 is provided in the ball tank 522 in a state viewed from the back side. The regions A and B may be set as a mode in which a virtual line is drawn in the vertical direction so as to pass through the left side of the cutout portion located at the leftmost end among the cutout portions.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of wirings connected to the panel relay substrate 1710A are kept as close as possible to the region B side (so that the bent portion does not enter the region A). Specifically, more wiring fixing portions (members such as hooks) for fixing various wirings connected to the panel relay substrate 1710A are provided on the region B side than the region A side on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, as many wirings as possible are kept close to the region B side. As a result, the plurality of wirings connected to the panel relay substrate 1710A are also hardly affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553.

  In addition, as described above in detail, the first flange portion 551da is provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, and the first flange portion 551da is connected to the back side of the game board 5 (game). It extends to the left of the rear side of the panel 1100 and extends below the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553. That is, in the region A, the first brim portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the main control substrate 1310, the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the like, whereas the region B , The first flange portion 551da is located between the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553 and the panel relay substrate 1710A. As described above, in the region A, the first cover portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. When the back cover 640 is opened as well as when the back cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the first flange portion 551da, Suppressing foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa from dropping toward a board such as the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510 located therebelow. Can do. Thereby, about the board | substrates, such as the main control board 1310 provided in the area | region A, and the periphery control board | substrate 1510, not only the board | substrate box which accommodates those board | substrates but the 1st collar part 551da, foreign substances, such as metal powder, are contained. It is possible to prevent the adhesion from occurring.

  On the other hand, in the region B, the first flange 551da provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends to the lower side of the ball tank 552 and is positioned above the panel relay board 1710A. In addition to not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa is received and attached to the first flange portion 551da. It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as metal powder falling outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa from dropping toward the panel relay substrate 1710A located on the lower left side. As a result, the panel relay board 1710A provided in the region B is not stored in the board box, but prevents the first brim 551da from attaching foreign matter such as metal powder. Can do.

  In addition, although the case where the 1st collar part 551da comprises a collar part was demonstrated as a structure of foreign material countermeasures, such as metal powder which concerns on 1st Embodiment, the above measures against foreign substances, such as metal powder which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. When the first collar portion 551da and the second collar portion 640a are connected to form the collar portion jointly as in the configuration of FIG. 5, the configuration of the countermeasure against foreign matter such as metal powder according to the third embodiment is used. When the first collar part 551da constitutes the collar part, the first collar part 551da is not provided and the second collar part 640a is independently provided as the collar part as in the configuration of measures against foreign matters such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. Any of the cases may be used. That is, in the region B, the flange portion provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends to the lower side of the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553, and above the panel relay board 1710A. And at least when the back cover 640 is closed, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached to the collar portion. Further, it is possible to prevent foreign matters such as metal powder falling outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa from dropping toward the panel relay board 1710A located on the lower left side. As a result, the panel relay board 1710A provided in the region B is not housed in the board box, but it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the collar.

  In the above description, the flange portion of the region A provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is configured to extend to the lower portion of the ball tank 552 in the region B. A foreign object such as metal powder that has dropped from the main guide part 553a to the collar part of the area A through the notch part 553aa moves to the area B side without providing a collar part below the ball tank 552. You may comprise so that the movement prevention part to prevent may be provided. For example, what is necessary is just to comprise so that the collar part of the area | region A provided below the notch part 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be bent toward the upper direction in the boundary of the area | region A and the area | region B. Even in such a configuration, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the flange portion of the region A through the notch portion 553aa does not move to the region B side, but moves to the region B side. It can suppress falling toward the panel relay board | substrate 1710A located. Accordingly, the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B is not housed in the board box, but is moved by the flange part of the area A and the movement preventing part that prevents the panel relay board 1710A from moving to the area B side. It is possible to prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder.

  Further, in this embodiment, the board color on the mounting surface side of the board of the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100) is provided in the area A. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are painted in a color different from the board color on the mounting surface side. Specifically, the color of the resist and the silk printing color applied to the substrate surface of the panel relay substrate 1710A are the same as the color of the resist and the silk printing color applied to the substrate surface of the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510. And are different. Thereby, for the panel relay board 1710A provided in the region B, the peripheral control board 1510 and various sensor bodies and movable bodies controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, various types provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5). Sensors, drive motors, speakers, etc.) are to be integrated into the wiring for electrical connection, and foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa It can be easily determined from the outside that it is located in the region B that is difficult to perform. In addition, for the board such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the area A, the area A in which foreign matters such as metal powder falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside via the notch part 553aa are likely to adhere. Therefore, it is preferable to apply a color that can easily determine whether or not a foreign substance such as the metal powder has adhered, for example, a dark color (green, black, etc.). However, the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B is also located in the area B where foreign matter such as metal powder that has dropped from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa is difficult to adhere. Similarly to the provided substrate, it may be configured to paint in a color (such as green or black) that can easily determine whether or not a foreign substance such as metal powder has adhered.

  Further, as described above, as a technique for facilitating the determination of the presence of the region B from which foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa is difficult to be detected from the outside, a mounting surface of the board Not only the difference in the substrate color on the side, but also the part covering the area A and the part covering the area B of the back cover 640 in a closed state are subjected to some marking to determine the presence of the areas A and B from the outside It may be easy. Specifically, the specific marking B may be provided in a portion of the back cover 640 that covers the region B, and the specific marking B may not be provided in the region A. As the specific marking B, for example, a sticker or print on which specific information (character information or symbol information such as “high safety level” or “relay board side”) indicating that the region B is written is attached. Alternatively, specific information (character information or symbol information such as “high safety level” or “relay board side”) indicating the region B may be formed and processed on the back cover 640 itself. Alternatively, the specific marking A may be provided in a portion of the back cover 640 that covers the region A, and the specific marking A may not be provided in the region B. As the specific marking A in this case, for example, a seal or print on which specific information (character information or symbol information such as “low safety level” or “main control board side”) indicating the region A is written Or specific information indicating that the area is a specific information area A (character information or symbol information such as “low safety level” or “main control board side”). It can be exemplified that the back cover 640 itself is formed and processed. Moreover, you may make it provide specific marking A and B in the site | part which covers the area | region A among the back cover 640, and the site | part which covers the area | region B, respectively.

  Note that, on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100), the panel relay board 1710A provided in the region B is provided immediately below the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the pachinko machine 1 may be provided at a predetermined distance from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the side. That is, the panel relay board 1710A is not only the region B away from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, but also the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. It may be configured so as to be provided at a position separated by a predetermined interval. In such a case, the panel relay board 1710A has fallen from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 because the panel relay board 1710A is located at a predetermined distance from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as metal powder from adhering to the panel relay substrate 1710A, and to reduce the risk of failure of the panel relay substrate 1710A.

  Further, when the panel relay board 1710A is provided at a predetermined distance from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, the notch The panel relay board 1710A may be arranged in the region B so that the sphere tank 522 without the 553aa itself is positioned directly above like a collar. Thereby, even when foreign matter falls from the upper side of the pachinko machine 1 etc. including not only the notch portion 553aa but also island facilities etc., it is prevented that such foreign matter adheres to the panel relay board 1710A. The risk of failure of the relay board 1710A can be reduced.

  Further, the panel relay substrate 1710A may be provided on a plurality of substrates instead of a single substrate. When the panel relay board 1710A is divided into a plurality of parts, all the boards may be provided in the area B, or may be separately arranged in the areas A and B. For example, in the case where a plurality of panel relay boards 1710A are divided into a panel relay board 1710A1 and a panel relay board 1710A2 so as to have different board areas, a board having a large board area and a high possibility of foreign matter adhesion (for example, panel relay board 1710A1) For a substrate (for example, the panel relay substrate 1710A2) that is arranged in the highly safe region B and has a small substrate area and a low possibility of adhering foreign matter (for example, the panel relay substrate 1710A2), a portion sufficiently separated from the notch 553aa on the region A side ( For example, you may make it arrange | position in the lower right part etc. of the rear side of the game panel 1100.

[4-11. Positional relationship between tank rail cutout and drawer connector]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are electrically connected via a predetermined relay board. The game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 as such a relay board. It is also possible to provide a drawer connector DCN that can directly connect the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 without any additional wiring work. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 61, when the main body frame 4 is viewed from the front, each terminal is on the front side of the main body frame 4 on the lower right side of the front surface of the main body frame 4 (lower left side when the main body frame 4 is viewed from the back surface). A body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is provided so as to face. Further, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, the game is such that each terminal faces the back side of the game board 5 on the lower right side of the rear surface of the game board 5 (lower left side when the game board 5 is viewed from the back side). A panel-side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 is provided. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 Each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 and each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 are electrically connected.

  In addition, two sets of drawer connectors comprising a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and a game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 are provided. Depending on one drawer connector DCN, the game board 5 drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, thereby providing the main board 5 A control signal line for transmitting various control signals by the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4 is formed. In addition, depending on the other drawer connector DCN, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, so that the game board 5 Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals and detection signals by the peripheral control board 1510 provided, the decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, various sensors, various speakers, and the like are formed.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are like the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In the same manner as the panel relay board 1710A described above, it is provided in the area B which is the area where the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553 is provided. That is, in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, foreign matters such as metal powder fall from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. It is provided not in the area A that is easily affected, but in the area B that is not easily affected by the falling of foreign matter such as metal powder from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. More specifically, with respect to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 Within the frame 4, it is provided at the position of the region B farthest from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. As described above, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are provided not in the area A but in the area B, so that the tank rail 553 is provided. Prevent foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the main body frame 4 from adhering to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 The failure risk of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 can be reduced.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the game board attachment portion 301, which is the part of the main body frame 4 where the game board 5 should be attached, is opened. Thus, no member is provided between the tank rail 553 and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4. Further, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, foreign matters such as metal powder collected on the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 are likely to fall due to the impact to be removed. In this respect, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is provided not in the area A but in the area B, so that each terminal is exposed when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4. Although it is in a state, foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is prevented from adhering to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4, and the body frame of the body frame 4 The risk of failure of the side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (B), when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, an effect display device 1600, a peripheral control unit 1500, a drive board unit 1700, and a main control unit 1300 provided on the game board 5 are connected to the tank rail 553. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are provided in the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. To the front side of the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined distance P1. The notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided on the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. That is, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are separated from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to the region B, the pachinko machine 1 is provided at a position separated from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 by a predetermined interval P1 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. Thus, with respect to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, the notch portion of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 Since it is located at a predetermined distance P1 from 553aa, not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, but also when the game board 5 is not attached, metal powder or the like that has fallen from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 Foreign matter is prevented from adhering to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, and the main body frame side drawer connector (recessed) The risk of failure of the type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 can be reduced.

  In this example, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are connected to the pachinko machine 1 from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Although it is provided at a position separated by a predetermined interval P1 toward the front side, a position separated from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 by a predetermined interval P1 ′ (for example, on the main body frame side) The ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 may be provided directly above the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2. Even in such a configuration, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are separated by the tank rail 553 in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 1. Since it is located away from the notch 553aa by a predetermined interval P1 ′, the same effect as described above can be obtained. Further, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are directed from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. When it is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance P1 ′, the ball tank 552 does not exist immediately above the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2. Not only foreign material such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the rail 553, but also the game ball B and the like overflowing from the ball tank 552 are drawn on the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex) Type), the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 and the game of the game board 5 It is possible to further reduce the failure risk of side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2. Further, a new risk (from outside) due to the absence of any member of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 immediately above the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2. Taking account of foreign matter dropping etc., means for covering foreign bodies from the outside by covering the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 (back cover 640 etc.) ) Is preferably provided separately from the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553.

  Also, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 is provided in a box-shaped body having a rectangular opening so that the opening of the box-shaped body faces the front side of the body frame 4. However, in more detail, when the main body frame 4 is seen from the back surface, the opening of the box-shaped main body is provided so as to face slightly to the left. That is, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 is such that, in the region B, the opening of the box-shaped body does not face the region A side, and faces the side opposite to the region A. Is provided. Thus, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 does not face the region A where the foreign matter such as metal powder is likely to fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Since the opening of the box-shaped main body is provided, the foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached. However, it becomes difficult to enter from the opening of the box-shaped main body in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, and the risk of failure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is reduced. Can do.

  The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 is provided such that a box-shaped body having a rectangular opening is vertically long (the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction). In other words, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 has a vertically long box-shaped body (vertical) in the region B compared to the case where the box-shaped body is horizontally long (the left-right direction is the longitudinal direction). When the direction is the longitudinal direction), the area of the upper surface of the box-shaped main body can be reduced. Thus, for the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4, the upper surface of the box-shaped body that is easily affected by the falling of foreign matter such as metal powder from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 becomes smaller. Since the box-shaped main body is provided as described above, foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached. It becomes difficult to adhere to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the frame 4, and the risk of failure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 can be reduced.

  In the region B, the first flange 551da provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends to the lower side of the ball tank 552, and the main body frame side drawer connector (recessed) Type) Since it is located above the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of DCN1 and game board 5, not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened, Foreign matter such as metal powder falling to the outside from the guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to the first flange portion 551da, and foreign matter such as metal powder dropped to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa. However, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 which are located on the lower left side thereof. It can be suppressed to fall toward DCN2. In addition, since the first flange portion 551da is provided in the main body frame 4, not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached, the main guide is provided via the notch 553aa. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the portion 553a can be received and adhered to the first flange portion 551da, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa. Further, it is possible to prevent the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 located on the lower left side and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 from falling. Thus, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 provided in the region B are not stored in the board box. However, the first brim portion 551da can prevent the adhesion of foreign substances such as metal powder.

  In addition, although the case where the 1st collar part 551da comprises a collar part was demonstrated as a structure of foreign material countermeasures, such as metal powder which concerns on 1st Embodiment, the above measures against foreign substances, such as metal powder which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. When the first collar portion 551da and the second collar portion 640a are connected to form the collar portion jointly as in the configuration of FIG. 5, the configuration of the countermeasure against foreign matter such as metal powder according to the third embodiment is used. When the first collar part 551da constitutes the collar part, the first collar part 551da is not provided and the second collar part 640a is independently provided as the collar part as in the configuration of measures against foreign matters such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. Any of the cases may be used. That is, in the region B, the flange portion provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends to the lower side of the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553, and the main body frame 4 It may be configured to be positioned above the side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, and at least when the back cover 640 is closed, the main drawer via the notch 553aa. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to the collar portion, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 located at the lower left. It can be suppressed to fall toward DCN2. Accordingly, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 provided in the region B are not stored in the board box. Although it exists, it can prevent that adhesion of foreign materials, such as metal powder, generate | occur | produces with a collar part.

  In the above description, the flange portion of the region A provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is configured to extend to the lower portion of the ball tank 552 in the region B. A foreign object such as metal powder that has dropped from the main guide part 553a to the collar part of the area A through the notch part 553aa moves to the area B side without providing a collar part below the ball tank 552. You may comprise so that the movement prevention part to prevent may be provided. For example, what is necessary is just to comprise so that the collar part of the area | region A provided below the notch part 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be bent toward the upper direction in the boundary of the area | region A and the area | region B. Even in such a configuration, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the flange portion of the region A through the notch portion 553aa does not move to the region B side, but moves to the region B side. It can suppress falling toward the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5. Accordingly, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 provided in the region B are not stored in the board box. Although it exists, it can prevent that foreign materials, such as metal powder, adhere | attach by the movement prevention part which prevents moving to the collar part of the area | region A, and the area | region B side.

  When the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the game board mounting portion 301, which is the part of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 should be attached, is opened, and the main body frame 4 side of the main body frame 4 is opened. Although the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 can be visually recognized, a predetermined area around the installation of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is painted in black. Thereby, before attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, it is possible to clearly see whether foreign matter such as metal powder is attached around the installation of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN 1. If foreign matter such as metal powder adheres, it can be removed from the surroundings of the installation, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it adheres to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1. And the risk of failure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 can be reduced.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided with a game board mounting portion 501c that forms the lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed, and is provided with a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1. Is located behind the game board mounting portion 501c, but between the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board mounting portion 501c, as shown in FIG. A protrusion 501z is provided as a step so that the installation position of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is higher than the game board mounting portion 501c. Further, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the lower surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is attached so as to move from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c. It is done. Therefore, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4 and there is a foreign object such as metal powder on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c, the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The foreign matter is pushed out from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c, and the pushed foreign matter is located behind the game board placement portion 501c. (Concave type) It can suppress moving toward DCN1. As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is located behind the game board mounting portion 501c, but prevents foreign matter from adhering due to a step difference from the game board mounting portion 501c. Can do.

[4-12. Positional relationship between tank rail notch and external terminal board]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the external terminal plate 558 that is electrically connected to the hall computer installed on the game hall side is provided above the tank rail 553, but the position where the external terminal plate 558 is provided. May be provided below the tank rail 553. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

  As shown in FIG. 63, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, an external terminal plate 558 is provided below the tank rail 553 so that each terminal faces the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side by connecting to the wiring from the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  Further, the external terminal board 558 is provided on the side where the tank rail 553 is provided, like the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. It is provided in region A, which is a region. That is, the external terminal plate 558 is not in the region B where the foreign matter such as metal powder is unlikely to fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, but the foreign matter such as metal powder falls from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. It is provided in the area A that is easily affected. In contrast, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 provided in the area A are respectively housed in the board box. Since the external terminal plate 558 needs to be connected to the wiring from the game hall side, the external terminal plate 558 is not stored in the board box, and the connection terminal of the wiring is exposed.

  In this regard, in the area A, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the external terminal board 558, and the panel drive of the drive board unit 1700 are sequentially arranged from the top on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100). A board 1720 and a main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are provided. That is, the peripheral control unit 1500 having the peripheral control board 1510 is provided between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558. The external terminal board 558 is formed to have a width smaller than that of the board box that houses the peripheral control board 1510, and does not protrude in the left-right direction with respect to the width of the board box that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is provided below the peripheral control unit 1500. As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 having the peripheral control board 1510 is provided for the boards such as the external terminal board 558 which require wiring connection work and is difficult to be accommodated in the board box, although the wiring connection terminals are exposed. By being provided directly below the unit 1500, it is possible to prevent foreign matters such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the external terminal plate 558, and to reduce the risk of failure of the external terminal plate 558. Can do.

  As described above, since the peripheral control unit 1500 having the peripheral control board 1510 is provided between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558, the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided in the periphery of the external terminal plate 558. The control board 1510 is located closer to the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. For this reason, for example, when a foreign matter such as metal powder continues to fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, the foreign material such as metal powder may adhere to the peripheral control board 1510 rather than the external terminal plate 558. Therefore, there is a high possibility that an electrical trouble will occur in the peripheral control board 1510 before an electrical trouble occurs in the external terminal board 558.

  The board provided between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558 is different from the peripheral control board 1510 except for the main control board 1310 that affects the progress of the game itself. Other substrates may be used. For example, the door frame 3 is provided with a dummy movable body that performs a predetermined operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a certain time elapses), and the driving force is applied to the dummy movable body with the peripheral control board 1510. Is provided between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558, and the dummy substrate is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 before an electrical trouble occurs. You may comprise so that possibility that a trouble may generate | occur | produce becomes high. When an electrical trouble occurs in such a dummy substrate, the fact that the dummy movable body stops moving and then an electrical trouble is likely to occur in the external terminal board 558 is transmitted to the outside. Can do. Further, the substrate provided between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558 is not limited to one substrate, and may be a plurality of substrates.

  Here, the external terminal board 558 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side, the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by the hall computer, game information of the pachinko machine 1 and the like. However, if an electrical trouble occurs on the external terminal board 558, it becomes impossible to monitor the player's game by the hall computer, and the pachinko machine 1 Even if cheating is performed, there is a problem that the hall manager cannot grasp on the game hall side. Exploiting these characteristics, for example, a fraudulent person impacts the pachinko machine 1 to intentionally drop a foreign substance such as metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, and the external terminal board. There is a concern that an electrical trouble may be generated in 558 so that game monitoring by the hall computer can be performed, and then some sort of fraud is performed. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the main control board 1310, the presentation operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the presentation display device 1600, etc. When the event occurs, while the game can be progressed on the main control board 1310, various effects such as a light effect, a sound effect, a movable effect by various decorative boards, and a display effect by the effect display device 1600 are executed. There is a problem that cannot be done. In this regard, for example, when a foreign matter such as metal powder continues to drop from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, first, an electrical trouble is caused in the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 By making various performances in a non-execution state, the fact that a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 is notified to the outside. In other words, during the period when electrical trouble has occurred in the peripheral control board 1510, various effects by the peripheral control board 1510 are in a non-executed state, so that it is difficult for the pachinko machine 1 to perform illegal acts. . In this way, when an electrical trouble occurs, first, an electrical trouble is generated in the peripheral control board 1510, while preventing an electrical trouble from occurring in the external terminal board 558, It is possible to take measures to prevent a situation in which an illegal act is performed on the pachinko machine 1 during a period when an electrical trouble occurs in the external terminal board 558.

  The external terminal plate 558 is provided in a region A on the side where the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. As described above in detail, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, the opening / closing axis of the main body frame 4 (the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520) is connected to the right end portion of the region A. To be provided. That is, the area A closer to the opening / closing axis of the main body frame 4 than the area B (the area A farther from the open end side than the area B) is accessed from the outside as compared to the area B when the main body frame 4 is opened. It is a difficult area. In this regard, the external terminal board 558 is provided in the region A that is difficult to access from the outside, making it difficult for an unauthorized person to access the external terminal board 558. Thereby, it is possible to allow a fraudulent person to perform game monitoring by the hall computer and to prevent any fraudulent action from being performed. The external terminal board 558 is connected to the wiring provided in the island facility in order to be electrically connected to the hall computer. The wiring provided in the island facility is the same as when the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The tank rail 553 hangs down from the upper side toward the region A on which the notch 553aa is provided, and the external terminal plate 558 is provided in the region A in consideration of the connection with such wiring. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 64, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, an effect display device 1600, a peripheral control unit 1500, a drive board unit 1700, and a main control unit 1300 provided on the game board 5 are located below the tank rail 553. In contrast, the external terminal plate 558 provided on the game board 5 is provided at a position separated from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined interval P2. Yes. The notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided on the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. That is, the external terminal plate 558 is the region A on the side where the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, but the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. Is provided at a position separated by a predetermined interval P2. As described above, the external terminal plate 558 is positioned so as to be separated from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 by a predetermined interval P2 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, and thus falls from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be prevented from adhering to the external terminal plate 558, and the failure risk of the external terminal plate 558 can be reduced.

  Also, a terminal cover 551k whose upper surface extends horizontally so as to cover the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is provided on the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. ing. Since this terminal cover 551k is located on the upper side of the external terminal plate 558, the terminal cover 551k falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be received and adhered to the terminal cover 551k, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch 553aa is located below the terminal cover 551k. It can suppress falling toward. As a result, the terminal cover 551k is provided in the region A where the foreign matter such as metal powder is likely to fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in a state where it is not housed in the board box. The cover 551k can prevent adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder. The terminal cover 551k may be provided integrally with the external terminal plate 558 or may be provided on the substrate holder 1200 to which the external terminal plate 558 is attached.

  In this example, the external terminal plate 558 is provided below the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 below the tank rail 553, but the position where the external terminal plate 558 is provided is described above. A board having a wiring connection terminal exposed, such as a panel relay board 1710A, that is, a board that requires wiring connection work and is difficult to be accommodated in a board box may be provided. Even in this case, the same effect as that in the case where the external terminal plate 558 is provided can be obtained.

  In the region A, the first flange 551da provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is located above the external terminal plate 558. That is, in the region A, the first flange portion 551da is located between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558. As described above, in the region A, the first cover portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. When the back cover 640 is opened as well as when the back cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the first flange portion 551da, It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as metal powder that have fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa from dropping toward the external terminal plate 558 located therebelow. As a result, the external terminal plate 558 is provided in the region A where the foreign matter such as metal powder is likely to fall from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in a state where it is not housed in the substrate box. The first brim portion 551da can prevent adhesion of foreign matters such as metal powder.

  In addition, although the case where the 1st collar part 551da comprises a collar part was demonstrated as a structure of foreign material countermeasures, such as metal powder which concerns on 1st Embodiment, the above measures against foreign substances, such as metal powder which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. When the first collar portion 551da and the second collar portion 640a are connected to form the collar portion jointly as in the configuration of FIG. 5, the configuration of the countermeasure against foreign matter such as metal powder according to the third embodiment is used. When the first collar part 551da constitutes the collar part, the first collar part 551da is not provided and the second collar part 640a is independently provided as the collar part as in the configuration of measures against foreign matters such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. Any of the cases may be used. That is, in the region A, the flange provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to be positioned above the external terminal plate 558, and at least when the back cover 640 is closed. Metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the collar portion, and the metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa Or the like can be prevented from falling toward the external terminal board 558 located below the foreign substance. As a result, the external terminal plate 558 is provided in the region A where the foreign matter such as metal powder is likely to fall from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in a state where it is not housed in the substrate box. It can prevent that foreign material adhesion, such as metal powder, generate | occur | produces with a collar part.

[4-13. Suppression of metal powder movement when a game board is installed]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 by providing the protruding portion 501z in front of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. You may make it suppress the movement of foreign materials, such as metal powder. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 includes a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically and a little higher than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side in a range of about 3/4 of the total height from the lower position and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b are formed. A game board placement unit 501c on which the cage game board 5 is placed, and a game board that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear And a restriction portion 501d. The game board 5 side (game panel 1100) is formed with a notched portion corresponding to the game board restricting portion 501d, and the game board 5 is inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b at the correct position. In this case, there is no restriction by the game board restricting unit 501d, but when the game board 5 is inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b at a position that is not correct (position shifted to the left or right), the game board restricting part 501d. So that the game board 5 cannot be inserted.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is provided with a discharge ball receiving portion 628 that can discharge the game ball B to the outside. As shown in FIG. 66 (B), the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is positioned directly below the discharge portion 1201 of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged to the outside through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66A, in the main body frame 4, the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is located behind the game board mounting portion 501c, but the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the game A flat plate-like projecting portion 501z projecting upward from the rear end of the game board placing portion 501c is provided between the board placing portion 501c and the board placing portion 501c. That is, the protruding portion 501z is located in front of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and protrudes to a position higher than the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c. Thereby, the protrusion part 501z can restrict | limit the movement to the back of the lower end of the game board 5 with the game board control part 501d. As shown in FIG. 66 (B), when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the lower surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is viewed from the front side on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c. It is attached to move toward the rear side. Therefore, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, if there is foreign matter such as dust or metal powder on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501 c, the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. In such a case, such foreign matter is pushed out from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c, and the pushed foreign matter is a discharge ball located behind the game board placement portion 501c. It can suppress moving toward the receiving part 628. Thereby, although the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is located behind the game board placing portion 501c, the protruding portion 501z can prevent foreign matters such as dust and metal powder from entering.

  The protrusion 501z described above extends in the left-right direction by the same length as the longitudinal direction of the game board mounting portion 501c while maintaining the same height with respect to the rear end of the game board mounting portion 501c. ing. Further, the protruding portion 501z is configured to be higher than the height of the game board restricting portion 501d. For example, the height of the protruding portion 501z may be one or more heights of the game ball B. In such a case, even if the game ball B is on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c, When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the game ball B enters the discharge ball receiving part 628 side (the back side of the pachinko machine 1) located behind the game board mounting part 501 c. This can be prevented.

  The protrusion 501z is formed of a single color resin member such as black or white. Thereby, before attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, it is possible to clearly see whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder is attached to the protruding portion 501z, and foreign matter such as metal powder is attached. If the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it can be prevented from entering the discharge ball receiving portion 628 located behind the protrusion 501z by removing it from the protrusion 501z. . The protruding portion 501z is formed of a resin member that is an insulator. Thereby, foreign matter such as metal powder as a conductor can be easily attached to the protruding portion 501z. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, such foreign matter is placed on the game board. Even if it is pushed from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the part 501c, it does not scatter and is on the discharge ball receiving part 628 side (the back side of the pachinko machine 1) located behind the game board mounting part 501c. It is possible to prevent entry.

  The protruding portion 501z of this example protrudes upward from the rear end of the game board mounting portion 501c between the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c, and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and Although it is provided so as to protrude to a position higher than the game board mounting part 501c, the game board mounting part is not limited to this, and is provided between the discharge ball receiving part 628 and the game board mounting part 501c. Any structure may be used as long as a level difference higher than the 501c by a predetermined height is provided. For example, the discharge ball receiving portion 628 may be provided at a position above the step. Even with such a level difference, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder pushed out from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c is It is possible to suppress movement toward the discharge ball receiving portion 628 located behind the placement portion 501c, and it is possible to prevent foreign matters such as metal powder from entering the discharge ball receiving portion 628. .

  Note that the game board placing portion 501c is positioned forward of the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, but is positioned below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. For this reason, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, there is no blocking member like the game board 5 between the notch part 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the game board mounting part 501c. There is a possibility that a foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 adheres to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c. In this regard, even when foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board placement portion 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the game board placement Since the projecting portion 501z is provided between the base plate 501c and the game board 5, the foreign matter such as metal powder attached to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c is discharged from the ball. It can suppress moving toward the part 628, and can prevent foreign materials, such as metal powder, from entering the discharge ball receiving part 628.

  In addition, the out-port sensor 3032 that detects the game ball B collected from the out-port 1008 is provided on a path from the out-port 1008 to the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 side. However, after the game ball B is discharged from the discharge unit 1201, it may be provided on the main body frame 4 side in a path from the discharge ball receiving unit 628 to the outside. In such a case, when a foreign substance such as metal powder enters from the discharge ball receiving portion 628, the foreign substance such as metal powder adheres to the out port sensor 3032 and the game ball B collected from the out port 1008 cannot be counted normally. there is a possibility. Further, the number of game balls B detected by the outlet sensor 3032 is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. If the outlet sensor 3032 is not operating normally, the game balls B collected from the outlet 1008 are displayed. It becomes difficult to display the number of balls normally. In this regard, even when foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board mounting part 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the discharge ball receiving part 628 and the game board mounting Since the projecting portion 501z is provided between the base plate 501c and the game board 5, the foreign matter such as metal powder attached to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c is discharged from the ball. It can be prevented from attaching to the outlet sensor 3032 through the portion 628, and electrical troubles such as erroneous counting of the game ball B by the outlet sensor 3032 can be prevented.

  In the main body frame 4, a payout control having a power supply unit 620 c having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633 at a position behind the game board placing portion 501 c and further behind the discharge ball receiving portion 628. A unit 620d and an interface unit 620e having an inter-interface board 635 are provided. In this regard, even when foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, the interface unit Since the protruding portion 501z is provided between 620e and the game board mounting portion 501c, the metal powder adhered to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. It is possible to suppress the movement of foreign matter such as the power source unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e. Thereby, although the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are located behind the game board mounting part 501c, the metal powder or the like pushed out from the game board mounting part 501c by the protruding part 501z Can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 620, the payout control board 633, and the inter-interface board 635, and the risk of failure of those boards can be reduced.

[4-14. Measures against metal powder on power supply board]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the power supply board 630 is positioned below the tank rail 553. However, a protrusion 630h is provided so as to cover the upper side of the power supply board 630, and the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided. You may comprise so that foreign materials, such as metal powder which fell from, may not adhere. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

  As described above, the board unit 620 includes the base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, and the power supply unit 620c. The payout control unit 620d attached to the right side after the front view and the interface unit 620e attached to the left side after the front view of the power supply unit 620c are provided. The power supply unit 620c includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 (not shown) of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 (B), in the main body frame 4, at the position below the tank rail 553, a power supply unit 620c having a power supply board 630, a payout control unit 620d having a payout control board 633, an interface An interface unit 620e having an interface board 635 is provided. When these units are viewed from the side, the payout control unit 620d having the payout control board 633 and the interface unit 620e having the inter interface board 635 are located directly below the tank rail 553, whereas the power supply board. The power supply unit 620 c having 630 is positioned slightly forward of the tank rail 553.

  In addition, the base unit 620b attached to the power supply unit 620c protrudes upward from the vicinity of the rear end thereof, bends backward from a predetermined height, and horizontally extends so as to cover the upper side of the power supply unit 620c. A protruding portion 630h is provided. The protrusion 630h is formed such that the rear end of the upper surface is behind the rear end of the power supply unit 620c, and the left and right ends of the upper surface are longer than the length of the power supply unit 620c in the longitudinal direction. It is formed as follows. Further, the protrusion 630h is formed so that the rear end of the upper surface thereof is located behind the rear end of the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. The notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided on the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. Thus, since the upper side of the power supply unit 620c is covered by the protruding portion 620h, not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened, the main guide portion 553a is externally connected through the cutout portion 553aa. Foreign matter such as metal powder falling on the upper surface of the protrusion 630h can be received and attached to the protrusion 630h, and foreign matter such as metal powder falling to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch 553aa It can suppress falling toward the power supply unit 620c located on the lower side of the upper surface. The power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c is provided with a plurality of holes for dissipating heat generated from the power supply board 630. As described above, the power supply unit 620c is provided with a plurality of holes in the power supply board cover 631, but the protrusion 630h is positioned so as to cover the upper side of the power supply unit 620c. It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as metal powder falling from 553aa from adhering to the power supply substrate 630, and to reduce the risk of failure of the power supply substrate 630.

  The protrusion 630h described above is formed of a single color resin member such as black or white. Thereby, before and after mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, it is possible to clearly see whether foreign matter such as metal powder is attached to the protruding portion 630 h, and foreign matter such as metal powder is attached. In this case, by removing from the protrusion 630h, it is possible to prevent adhesion to the power supply substrate 630 of the power supply unit 620c located below the protrusion 630h. The protrusion 630h is formed of a resin member that is an insulator. As a result, foreign matter such as metal powder that is a conductor can be easily attached to the protruding portion 630h, and such foreign matter is scattered toward the power supply unit 620c located below the protruding portion 630h. Without being attached to the power supply board 630.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (A), the protruding portion 630h is provided not on the game board 5 side but on the main body frame 4 side, similarly to the power supply unit 620c. That is, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, there is no game board 5 between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c, but the upper side of the power supply unit 620c. Since the projecting portion 630h is positioned so as to cover the main frame 4, it is dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be received and attached on the upper surface of the projection 630h, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch 553aa It can suppress falling toward the power supply unit 620c located on the lower side. Thereby, as for the power supply unit 620c, although the plurality of holes are provided in the power supply board cover 631, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630 due to the protruding portion 630h. .

  The protrusion 630h is formed not only on the upper side of the power supply unit 620c but also on the payout control unit 620d and the upper part of the interface unit 620e located behind the power supply unit 620c. It may be formed so as to cover the entire upper side of the unit 620d and the interface unit 620e. In such a case, with respect to the payout control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e as well, foreign matter such as metal powder is attached to the payout control board 633 and the interinterface board 635 by the protruding portion 630h formed so as to cover the upper side thereof. This can be prevented. The protruding portion 630h may be formed so as to cover only the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, and in addition to the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, either one of the upper side of the payout control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e. It may be formed so as to cover only.

  In addition, a first flange 551da provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is positioned above the power supply unit 620c. That is, the first flange 551da is located between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c. Thus, since the first flange 551da is located between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c, not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached to the first flange portion 551da, and can be attached to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa. It is possible to suppress foreign matters such as metal powder falling to the power source unit 620c located below the metal powder. As a result, for the power supply unit 620c, although the plurality of holes are provided in the power supply board cover 631, it is possible to prevent foreign substances such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630 by the first flange portion 551da. Can do.

  In addition, although the case where the 1st collar part 551da comprises a collar part was demonstrated as a structure of foreign material countermeasures, such as metal powder which concerns on 1st Embodiment, the above measures against foreign substances, such as metal powder which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. When the first collar portion 551da and the second collar portion 640a are connected to form the collar portion jointly as in the configuration of FIG. 5, the configuration of the countermeasure against foreign matter such as metal powder according to the third embodiment is used. When the first collar part 551da constitutes the collar part, the first collar part 551da is not provided and the second collar part 640a is independently provided as the collar part as in the configuration of measures against foreign matters such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. Any of the cases may be used. In other words, the power supply unit 620c may be configured such that a flange provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is positioned above the power supply unit 620c, and at least when the back cover 640 is closed, the notch 553aa is interposed. Foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside can be received and attached to the collar portion, and foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the notch portion 553aa It can suppress falling toward the power supply unit 620c located therebelow. As a result, for the power supply unit 620c, although a plurality of holes are provided in the power supply board cover 631, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from attaching to the power supply board 630 due to the flange.

  Further, when the back cover 640 is closed, the back cover 640 and the power supply unit 620c are separated by a predetermined distance in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, but the upper end of the power supply unit 620c is more than the lower end of the back cover 640. It is located so that it may become upper. Also from this point, when the back cover 640 is closed, the foreign matter such as metal powder that has dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the notch 553aa is positioned so that the upper end is higher than the lower end of the back cover 640. It can suppress falling toward the power supply unit 620c. As a result, for the power supply unit 620c, although a plurality of holes are provided in the power supply board cover 631, it is possible to prevent foreign matters such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the power supply board 630. In addition, the risk of failure of the power supply board 630 can be reduced.

  The protrusion 630h is formed to protrude upward from the vicinity of the rear end of the base unit 620b and to have a vertical surface. That is, in the main body frame 4, the power supply unit having the power supply board 630 at a position behind the projecting portion 501z projecting from the rear end of the game board mounting portion 501c and further behind the vertical surface of the projecting portion 630h. A payout control unit 620d having a payout control board 633 and an interface unit 620e having an inter interface board 635 are provided. As described above in detail, even when a foreign object such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board placement part 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the game board placement part 501c By providing the projecting portion 501z projecting from the end, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, such a foreign object is placed on the side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 located behind the projecting portion 501z (power source The unit 620c and the like are prevented from entering. At this time, even if a foreign object such as metal powder enters rearward of the protrusion 501z, the vertical surface of the protrusion 630h, which is a separate member, is provided at a position behind the protrusion 501z. Thus, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, it is possible to prevent such foreign matter from moving to the power supply unit 620c or the like located behind the vertical surface of the protruding portion 630h. . In other words, not only the protrusions 501z but also the vertical surfaces of the protrusions 630h, which are separate members, have a foreign object such as metal powder pushed out from the game board mounting part 501c when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4. It functions as a member that suppresses movement toward the power supply unit 620c and the like. As a result, foreign matter such as metal powder pushed out from the game board mounting portion 501c is prevented from doublely adhering to the power supply board 620, the payout control board 633, and the inter-interface board 635, and the failure risk of those boards is reduced. Can be reduced. In the above description, the protruding portion 501z is provided in front of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. You may comprise so that only a vertical surface may be provided.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a front view of a game board in which a game panel or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 68 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 67 viewed from the front right, FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 67 viewed from the left front, and FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the gaming board viewed from the rear. FIG. 71 is a schematic explanatory diagram of the routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 72 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board with the game panel and the like made transparent.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 111 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a gate unit that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a special winning port 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 receives or passes the game ball B in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. As described above, the game 111 is for performing a game to entertain the driving operation of the handle 111 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 77 and the like) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 156, 111, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and has a function display unit 1400 which is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 The driving board unit 1700, the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 are further provided.

  An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. A frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 75 and the like) that is attached to the rear side and to which the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

  The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit according to a command from the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510. A panel drive board 1720 for driving the decorative board and the drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 for housing the panel relay board 1710 and the panel drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 so that the left side of the back view can be rotated by a hinge, and the right side of the drive board box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning holes 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive a game ball B that has been driven into the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning holes 2001 are a gaming area. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; According to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200 which is attached to the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start opening unit 2100 in the front view and has two general winning ports 2001, and the start which is the lower right corner in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. From an attacker unit 2400 that is attached to the right of the front unit 2100 in front view and has one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005, a starting port unit 2100, and a side unit 2200 Is a frame having a gate portion 2003 that is attached slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. And includes the center role object 2500, the.

  The start port unit 2100 includes a first start port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 and a second that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. A start opening sensor 2402 and a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 are provided. The center accessory 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism acting illegally.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall in the shape of a box attached to the rear face of the panel holder 1120 and opened forward. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 111). See).

  The back unit 3000 includes a back first effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back second effect unit 3200 attached in the back box 3010 behind the back first effect unit 3100. The back third stage production unit 3300 attached in the back box 3010 behind the back second stage production unit 3200, and the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 installed in front of the back second stage production unit 3200 The back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 and releases it downward, and the game received in the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005 of the attacker unit 2400. A back right sphere discharge unit 3040 for receiving the sphere B and releasing it downward.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 75B is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

  The front component member 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left side in front view, and the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side thereof is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000 and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is provided with an out port 1008 penetrating front and rear at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the center lower portion in the left-right direction in front view in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch are passed through the lower full ball path. Front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. Yes.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is substantially entirely formed transparent, and the panel plate 1110 and the like of the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 that is formed to be slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and made of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated in the left-right direction at a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole penetrating forward and backward and a short long hole, and an upper edge and a lower edge, respectively. A plurality of engaging step portions having a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset from the center to the upper right in front view. Thereby, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the frame-shaped circumferential direction) is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The ball B is wide enough to be lined up, and the upper and right sides are narrow enough that a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step (not shown) that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. A through-hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step portion and is disposed outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins that are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, respectively. Three engaging claws that are elastically engaged with the engaging step portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and projecting upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. A pair of engaging pieces that respectively engage with the two engaging step portions on the lower side of the. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left side by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally upper front. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached in a state in which the panel plate 1110 is accommodated in the holding step portion by elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion that is in place with the engaging claw. At this time, the projecting pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 72 and FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and front open, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 73 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 for controlling game content and payout of the game ball B, a setting change board 1311 for setting game performance, a main control board 1310, and a setting change board 1311. And a main control board box 1320 attached to the board holder 1200.

  In a state where the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from behind, a rectangular main control board 1310 that is long in the left-right direction is a left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, In the area surrounded by the upper side, the right side, and the lower side, the area is formed so as to occupy about 4/5 of the area from the left side to the right side, and the remaining 1/5 of the area. A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner area where the upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

  As described above, the outer frame 2 rotates on the same axis between the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side when viewed from the front, the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 are disposed. The left side of the main body frame 4 in front view is the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 in front view is the open side of the main body frame 4. Become. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4, whereas the main frame 4 has a pivot support side ( A setting change board 1311 is disposed on the closed side.

  Further, the back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Is. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640. Further, as described above, the back cover 640 is attached so that the right side in the front view is rotatable to the right end of the rear face of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around the vertically extending axis, and the left side in the front view is the payout Since it is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, the right side when viewed from the front is the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, The left side of the front view which is the opposite side is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

  In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are green resists except for various land patterns. On the other hand, as the resist for the setting change board 1311, white having a color different from that of the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted, and the entire surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting board 1311 are white. The resist is solid, except for various land patterns.

  Here, the point that a color different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are both boards accommodated in the main control board box 1320. The store manager of the game hall, the staff of the game hall, etc., is that the main control board 1310 is a board with high importance in terms of crime prevention, which controls the progress of the game (controls the game contents and the payout of the game ball B, etc.). Awareness about is very high. For this reason, it is not necessary to call out that the board is the main control board 1310 in distinction from other boards. On the other hand, since the setting change board 1311 is a board having a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1 that can set the gaming performance, although it is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, it is important for crime prevention. The awareness of the fact that it is a high substrate is very low. For this reason, it is necessary to alert the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311 separately from other boards.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, green, which is generally used as a resist for the substrate, is adopted as the resist for the main control board 1310, and white, which is different from the color adopted as the resist for the main control board 1310, is used as the resist for the setting change board 1311. Adopted. Thereby, among the boards accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 becomes conspicuous compared with the main control board 1310, and the setting change board 1311 in addition to the main control board 1310 is also highly important for crime prevention. It can contribute to raising the recognition about the point which is a board | substrate.

  In the above-described embodiment, the white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change board 1311. However, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be distinguished. If possible, yellow, red, blue, and transparent may be used.

  In the present embodiment described above, white that is different from green used as the resist for the main control board 1310 is used as the resist for the setting change board 1311, but instead of the resist for the setting change board 1311, It may be printed in white as silk printing so as to cover almost the entire surface (mounting surface) and / or back surface (solder surface), or as silk printing in any color of black, blue, yellow, and red You may print.

  Next, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. A main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are made of a polycarbonate resin and are transparently formed, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether unauthorized modification has been performed, Or, whether or not an illegal IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. Note that the cover body is formed with a plurality of heat radiating vents that can release the air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first start port sensor 2101, a gate sensor 2506, a second start port sensor 2402, a big winning port sensor 2403, a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, and a general winning port sensor. 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a magnetic sensor 2470, a vibration sensor 3005, and an out opening sensor 3032.

  The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting value. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection) (the harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) (Electrical wiring) may be electrically connected, and the force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a is absorbed (reduced) by the harness (electrical wiring) from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Can be difficult to reach). By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. In addition, the connector connection which is a board-to-board connection includes a connection using a normal connector not provided with a floating mechanism and a connection using a special connector provided with a floating mechanism. A normal connector not equipped with a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug into the socket. When the socket is fitted with the plug, In this structure, there is no amount of movement in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed in (for example, the vertical direction). In contrast, a special connector having a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the socket into the plug, and the socket is fitted with the plug. When mating, an error (fitting shaft misalignment) that occurs when the socket is pushed in by moving a predetermined distance range in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (for example, the vertical direction) can be absorbed. It has a structure. In this embodiment, a normal connector that does not include a floating mechanism is employed as a connector connection that is an inter-board connection. However, a special connector that includes a floating mechanism may be employed.

  The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with the distance dimension of one side being about one fifth of the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side thereof is the main control board 1310. Are arranged on the same straight line as the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the lower side thereof is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310.

  The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is disposed along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main control board 1310. And is arranged at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key at the center point where the center lines in the vertical and horizontal directions of the square setting change board 1311 intersect is disposed. The main control board 1310 is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) above the center line in the horizontal direction of the setting change board 1311 and near the connector MSCN. A setting indicator 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED indicator with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and in the vicinity of the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310 A base monitor 1310h is arranged which is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) from the center toward the right side.

  In the present embodiment, a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port extends in the vertical direction. In the position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion slot, and the setting key can be removed from the insertion slot. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot, and the outer frame 2 is attached. On the other hand, even if the main frame 4 is closed, other pachinko machine members (or members of the game hall island equipment) lined up opposite the island equipment in the game hall and the setting key do not interfere with each other. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so as not to be damaged.

  When the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turned ON, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON, and the setting key ON signal is sent to the setting change board 1311. To the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned OFF by turning 60 degrees counterclockwise. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  Although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320, it corresponds to the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. A wire intrusion prevention part is molded in the cover body with respect to the opening so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the opening. It has become a structure.

  The setting key switch 1311a accommodates a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key in a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing. A surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is arranged substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder provided with the insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the metal cylindrical shape ( Alternatively, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the casing of the rectangular shape is disposed substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. In a state where the setting key cylinder is housed in a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing, the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected. It has become.

  The setting key switch 1311a is provided with a circuit in the setting key cylinder that can take out (output) as a signal whether the setting key switch 1311a is in an ON state or an OFF state. The signal can be taken out (output) from a pair of opposed lead terminals protruding from the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. The circuit and the pair of opposing lead terminals provided in the setting key cylinder are electrically insulated from the setting key cylinder, and are electrically connected to the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a. Is electrically insulated.

  From the rear surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a, there is a pair of opposed lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder and a predetermined angle with a 90 degree rotation angle. A pair of opposing mounting plate pieces projecting are formed. The pair of opposing mounting plate pieces are respectively soldered on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 through the attachment long holes formed in the setting change board 1311 so that the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting change board 1311. It can be fixed to.

  Further, as described above, the insertion port for inserting the setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on the same plane as the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 when the setting change board 1311 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320. That is, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a does not protrude outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320.

  As a result, when the worker performs the work of mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility of the game hall, first, temporarily place it on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged when the temporarily placed game board 5 is stopped during work and the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and falls. Further, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or the periphery thereof. It is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged when the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and falls down during the work.

  Although the setting indicator 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is molded transparently as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed on the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed on the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

  In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the setting key switch 1311a is set as a route between the wiring pattern that transmits the setting key ON signal and the wiring pattern that transmits the setting key switch 1311a OFF signal. The change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed apart. Also on the main control board 1310, wiring patterns for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, wiring patterns for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and OFF of the setting key switch 1311a). Wiring patterns that carry the same signal) are also close to each other In addition to being formed (separated from each other), the routing from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is not close to each other (so that they are not separated from each other). Formed).

  Here, a procedure until the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is operated will be briefly described. In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, as described above, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the support side (closed side). Further, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640 as described above. Further, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side. That is, when the back cover 640 is opened, since the back cover opening side of the back cover 640 is the shaft support side (closed side) of the body frame 4, the body frame 4 is made larger than the outer frame 2 (about If it is not opened (close to 90 degrees), the open side of the back cover 640 interferes with the outer frame 2 so that the state where the back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 cannot be opened. In other words, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a in order to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 by a gap enough to insert an arm. Even if it is attempted to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the back cover 640 cannot be opened. That is, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 first sets the space for the outer frame 2 in order to secure a space where the back cover 640 can open the state where the back side of the game board 5 is covered. Therefore, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 large (approximately 90 degrees).

  Thus, since the setting change board 1311 is disposed on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, the setting change board 1311 is compared with the case where the setting change board 1311 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4. When a fraudster who tries to gain unauthorized access to the setting key switch 1311a uses an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a wire, the open side of the body frame 4 is between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted and fed from the side, the path from the opening side of the main body frame 4 to the setting key switch 1311a becomes long, and therefore it is necessary to feed the unauthorized tool deeply. As a result, the operation time during which an unauthorized tool is sent to the setting key switch 1311a also becomes longer, so that it is easy for a staff member such as a game hall clerk to find such an unauthorized act.

  Further, since the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640, the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311 a of the setting change board 1311 is covered with the back cover 640. Yes. As a result, a fraudulent person who tries to gain unauthorized access to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is located between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 using an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a wire. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted and fed from the open side of 4, the unauthorized tool is blocked by the back cover 640 before reaching the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. It is possible to prevent the switch 1311a from being inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder.

  Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered with the back cover 640. In order to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to perform an operation of opening the back cover 640. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to perform an operation of opening the main body frame 4 larger than the outer frame 2 (approximately 90 degrees). By accompanying such a plurality of operations, it is possible to increase the deterrence against unauthorized acts by unauthorized tools by increasing the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311.

  As described above, the back cover 640 is mounted so that the left side of the front view is pivotally supported by the back cover mounting portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600 so as to be opened and closed. The back cover 640 is fixed by screwing the lock screw 642 to the back cover mounting portion 601a, and the lock screw 642 is also arranged on the open side of the back cover 640, whereby the main body frame 4 is fixed. It is arrange | positioned at the axial support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 used as the opposite side to the open side. For this reason, an unauthorized person who attempts to gain unauthorized access to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 inserts an unauthorized tool between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4. Even if it is sent in, the path from the opening side of the main body frame 4 to the locking screw 642 of the back cover 640 becomes longer, so that it is necessary to send an unauthorized tool deeply. Also in this respect, since the operation time for sending an unauthorized tool to the locking screw 642 becomes longer, it is possible to make it easier for a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall to find such an unauthorized action, and a setting change board. By increasing the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of 1311, it is possible to increase deterrence against fraudulent acts by unauthorized tools.

  The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is disposed is housed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. ing. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged is accommodated in the payout control board box 632, and this payout control board box 632 is located behind the power supply board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Installed on the side. In this manner, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are separated from each other by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z on different boards and making the objects to which the boards are attached different. Can do. In the case where the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are collectively arranged on one board, it is only necessary to make an unauthorized modification to one board, which is not preferable for crime prevention. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different boards, and the configuration to which the board is attached is different, so that the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM are arranged. Security against the clear button 633z is improved.

  Note that the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) performs game preparation control and game control (the game control is performed following the game preparation control). The game preparation control is based on a signal from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in the first step (in step S14 in the main control side power-on process described later) in which the setting value can be changed. Subsequent to this determination and the processing of step S16A) and this first step, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (here, functions as a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value). The second step (the determination in step S216 in the setting change process to be described later, the process in step S218) can be switched based on the setting value. Subsequent to the game preparation control, the game control includes a main control side main process in a main control side power-on process described later, a main control side timer interrupt process described later, and the like.

  Although such a crime prevention capability can be improved, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different boards, and the setting key is adopted by adopting a configuration in which the objects to which the boards are attached are different. Since the switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, it is not particularly necessary to tell where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged. The staff of the game hall, the staff of the game hall, etc., may be unfamiliar and may be difficult to understand whether they are arranged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board box 1320 is provided with notation serving as location information that can tell the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Specifically, a seal that can tell the location of the RWM clear button 633z is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet. On this rectangular sheet, for example, a red translucent character (height: 7 mm) is printed as “RWM clear button (setting switch button) is on the dispensing control board”. ing. As a result, the arrangement location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switch button) can be communicated to the store manager of the game hall, the store staff of the game hall, etc., so the store manager of the game hall, store staff of the game hall, When the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the RWM clear button 633z can be easily found, so that the eyes are not turned. Therefore, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Note that this seal does not interfere with the visibility of the main control board 1310 even if it is affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Further, symbols such as arrows may be used instead of the characters printed on the rectangular sheet of the seal.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When the cover body of the substrate box 1320 is molded, a concave character or a convex character may be molded together (that is, the cover body and the character may be molded integrally). . Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The character (height: 7 mm) “RWM clear button (setting switch button) is on the payout control board” may be printed in white as silk print on the surface (mounting face) of the board 1311, or the payout control board 633 A character (height: 7 mm) “RWM clear button (setting switching button)” may be printed in white as silk printing on the front surface (mounting surface). The silk printing color may be the same color or different colors. In addition, symbols such as arrows may be used instead of characters to be silk-printed. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Mask the character part on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311 and remove the letter (height: 7 mm). The RWM clear button (setting change button) is on the payout control board. A character portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 633 and a letter (height: 7 mm) “RWM clear button (setting switching button)” may be formed by resist. The resist colors may be the same color, but different colors are preferable because the substrates can be distinguished. Further, a blank symbol in which a symbol such as an arrow is masked may be used instead of the blank character. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The same seal (the seal is a transparent rectangular sheet) on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 1310 or the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. For example, a red translucent character (high 7mm) may be affixed with "RWM clear button (setting switch button) is on the dispensing control board"), or red translucent on the surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633 A transparent rectangular sheet called “RWM clear button (setting switching button)” may be pasted with simple characters (height: 7 mm). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  In the above-described embodiment, a seal is affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Where the button 633z is arranged, the announcement sound may be played from various speakers, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a staff member such as a game hall manager or a game hall clerk operates the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 to display the effect display device 1600. Various setting screens are displayed, and an item for the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) is selected. As a result, the announcement sound “RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also functions as a setting switching button” tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located. An announcement image (which may be taken with a photograph) indicating the location of the RWM clear button 633z is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The store manager of the game hall, the store clerk of the game hall, etc., grasps the location of the RWM clear button 633z from the announcement sound and the announcement image, and then shuts off the power of the pachinko machine 1 and changes the setting value. It can be done smoothly. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is pasted on the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When the setting change is performed, the announcement sound may be played from various speakers where the RWM clear button 633z which also functions as a setting switching button is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing that can change and determine the setting value, Tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located under the control of the control board 1510 "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button. Set by operating the RWM clear button Please change the value "announcement sound repeatedly flows from various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement voice and proceeds with various processes based on the received predetermined command. Will be. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known. Note that, after such an announcement voice, an announcement voice that tells the operation method of the setting key after the set value is determined may be played from various speakers. Further, when the announcement sound is being played, an image “setting” may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the seal is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When the setting change is performed, the announcement sound may be played from various speakers where the RWM clear button 633z which also functions as a setting switching button is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing that can change and determine the setting value, Tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located under the control of the control board 1510 "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button. Set by operating the RWM clear button Please change the value "announcement sound repeatedly flows from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for a sticker attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. In addition, although such announcement sound repeatedly flows from various speakers, it is assumed that the content of the announcement sound is missed, and the sticker affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 before the next announcement sound starts to flow. Can be known where the RWM clear button 633z is arranged. In addition to “The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also functions as a setting switching button. Change the setting value by operating the RWM clear button.” You may make it guide the content which tells the place where the sticker which shows the location of a button is affixed. When the RWM clear button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement voice. Even if the person who changes the setting value has become accustomed to the setting value change due to the work, if the RWM clear button is operated immediately after starting the work, , The announcement voice can be stopped promptly, and if it is unavoidable that the work must be done after the game hall is started, the work should be started so that the player is not inconvenienced. When the RWM clear button is operated immediately, the announcement voice can be stopped promptly. Note that, after such an announcement voice, an announcement voice that tells the operation method of the setting key after the set value is determined may be played from various speakers. Further, when the announcement sound is being played, an image “setting” may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different boards, and the objects to which the boards are attached are also different, so that the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are different. However, if the crime prevention can be improved, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button (in this case, the setting switching button is switched from the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633). Functions can be removed). For example, the setting change board 1311 has a distance dimension in the vertical direction of the right side and the left side that is substantially the same as a distance dimension in the vertical direction of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the distance dimension in the left and right direction is the main control board 1310. A center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and a center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311; , Has a matching shape. That is, the setting change board 1311 has a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is disposed on the center line along the left side of the setting change board 1311 on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is A position serving as the center of the vertical distance dimension is arranged on the center line along the right side of the control board 1310. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder which is inserted below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and is rotated by inserting a setting key near the lower side of the setting change board 1311 is disposed. A setting switching button having a pressing operation unit is arranged above the center line and near the upper side of the setting change board 1311. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is disposed near the lower side of the same substrate as the setting change substrate 1311, whereas the setting switching buttons are disposed near the upper side and are spaced apart from each other. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are arranged separately from each other on the same board, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are collected on one board. Can be made difficult to perform unauthorized modification, so that the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are integrated on one board and arranged separately. Even if it is a thing, crime prevention can be improved.

  Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and the setting indicator 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. Here, the case where the setting value setting is changed will be briefly described first, and the case where the current setting value confirmation display is performed will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the set key is an important key that can be used to check the current set value that has been set. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

  When changing the set value, the main body frame relative to the outer frame 2 is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON. The “predetermined set value change permission condition” that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated needs to be satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting value checks the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), The operation of opening the main body frame 4 is performed, and then the setting key switch 1311a is inserted by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and turning it clockwise by 60 degrees. The setting key is turned ON, and then the power switch 630a is operated to operate the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

  A person who changes the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then attaches the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Next, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by inserting the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. Is set to ON. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. Thus, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is set among the current set values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the set key cylinder of the set key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. Is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the off state to the on state.

  When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, a detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is sent from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is input. Each time a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the main control MPU 1310a increases by one from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z. Then, when the set value 6 that is the maximum value is reached, the control returns to the set value 1 that is the initial value, increases by 1 again, and controls to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

  When a person who changes the setting value decides the setting value, the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a) is changed from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the setting key cylinder rotation position to be turned off, and turn it off. The setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and hides the setting value from the state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. The state is switched, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from a lighting state to a lighting state.

  The person who changes the setting of the setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value setting. To complete.

  When performing confirmation display of the set value currently set, the outer frame 2 can be used at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON. The “predetermined set value display permission condition” that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated needs to be satisfied. In other words, the person who performs the confirmation display of the set value that is actually set first checks that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the pachinko machine 1 is turned off) and then goes outside. To open the main body frame 4 with respect to the frame 2, and subsequently insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and then the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

  The person who confirms and displays the set value that is currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the pachinko machine 1 is turned off) and then the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. Thus, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is set among the current set values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the set key cylinder of the set key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. Displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state where the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the pressing operation is not performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

  When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set value completes the confirmation of the currently set value, the initial position is the original position from the rotational position of the set key cylinder where the set key switch 1311a is turned on. In order to return to the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), the turning operation is performed by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which it is not displayed.

  A person who confirms and displays the currently set value removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to set the current setting. Complete the confirmation display of the set value.

  In addition, as described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is that when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure in which an instantaneous power failure occurs), 2 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON. On the other hand, it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, whereas the preset setting value display permission condition is as described above, the pachinko machine 1 The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 at the time of power-on or power recovery after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure), and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the motor, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the setting key is turned ON by being turned ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is It must be not operated. As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are determined when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). At the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder rotates 60 degrees clockwise. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is turned on when it is operated and turned on, and the predetermined setting value change permission condition includes “when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when there is a power failure (instantaneously) Requirement that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the time of power recovery after power recovery after a power failure occurs. The requirement is that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated when power is restored after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or power recovery after a power outage (instantaneous power outage that momentarily causes a power outage). It is different in point.

  There are two types of setting key switches: a lead type and a surface mount type (so-called SMD type). The setting key switch 1311a in this embodiment basically adopts a lead type. The setting key switch 1311a has an operation in which a setting key is inserted into or removed from the insertion slot. For this reason, the force accompanying this operation acts on the substrate on which the setting key switch 1311a is provided, so that the substrate is bent. In the lead type, each lead of the setting key switch is disposed inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate. On the other hand, in the SMD type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged to protrude outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch, and is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

  Thus, in the lead type, if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is removed from the insertion port, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and Compared with the SMD type soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the setting key switch, the lead of the setting key switch is projected to the outer shape and soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the setting key switch. The load applied to the part where each lead is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board increases, and this load acts strongly from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board, and the board itself bends greatly. It becomes. On the other hand, in the SMD type, even if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is removed from the insertion port, each lead of the setting key switch protrudes outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch. Since it is placed and soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board, each lead of the setting key switch is placed inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board The load applied to the part where each lead of the setting key switch is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting key switch is reduced, and this load is transferred from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface). The board itself is difficult to bend even if it works toward you.

  In addition, when the substrate itself bends greatly due to the external force acting on the substrate, there is a concern that the solder pattern where the SMD type electronic component is soldered may cause the land pattern peeling load to be greatly peeled off. When using the above-mentioned one, it is desirable to mount it on a substrate on which no SMD type electronic component is mounted. In addition, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern in the solder portion where each lead portion of the setting key switch is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate is smaller than that of the SMD type, and the soldering portion of the setting key switch In view of the strength of the solder portion, it is desirable to use a lead-type key switch as the setting key switch.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, basically, a lead type switch is adopted as the setting key switch 1311a. In this embodiment, since the SMD type electronic component is not mounted on the setting change board 1311 but the lead type electronic component is mounted, a lead type of the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the setting change board 1311. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion slot when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion slot and the board itself is greatly bent as described above, the lead soldered to the back surface (solder side) of the setting change board 1311 There is no possibility that other electronic components of the type are peeled off from the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. As described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). Therefore, the signals from the setting key switch 1311a are electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  A rectangular main control board 1310 that is long in the left-right direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 extends from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the left side, upper side, right side, and lower side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. The size of the main control board box 1320 is connected to the upper side and the right side of the main control board box 1320. A square-shaped setting change board 1311 is arranged in the corner area. The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape having a distance dimension of one side of about one fifth of the distance dimension in the horizontal direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and is a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction. It is smaller than the main control board 1310 having a shape. In the present embodiment, the lead-type setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the square-shaped setting change board 1311 having such a small shape, and the setting key is temporarily inserted into the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Even if the board itself bends or when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key is caught in the insertion hole, the setting change board 1311 is formed on a small board. As a result, the amount of deflection can be suppressed to be smaller than that of the main control board 1310. As a result, the cover or base body of the main control board box 1320, which is in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) or back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, is prevented from being bent at a position corresponding to the setting change board 1311. Since there is no need to provide ribs that can be set, screw setting holes can be provided in the setting change board 1311 around the position where the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, and the setting change board 1311 is accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320. This can contribute to the visibility of the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is a lead type and is disposed on the setting change board 1311 separate from the main control board 1310, so that the setting value can be changed. Even if the setting change board 1311 is bent due to an operation (operation) in which the setting key is inserted into and removed from the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board 1310 is not bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being bent due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

  On the other hand, instead of the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311 a is arranged on any of the boards such as the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the power supply board 630. When the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the board, the setting key switch 1311a is replaced with the SMD type instead of the lead type, and is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board and temporarily inserted. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is pulled out from the mouth, the substrate itself is difficult to bend as described above, so other SMD type electronic components soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate are There is no fear of peeling off from the surface (mounting surface).

  Here, the set value will be briefly described. The “set value” is a probability for determining whether or not a big hit or not, and a probability for determining whether or not a lottery or not. It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when shifting to the time, the distribution ratio to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and it is advantageous for the player (that is, what the player acquires) The probability (advantage) that can increase the number of game balls that can be played) is preset. In the present embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 toward setting value 6. The probability (advantage) that is advantageous for the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, Big hit symbol determination table that defines the percentage of decision value for decision, small hit judgment table that defines the proportion of small hit judgment value that indicates winning for small hit, and the percentage of decision value for decision of small hit symbol A small hitting symbol determination table, a normal transition determination table in which the ratio of determination values for transition determination from the probability change to the normal time is specified), and used at various distribution rates associated with set values Select various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids, etc.) Or. In the various tables used for various lottery determinations associated with the set values, the various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. Various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values are different from each other, and various tables used in various allocation rates are set so that at least some values are different from each other. In some cases, the values differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electrical drive source. Some are set to. In addition, as the setting values described above, six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 were used. However, the setting values may be in a smaller range or in a larger range. It may be a thing. For example, four set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 4 may be used, or eight set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 8 may be used.

  As described above, the setting indicator 1310g displays the set value, and the main control MPU 1310a checks the contents of the RAM contained in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether there is an abnormality. When it is determined that there is an abnormality, if the main control side power-off process is not completed normally when the power is shut down, there is an abnormality (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in itself. Display an error message to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 among the game balls launched in the game area 5a. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls launched into the game area 5a, the game balls collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out port sensor 3032, and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, stores the count result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning ON. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting position) is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off so that the key switch 1311a is turned back to the rotational position). The OFF signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit capable of serially outputting the information for transmitting the setting key ON and OFF as serial information to the outside. Good. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with the serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . When serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key ON and OFF are received from the received serial information. It is possible to determine which one is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as “setting key modification (1)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 ° clockwise from the initial position and turning ON. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting position) is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off so that the key switch 1311a is turned back to the rotational position). The OFF signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a pulse output circuit capable of outputting the information indicating the setting key ON and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside as being input to the main control MPU 1310a. . Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit has, for example, a pulse width set to 1 ms in the case of information indicating the setting key ON, and a pulse width of 5 ms in the case of information indicating OFF. . When the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a selects the setting key ON and OFF from the input pulse signal. It is possible to determine which information is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be referred to as “setting key modification (2)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 ° clockwise from the initial position and turning ON. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting position) is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off so that the key switch 1311a is turned back to the rotational position). The OFF signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Although it was input to the main control MPU 1310a, the voltage level of the signal of the setting key ON and the voltage level of the OFF signal are set to the intermediate potential between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. (For example, a potential from 2 V to 3 V out of zero V to 5 V) is used, a comparator circuit is provided in the main control board 1310, and a comparison result by the comparator circuit is input to the main control MPU 1310a, whereby main control The MPU 1310a may determine ON / OFF of the setting key ON signal and ON / OFF of the OFF signal. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as “setting key modification (3)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a included in the setting change board 1311 is set ON. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotation position of the main control board. The setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (the configuration of the setting key switch is “variation example of setting key (4)”). May be described).

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 configured by the cover body and the base body. It may be accommodated in the body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism. Next, to open the main control board box 1320, The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. The setting change board 1311 can be modified by infiltrating a wire or the like from a “gap” formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the determination key button. The wire intrusion prevention part is formed in the cover body with respect to the opening so that the opening cannot be made. Note that, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the structure of the setting change board box is different from that of the main control board box 1320 in the case where the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. A setting change board cover opening / closing switch that can detect opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening / closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirect) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. You may comprise. Based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening / closing switch, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the above-described predetermined set value change permission condition (of the setting change board box). The mode may be described as “setting key modification (5)”).

  Further, among the above-described modification examples (1) to (5) of the setting key, a mode appropriately selected and combined may be adopted (the mode of the selection combination of the modification example is referred to as “setting key modification example (6)). ").

  In addition to the probability for the lottery determination as to whether or not the big hit or the probability for the lottery determination as to the small hit with the set value described above, in order to determine the lottery when shifting from the probability change to the normal time , The allocation ratio to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and is advantageous to the player (that is, increasing the number of game balls that the player can acquire) The probability (advantage) can be set in advance. In the present embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 toward setting value 6. The probability (degree of advantage) that would be advantageous to the player was set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from the set value 1 to the set value 6, there is a probability (advantage degree) that other pachinko machines are advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value set in advance. That is, a game specification that has a probability (advantage) that is advantageous to the player as a plurality of set values in advance and requires a setting change, such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, is advantageous to the player. There is a game specification with a probability (advantage) that has a single preset value in advance and does not require any setting change. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in design according to such a game specification and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are changed. Therefore, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations are provided depending on the game specifications. Therefore, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are required not to depend on the game specifications, that is, to be able to be used in common without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

  For example, in a game specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting change is not necessary at all, the probability (advantage) that the set value is advantageous for the player is advantageous. The setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 should be dealt with by a design change by software that assigns the following contents. Can do.

  For example, the main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns after clearing a predetermined area (excluding a specific area of the entire RAM area) of the RAM built in itself (after the RAM is cleared). It can be used as a set value (the activation method of the pachinko machine 1 can be varied). In this case, with respect to the operation of the movable body (object) to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a and the lighting of a light emitter such as a lamp or LED, the set value 1 is “all operations (movable body (portable object). The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that designates “operation of the object (lighting object)” is assigned, and the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that designates “operation of the movable object (object)” is assigned as the setting value 2 and is set. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that designates “lighting of the luminous body” is assigned as the value 3, and the detailed operation of the movable body (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operation region, other An actual machine check operation pattern 4 for designating an interference check with a structure or another movable body (an accessory) and an operation order such as an operation order with another movable body (an accessory)) is assigned. 1 port unit of light emitter (main control MP An actual machine check operation pattern 5 that designates “lighting of a light emitting body in a predetermined output port unit 1310a (that is, for each output port)” is assigned, and an actual machine check that designates “no operation” as a setting value 6 is assigned. An operation pattern 6 is assigned (the change setting mode of the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared may be described as “variation example (1) by common hardware configuration)”. Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (instant) and the lighting of a light emitting body such as a lamp or LED by repeatedly performing a main control side timer interruption process described later in the actual machine check operation after the RAM is cleared. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 121) from the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control with the contents (actual machine check operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. The operation of the movable body (the accessory) to be controlled by the substrate 1510 and the lighting of the light emitter can be performed. Variations in the activation method of the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared can be provided by the change setting mode of the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of symbol variation until a demonstration (a demonstration effect performed in a player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 designating “10 seconds” as the setting value 1 is assigned, the time setting pattern 2 designating “15 seconds” as the setting value 2 is assigned, and “20 seconds as the setting value 3”. Is assigned a time setting pattern 3 that designates “25 seconds” as a setting value 4, and a time setting pattern 5 that designates “30 seconds” as a setting value 5. A time setting pattern 6 that designates “35 seconds” as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of changing the time when the player enters the waiting state after the end of the change of the symbol is described as “Modification by common hardware configuration (2 ) "). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The time from the end of the symbol change to the demonstration can be varied according to the mode for setting the time change after the symbol change is over.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (a demonstration effect performed while waiting for a player) performed after the end of symbol variation. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that designates “comical effect” as the setting value 1 is assigned, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates “comical effect, operation effect of movable body (function)” as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 that designates “serious effect” as the setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern that designates “serial effect, operation effect of movable body (function)” as the setting value 4 4 is assigned, and a demonstration effect setting pattern 5 is assigned as a setting value 5 that designates “period drama style production”. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of the contents of the demonstration effect may be described as “variation example by common hardware configuration (3)”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. According to the aspect of the change setting of the contents of the demonstration effect, it is possible to give variations to the contents of the demonstration effect performed after the end of the change of the symbol.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, a volume setting pattern 1 that designates “volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, a volume setting pattern 2 that designates “volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and “volume 3” is assigned as the setting value 3. Is assigned a volume setting pattern 4 that designates “volume 4” as a setting value 4, and a volume setting pattern 5 that designates “volume 5” as a setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 that designates “volume 6” is assigned as the setting value 6 (the default volume change setting mode may be described as “variation example (4) by common hardware configuration)”. Note that the volume is set to increase from the setting value 1 toward the setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is set to a default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of “volume 1” assigned to setting value 1 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch decreases the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is increased), and the movement to the end of the minimum volume is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when stopped at the front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of “volume 6” assigned to the setting value 6 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch increases the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is decreased), and the movement to the maximum volume side end is completed. When the maximum volume is adjusted, the maximum volume may be set, or the volume may be a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. With this default volume change setting mode, it is possible to provide variations in the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of error notification sound volumes in error notifications such as various problems, gotoes, and errors. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, not dependent), and the pachinko machine that generates the error notification sound by setting the maximum volume to the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a store clerk to notice, there may be a case where the player who plays the game with other pachinko machines feels annoying. Therefore, what can adjust the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, an error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, and an error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies “error notification volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2. , An error notification volume setting pattern 3 designating “error notification volume 3” is assigned as the setting value 3, an error notification volume setting pattern 4 designating “volume 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and “ An error notification volume setting pattern 5 that designates “error notification volume 5” is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 that designates “error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)” is assigned as a setting value 6 (volume of error notification sound) ) May be described as “variation example with common hardware configuration (5)”. It should be noted that the setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute, and the volume that can recognize the error notification sound when stopped in front of the pachinko machine that generates the error notification sound) is set to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume, It is set so that the volume of the error notification sound increases toward a volume that allows the error notification sound to be sufficiently recognized even if it is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a performs control to generate an error notification sound at an error notification sound volume (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied according to the change setting of the error notification sound volume.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The luminance can be increased or decreased from the default luminance with respect to the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, a default luminance setting pattern 1 that designates “luminance 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, a default luminance setting pattern 2 that designates “luminance 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and “ A default luminance setting pattern 3 that designates “luminance 3” is assigned, a default luminance setting pattern 4 that designates “luminance 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and a default luminance setting pattern that designates “luminance 5” as the setting value 5 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that designates “brightness 6” as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of changing the default brightness may be described as “variation example by common hardware configuration (6)”). is there). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing a main control timer interruption process, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, thereby performing lighting, blinking, and gradation point of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default luminance (default luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The brightness of the illuminant can be adjusted to light up, flash, and tone points. Variations in the default brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs can be provided by changing the default brightness content.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of brightnesses of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in error notification such as various problems, goto, and errors. An error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that designates “error notification luminance 1” as a setting value 1 is assigned to a lamp that is to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and “error notification luminance 2” is set as a setting value 2. An error notification luminance setting pattern 2 to be specified is assigned, an error notification luminance setting pattern 3 to specify “error notification luminance 3” as a setting value 3 is assigned, and an error notification to specify “error notification luminance 4” as a setting value 4 An error notification is assigned the luminance setting pattern 4, is assigned the error notification luminance setting pattern 5 that designates “error notification luminance 5” as the setting value 5, and designates “error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)” as the setting value 6. The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of the brightness of the illuminant in error notification is set as “common hardware It may be described as E A modification of the configuration (7) "). It should be noted that although the lamp is not turned off, the lamp brightness is low and the lamp brightness is such that an error notification can be recognized when stopped in front of the pachinko machine. The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the illuminant by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interruption process described later to change the luminance of the illuminant in the error notification, thereby adjusting the lighting of the illuminant, blinking, gradation points, etc. Do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The brightness of the illuminant can be adjusted to turn on, blink, and tone points. Variations in the luminance of the light emitters in the error notification can provide variations in the luminance of the light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in the error notification.

  In addition, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) according to the common hardware configuration described above satisfy preset setting value display permission conditions in the setting value confirmation display processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. It is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off (setting value display). May be described as “variation example (8) by common hardware configuration”).

  Further, any one of the modification examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above may be selected as appropriate and adopted in the modification example (6) of the setting key described above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. As a premise, when the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in a main control side power-on process to be described later, and the main control built-in RAM The game is progressed by clearing all areas of the game except for specific areas, and then setting interrupt permission, etc., while the payout control board When the pressing operation unit of the 33 RWM clear button 633z is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process in a main control side power-on process described later, and then performs an interrupt permission setting and the like. Proceed with the game. By adopting this mode, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the set value confirmation display process is never performed. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the set current setting value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 in the ball count process of the main control side power-on process described later. The number of game balls output to the base monitor 1310h and collected by the out port 1008 in the port output process of the main control side power-on process described later is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting value that is set and displayed by the setting indicator 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h described above. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set value that has been set in the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like. In addition, when the progress of the game is started by performing an interrupt permission setting after power is restored, the number of game balls collected through the out port 1008 can be displayed. There is no need to provide it, which can contribute to cost reduction.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 67, FIG. 70, and FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  In the function display unit 1400, the detailed illustration is omitted, and two shins are displayed for displaying a status indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying a gaming state and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs, and a normal hold display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate part 2003 are provided.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and the first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the reception of the game ball B to the second, and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reservation number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of times the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like. Display.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

  Here, as a countermeasure against noise when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other. A plurality of wirings that transmit control signals from the control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 (hereinafter may be simply referred to as “wirings”) will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via the connection connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is connected to the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the upper right corner of the game board 5. When drawn to the upper side, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is gathered together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of 1100 or attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 as it is. It is drawn down.

  When the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the wiring FCBL is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After being routed to the lower side, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  As described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a long wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. They are routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320 along the right side of the main control board box 1320 on the rear side of the board holder 1200 that is collected and attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100. Thus, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed is the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 137 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Will be placed.

  Behind the function display unit 1400, a decoration board 1131 on which a plurality of decoration LEDs are mounted is disposed. When the wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable that is electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the decorative substrate 1131, is bent to the upper rear side of the game panel 1100, the upper side of the front side of the back box 3010 When bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and drawn up to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the state of being close (or in contact with) the above-described wiring FCBL, it is directed downward to the rear surface of the back box 3010. And bent together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. The Then, the wiring UPCBL is separated from the above-described path of the wiring FCBL, and is bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500 and at the upper side of the driving board unit 1700, along the upper side of the driving board unit 1700. After being routed and routed to above the predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, the drive board unit 1700 is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

  As described above, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the decorative board 1131 and the panel drive board 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a long wiring length, and particularly from the upper right corner of the game board 5. The wiring FCBL routed to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and the upper side of the back side of the back box 3010 is bent downward on the rear side of the back box 3010, and vertically along the right side of the rear side of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are collected and routed to the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. In this manner, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 153 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 in the same manner as the wiring FCBL described above. It will be arranged in front of the payout unit 560.

  As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding path for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guiding path of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 for paying out the game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full sphere path unit 600 for guiding the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward; A lower full sphere path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full sphere path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  In addition, as described above, the game ball B is ground in the island facility of the game hall or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 to be charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby generating electromagnetic noise. discharge. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game ball B can be retained and in the vicinity thereof.

  The main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. I have. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as “built-in reset circuit”). The forced reset by the circuit has a mechanism that cannot be controlled and invalidated by the user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcedly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and again executes the main control-side power-on processing described later. Will be. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a always occurs, so the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Will be completely erased (cleared). That is, if the internal reset circuit is forcibly reset, the RAM is cleared when the main control MPU 1310a is activated again.

  In the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is adopted as the package of the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are provided. The main control board 1310 protrudes from the soldering surface (surface opposite to the mounting surface). That is, the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, since the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are attached and the surrounding area are likely to accumulate static electricity, the function display unit is disposed in front of the payout unit 560 when electromagnetic noise is released by electrostatic discharge. 1400 and the main control board 1310 may enter the wiring FCBL that electrically connects, and the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected. The wiring UPCBL may enter. As a result, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may jump out and invade the wiring UPCBL. On the contrary, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may jump out and enter the wiring FCBL.

  For example, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is assumed to be in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is routed in a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, the right side of the main control board box 1320 and about the upper side of the main control board box 1320). A portion having a length of ¼, bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper side or the lower side of the main control board box 1320), and the left side from the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310 At the stage of passing over the function display unit connector MFCN arranged closer to the main control board box 1320 In the case of being electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN after being bent toward the side and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, when the electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is When drawn in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the front of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control board 1310a). When passing through the area (in front of the bottom plate of the control board box 1320), electromagnetic noise enters the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the wiring FCBL. Under the influence of electromagnetic noise, the main control MPU 1310a is forced to reset by its own built-in reset circuit. Door and there is a consuming fear.

  In addition, instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, when the wiring receiving groove is formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the wiring FCBL is , Not the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, but is accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, and then the function display It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodating groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a. When passing through a region in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position, electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. The main control MPU 1310a may intrude into various pins protruding toward the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit due to the influence of the electromagnetic noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is used as the main control board as a positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged with the function display unit connector MFCN below the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. By disposing the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

  As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is connected to the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control. It is possible to prevent the MPU 1310a from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space separating the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by disposing the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected. The electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated on the main control board 1310 or in a space where the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other in the main control board 1310. ing. Also in this point, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as “first wiring separation distance dimension”). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, and therefore, electromagnetic waves that have entered the wiring FCBL. This is to prevent noise from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the first wiring separation distance from the wiring FCBL.

  Further, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 as described above. (Or accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200) without being routed, on the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 And then bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 and routed to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 132 is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. The distance dimension between the wiring FCBL routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter referred to as “second wiring separation distance dimension”). ) Can be secured greatly. The second wiring separation distance dimension is larger than the first wiring separation distance dimension. As a result, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL enters various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrudes from the wiring FCBL toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a second wiring separation distance dimension. Can be prevented. Also in this point, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL. However, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to be connected. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay substrate 1710 with an element that can reduce or eliminate the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of control signals transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise for each wiring FCBL). As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being affected by electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of electromagnetic wave noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, and the like, EMC countermeasure components (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can be cited as such elements. When using capacitors, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. When a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor Circuits configured by combining these may be inserted.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 has a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 111) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses peripheral control board 1510. And a box. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the presentation operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3, the presentation display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 72 and FIG. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the upper surface, and a lower fixing piece 1602 that protrudes outward from the lower surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixed grooves 3010c opened in an upper inner peripheral surface in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the back. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 76 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 76 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as seen from the back. FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board showing the game panel in the state in which the game panel is made opaque and the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to show the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nail. 78 is an enlarged front view of the distribution passage group at the upper right corner in FIG. 77, and FIG. 79 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit at the lower right corner in FIG.

  The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (in this case, a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003. And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.

  A plurality (four in this case) of the general winning awards 2001 are arranged below the center in the up-down direction in the game area 5a. ing. The left general winning opening 2001 is arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the right general winning opening 2001 is arranged near the right end in the gaming area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed at the approximate center in the vertical direction above the general winning award port 2001 on the right side. The second start port 2004 is arranged at a position higher than the first start port 2002 below the right general winning port 2001. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged on the left side of the second starting opening 2004 at a height slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and one general winning port 2001, A side unit 2200 that is attached to the left side of the mouth unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view and has two general winning ports 2001, and a start-up unit that is the lower right corner of the game area 5a in front view. An attacker unit 2400 that is attached to the right side of the front view 2100 and has one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning port 2005, and above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 Thus, a frame-shaped center attached to the center of the game area 5a slightly above the front view and having a gate portion 2003 is provided. The Tar won game 2500, is equipped with a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out port 1008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a width that can receive only one game ball B and is always open upward, and receives only one game ball B at the lower left of the first start port 2002. And a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a possible width. The start-up unit 2100 is entirely formed in a transparent manner, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 74 and the like).

  The start port unit 2100 includes a first start port sensor 2101 (see FIG. 77 and the like) that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 as a panel. A guide path 2102 (see FIG. 76) for discharging to the lower side (on the substrate holder 1200) after being guided behind the plate 1110 is provided.

  The start opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first start opening 2002 is a center described later. It is located immediately below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Accordingly, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  In the state where the start port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, the first start port 2002 is located immediately below the central discharge portion 2503a of the stage 2503 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the central discharge portion of the stage 2503 The game ball B released from 2503a is configured to be received at the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes two general winning ports 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be received at all times, and a first shelf 2201 that is inclined so that the right end is lower at the upper left of the two general winning ports 2001. , And a second shelf 2202 that is inclined so that the right end is lowered at the upper part of the two general winning ports 2001. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

  In the side unit 2200, two general winning ports 2001 are provided at a height position between the first starting port 2002 and the general winning port 2001 of the starting port unit 2100. The two general winning ports 2001 are provided facing each other so as to be arranged side by side. The left general winning opening 2001 opens toward the upper left, and the right general winning opening 2001 opens toward the right.

  In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end of the first shelf 2201 is located near the periphery of the game area 5a, and the game ball B has flowed down the left area of the center accessory 2500. Can be guided to the right. The first shelf 2201 is inclined so that an extension line on the upper surface passes between the first start port 2002 and the stage 2503. The second shelf 2202 is inclined so that the extension line on the upper surface passes through the portion where the general winning opening 2001 of the start port unit 2100 is opened.

  The entire side unit 2200 is formed transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 74 and the like). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the two general winning ports 2001, the first shelf portion 2201, and the second shelf portion 2202 are projected forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. . The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfer it to the guide path of the back unit 3000. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 are detected by a general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 111).

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. The entire attacker unit 2400 is formed to be transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 74 and the like). The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 among the four general winning ports 2001 (see FIG. 79 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 has an outer shape in a front view, which is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward at the upper right corner, and the second start opening 2004 can be opened upward at the lower left of the general winning opening 2001. Can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting port 2004.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a second start port 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball and is open upward, and the big prize port 2005 is approximately three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. Opening upward with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, a second starting port sensor 2402 that detects the gaming ball B received in the second starting port 2004, and a large And a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 111 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second start port door 2411 that can open and close the second start port 2004, and opens and closes the second start port door 2411 according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate part 2003. The start opening solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are selected by receiving the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to one special lottery result or a second special lottery result.

  As shown in FIG. 79 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 includes an attacker left passage 2421 and an attacker right passage 2422 through which the game ball B can flow downward on both the left and right sides of the general winning opening 2001, and an attacker left passage. The second starting port guide shelf 2423 that is inclined so as to become lower from the position immediately below 2421 to the left and the second starting port 2004 is opened in the middle, and the second start port guide shelf 2423 below the second starting port guide shelf 2423 A large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left from a position spaced leftward from the left end of the start opening guiding shelf 2423, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened in the middle. I have.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 includes a communication port 2425 that communicates with the attacker right passage 2422 on the right end side of the second start port guide shelf 2423, and a lower position than the prize winning port 2005 from the right end side of the second start port guide shelf 2423. From the lower right passage 2426 of the attacker extending to the left end of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 so as to become lower leftward, and between the second start opening guiding shelf 2423 and the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 An intermediate passage 2427 that extends downward from the big prize opening 2005 and communicates with the lower right passage 2426 of the attacker.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 extends downward from the lower end of the general winning opening 2001, partitions the attacker left passage 2421 and the attacker right passage 2422, and provides a communication opening 2425 between the lower end and the second start opening guide shelf 2423. A partition portion 2428 to be formed, and an inclined portion 2429 which is inclined so as to be positioned leftward from the lower end of the partition portion 2428 upward.

  A second start port door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second start port 2004 opened in the second start port guide shelf 2423 extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered. It is formed, and the left end side is provided so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The second starting port door 2411 has a right end on the upper side with respect to the horizontal and slightly lower than the right end of the opening of the second starting port 2004. The second start port 2004 can be closed by disabling acceptance of B. In a state where the second start port 2004 is closed, the second start port door 2411 guides the game ball B that has circulated through the second start port guide shelf 2423 from the upstream side (right side) to the left side. be able to.

  The second starting port door 2411 is in a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed in a counterclockwise direction so that the right end side moves upward with the left end side as the center, The second starting port 2004 can be opened (opened) by allowing the game ball B to be received in the second starting port 2004. When the second starter door 2411 rises to the right end side to open the second starter 2004, the second starter door 2411 rises from the second starter guide shelf 2423. Thus, the path of the game ball B rolling on the second start port guide shelf 2423 can be inhibited, and the game ball B can be received into the second start port 2004. The second start port door 2411 closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). Let open.

  A grand prize opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the big prize opening 2005 opened in the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 extends in the front-rear direction and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered. The award winning opening 2005 opened upward can be opened and closed by moving forward and backward. The big prize opening door 2413 can close the big prize opening 2005 by moving forward, and in the state where the big prize opening 2005 is closed, the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 is distributed from the upstream side (right side). The played game ball B can be guided to the left. In addition, the special winning opening door 2413 is opened by the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the special winning opening 2005, and circulates through the second start opening guiding shelf 2423 and the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 of the center accessory 2500. The game ball B can be received in the special winning opening 2005. The special prize opening door 2413 closes the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when no power is supplied), and opens the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when current is supplied).

  Although not shown, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a first receiving port 2007 that can be opened upward inside the special winning opening 2005, and upward on the right side of the first receiving port 2007. A second receiving port 2008 that is always open is disposed. Further, the attacker unit 2400 includes a first receiving sensor 2404 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second receiving port 2008. 2405 and the first receiving port 2007 are opened and closed (the game ball B received in the grand prize winning port 2005 and distributed inside is distributed to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008). And a sorting solenoid 2416 that opens and closes the sorting piece 2415 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottered by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 It is equipped with. The distribution piece 2415 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front-rear direction so that the right end of the distribution piece 2415 extends in the front-rear direction, and opens upward by moving forward and backward. The first receiving port 2007 (V winning port) can be opened and closed. The sorting piece 2415 moves forward to close the first receiving port 2007, guides the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 to the right, and is always opened upward. It can be accepted in 2008. Further, the sorting piece 2415 retreats by the driving of the sorting solenoid 2416 to open the first receiving port 2007, and the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is highly probable for the first receiving port 2007. Can be accepted. The sorting piece 2415 closes the first receiving port 2007 when the sorting solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the first receiving port 2007 when the sorting solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Let In other words, the sorting piece 2415 can sort the game balls B received in the special winning opening 2005 so as to be received in either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008.

  When the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the general winning opening 2001 is located below the gate portion 2003 (below the gate portion 2003) on the downstream side of the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 in the center accessory 2500 described later. The second starting port 2004 is positioned at a height between the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and is a large winning port. 2005 is located below the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Moreover, in the state attached to the panel board 1110, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N between the lower end and the upper end (general winning port 2001) of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500.

  Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the general winning port 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are positioned above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, the game ball B is released from the stage 2503. Even if it is released, it will not be accepted into the general winning port 2001 or the second start port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Accordingly, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (distribution passage group 2520) of the center accessory 2500 may be received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second start opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Downstream of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, an attacker left passage 2421, a general winning port 2001, and an attacker right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left. B will enter either of them.

  When the game ball B supplied through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and above the general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is received by the general winning port 2001, it is detected by the general winning port sensor 2401. The game panel 1100 is discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side. If the game ball B enters the attacker left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 without being received in the general winning opening 2001, it falls onto the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 According to the inclination, it flows to the second start port 2004 side (left side). In the state where the second start port 2004 is closed by the second start port door 2411, the second start port 2004 flows to the left on the second start port door 2411 and is discharged to the left from the left end of the second start port guide shelf 2423. . When the game ball B passes through the second start port guide shelf 2423, if the second start port 2004 is opened, the game ball B is accepted into the second start port 2004 with a very high probability.

  The game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second start opening 2004, the game ball B is discharged to the left big winning opening 2005 side through the second start opening guide shelf 2423.

  Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the left side of the second start port guide shelf 2423, the game ball B released to the left from the second start port guide shelf 2423 is Alternatively, it flows down to either the intermediate passage 2427 side. When the prize winning opening 2005 is closed by the prize winning entrance door 2413 when it flows down to the prize winning entrance 2005 side, it is guided to the left by the prize winning entrance door 2413 and from the left end of the prize winning entrance guide shelf 2424. Released to the left. When the big prize opening door 2413 that closes the big prize opening 2005 is retreated and the big prize opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B that has flowed down from the second start opening guide shelf 2423 to the big prize opening 2005 side is Accepted at Grand Prize Winner 2005. The game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 from the second start-port guide shelf 2423 and the game ball B that has been released to the left from the winning prize guide guide shelf 2424 pass through the out-port 1008 and the rear side of the game panel 1100. Is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200).

  On the other hand, the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the general winning opening 2001, and is placed on the right side of the general winning opening 2001. When entering the attacker right passage 2422, it abuts against the stepped portion 1005 a of the right rail 1005 and rebounds to the left. In this embodiment, since the second start port guide shelf 2423 is provided so that the extension line of the second start port guide shelf 2423 coincides with the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, it enters the attacker right passage 2422. Then, the game ball B bounced off at the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 falls (circulates) onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with high probability.

  When the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 and has come into contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 bounces upward from the communication port 2425, the partition portion 2428 that forms the upper end side of the communication port 2425 Since the inclined portion 2429 is provided at the lower end, the game ball B comes into contact with the inclined portion 2429. Since the inclined portion 2429 is inclined so that the upper end is located on the right side with respect to the lower end, the game ball B that is in contact with the inclined portion 2429 is reflected toward the lower right side passage 2426 of the attacker, The attacker enters the lower right passage 2426. Further, when the game ball B abutting against the step portion 1005 a of the right rail 1005 bounces downward from the communication port 2425, the game ball B enters the attacker lower right passage 2426.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacker lower right passage 2426 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without an opportunity to be received at the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005.

  Also, the attacker unit 2400 includes a sub-function display unit 2450 above the second start port 2004. The sub-function display unit 2450 has a plurality of (six here) full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2450 is linked with the normal symbol display, the first special symbol display, and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the gate unit is lit by the lighting / flashing of the LED, the emission color, etc. Display the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to 2003, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 To do.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 includes a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism (see FIG. 111). This magnetic sensor 2470 is for detecting fraud using a magnet.

[5-8d. Center character]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect display device 1600 disposed in the rear of the game panel 1100 through the frame and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front. it can. Further, the center accessory 2500 is substantially entirely formed transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

  In the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a Can not invade.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2501 in which a game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2501 can be discharged to the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. A warp outlet 2502 that opens inward, and a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape that is depressed in the center in the left-right direction, and corresponds to the position directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). 1110) is formed in a wave shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides. In the stage 2503, a portion (center discharge portion 2503a) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction, and a portion that is lowest (side discharge portion 2503b) on both the left and right sides are directed forward. It inclines so that it may become low, and the game ball | bowl B can be discharge | released in those game area | regions 5a from those parts.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the elevated portion (central discharge portion 2503 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. Thus, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a gate portion 2003 provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction and on the right side of the outer peripheral surface on the right side. The gate portion 2003 has a size that allows only one game ball B to pass therethrough, and is provided with a gate sensor 2506 that detects the passage of the game ball. The gate portion 2003 is provided with a space through which only one game ball B can pass between the gate portion 2003 and the frame-shaped outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 forms a part of the upper outer peripheral surface, and an upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 which is inclined so as to become lower from the left side to the right side from the center in the left-right direction. And a distribution passage group 2520 including a plurality of passages through which the game balls B can be distributed. The flow passage group 2520 extends vertically from the vicinity of the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 to above the gate portion 2003.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the distribution passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and is provided adjacent to the first distribution passage 2521 and the left side of the first distribution passage 2521. And a second distribution passage 2522. The first distribution passage 2521 extends in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge (right rail 1005) of the game area 5a from the inlet side at the upper end, and the vicinity of the lower end is bent in a crank shape to the left, and the outlet is downward. It is open toward. The outlet at the lower end of the first distribution passage 2521 is located slightly to the right with respect to the top of the gate portion 2003.

  The second circulation passage 2522 has an upper end inlet that opens to the left with respect to the inlet of the first circulation passage 2521 and is bent in a crank shape to the right near the upper end. Adjacent to the circulation passage 2521, it extends downward in an arc shape, bends in a crank shape to the left in the vicinity of the lower end, then bends in a crank shape to the right, and the outlet is adjacent to the outlet of the first circulation passage 2521 It is open toward. As a result, the second circulation passage 2522 can attenuate the circulation speed of the game ball B more than the first circulation passage 2521. The first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are provided with a plurality of protrusions 2523 at intervals in the distribution direction of the game balls B, and the game balls B abut on the protrusions 2523. Therefore, the distribution speed can be suppressed.

  The center accessory 2500 is upstream of the distribution passage group 2520 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 of the front component member 1000 (periphery of the game area 5a) in the assembled state on the game board 5. An upstream space 2511 in which the game ball B can be circulated is formed. Further, in the assembled state in the game board 5, the upper end entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 of the distribution passage group 2520 is located directly below the stop portion 1006, and the first distribution passage 2521 is connected to the right rail 1005 (game). It extends along the periphery of the region 5a. Further, a gap through which the game ball B can pass is formed between the gate portion 2003 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005 (periphery of the game area 5a).

[5-8e. The flow of game balls through the distribution channel group of the center role]
Next, the flow of the game ball B through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79 and the like. In the assembled state in the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N are provided between the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate portion 2003, and between the gate portion 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400. Has been planted. The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 are such that the game balls B that have circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 are positioned on the right side of the gate portion 2003 (the gate portion 2003 and the right rail 1005). ), And is adjusted to circulate with high probability. Also, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 is such that the game balls B that have circulated through the second distribution passage 2522 pass through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. It has been adjusted. Furthermore, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 is that the game balls B that have circulated through the second distribution passage 2522 have the second highest probability after the gate portion 2003. It is adjusted to circulate on the left side of 2003.

  On the other hand, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate unit 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 has a high probability that the game ball B circulated on the right side of the gate unit 2003 has a high probability. It is adjusted to enter the attacker right passage 2422. In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate unit 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 have a high probability that the game ball B circulated on the left side of the gate unit 2003 or the gate unit 2003 has a high probability. It is adjusted to enter the left attacker left passage 2421 of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, and is adjusted to be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 with the next highest probability of the attacker left passage 2421.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is driven with the strength that the game ball B enters above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 of the center accessory 2500 (upstream space portion 2511), the distribution passage group 2520 The game ball B flows through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. Specifically, the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against a stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 constituting a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting). ), The game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first distribution passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first circulation passage 2521 has a high probability to the right of the gate portion 2003 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the downstream end of the first circulation passage 2521 and the gate portion 2003. Pass through. Then, the game ball B that has passed the right side of the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2422 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 circulates through either the second start-up port guide shelf 2423 or the attacker right lower passage 2426.

  As described above, the game ball B that has circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 does not pass through the gate part 2003 so much, so that the lottery of the normal lottery result carried out by the passage of the game ball B through the gate part 2003 is not performed, There is a low possibility that the normal lottery result in which the second start port 2004 is opened will be drawn. Therefore, even if the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 circulates through the second start-out guide shelf 2423 via the attacker right passage 2422, the second start-up port 2004 is often closed, and the second start-up Since the mouth 2004 is not accepted so much, the game balls B are received at the second starting port 2004, so that there are few opportunities to receive benefits such as the lottery of the second special lottery result and the payout of the game balls B. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates through the first distribution passage 2521, the privilege given to the player is relatively small.

  In addition, although the case where it hits right was demonstrated above, the game ball B thrown in by the strength which jumps over the entrance of the 2nd distribution passage 2522 opened near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510, It will enter into the 1st distribution passage 2521, and will become the result similar to the above.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 enters the second circulation passage 2522 and circulates through the second circulation passage 2522, it is between the downstream end of the second circulation passage 2522 and the gate portion 2003. A lottery of the normal lottery result is performed by passing through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are installed. The game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker left passage 2421 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400, and from the attacker left passage 2421. The second start port guide shelf 2423 is distributed.

  At this time, since the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal lottery result is drawn, if the selected lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port 2004 has a predetermined pattern. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received at the second start port 2004, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates through the second distribution passage 2522, the privilege given to the player is relatively high (large).

  For this reason, since the player is more likely to receive a privilege in the second distribution passage 2522, the player has a driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511, and the game The driving strength of the gaming ball B will be adjusted so that the gaming ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving strength at which the ball B enters the second circulation passage 2522. A change can be given to the driving operation, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and allows the player to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In the case where the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is a “big hit” or the like that generates an advantageous gaming state, The big prize opening 2005 is in a state where the game balls B can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and when the game balls B are accepted into the big prize opening 2005, a lot of game balls B are paid out. In such an advantageous game state (“big hit game state”), if the player is required to adjust the strength of the game ball B, the player may feel impatient and frustrated. There is a risk of reducing interest in However, in this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit right and circulates through the first distribution passage 2521, the right ball of the gate portion 2003 and the attacker right passage 2422 circulate and then communicate with the step portion 1005 a of the right rail 1005. The game ball B can be distributed to the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 side (the big winning opening 2005 side) by bouncing back toward the opening 2425 and falling to the second start opening guiding shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425. Therefore, the game ball B can be accepted into the big prize opening 2005 by an easy driving operation without adjusting the driving operation delicately, and the player can enjoy the game in the advantageous gaming state. At the same time, the driving operation of the game ball B can be sharpened according to the game state, and the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

[5-8f. Another embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center character
Next, the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 according to an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. 80 (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of the center accessory different from FIG. 78 and the like, and FIG. It is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment. FIG. 81 (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group for a center accessory that is further different from that in FIG. 80, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 82 is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory which is further different from those in FIGS. In FIGS. 80 and 81, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 80 (a), compared with FIG. It is what. This distribution passage group 2520 can also provide the same effects as described above.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 80 (b), the angle of the hitting portion 1006 is such that the hitting ball 1006 in the front component member 1000 is likely to rebound to the entrance side of the second circulation passage 2522. And the portion between the inlet of the first circulation passage 2521 and the inlet of the second circulation passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is inclined so that the second circulation passage 2522 side (left side) is lowered. It has been made. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second circulation passage 2522 side, so the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B into which the game ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522 becomes wider. It is possible to easily perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the flow passage group 2520 of FIGS. 78 and 80, the respective inlets of the first flow passage 2521 and the second flow passage 2522 are opened upward. Thus, the upstream side of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 is extended to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective inlets are directed leftward in a state where they are lined up and down. It is made to open.

  In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5 a) constitutes a part of the first circulation passage 2521, and a part of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is a part of the second circulation passage 2522. Part. In this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space portion 2511 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) is the first circulation from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. It becomes the length to each entrance of the passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 and is narrower than the upstream space portion 2511 shown in FIGS. 78 and 80.

  In this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, the driving strength that comes into contact with the narrower portion on the left side than the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510, Since it is necessary to drive the game ball B with a driving strength that directly enters the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 that opens toward the left, compared with the embodiment of FIG. 78 and FIG. The adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B is narrowed. In addition, a game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 on the left side of the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 and the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 divides the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522. When it comes into contact with the left end of the wall portion (the portion between the two entrances), there is a possibility of deviating from the upstream space portion 2511 depending on the momentum or angle of the bounced game ball B to the left. That is, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2511, it deviates leftward from the upstream space portion 2511 and does not enter any of the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center object 2500 may be distributed. For this reason, since the difficulty level for the game ball B driving operation is increased, the player's willingness to drive the game ball B can be increased, and the player can insert game media. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the embodiment of FIG. 81 (a), a branch portion 2524 that communicates with the second circulation passage 2522 in one way is provided in the middle of the first circulation passage 2521. It is. The branch portion 2524 is provided immediately above a portion that is bent downward from the right end of a portion (upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) that extends to the left and right in the second circulation passage 2522. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is struck with the strength to enter the first distribution passage 2521, the game sphere B is second in the branching portion 2524 depending on the strength of the stake (if the strength is low). Since branching to the circulation passage 2522 side, the difficulty of circulation of the game ball B with respect to the second circulation passage 2522 can be made lower than that in the embodiment of FIG.

  In order to allow the game ball B to enter the second distribution passage 2522, it is necessary to drive the game ball B weaker than the driving strength of the game ball B entering the first distribution passage 2521. Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the portion bent downward in the second circulation passage 2522, the game ball B that has entered the second circulation passage 2522 is bent downward. It does not jump upward (branch portion 2524 side), and does not enter the first flow passage 2521 side through the branch portion 2524. That is, the branch portion 2524 communicates with the one-way passage from the first circulation passage 2521 to the second circulation passage 2522.

  Further, in this embodiment, when entering the inlet of the first circulation passage 2521 having the branching portion 2524 in the middle and flowing through the first circulation passage 2521, the first circulation passage 2521 side in the portion of the branching portion 2524 Or, since it branches to either side of the second distribution passage 2522, the player can be throbbing or throbbing depending on whether the game ball B branches to which side in the branching portion 2524, the first circulation It is possible to entertain the flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second distribution passage 2522, the game ball B enters the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. Since the branch portion 2524 of the first distribution passage 2521 may branch to the second distribution passage 2522 side, whether or not the branch portion 2524 branches to the second distribution passage 2522 side determines whether or not the player It can be thrilled and entertained by the player, and when the branching portion 2524 branches to the second distribution passage 2522 side, a player's driving operation mistake is covered and the desired second distribution passage 2522 is opened. The game ball B will be distributed, and it can be made to the feeling obtained with respect to a player, and the fall of the interest with respect to a player's game can be suppressed.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 82, the second distribution passage 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 that crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the inlet of the second circulation passage 2522 is opened upward at a position on the left side of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. Accordingly, all of the game balls B that have been driven into the upstream space 2511 above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 circulate through the first circulation passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 and flows through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player side Since the distribution of the game ball B can be conspicuous from the player, if the game ball B distributes through the bypass portion 2525, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good after that. Allow the player to perform a game ball B driving operation aiming at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and entertain the game ball B to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest Can do.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86 and the like. FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit after disassembling the back unit, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the rear after disassembling the main unit. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall in the shape of a box attached to the rear face of the panel holder 1120 and opened forward. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 111). See).

  The back unit 3000 includes a back first effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back second effect unit 3200 attached in the back box 3010 behind the back first effect unit 3100. The back third stage production unit 3300 attached in the back box 3010 behind the back second stage production unit 3200, and the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 installed in front of the back second stage production unit 3200 The back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 and releases it downward, and the game received in the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005 of the attacker unit 2400. A back right sphere discharge unit 3040 for receiving the sphere B and releasing it downward.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached by cutting from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side (see FIGS. 85 and 86).

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable left and right.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-like fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes and the like at appropriate positions for mounting each movable effect unit and the like.

  Further, the back box 3010 has an insertion port 3011 that is cut out so as to be recessed backward from the front end in the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The insertion port 3011 is configured to communicate a space behind the light guide plate 3110 in the back first effect unit 3100 described later and the outside of the back box 3010 in a state assembled to the game board 5. When the game board 5 is transported, the insertion hole 3011 is inserted into the rotating decorative body 3210 from the side surface side of the back box 3010 so that vibrations due to transportation or the like cause vibration of the back second stage production unit 3200. The rotating decorative body 3210 can be prevented from moving. Alternatively, when a problem occurs in the movement of the rotating decorative body 3210 of the back second stage production unit 3200, it is possible to eliminate the problem by inserting a finger, a tool, or the like through the insertion port 3011.

[5-9a. Back first production unit]
Next, the back first effect unit 3100 in the back unit will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the back first production unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back first production unit of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 88 is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate in the back first effect unit. The back first effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached at the front end of the back box 3010 so as to close the opening opened forward.

  The back first rendering unit 3100 has a transparent flat light guide plate 3110 that closes the front end opening of the back box 3010, and a plurality of light guide plates 3110 that are disposed above the light guide plate 3110 and irradiate light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3110. The back first upper decorative substrate 3120 on which the LEDs 3121 are mounted, and the back first left on which a plurality of LEDs 3131 that are arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 3110 and emit light toward the left surface of the light guide plate 3110 are mounted. A diffusing lens 3140 is provided between the decorative substrate 3130, the plurality of LEDs 3131 of the back first left decorative substrate 3130, and the left surface of the light guide plate 3110, and diffuses the light from the LED 3131 to irradiate the left surface of the light guide plate 3110. And.

  Further, the back first effect unit 3100 has a transparent flat plate-like upper base 3151 attached to the front upper edge of the light guide plate 3110, and is attached to the rear side of the upper base 3151 so as to sandwich the light guide plate 3110 and back. A transparent upper rear cover 3152 to which the first upper decorative substrate 3120 is attached, a transparent flat plate-like left base 3153 attached to the front left edge of the light guide plate 3110, and attached to the rear side of the left base 3153 A transparent left rear cover 3154 that sandwiches the light guide plate 3110 and has the back first left decorative substrate 3130 and the diffusion lens 3140 attached thereto, and a transparent flat plate attached to the front right edge of the light guide plate 3110 And a transparent right rear cover 3156 attached to the rear side of the right base 3155 and sandwiching the light guide plate 3110 It is equipped with a.

  The back first effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the upper base 3151, and is attached to the front surface of the back first upper decorative body 3161 on which a relief-like decoration is formed and the left base 3153. A back first left decorative body 3162 formed with a relief-shaped decoration, a back first right decorative body 3163 attached to the front surface of the right base 3155 and formed with a relief-shaped decoration, The light plate 3110 is attached to the center of the front lower edge in the left-right direction, and is attached to the back first lower decorative body 3164 on which the relief-like decoration is formed, and to the rear side of the back first lower decorative body 3164. And a back first lower decorative board 3170 on which a plurality of LEDs 3171 capable of irradiating light are mounted.

  The light guide plate 3110 of the back first effect unit 3100 has a substantially quadrangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a notch 3111 that is notched upward in a semicircular arc shape at the center in the left-right direction at the lower edge. Although not shown, the light guide plate 3110 includes a first pattern that emits light by light irradiated from the upper surface and a second pattern that emits light by light irradiated from the left surface. The first design and the second design are different from each other. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the 1st pattern is formed so that a light emission aspect may differ with LED3121 which light-emitted among several LED3121 of the back 1st top decoration board | substrate 3120. FIG.

  On the back first upper decorative board 3120 and the back first left decorative board 3130, the LED 3121 and the LED 3131 mounted thereon are full-color LEDs. The back first left decorative substrate 3130 is divided into three in the vertical direction. By dividing the back first left decorative substrate 3130 into three parts, the diffusion lens 3140 is also divided into three parts in the vertical direction so as to correspond. The first pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be emitted by causing the LED 3121 of the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 to emit light, and the second pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be emitted by causing the LED 3131 of the back first left decorative substrate 3130 to emit light. The design can emit light.

  The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163 include a plating layer having a metallic luster. The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163 are formed in a strip shape along the upper side, the left side, and the right side of the light guide plate 3110. Yes.

  The back first lower decorative body 3164 has a pair of portions that are concentric with the arc of the notch 3111 at the center of the lower edge of the light guide plate 3110 and extend in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and the upper and lower sides are opened. It is formed in a substantially annular shape. The back first lower decorative body 3164 has a plurality of three-sided decorations arranged in an arc shape on the front surface. Further, the back first lower decorative body 3164 has protrusions extending radially so as to pass through the respective three-sided decorative parts. These radially extending protrusions extend outward from the three-piece decoration and extend short toward the center. The back first lower decorative body 3164 is obtained by providing a transparent member with a vapor-deposited layer having a predetermined metallic luster and translucency. In the state in which the back first lower decorative body 3164 does not emit the LED 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170, the decoration on the front side can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state by the vapor deposition layer of metallic luster. .

  On the back first lower decorative substrate 3170, LEDs 3171 are mounted at positions behind the three-sided decorative part in the back first lower decorative body 3164. When the plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 are caused to emit light, the entire back first lower decorative body 3164 can be light-decorated, and the three-sided decoration part can be brightly decorated. The plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 are full-color LEDs.

  In the state where the back first effect unit 3100 is assembled to the game board 5, the light guide plate 3110 extends behind the transparent panel plate 1110 to the substantially front surface above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and the first pattern And the second pattern can be displayed in a luminous manner. Further, the back first effect unit 3100 is assembled to the game board 5, and as shown in FIG. 74 and the like, the back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163. However, they are located in the vicinity of the upper edge, the left edge, and the right edge, respectively, in the game area 5a.

  The back first lower decorative body 3164 is located immediately above the out port 1008, and the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 substantially coincides with the position of the first start port 2002. . The back first lower decoration body 3164 can decorate the outside of the rotation decoration body 3210 located at the lowermost specific position among the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200. Therefore, the back first lower decorative body 3164 can give a special feeling (or a premium feeling) to the rotating decorative body 3210 at a specific position.

[5-9b. Back second production unit]
Next, the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 89 to 96 and the like. FIG. 89 is a perspective view of the back second rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 90 is a perspective view of the back second rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the rear second stage production unit mainly exploded for each configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the rear second stage production unit mainly exploded for each configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 93 is a front view showing a drive mechanism in the back second effect unit. 94 (a) to (d) are explanatory views showing the movement of a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit, and FIGS. 95 (e) to (g) are in the back second effect unit continuing from FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a some rotation decoration body. FIG. 96 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs in the back second effect unit.

  The back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010 between the back first effect unit 3100 and the back third effect unit 3300. The back second effect unit 3200 is arranged in a line on a predetermined circumference, and includes a plurality of (in this case, 12) rotating ornament bodies 3210 that revolve while rotating. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 each have a shaft portion 3210a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the center of the rear surface to the rear. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 have translucency. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are provided in front of a back second outer decorative body 3228 and a back second inner decorative body 3229 which will be described later.

  The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are composed of a plurality (here, four) special rotating decorative bodies 3211 and the remaining (here, eight) ordinary rotating decorative bodies 3212. The special rotating decorative bodies 3211 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (here, two) of normal rotating decorative bodies 3212 in between. In the present embodiment, the special rotating decorative body 3211 is decorated with a three-piece decoration. The special rotating decorative body 3211 is formed in a gold color with the heel part being red and the other part having a metallic luster, and the whole has translucency. Ordinary rotating decorative body 3212 is decorated with petals. The normal rotating decorative body 3212 has a petal portion formed in a pink color having a metallic luster, and other border portions are formed in white, and the whole has translucency.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 has a unit base 3220 having a quadrangular outer shape and a polygonal through hole 3220a in the center and an annular fixed gear portion 3220b having a larger diameter than the through hole 3220a, and a unit base It is rotatably attached to the front surface of 3220 and penetrates back and forth at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the same circumference larger than the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, so that the shaft portion 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210 can rotate. And an annular drive ring 3221 having an annular ring gear portion 3221b provided outside the multiple shaft holes 3221a and the multiple shaft holes 3221a.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 is attached to the rear surface of the upper right corner of the unit base 3220. The back second drive motor 3222 has a rotating shaft that passes through the unit base 3220 and projects forward. The spur gear-like drive gear 3223 attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3222 and the drive gear 3223 are meshed with the ring gear portion 3221b of the drive ring 3221 and can rotate to the unit base 3220. A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3224 attached to the rotating base body 3210, and a rotating body gear 3225 that is fixed to the rear ends of the shaft portions 3210 a of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 and meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220 b of the unit base 3220. It is equipped with.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 and attached to the unit base 3220, and has a through hole 3226a having a square outer shape and a slightly smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the drive ring 3221. The outer base 3226 has a circular shape that is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 in the through hole 3226a of the outer base 3226 and attached to the unit base 3220. The outer shape is slightly larger than the inner diameter of the drive ring 3221. Are attached to the front surface of the inner base 3227 having a polygonal through hole 3227a at the center and the outer base 3226. The outer shape of the inner base 3227 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the outer base 3226. Back second outer side having through-hole 3228a having a smaller diameter The decorative body 3228 is attached to the front surface of the inner base 3227 in the through hole 3228a of the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the outer shape is larger than the outer diameter of the inner base 3227 and has a polygonal through hole 3229a in the center. A back second inner decorative body 3229, and an annular back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 inserted into the through hole 3229 a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 and attached to the unit base 3220. It is equipped with.

  Furthermore, the back second stage production unit 3200 includes a rotation position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating and is located at a lowermost specific position, and a special that revolves while rotating. And a special rotation position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that the rotation decoration body 3211 is located at the lowest specific position.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 is attached to the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 between the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227, and the rear second outer decorative body 3228 and the rear second inner decorative body 3229. And a back second decorative board 3240 on which a plurality of LEDs 3241 are mounted. The LED 3241 of the back second decorative substrate 3240 is appropriately caused to emit light, whereby the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229 can be light-decorated.

  The unit base 3220 is transparent and has a flat plate shape. The drive ring 3221 has the same number of shaft holes 3221a as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210. The inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 is a shape in which trapezoidal portions protruding toward the center side are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The number of the protrusions in the trapezoidal shape is the same as the rotational decoration body 3210 (here, 12). In this embodiment, twelve trapezoidal protruding portions are provided by 30 degrees in the clockwise direction from the position of the upper end of the circumference.

  The drive ring 3221 has a plurality of detection pieces 3221c protruding from the inner periphery of the portion corresponding to the plurality of shaft holes 3221a toward the center. In addition, the drive ring 3221 extends further to the center side from the detection pieces 3221c that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (two in this case) of the detection pieces 3221c between the plurality of detection pieces 3221c. A plurality (four in this case) of special detection pieces 3221d are provided. That is, the drive ring 3221 of the present embodiment has the same number (12) of detection pieces 3221c as the rotation decoration body 3210 and the same number (4) of special detection pieces 3221d as the special rotation decoration body 3211. have. Although not shown, the drive ring 3221 is rotatably supported by a plurality of rollers provided on the unit base 3220.

  The outer shape of the outer base 3226 is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the unit base 3220. The outer base 3226 is transparent and has a flat plate shape. The outer base 3226 is divided into four parts with a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center of the through hole 3226a as a boundary, and each is attached to the unit base 3220.

  The inner base 3227 is formed so that the inner peripheral shape of the polygonal through hole 3227a is the same shape and the same size as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220. The inner base 3227 is transparent and has a flat plate shape. The inner base 3227 is divided into four parts with a cross line obtained by rotating a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center by about 20 degrees in the clockwise direction, and each is attached to the unit base 3220. Yes. In this embodiment, since the divided part of the inner base 3227 divided into four parts is different from the divided part of the outer base 3226, the unit base 3220 is compared with the case where the divided parts are the same. The strength and rigidity when the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 are attached to can be improved.

  The back second outer decorative body 3228 has the same outer shape as the outer base 3226 and the same size. The back second outer decorative body 3228 is formed such that the inner diameter of the through hole 3228a is slightly larger than the same circumference where the plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged. The back second outer decorative body 3228 includes a red annular decorative portion 3228b provided in an annular shape with a certain width outward from the through hole 3227a, and two upper corners of the four corners outside the annular decorative portion 3228b. And a corner decoration portion 3228c. The annular decoration portion 3228b is decorated by arranging stylized plant leaves in a certain pattern in the circumferential direction. The corner decoration portion 3228c is decorated to resemble a tangled wind. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a relief decoration on the surface. The back second outer decorative body 3228 includes a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster and a light transmitting property. The back second outer decorative body 3228 is divided into four like the outer base 3226.

  The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a circular outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the same circumference in which a plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged. In the back second inner decorative body 3229, the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a is substantially the same shape and the same size as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3227a of the inner base 3227. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is a red decoration in which the stylized plant leaves are arranged in a certain pattern in the circumferential direction so as to form a pair with the annular decorative portion 3228b of the back second outer decorative body 3228. Is given. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a relief decoration on the surface. The back second inner decorative body 3229 includes a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster and a light transmitting property. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is divided into four like the inner base 3227.

  The back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 has a length in the front-rear direction that connects the peripheral edge of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 and the peripheral edge of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229. The inner peripheral side between the base 3220 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 is closed. The back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 includes a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster and a light-transmitting property.

  The rotational position detection sensor 3231 is attached to the rear surface of the back second decorative substrate 3240. This rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c located at the lowest position among the plurality of detection pieces 3221c of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 93).

  The special rotation position detection sensor 3232 is attached between the unit base 3220 and the inner base 3227 and detects the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221. More specifically, the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 has moved one of the plurality of trapezoidal protruding portions in the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 in the clockwise direction from the lowermost portion (rotate 30 degrees). It is attached to a trapezoidal part protruding at a position (see FIG. 93).

  In the back second decorative substrate 3240, the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The back second decorative substrate 3240 has a quadrangular outer shape, and a polygonal through hole 3240a is formed at the center. Further, the back second decorative substrate 3240 is formed with an insertion hole 3240b penetrating in an annular shape on the outer peripheral side of the through hole 3240a. The back second decorative substrate 3240 has a portion outside the insertion hole 3240b attached to the outer base 3226 and a portion inside the insertion hole 3240b attached to the inner base 3227. The back second decorative substrate 3240 is divided into eight so as to correspond to the respective divided bodies of the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 which are divided into four.

  Subsequently, the movement of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the back second rendering unit 3200 will be described. First, in the back second rendering unit 3200, the shaft portion 3210a protruding rearward from each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 has the inner periphery of the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 from the front. Through the insertion hole 3240b of the back second decorative substrate 3240, and between the inner periphery of the outer base 3226 and the outer periphery of the inner base 3227, so that the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 can rotate. While being inserted, the rear end penetrates the shaft hole 3221 a and protrudes rearward from the drive ring 3221. A rotating body gear 3225 that meshes with the fixed gear section 3220b of the unit base 3220 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft section 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210.

  Among the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 move one counterclockwise from the shaft hole 3221a corresponding to the special detection piece 3221d in the drive ring 3221 in a front view. The shaft portion 3210a of the special rotating decorative body 3211 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a. In the remaining eight ordinary rotating decorative bodies 3212, the respective shaft portions 3210a are inserted into the remaining shaft holes in which the shaft portions 3210a of the special rotating decorative body 3211 are not inserted.

  In the normal state, the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment has four special rotation decoration bodies 3211 out of the twelve rotation decoration bodies 3210 in the revolution orbit as shown in FIGS. It is located at both ends in the up-down direction and both ends in the left-right direction on the circumference. In other words, the four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 are located at 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, 9 o'clock and 12 o'clock in the watch, and the remaining 8 ordinary rotating decorative bodies 3212 are It is located at 1 o'clock, 2 o'clock, 4 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, 8 o'clock, 10 o'clock, and 11 o'clock. In the present embodiment, the position of the 6 o'clock part is set as the specific position of the rotating decorative body 3210.

  In this normal state, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (FIG. 93).

  In the state where the back second effect unit 3200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 74 and the like, a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are arranged in a circle along the periphery of the game area 5a. Except for, all the rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be visually recognized from the front in a good state. In the state assembled to the game board 5, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 arranged at the rear is viewed from the front through the through-hole 3229 a (back second inner periphery decoration body 3230) of the back second inner decoration body 3229. It can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the normal state, the rotating decorative body 3210 located at the specific position of the 6 o'clock position which is the lowest end is the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100. And the outside is decorated by the back first lower decorative body 3164. In addition, the rotational decoration body 3210 at a specific position is located behind the first start port 2002 and can decorate the back of the first start port 2002.

  When the drive gear 3223 is rotated clockwise by the back second drive motor 3222 in this normal state, the transmission gear 3224 meshed with the drive gear 3223 and the ring gear portion 3221b meshed with the transmission gear 3224. Through this, the drive ring 3221 rotates in the clockwise direction. When the drive ring 3221 rotates, the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 also moves in the circumferential direction, and the rotating decorative body 3210 also moves in the circumferential direction via the shaft portion 3210a inserted in the shaft hole 3221a. Become.

  At this time, since the rotating body gear 3225 fixed to the shaft portion 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210 meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, the shaft portion 3210a is moved in the circumferential direction. The rotating body gear 3225 rotates about the shaft portion 3210a in the same direction (here, the clockwise direction) as the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221. Thus, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated clockwise by the back second drive motor 3222, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the clockwise direction while rotating in the clockwise direction. Become.

  In the present embodiment, the gear ratio between the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220 and the rotating body gear 3225 is configured such that each rotating decorative body 3210 rotates by one rotation when the drive ring 3221 rotates 30 degrees. .

  As described above, when the drive ring 3221 rotates in the clockwise direction, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve while rotating, and in a state where the normal rotating decorative body 3212 is positioned at a specific position, The detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 does not detect the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 94A).

  When the drive ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction and the special rotation decoration body 3211 approaches a specific position, the normal rotation decoration immediately before the special rotation decoration body 3211 with respect to the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221. The special detection piece 3221d corresponding to the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the body 3212 is inserted approaches the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (FIGS. 94 (b) to (d) and FIG. 95 (e). ), See (f)).

  When the drive ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction and the special rotating decorative body 3211 reaches a specific position, it corresponds to the shaft hole 3221a of the driving ring 3221 in which the shaft portion 3210a of the special rotating decorative body 3211 is inserted. The detected piece 3221c is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 3231, and the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the normal rotation decoration body 3212 immediately before the rotation direction of the special rotation decoration body 3211 is inserted. The special detection piece 3221d protruding from the detection piece 3221c corresponding to is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (see FIG. 95 (g)). That is, when the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221d, it is detected that the special rotation decoration body 3211 is located at a specific position.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 rotates the back second drive motor 3222 in the opposite direction to the above, thereby rotating the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the counterclockwise direction opposite to the above. It is also possible to revolve in the counterclockwise direction.

  Subsequently, a light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 in the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative substrate 3240 are full-color LEDs each having high luminance. These LEDs 3241 can irradiate the player with the emitted color regardless of the decorative colors of the rotary decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229 arranged on the front side. it can. That is, the rotating decoration body 3210, the back second outer decoration body 3228, and the back second inner decoration body 3229 can be light-decorated with an appropriate color depending on the light emission color of the LED 3241.

  The plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 are provided at 12 positions located behind the respective rotary decorative bodies 3210 in a state where the rotary decorative body 3210 is stopped at a specific position (normal state). Of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250, twelve intermediate LED groups 3255 provided between the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, and the rear of the corner decorative portion 3228 c of the back second outer decorative body 3228. The upper left corner LED group 3256 and the upper right corner LED group 3257 provided at the position to be positioned, the lower left corner LED group 3258 provided at the lower left corner part behind the side unit 2200, the start port unit 2100 and the side The winning prize port LED group 3259 provided in the rear part of each general winning prize port 2001 of the unit 2200 is configured. .

  The twelve rotational decoration body LED groups 3250 have the part behind the lowest specific position as the first rotational decoration body LED group 3250a, and the second rotational decoration body LED group 3250b and the third rotation in the clockwise direction. Decoration body LED group 3250c, fourth rotation decoration body LED group 3250d, fifth rotation decoration body LED group 3250e, sixth rotation decoration body LED group 3250f, seventh rotation decoration body LED group 3250g, and eighth rotation decoration body LED group 3250h , A ninth rotation decoration body LED group 3250i, a tenth rotation decoration body LED group 3250j, an eleventh rotation decoration body LED group 3250k, and a twelfth rotation decoration body LED group 3250l. In the twelve rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, the LEDs 3241 provided respectively can emit light independently.

  Each of the twelve rotational decoration body LED groups 3250 includes a radiation passing from the revolution center of the rotational decoration body 3210 through the rotational center of the rotational decoration body 3210 and the rotational center of the rotational decoration body 3210 with the revolution center of the rotational decoration body 3210 as the center. , A first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. Four 1st LED groups 3251, 2nd LED group 3252, 3rd LED group 3253, and 4th LED group 3254 which constitute one rotation decoration body LED group 3250 are LED3241 provided in each, It is possible to emit light independently

  The first LED group 3251 of the rotating ornament body LED group 3250 is closer to the revolution center side (inner side) than the rotation center of the rotating ornament body 3210, and on the counterclockwise revolution direction side of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotation ornament body 3210. positioned. The second LED group 3252 is located on the opposite side (outside) to the revolution center side with respect to the rotation center of the rotating decorative body 3210 with respect to the first LED group 3251. The third LED group 3253 is located on the opposite side (clockwise direction side) of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotating decorative body 3210 with respect to the first LED group 3251. The fourth LED group 3254 is located on the side (outside) opposite to the revolution center side with respect to the rotation center of the rotational decoration body 3210 with respect to the third LED group 3253.

  The twelve intermediate LED groups 3255 have, as a first intermediate LED group 3255a, a portion adjacent to the lowest specific position in the clockwise direction, the second intermediate LED group 3255b in the clockwise direction, Third intermediate LED group 3255c, fourth intermediate LED group 3255d, fifth intermediate LED group 3255e, sixth intermediate LED group 3255f, seventh intermediate LED group 3255g, eighth intermediate LED group 3255h, ninth intermediate LED group 3255i, The tenth intermediate LED group 3255j, the eleventh intermediate LED group 3255k, and the twelfth intermediate LED group 3255l are provided.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment emits a plurality of LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 among the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative board 3240 in a normal state, thereby causing the plurality of LEDs 3241 to emit light. The rotating decorative body 3210 can be decorated with light emission. That is, 12 circular light emitting decorations arranged on the circumference can be shown to the player. At this time, it is possible to decorate the rotating decoration body 3210 with different colors or to illuminate the ordinary rotating decoration body 3212 with different colors.

  Further, by causing the twelve rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 to emit light sequentially in the circumferential direction, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which light rotates in the circumferential direction. At this time, before the next rotating decorative body LED group 3250 emits light, the intermediate LED group 3255 located between the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 may emit light. Thereby, the light emission between rotation decoration body LED group 3250 will be supplemented by the light emission of intermediate LED group 3255, and the player can be shown a light emission effect that turns more smoothly.

  In addition, each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 is divided into four groups of a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. After causing the LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 to emit light, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light, and then adjacent to the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254. When the intermediate LED group 3255 is caused to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that turns more smoothly and a light effect that turns in small increments. Then, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolved while rotating, if the light emission effect as described above is performed in accordance with the revolution speed of the rotating decorative body 3210, an LED is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210 itself. As a result, it is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 is revolving while emitting light.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251,. By emitting light in a proper order, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which light is rotating in one rotational decoration body LED group 3250. Thereby, when the rotating decoration body 3210 is stopped in a normal state, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light in order. The player can be given an illusion that the rotating decorative body 3210 is rotating (spinning) in a state where it is not revolving.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 emit light, and then the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 emit light, the outer side from the center It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that moves and spreads. Alternatively, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, the player is shown an emission effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

  Further, when the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are caused to emit light at the same time, an annular light emitting decoration can be shown to the player. At this time, by increasing the luminance of the light emitting decoration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the shape of the rotating decoration body 3210 or the like (hard to see). Thereby, for example, in a state in which the rotating decorative body 3210 is made difficult to be seen by increasing the luminance and light is emitted in a ring shape, the rotational decorative body 3210 is rotated and revolved to change the position of the special rotating decorative body 3211. After that, by making the brightness low or turning it off so that the rotating decorative body 3210 can be easily seen, it is possible to show the player that the rotating decorative body 3210 is moving sometime.

  As described above, according to the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, various movable effects can be performed by the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, and various light emission by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative substrate 3240. Production can be performed. Further, by appropriately combining the movable effect and the light emission effect, various effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be made less tired.

[5-9c. Back third production unit]
Next, the back third rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 97 to FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the back third rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the back third rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the back third stage production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 101 is a front view showing a drive mechanism and a decorative board in the back third effect unit in a state where the left lateral ring ornament and the right lateral ring ornament are moved to the appearance position. The back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached in the back box 3010 behind the back second effect unit 3200.

  The back third rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a square frame-shaped unit base 3301, an upper unit 3310 provided on the upper part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and a unit base 3301. A lower unit 3330 provided in the lower part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, a left unit 3350 provided in the left part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and a right unit 3370 provided in the right part of the front surface of the unit base 3301. And.

  The upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 is attached to the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 which is attached to the upper part of the unit base 3301 so that it can be opened and closed near the center in the left-right direction, and to the rear side of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311. The upper vertical ring decorative board 3315, the back third upper drive motor 3320 which is attached to the upper right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and whose rotation shaft projects rearward of the unit base 3301, and the back third upper drive A spur gear-like drive gear 3321 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3320, a rotation link member 3322 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3321 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotation link member 3322 Slides left and right to open and close the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 That the slide link member 3323, and a.

  The upper unit 3310 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover an upper detection sensor 3324 for detecting the opening / closing position of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and a part of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 from the front side. The front cover 3325, the gear cover 3326 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3321 from the rear, and the slide link member 3323 are biased in the direction in which the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is closed. An upper spring 3327.

  The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 includes a first decorative body 3312 that is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end extends in the front-rear direction, and a right side of the base end side of the first decorative body 3312. The second decorative body 3313 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line except for a part thereof. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend in a straight line from the proximal end side, and then extend substantially semicircularly so that the extension line of the linear portion faces the inner side of the chord of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semi-arc shape with the antinodes of the strings directed in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend with a substantially constant width from the proximal end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 have a large-diameter decorative portion 3311a having three large diameters and a small-diameter decorative portion 3311b having six small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3312 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3313 with the shaft hole 3312a as a center, and a shaft hole 3312a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. A first gear portion 3312b, a link piece 3312c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side of the distal end side, and a long hole-like link slit 3312d extending through the link piece 3312c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. And have. In the link slit 3312d, a transmission pin 3323b of a slide link member 3323 described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3313 is provided in a circular arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3312 side around the shaft hole 3313a and a shaft hole 3313a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. And a second gear portion 3313b meshing with the first gear portion 3312b. When the first decorative body 3312 is rotated, the second decorative body 3313 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3312 due to the engagement of the first gear portion 3312b and the second gear portion 3313b. Accordingly, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is movable such that the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are opened and closed with the base end side as the center.

  The upper vertical ring decorative substrate 3315 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313, and the first LED 3316 behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3311a and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3311b. The second LED 3317 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3316 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3317 is a single color LED.

  The back third upper drive motor 3320 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotation link member 3322 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at the same height as the rotation axis of the back third upper drive motor 3320 on the left side of the back third upper drive motor 3320. The rotary link member 3322 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3322a that meshes with the drive gear 3321 and a crank pin 3322b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape forward from the eccentric position. A crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3323a of a slide link member 3323 described later.

  The slide link member 3323 has a base end side located in the vicinity of the back third upper drive motor 3320 and a tip end side of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction center (the portion where the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is rotatably supported). ) Extends to the vicinity in the left-right direction and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The slide link member 3323 is provided above the rotation center of the rotary link member 3322. The slide link member 3323 extends vertically on the base end side, and has a transmission slit 3323a into which the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted. It has a transmission pin 3323b slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d of the decorative body 3312, and a detection piece 3323c detected by the upper detection sensor 3324 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 is positioned to the right of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3322, the lower end is positioned below the rotation center of the rotary link member 3322, and heads toward the front end side. So that it bends. Further, the slide link member 3323 has a flange portion 3323d to which one end side (left end side) of the upper spring 3327 is hooked. The slide link member 3323 is always urged to the right by an upper spring 3327 hooked on the flange portion 3323d.

  In the normal state, the upper unit 3310 is such that the slide link member 3323 is positioned at the moving end to the right, and the top ends of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are farthest from each other. The decorative body 3311 is in the most open standby position. In the state where the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are respectively positioned near the upper edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In a normal state, the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is located at a bent portion of the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a in the slide link member 3323. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3323 c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324.

  In this normal state, the respective leading end sides of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 are away from the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers. A rotational moment is applied to the respective tip sides to approach each other, and the rotational moment causes the slide link member 3323 to move to the left via the link slit 3312d of the first decorative body 3312 and the transmission pin 3323b of the slide link member 3323. The force which moves to the direction is acting. Due to the force to move the slide link member 3323 to the left, the force to move the crank pin 3322b to the left acts via the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323.

  In a normal state, since the crank pin 3322b is located below the revolution center (the rotation center of the rotary link member 3322), the crank pin 3322b is rotated clockwise so that the crank pin 3322b moves downward and to the left. Try to revolve in the direction, but because the crank pin 3322b is located at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b can no longer revolve in the clockwise direction, and the crank pin 3322b revolves. There is no. That is, in a normal state, even if a force from the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 side acts, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 does not close (move to the appearance position side), and the standby position remains open. It is locked in the state, and the load from the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 side to the back third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

  In this normal state, when the rotation link member 3322 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third upper drive motor 3320 via the drive gear 3321, the crank pin 3322b of the rotation link member 3322 rises in the transmission slit 3323a. The slide link member 3323 slides to the left against the urging force of the upper spring 3327. When the slide link member 3323 moves to the left, the first decorative body 3312 is moved counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3312a so that the tip side thereof moves downward via the link slit 3312d by the transmission pin 3323b at the tip. The second decorative body 3313 rotates in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3313a by the second gear portion 3313b meshing with the first gear portion 3312b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3312 and the tip of the second decorative body 3313 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed).

  Further, since the slide link member 3323 slides leftward, the detection piece 3323c also moves leftward together, so that the upper detection sensor 3324 is in a non-detection state.

  Then, the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 revolves counterclockwise, so that the crank pin 3322b slides upward in the transmission slit 3323a and then slides downward, and the crank pin 3322b When revolving 180 degrees or more from the state and positioned near the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a (below the center of revolution), the driving of the back third upper drive motor 3320 stops. In this state, the top positions of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are close to each other so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are each rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In this appearance position, a force for moving the slide link member 3323 to the right is applied by the biasing force of the upper spring 3327, so that the crank pin 3322 b is applied to the crank pin 3322 b via the transmission slit 3323 a of the slide link member 3323. There is a force to move it to the right. In this appearance position, the crank pin 3322b is positioned below the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3322), so that the crank pin 3322b moves counterclockwise so as to move downward and to the right. However, since the crank pin 3322b is positioned at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b cannot revolve further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crank pin 3322b revolves. Never do. That is, in the state of the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 does not open (move to the standby position side) even if a force from the upper spring 3327 or the like is applied, and the state of the appearance position remains closed. And the load from the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 side to the back third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and are positions rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 (the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313) is within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is set as above until the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

  Thus, in the upper unit 3310, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 can be opened and closed between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third upper drive motor 3320.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is driven by a constant current drive system to rotate the drive gear 3321 with high torque, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is set to the standby position and the appearance position. Can be moved (opened and closed) in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The lower unit 3330 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is attached to the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 which is attached to be openable and closable in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction at the lower part of the unit base 3301, and to the rear side of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331. A lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, a back third lower drive motor 3340 which is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and whose rotating shaft projects rearward of the unit base 3301, and a back third lower drive. A spur gear-like drive gear 3341 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3340, a rotation link member 3342 that is rotated by rotation of the drive gear 3341 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotation link member 3342 Slides left and right to open and close the lower vertical ring ornament 3331 That the slide link member 3343, and a.

  The lower unit 3330 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a lower detection sensor 3344 for detecting the opening / closing position of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 and a part of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 from the front side. The front cover 3345, the gear cover 3346 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3341 from the rear, and the slide link member 3343 are biased in the direction in which the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is closed. A lower spring 3347.

  The lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 includes a first decoration body 3332 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth, and a left side of the base end side of the first decoration body 3332. The second decorative body 3333 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line except for a part thereof. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and then extend substantially semicircularly so that the extension line of the linear portion faces the inside of the belly of the string from the distal end. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semi-arc shape with the antinodes of the strings directed in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend with a substantially constant width from the proximal end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 have a large-diameter decorative portion 3331a having three large diameters and a small-diameter decorative portion 3331b having six small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3332 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3333 with the shaft hole 3332a as the center, and a shaft hole 3332a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. A first gear portion 3332b, a link piece 3332c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side of the distal end side, and a long-hole-like link slit 3332d extending through the link piece 3332c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. And have. In the link slit 3332d, a transmission pin 3343b of a slide link member 3343, which will be described later, is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3333 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3332 around the shaft hole 3333a and a shaft hole 3333a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. And a second gear portion 3333b meshing with the first gear portion 3332b. When the first decorative body 3332 is rotated, the second decorative body 3333 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3332 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3332b and the second gear portion 3333b. As a result, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is movable such that the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 open and close on the proximal end side.

  The lower vertical ring decorative substrate 3335 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333, and the first LED 3336 behind the large diameter decorative portion 3331a and the rear of the small diameter decorative portion 3331b. The second LED 3337 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3336 is a full color LED and the second LED 3337 is a single color LED.

  The back third lower drive motor 3340 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotation link member 3342 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the right side of the back third lower drive motor 3340 at the same height as the rotation shaft of the back third lower drive motor 3340. The rotation link member 3342 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3342a that meshes with the drive gear 3341, and a crank pin 3342b that protrudes forward from the eccentric position in a cylindrical shape. A crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3343a of a slide link member 3343 described later.

  The slide link member 3343 has a proximal end located in the vicinity of the back third lower drive motor 3340 and a distal end supported in the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is rotatably supported). ) Extends to the vicinity in the left-right direction and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The slide link member 3343 is provided below the rotation center of the rotary link member 3342. The slide link member 3343 extends vertically on the base end side, and has a transmission slit 3343a into which the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted. It has a transmission pin 3343b slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d of the decorative body 3332 and a detection piece 3343c detected by the lower detection sensor 3344 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 is located to the left of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3342, the upper end is located above the rotation center of the rotary link member 3342, and heads toward the distal end side. So that it bends. Further, the slide link member 3343 has a flange portion 3343d to which one end side (left end side) of the lower spring 3347 is hooked. The slide link member 3343 is always urged to the left by a lower spring 3347 hooked on the flange portion 3343d.

  In the normal state, the lower unit 3330 is such that the slide link member 3343 is positioned at the leftward moving end, and the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are farthest apart from each other. The decorative body 3331 is in the most open standby position. In a state where the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are respectively located near the lower edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In a normal state, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is located at a bent portion of the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a in the slide link member 3343. Furthermore, in a normal state, the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344.

  In this normal state, the front end sides of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are away from the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers. A rotational moment is applied to the respective tip sides to approach each other, and the rotational moment moves the slide link member 3343 to the right via the link slit 3332d of the first decorative body 3332 and the transmission pin 3343b of the slide link member 3343. The force which moves to the direction is acting. A force for moving the slide link member 3343 to the right acts on the crank pin 3342b via the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343.

  In a normal state, since the crank pin 3342b is located above the revolution center (the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342), the crank pin 3342b is rotated clockwise so that the crank pin 3342b moves upward and rightward. Trying to revolve in the direction, but because the crank pin 3342b is located at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve further in the clockwise direction, and the crank pin 3342b revolves. There is no. That is, in a normal state, even if a force from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side is applied, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is not further opened and is locked in the standby position. The load from the ring decoration body 3331 side to the back third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

  In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3342 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third lower drive motor 3340 via the drive gear 3341, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 descends in the transmission slit 3343a. The slide link member 3343 slides to the right against the urging force of the lower spring 3347. When the slide link member 3343 moves to the right, the first decorative body 3332 moves counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3332a so that the tip side moves upward through the link slit 3332d by the transmission pin 3343b at the tip. The second decorative body 3333 is rotated in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3333a by the second gear portion 3333b meshing with the first gear portion 3332b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3332 and the tip of the second decorative body 3333 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is closed).

  Further, since the slide link member 3343 slides to the right, the detection piece 3343c also moves to the right together, so that the lower detection sensor 3344 is in a non-detection state.

  Then, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 revolves counterclockwise, so that the crank pin 3342b slides downward in the transmission slit 3343a and then slides upward, and the crank pin 3342b is normal. When revolving 180 degrees or more from the state and positioned near the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a (above the center of revolution), the driving of the back third lower drive motor 3340 is stopped. In this state, the appearance positions of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are close to each other so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In this appearance position, the biasing force of the lower spring 3347 exerts a force to move the slide link member 3343 to the left, so that the crank pin 3342b is applied to the crank pin 3342b via the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343. There is a force acting to move it to the left. In this appearance position, since the crank pin 3342b is located above the revolution center (the rotation center of the rotary link member 3342), the crank pin 3342b is rotated counterclockwise so as to move upward and to the left. However, since the crank pin 3342b is positioned at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crank pin 3342b is revolved. Never do. That is, in the state of the appearance position, even if a force from the lower spring 3347 or the like is applied, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 does not open (move to the standby position side), and the state of the appearance position remains closed. And the load from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side to the back third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and are each rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 (the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333) is placed in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third lower drive motor 3340 is set as above until the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

  Thus, in the lower unit 3330, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 can be opened and closed between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third lower drive motor 3340.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back third lower drive motor 3340 is driven by a constant current drive system so that the drive gear 3341 is rotated with high torque, and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is moved to the standby position and the appearance position. Can be moved (opened and closed) in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The left unit 3350 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is provided on the left side of the unit base 3301 so that it can be opened and closed near the center in the vertical direction, and on the rear side of the left side ring ornament 3351. A left side ring decorative board 3355 that is attached, a back third left drive motor 3360 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and whose rotating shaft projects rearward of the unit base 3301, and back third A spur gear-like drive gear 3361 attached to the rotation shaft of the left drive motor 3360, a rotation link member 3362 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3361 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotation link member 3362 The left side ring decoration body 3351 is opened and closed by sliding up and down by rotating That the slide link member 3363, and a.

  The left unit 3350 is attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the left detection sensor 3364 for detecting the opening / closing position of the left side ring decoration body 3351 and a part of the left side ring decoration body 3351 from the front side. A front cover 3365, and a gear cover 3366 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3361 from the rear.

  The left lateral ring decorative body 3351 includes a first decorative body 3352 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose proximal end extends in the front-rear direction, and an upper side on the proximal end side of the first decorative body 3352. The second decorative body 3353 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are formed symmetrically with respect to the horizontal line except for a part thereof. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and are substantially semicircular so that the extension line of the linear portion faces the inner side of the string belly from the distal end. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semi-arc shape with the antinodes of the strings directed in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend with a substantially constant width from the proximal end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 have a large-diameter decorative portion 3351a having three large diameters and a small-diameter decorative portion 3351b having six small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3352 is provided in a circular arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3353 with the shaft hole 3352a as the center, and a shaft hole 3352a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. A first gear portion 3352b, a link piece 3352c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side of the distal end side, and a long hole-like link slit 3352d extending through the link piece 3352c and extending toward the shaft hole 3352a. And have. In the link slit 3352d, a transmission pin 3363b of a slide link member 3363 described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3353 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3352 with the shaft hole 3353a as a center, and a shaft hole 3353a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. And a second gear portion 3353b meshing with the first gear portion 3352b. When the first decorative body 3352 is rotated, the second decorative body 3353 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3352 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3352b and the second gear portion 3353b. Accordingly, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is movable such that the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are opened and closed with the base end side as the center.

  The left lateral ring decorative substrate 3355 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, the first LED 3356 behind the large diameter decorative portion 3351a, and the rear of the small diameter decorative portion 3351b. The second LED 3357 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3356 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3357 is a single color LED.

  The back third left drive motor 3360 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotary link member 3362 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third left drive motor 3360 below the back third left drive motor 3360. The rotary link member 3362 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3362a that meshes with the drive gear 3361, and a crank pin 3362b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the eccentric position. A crank pin 3362b of the rotation link member 3362 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3363a of a slide link member 3363 described later.

  The slide link member 3363 has a base end side located near the back third left drive motor 3360 and a tip end side of the unit base 3301 that is supported by the center of the unit base 3301 in the vertical direction (the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 is rotatably supported). ) Up and down in the vertical direction and attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3363 is provided on the left side of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362. The slide link member 3363 extends to the left and right at the base end side, and has a transmission slit 3363a into which the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is slidably inserted. It has a transmission pin 3363b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d of the decorative body 3352, and a detection piece 3363c detected by the left detection sensor 3364 on the proximal end side.

  The transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363 is located below the rotation center of the rotary link member 3362, the right end thereof is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3362, and heads toward the front end side. So that it bends.

  In the normal state, the left unit 3350 is such that the slide link member 3363 is positioned at the upward moving end, and the distal ends of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are farthest away from each other and the left lateral ring. The decoration body 3351 is in the most open standby position. In the state where the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are respectively located near the left edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In a normal state, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is located at the right end of the transmission slit 3363a in the slide link member 3363. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364.

  In this normal state, the front end sides of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 approach the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers, and the center of gravity is more than the rotation center. Located on the right. Therefore, in the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, the rotational moments to rotate in the clockwise direction respectively act, but the first gear portion 3352b of the first decorative body 3352 and the second Since the second gear portion 3353b of the two decorative body 3353 is meshed with each other, the rotational moment applied to each of the two decorative bodies 3353 is canceled and maintained in the standby position. Thereby, from the left side ring decoration body 3351 side, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b, and the left side ring decoration A load is hardly applied to the back third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

  In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3362 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third left drive motor 3360 via the drive gear 3361, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 moves left in the transmission slit 3363a. Revolving so as to slide in the direction, the slide link member 3363 slides downward. When the slide link member 3363 moves downward, the first decorative body 3352 moves counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3352a so that the tip side moves upward via the link slit 3352d by the transmission pin 3363b at the tip. The second decorative body 3353 rotates in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3353a by the second gear portion 3353b meshing with the first gear portion 3352b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3352 and the tip of the second decorative body 3353 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is closed).

  Further, since the slide link member 3363 slides downward, the detection piece 3363c also moves downward together, so the left detection sensor 3364 is in a non-detection state.

  Then, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 revolves counterclockwise, so that the crank pin 3362b slides to the left in the transmission slit 3363a and then to the right, and the crank pin 3362b When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the normal state and is positioned near the right end of the transmission slit 3363a (to the right of the revolution center), the driving of the back third left drive motor 3360 stops. In this state, the front end of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are in an appearance position where the left side ring decorative body 3351 is closed so that the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are respectively rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In the state of the appearance position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 are in a state of extending to the right from the respective rotation centers. Rotational moments to rotate in the clockwise direction act on the second decorative body 3353 and the first gear portion 3352b of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, respectively. Since the second gear portion 3353b meshes with each other, the rotational moment applied to each of the second gear portions 3353b is canceled and maintained in the state of the appearance position. Thereby, from the left side ring decoration body 3351 side, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b, and the left side ring decoration A load is hardly applied to the back third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and are each rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 (the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353) is within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. When the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third left drive motor 3360 is set as above until the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

  As described above, in the left unit 3350, the back third upper drive motor 3320 can open and close the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 between the opened standby position state and the closed appearance position state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back third left drive motor 3360 is driven by a constant current drive system so that the drive gear 3361 is rotated with high torque, and the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is set to the standby position and the appearance position. Can be moved (opened and closed) in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The right unit 3370 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is provided on the right side of the unit base 3301 so that it can be opened and closed near the center in the vertical direction, and on the rear side of the right side ring ornament 3371. A right side ring decorative board 3375 that is attached, a back third right drive motor 3380 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and whose rotating shaft projects rearward of the unit base 3301, and back third A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3381 attached to the rotation shaft of the right drive motor 3380, a rotary link member 3382 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3381 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotary link member 3382 Rotate the top and bottom to open and close the right side ring decoration 3371 That the slide link member 3383, and a.

  The right unit 3370 is attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a right detection sensor 3384 for detecting the opening / closing position of the right side ring decoration body 3371 and a part of the right side ring decoration body 3371 from the front side. A front cover 3385 and a gear cover 3386 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3381 from the rear.

  The right lateral ring decorative body 3371 includes a first decorative body 3372 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose proximal end extends in the front-rear direction, and an upper side on the proximal end side of the first decorative body 3372. The second decorative body 3373 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are formed symmetrically with respect to the horizontal line except for a part thereof. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and then extend substantially semicircularly so that the extension line of the linear portion faces the inner side of the chord of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semi-arc shape with the antinodes of the strings directed in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend with a substantially constant width from the proximal end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 have a large-diameter decorative portion 3371a having three large diameters and a small-diameter decorative portion 3371b having six small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3372 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3373 with the shaft hole 3372a as a center, and a shaft hole 3372a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. A first gear portion 3372b, a link piece 3372c projecting from the proximal end side to the opposite side of the distal end side, and a long-hole-like link slit 3372d extending through the link piece 3372c and extending toward the shaft hole 3372a. And have. In the link slit 3372d, a transmission pin 3383b of a slide link member 3383 described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3373 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3372 with the shaft hole 3373a as a center, and a shaft hole 3373a supported rotatably on the unit base 3301 on the base end side. And a second gear portion 3373b meshing with the first gear portion 3372b. When the first decorative body 3372 is rotated, the second decorative body 3373 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3372 by the meshing of the first gear portion 3372b and the second gear portion 3373b. Accordingly, the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is movable such that the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are opened and closed with the proximal end as the center.

  The right lateral ring decorative board 3375 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, the first LED 3376 behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3371a, and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3371b. The second LED 3377 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3376 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3377 is a single color LED.

  The back third right drive motor 3380 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotary link member 3382 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third right drive motor 3380 above the back third right drive motor 3380. The rotary link member 3382 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3382a that meshes with the drive gear 3381, and a crank pin 3382b that protrudes forward from the eccentric position in a cylindrical shape. A crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3383a of a slide link member 3383 described later.

  The slide link member 3383 has a base end located in the vicinity of the back third right drive motor 3380 and a tip end on the center of the unit base 3301 in the up-down direction (a portion where the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 is rotatably supported). ) Up and down in the vertical direction and attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3383 is provided on the right side of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382. The slide link member 3383 extends to the left and right at the base end side, and has a transmission slit 3383a into which the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted. It has a transmission pin 3383b slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d of the decorative body 3372, and a detection piece 3383c detected by the right detection sensor 3384 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383 is located above the rotation center of the rotary link member 3382, the left end is located to the left of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3382, and the front end side is Bent to the opposite side.

  In the normal state, the right unit 3370 has the slide link member 3383 located at the upward movement end, and the distal ends of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are farthest from each other and the right lateral ring. The decoration body 3371 is in the most open standby position. In a state where the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are each positioned near the right edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In a normal state, the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is located at the left end of the transmission slit 3383a in the slide link member 3383. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3383 c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384.

  In this normal state, the front end sides of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are close to the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers, and the center of gravity is more than the rotation center. Located on the left. Therefore, in the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, the rotational moments that try to rotate in the counterclockwise direction respectively act, but the first gear portion 3372b of the first decorative body 3372 and Since the 2nd gear part 3373b of the 2nd decoration body 3373 meshes | engages, the rotational moment concerning each is canceled and it maintains in the state of a standby position. Thereby, from the side of the right side ring decoration body 3371, a force to slide the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction hardly acts via the link slit 3382d and the transmission pin 3383b. A load is hardly applied to the back third right drive motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

  When the rotary link member 3382 is rotated clockwise by the back third right drive motor 3380 via the drive gear 3381 in this normal state, the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is moved rightward in the transmission slit 3383a. The slide link member 3383 slides downward. When the slide link member 3383 moves downward, the first decorative body 3372 moves in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3372a so that the tip end side moves upward via the link slit 3372d by the transmission pin 3383b at the tip. While rotating, the second gear 3373b meshing with the first gear 3372b causes the second decorative body 3373 to rotate counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3373a. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3372 and the tip of the second decorative body 3373 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is closed).

  Further, since the slide piece 3383 slides downward, the detection piece 3383c also moves downward, so that the right detection sensor 3384 is in a non-detection state.

  Then, the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 revolves in the clockwise direction, so that the crank pin 3382b slides to the left after sliding in the transmission slit 3383a, and the crank pin 3382b is normally When revolving 180 degrees or more from this state and being positioned near the left end of the transmission slit 3383a (leftward of the revolution center), the driving of the back third right drive motor 3380 is stopped. In this state, the front end of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are in an appearance position in which the right side ring decorative body 3371 is closed and close to each other. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In the state of the appearance position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are in a state of extending leftward from the respective rotation centers. Rotational moments to rotate counterclockwise act on the second decorative body 3373 and the first gear portion 3372b of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, respectively. Since the second gear portion 3373b meshes with each other, the rotational moment applied to each of the second gear portions 3373b is canceled and maintained in the appearance position state. Thereby, from the side of the right side ring decoration body 3371, almost no force is exerted to slide the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3372d and the transmission pin 3383b. A load is hardly applied to the back third right drive motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are not rotated until their respective tips are in contact with each other, and are each rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the right side ring decoration body 3371 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the right side ring decoration body 3371 (the first decoration body 3372 and the second decoration body 3373) is placed in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. When the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third right drive motor 3380 is set as above until the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

  In this way, in the right unit 3370, the back third right drive motor 3380 can open and close the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 between the opened standby position state and the closed appearance position state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back third right drive motor 3380 is driven by a constant current drive system so that the drive gear 3381 is rotated with high torque, and the right side ring decoration body 3371 is moved to the standby position and the appearance position. Can be moved (opened and closed) in a very short time of 650 ms.

  In the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and a right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are formed in the same shape. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 of the back third rendering unit 3300 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The left lateral ring decoration body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are also provided behind the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331.

  In this embodiment, a two-phase stepping motor is used as the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380. .

  In the present embodiment, 200 pps (the width of one pulse is 5 ms) with the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 attached. Furthermore, even if it is excited with a pulse of 200 pps without a slow-up process from the stop state, it can be started automatically.

  Further, since the movement from the standby position to the appearance position of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is completed in 130 steps, [130step × 5 ms. = 650 ms], and it is possible to appear and retreat (appear / retreat) at 650 ms.

  Next, a movable effect using the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 in the back third rendering unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, each of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is in a standby position. ing. When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are in the standby position, the back side of the back second effect unit 3200 arranged in the front side. It is located outside the through hole 3229a of the second inner decorative body 3229 and is invisible from the front (player side).

  In this normal state, when the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 from the standby position to the appearance position, The front end of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the front end of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 are close to each other in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, and a decoration in which three rings are arranged vertically (up and down). It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 104).

  Further, when the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven in a normal state, the left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position. The front end of the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 and the front end of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are close to each other in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, and the three rings are arranged side by side (left and right). Can be shown to the player (see FIG. 105).

  Furthermore, in the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311. When the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are respectively moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3331 is located at the center in the frame of the unit base 3301 in a front view. The front end of the ring decorative body 3311 and the front end of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are close to each other, and the front end of the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the front end of the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are close to each other. The player can see the decoration in which the rings are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross (see FIG. 106).

  In the back third rendering unit 3300, for example, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven in a normal state, so that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are driven. Is moved from the standby position to the midway position from the appearance position to the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 (first decoration body 3312 and second decoration body 3313) and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 (first The front end portions of the decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373) are located inside the through-hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 in the back second rendering unit 3200 in a front view, and are partly on the player side (See FIG. 107). In this state, the two leading ends of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration body 3229, and two right side ring decoration bodies 3371 Since two tips appear in the upper and lower corners on the right side among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229, the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 can be changed. it can.

  As described above, according to the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are appropriately combined. By moving to the appearance position, ring decorations arranged vertically, horizontally, or in a cross can appear, and various movable effects can be shown to the player.

  Also, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration board 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, the first LED 3356 and the second LED 3357 of the left horizontal ring decoration board 3355, the right horizontal ring. The first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the decoration substrate 3375 are appropriately illuminated to emit light on the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371. Therefore, various light emission effects can be shown to the player.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 102 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit are revolved 15 degrees while rotating in the clockwise direction from the normal state. FIG. 103 is an enlarged front view showing the lower part of the game board in a state where the special rotating ornament in the second back effect unit is moved to a specific position. FIG. 104 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decorative body and the lower vertical ring decorative body moved to the appearance position in the back third effect unit. FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board showing the left side ring decoration body and the right side ring decoration body in the back third stage production unit moved to the appearance position. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration body, the lower vertical ring decoration body, the left horizontal ring decoration body, and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third stage production unit in the state of being moved to the appearance position. is there. FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration body and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third effect unit moved to the middle of the appearance position.

  FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board showing an example of the effect image on the effect display device when a problem occurs in the back third effect unit. FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board showing an example of the shadow effect executed during the light emission effect in the back unit. FIG. 110 is a front view of the pachinko machine shown with the game board facing the game window of the door frame.

  The game board 5 includes a panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, an attacker unit 2400, a center accessory 2500, and the like. Since it is formed transparently, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 74 and the like, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 are passed through them. The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, the back first right decorative body 3163, the back first lower decorative body 3164, and the plurality of rotations in the back second directive unit 3200 Decoration body 3210 (special rotation decoration body 3211 and normal rotation decoration body 3212), back second outside decoration body 3228, back second inside Kazaritai 3229, and the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230, and the like can be satisfactorily visually recognize the.

  In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 74 and the like, four special rotation decoration bodies 3211 out of the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210 in the back second stage production unit 3200 have both ends in the vertical direction on the circumference of the revolution track. , Located at both ends in the left-right direction. That is, one special rotating decorative body 3211 is located at a specific position (6 o'clock part of the timepiece) that is the lowest on the revolution track. The special rotating decorative body 3211 located at this specific position is positioned at the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100, and the outside is the back first lower decorative body 3164. It is in a state decorated by. Further, the special rotating decorative body 3211 (rotating decorative body 3210) at a specific position is located behind the first starting port 2002 and decorates the rear of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 103).

  In the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are respectively in the standby position state. It is located outside the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 in the back second rendering unit 3200 in the front view, so that the front is a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, a drive ring 3221, and the back second outer side. It is covered with a decorative body 3228, a back second inner decorative body 3229, etc., and is invisible from the player side.

  In this normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side through the inside of the back second inner decorative body 3230 in the back second effect unit 3200 is displayed on the player side (front). Can be visually recognized in a good state.

  The game board 5 has the back first of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, and the back third effect unit 3300 perform a predetermined movable effect.

  First, an effect using the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As an effect using the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 102, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated in the clockwise direction by driving the back second drive motor 3222. A movable effect of revolving in the clockwise direction can be performed while the plurality (12) of the rotating decoration bodies 3210 rotate in the clockwise direction. As a result, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve around the effect image that can be seen through the inside of the back second inner decorative body 3230 while rotating, so that the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate around the game area. It is possible to make 5a lively and entertain the player.

  As described above, for example, when the LED 3171 of the back first lower decorative board 3170 in the back first effect unit 3100 is caused to emit light while the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are revolving while rotating, the rear side is the rotating decoration body. Since the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 around which 3210 circulates, the player's interest can be directed to the back first lower decorative body 3164. Further, since the back first lower decorative body 3164 is conspicuous, a desired rotational decorative body 3210 (special rotational decorative body 3211) is placed in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164 with respect to the player. Depending on whether or not the revolution is stopped, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained.

  At this time, only the first rotation decoration body LED group 3250a corresponding to the specific position in the rotation decoration body LED group 3250 may be turned on. As a result, only the rotating decorative body 3210 passing through the rear side of the back first lower decorative body 3164 in the ring can be viewed well, and the other rotating decorative body 3210 is difficult to view. It is possible to show the player an effect like a roulette or slot with the inside of the ring as a window, and to enhance the throbbing feeling as to whether or not the desired rotating ornament 3210 stops at a specific position. Can do.

  When the desired rotating decorative body 3210 (special rotating decorative body 3211) stops in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164, as shown in FIG. Since the first starting port 2002 is provided, if the player receives the game ball B in the first starting port 2002, the player may think that there is a very high possibility that a “hit” will be drawn. It is possible to urge the player to drive the game ball B aiming at the first start port 2002 and to entertain the game ball B.

  Further, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolved while being rotated by the driving of the back second drive motor 3222, the plurality of LEDs 3241 on the back second decorative board 3240 are appropriately set in accordance with the movement position of each rotating decorative body 3210. You may make it light-emit. For example, when one rotating decoration body 3210 is located at a specific position, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 of each rotating decoration body LED group 3250 are displayed. While turning on, each intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. Subsequently, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves about 7 degrees in the clockwise direction, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are turned on, and the first LED group 3251 and the first LED group 3251 are turned on. The second LED group 3252 is turned off and the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. Further, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves 15 degrees from the initial position, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are also turned off, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is turned off, and only the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. Leave it alone.

  Subsequently, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves about 22 degrees from the first position, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are turned on, and the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group are turned on. While 3254 is kept off, the intermediate LED group 3255 is kept on. When the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves 30 degrees from the first position (the next rotating decorative body 3210 is positioned at a specific position), the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are turned on to rotate the rotating decorative body LED. The group 3250 is turned on and the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. Accordingly, the LED 3241 in which the rotational decoration body 3210 is positioned forward is turned on, and the LED 3241 in which the rotational decoration body 3210 is not positioned forward is turned off. As if the LED itself is provided, the player can show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 is revolving while emitting light, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. .

  Further, in the back second rendering unit 3200, in a normal state, all the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light with high brightness, and then a plurality of rotational decorations are driven by the back second drive motor 3222. The body 3210 rotates and revolves, the rotation and revolution of the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are stopped in a state different from the normal state, and the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are turned off or dimmed. May be. Thereby, since all the rotating ornament body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light with high luminance, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the plurality of rotating ornament bodies 3210. By changing the position of 3210, it is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 moves without the player's knowledge, so that the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, in the back second rendering unit 3200, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative board 3240 can appropriately emit light, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is changed from the first rotating decorative body LED group 3250a. , Second rotation decoration body LED group 3250b, third rotation decoration body LED group 3250c, fourth rotation decoration body LED group 3250d, fifth rotation decoration body LED group 3250e, sixth rotation decoration body LED group 3250f, seventh rotation decoration Body LED group 3250g, eighth rotation decoration body LED group 3250h, ninth rotation decoration body LED group 3250i, tenth rotation decoration body LED group 3250j, eleventh rotation decoration body LED group 3250k, and twelve rotation decoration body LED group By emitting light (turning on) in order like 3250l, the player can have a light-emitting effect in which light is rotating in a predetermined direction. So it can be, it is possible to entertain the player. When the rotation of the light is stopped, the player's expectation can be enhanced depending on at which position the rotation of the light stops, and the player can be entertained.

  Note that when the rotation of light is stopped, the rotation speed of the light is gradually decreased, and the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth in the rotating decoration body LED group 3250. The LED group 3254 and then the intermediate LED group 3255 may be lit in order so that the light moves in small increments in the rotation direction and stops slowly. Thereby, since the position where light stops becomes fine, it can be made difficult for the player to predict at which position the rotation of the light stops, and the player can be excited and entertained.

  In addition, as described above, since the light can be rotated (turned around), by turning on and off in order in the circumferential direction, the lighting effect that measures time like a clock and the remaining time can be reduced. The suggested light-emitting effect can also be performed, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in each of the rotational decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251,. The light may be emitted in any order. Thereby, while it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which light is rotating in one rotation decoration body LED group 3250, the rotation decoration body 3210 is not revolving with respect to the player. An illusion of rotating (spinning) can be provided, and the player can be entertained.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 emit light, and then the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 emit light, the outer side from the center It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that moves and spreads. Alternatively, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, the player is shown an emission effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

  Next, effects using the back third effect unit 3300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. First, as shown in FIG. 104, for example, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven from the normal state, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 are moved. Move from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, the front end of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the front end of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 approach each other at the center inside the back second inner periphery decoration body 3230 in front view, and the three rings are vertically ( You can show the player the decorations that are lined up and down.

  Further, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 105, the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven from the normal state to decorate the left lateral ring. The body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, the front end of the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 and the front end of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 come close to each other at the center inside the back second inner periphery decoration body 3230 in front view, and the three rings are lateral ( You can show the player the decorations arranged side by side.

  In this embodiment, the left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 of the back third stage production unit 3300 are moved to the appearance position, and the decoration is formed in a state in which the decoration in which three rings are arranged side by side is formed. In the display device 1600, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are displayed in the respective parts of the three rings. It is possible to display the variation of the three symbol sequences for suggestion. Thereby, in the state where the left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, the top and bottom of the three symbol strings are compared with the case where the three symbol strings are variably displayed. Since the game is physically decorated by the left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 at the appearance position, the symbol sequence that is variably displayed to the player is a game such as “big hit”. It is possible to make it seem that there is a high possibility that the player is stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player, and the player's sense of expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 106, from the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, And the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position, respectively. Move. As a result, the tip of the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring ornament 3331 are brought closer to each other at the center inside the back second inner peripheral ornament 3230 and the left horizontal ring ornament 3351 The front end and the front end of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are brought close to each other, so that the player can see a decoration in which five rings are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 106, when the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are all moved from the standby position to the appearance position, Since a decoration in which five rings are arranged in a cross is formed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous to the player, such as “big hit”, may occur. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a “big hit” game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position in an appropriate order or combination order. May be. For example, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 are moved to the appearance position in this order, or the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring The decoration body 3331, the left side ring decoration body 3351, and the right side ring decoration body 3371 may be moved to the appearance position in this order. As a result, after five stages, the five rings are arranged in a cross, so that at each stage, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not to move to the next stage. Can be entertained.

  By the way, in the back third rendering unit 3300, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are increased by a constant current drive method. Since the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are driven by torque, the extremely short time of 1 second or less (here, 650 ms). ) From the standby position to the appearance position or from the appearance position to the standby position. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 appear and disappear instantly, giving a strong impact to the player. Can entertain the player.

  Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. 107, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven from the normal state, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is driven. And the right side ring decoration body 3371 is moved to a position on the way from the standby position to the appearance position. Accordingly, the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 (first decorative body 3312 and second decorative body 3313) and the tip portion of the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 (first decorative body 3372 and second decorative body 3373) However, it is located inside the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 in a front view, and can be partially viewed from the player side.

  More specifically, in the state of FIG. 107, the two leading ends of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration body 3229, The two front ends of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 appear at the upper and lower corners on the right side among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229. Thereby, since the inner shape of the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 on which the display screen of the effect display device 1600 faces is changed, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decorative body are provided to the player. The movement of 3371 can be easily noticed, and the player can feel that something will happen and can increase the expectation of the game.

  When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, only the tip portion can be visually recognized. Thus, it may be moved halfway and moved to the appearance position as the next stage. Thus, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the player has completely moved to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. When moving to the middle of this appearance position, it may be reciprocated in small increments with respect to the standby position, and the player changes the shape inside the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 in small increments. Can be made easier to notice.

  In the back third rendering unit 3300, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration board 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, the first LED 3356 and the first LED 3356 of the left horizontal ring decoration board 3355. The second LED 3357, the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the right horizontal ring decoration board 3375 are appropriately illuminated, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration. The body 3371 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. Accordingly, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 that have moved to the appearance position side can be decorated with light emission in various light emission modes. , Can entertain the player.

  By the way, in this embodiment, in the back third stage production unit 3300, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved to the appearance position. Sometimes, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 includes the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the part directly behind the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. A decorative image 3390 similar to that shown in FIG. 10 is displayed (see FIG. 108).

  In the present embodiment, for some reason, at least one of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is provided. When it becomes impossible to move to the appearance position, even if an effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is executed. These are kept at the standby position so as not to move to the appearance position side, and the effect display device 1600 displays the decoration image 3390 (see FIG. 108). Thereby, even if a problem occurs in the back third effect unit 3300, the decoration image 3390 can be seen, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of the problem. By recognizing, it is possible to avoid a sense of discomfort because the game has to be interrupted, and the player can continue to enjoy the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the back unit 3000, it is also possible to perform an effect by appropriately combining the effect by the back second effect unit 3200 and the effect by the back third effect unit 3300. As a result, a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be made less tired. In addition, since it is possible to show the player more stages of production, the player can be throbbing and throbbing at each stage, which can increase the player's expectation and suppress the decrease in interest. it can.

  In addition, as an effect using the back unit 3000, for example, when an appropriate light emission effect is executed using the back first effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, and the back third effect unit 3300, While turning off the LEDs located on the line, it is possible to perform a shadow effect in which the line is moved from one side in the predetermined direction to the other side in a short time (less than one second) across the game area 5a. (See FIG. 109). Thereby, by turning off the LED on a specific line, a dark part (shadow part 3050) appears on the line in the game area 5a, and the shadow part 3050 crosses the game area 5a in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player “ha” and to concentrate on the game by making a presumption that something will happen. Note that the shadow portion 3050 can be moved not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction and the diagonal direction.

  In addition, the above shadow effect is a movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3210, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, etc. It can also be executed when the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is switched. Thus, with the shadow effect as a break, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the next movable effect, effect image, and the like, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the gaming area 5a can be viewed from the player side through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 as shown in FIG. In the door frame 3, the outer periphery of the door window 101 a is arranged in a semi-tubular dish upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decoration. It is surrounded by a body 419 and a door frame top decorative body 453. Further, in the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312 a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body 453 are provided. Behind, dish upper left decorative board 273, dish upper right decorative board 278, dish central upper decorative board 314, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top central decorative board 455, door frame top left Since the decoration board 456 and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a (the game area 5a) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs on the decoration board. The light can be moved along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  And as above-mentioned, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, since various light emission effects can be performed, the 1st LED group 3251 and the 3rd LED group 3253 of the back 2nd effect unit 3200, 2nd, for example. When the LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 and the LEDs of the decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in this order, the player can be shown a light-emitting effect that spreads from the center to the outside. Can be directed to the outside of the game area 5a. Or if it makes it light-emit in order of LED of each decoration board of door frame 3, 2nd LED group 3252 and 4th LED group 3254, 1st LED group 3251, and 3rd LED group 3253 of back 2nd production unit 3200, The player can show the player the light emission effect that converges from the outside to the center, and the player's interest can be directed to the center of the game area 5a.

  Moreover, in the back second stage production unit 3200, as described above, on the door frame 3 side in the light production stage in which light rotates (turns) in the circumferential direction by the plurality of rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED groups 3255. Alternatively, a light emission effect in which light rotates in the circumferential direction of the door window 101a may be executed. This makes it possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light turns around the entire pachinko machine 1 around the center of the game area 5a, giving the player a strong impact, and making the player enjoy It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light-emitting effect as described above can be combined as appropriate, and also combined with an effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, various combinations of lighting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc. can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and various effects. It is possible to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[5-11. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 of the upper unit 3310 and the lower vertical ring decoration body of the lower unit 3330 of the back third rendering unit 3300 in the back unit 3000. 3331, the left side ring decoration body 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right side ring decoration body 3371 of the right unit 3370 are arranged at the center of the game area 5a (here, the back second inner circumference of the back second effect unit 3200). The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration are rotated outward from the inner periphery of the decorative body 3230 to be in the retracted position. The body 3371 is a rotating decorative body 3210, a back second outer decorative body 3228, a back second inner decorative body 3229 of the back second rendering unit 3200, And the second back inner decorative body 3230, and the second upper inner decorative body 3230, the second rear outer decorative body 3228, the second back inner decorative body 3229, and the second back inner decorative body 3230 are arranged vertically. The ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be made invisible from the player side (front), and the upper vertical ring is provided to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351, and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371, and the effect display device 1600 facing the center of the game area 5a. The effect image displayed on the player can be viewed well from the player side (front), and the player can entertain the effect image.

  In this normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are within the range of 0.5 second to 1.0 second (this embodiment In the form, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third drive motor 3320 are rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position in 650 ms (0.65 seconds) by the peripheral control board 1510. The three left drive motors 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive system, and an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and a right horizontal ring. When the decorative body 3371 is rotated, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are rotated with high torque. A large rotational moment acts on the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 that have been stopped due to high torque. Since the vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be rotated to an appearance position at an extremely high speed, the player does not recognize them. In addition, the player can show an effect that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 suddenly appear in the center of the game area 5a. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left The ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 suddenly appear instantly can make the player strongly think that there is something good, and raise the expectation for the game. Decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the peripheral control board 1510 in a constant current drive system. When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are rotated with high torque, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is quickly rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position. Part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371. The upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal The movement of the upper decorative ring 3371 can be immediately recognized, and the movement of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 greatly increases the player. Can surprise you.

  Further, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the portion between the proximal end side and the distal end side of the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. Since it is located on the rear side of a straight line connecting the base end side and the tip end side when rotating, a shape that extends nonlinearly between the base end side and the tip end side (here, an arc) When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position, In addition, the front end side of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be visually recognized. At this time, a portion (front end side) visible from the front in the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is the base end. Since the space between the side and the tip side is a non-linear shape, the direction projecting inward from the back second inner periphery decoration body 3230 is the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration. The direction is different from the direction of the base end side of the body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371. Accordingly, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are stopped turning halfway to the appearance position side, and only the tip side is visually recognized. When an effect that can be performed is executed (see FIG. 107), the player is different from the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. Since it is possible to make an illusion that another decorative body appears, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Also, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371 are arranged with the base side at the center of the game area 5a (the back second inner peripheral ornament. 3230) is supported in a rotatable manner on the outer side than 3230), and has an elongated frame shape that extends to the center of the game area 5a at the appearance position. When the decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are rotated to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right Since the front end side of the horizontal ring ornament 3371 is located at the center of the game area 5a, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, and the left horizontal ring ornament 335 appearing positions. , And the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be conspicuous, and the player's interest is strongly expressed in the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. It can be attracted.

  Further, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the peripheral control board 1510 by a constant current drive system. The time when the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position by a high torque is set to 0. Since it is within the range of 5 seconds to 1.0 seconds, it is not necessary to use a large drive motor with a torque higher than necessary, and the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left An increase in space required for the drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 can be suppressed, and the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 and the lower vertical ring device are relatively The space for arranging the body 3331, the left lateral ring decoration body 3351, the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 and other members can be easily secured, and the secured vertical space allows the upper longitudinal ring decoration body 3311, The ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, and the like can be made larger. A large upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, a lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, and a left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 can be used. , And the right side ring decoration 3371 or the like, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining for the player. Moreover, since it is not necessary to use a large-sized drive motor with higher torque than necessary or to use a complicated control circuit for outputting high torque, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1. .

  In addition, an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image is provided in the center of the game area 5a, and an upper vertical ring ornament 3311, a lower vertical ring ornament 3331, a left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and a right horizontal ring. When the decoration body 3371 is rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position or from the appearance position to the retracted position, the display screen is temporarily darkened, so that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is displayed to the player. Since it is difficult to see the movement of the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371, the display screen is brightened thereafter, so that the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, The lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left lateral ring ornament 3351, and the right lateral ring ornament 3371 suddenly appear or disappear from the center. The effect can be shown to the player and the player can be surprised, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 play a game. A player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

  By the way, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the constant current drive system, the upper vertical ring decoration Since the body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated with high torque, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive motor 3360, back third right drive motor 3380, upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 and the like. Although there is a risk that problems are likely to occur due to early fatigue, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decorative body 335 Since the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by executing the effect of moving the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is in trouble. Even if the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 cannot be moved (rotated) to the appearance position, the decorative image 3390 can be used for the player. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be illusioned as if they moved to the appearance position. Same effects as the ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. It is possible to suppress the reduction of interest to show the exit to the player.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control unit 1511 and effect display control unit 1512) causes the upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 to be displayed. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 of the lower unit 3330, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 of the right unit 3370 are not visible from the player side. Therefore, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed well, and the player can entertain the effect image. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 performs an effect of moving the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position, The number of upper vertical ring ornaments 3311, lower vertical ring ornaments 3331, left horizontal ring ornaments 3351, and right horizontal ring ornaments 3371 appear on the effect display device 1600 at the timing of moving from the retracted position to the appearance position. A decorative image 3390 is displayed at a position behind the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, and the frame-shaped upper vertical ring decoration Ring ornament body 3311, lower longitudinal ring ornament body 3331, left lateral ring ornament body 3351, and right lateral ring ornament body 3371 Since a specific effect image (for example, a plurality of symbol strings for suggesting a lottery special lottery result) is displayed in the divided area, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal The specific effect image is clearly demarcated by the ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371, the specific effect image can be made conspicuous, and the effect by the specific effect image can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. .

  Then, for some reason, any one of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position. When detected by any of the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384, the peripheral control board 1510 causes all the upper vertical ring ornaments 3311, the lower vertical ring ornaments 3331, and the left horizontal ring to be detected. Since only the movement control of the decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is paused, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative When the effect of moving the body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical The ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 do not move from the retracted position, and the effect display device 1600 displays the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 at the appearance position. , A decorative image 3390 is displayed at the rear part of the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring of the appearance position are displayed. Since the specific effect image is displayed at a part defined by the decorative body 3351 and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 (decorative image 3390), the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are displayed for the player. , The left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 can be given an illusion as if they moved to the appearance position. The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring by the decorative image 3390 similar to the vertical decorative ring 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371. It is possible to show the player the same effect as that produced by the decorative body 3351 and the right side ring decorative body 3371. Therefore, even if the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 fail to move to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3331 A decorative image 3390 similar to the decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be shown to the player, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring An effect equivalent to the effect by the decorative body 3331, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351, and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 can be shown to the player by the decorative image 3390, and the specific effect image can be made conspicuous by the decorative image 3390. It is possible to make the player enjoy the effect by the specific effect image and suppress the decrease in the interest.

  In addition, when any one of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position, The movement control of all the upper vertical ring ornaments 3311, the lower vertical ring ornaments 3331, the left horizontal ring ornaments 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornaments 3371 is suspended, and the upper vertical ring ornaments 3311 and the lower vertical ring ornaments. 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, so that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and When performing the effect of moving the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 to the appearance position at the same time, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 moved to the appearance position, An effect is produced in which any one of the ring decorative body 3331, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351, and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 and the decorative image 3390 that can be visually recognized by not moving to the appearance position due to a malfunction are seen. Can be avoided, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, when an effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, a decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The decorative image is displayed regardless of whether or not the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 do not move to the appearance position. Since 3390 is displayed, an image for when a malfunction occurs in the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is separately provided. This is unnecessary, and the load on the display of the effect image including the decoration image 3390 can be reduced.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, an upper detection sensor 3324, a lower detection sensor 3344, a left detection sensor 3364, and a right detection sensor 3384, When the trouble that the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 does not move is detected, the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is suspended. Therefore, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are stopped at a halfway position due to a malfunction. To prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. The decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be entertained by the decoration image 3390, and the decrease in the player's interest is suppressed. be able to.

  Further, since the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is stopped by detecting a defect, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3371 is stopped. Back third upper drive motor 3320, back third lower drive motor 3340, rear third left drive for moving body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 No overload acts on the motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 It is possible to prevent the other members from being damaged, and to avoid the problem from expanding.

  Further, since the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are invisible in the state of the retracted position, the upper vertical ring decoration body for some reason. 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are decorated on the effect display device 1600 as described above even if there is a problem that the movement cannot be performed to the appearance position. Since the image 3390 is displayed, the effect by the decoration image 3390 can be enjoyed, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration at the retracted position can be enjoyed. Since the body 3371 is not visible, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right side ring decorative body 3371 can be made difficult to notice that a malfunction has not occurred, preventing the player from feeling anxious and suppressing a decrease in interest Can be made.

  Further, when the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved to the retracted position (normal state), the upper side from the player side. Since the vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 cannot be visually recognized, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is displayed to the player in the retracted position. Since it is difficult to notice the presence of the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal When the ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical phosphorus that were not visible are displayed. The appearance of the decoration body 3331, the left side ring decoration body 3351, and the right side ring decoration body 3371 can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and provide something for the player. It can be thought that there is a good thing, can raise the expectation for the game, and can suppress the fall of interest.

  Further, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body are obtained by the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384. 3371 does not move to the appearance position, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 in the retracted position are Since the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 are detected, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring are detected by the peripheral control board 1510. The decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 are controlled to move to the appearance position. The upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 are the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal. If the ring decorative body 3371 is still detected, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are not moved, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3371 is not moved. A ring machine 3311, a lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, a left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and a right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be detected to have a problem of not moving to the appearance position, and a gaming machine having the above-described effects is realized. Can be

  Note that a decorative image 3390 similar to the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 includes an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and a lower vertical ring decoration body. It may be larger or smaller than the size of 3331, the left lateral ring decoration body 3351, and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371. When the decorative image 3390 is larger than the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, the decorative image displayed on the effect display device 1600 3390 has an advantage that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be further decorated. On the other hand, when the decorative image 3390 is smaller than the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3311, When an effect of moving the ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, an upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, a lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, left There is an advantage that the decorative image 3390 is not recognized by the player unless the movement control of the horizontal ring decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is stopped.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back second stage production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 has the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the through-hole 3329a penetrating in the front-rear direction. In front of the back second inner decorative body 3229, in the normal state, four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 that are specially decorated and the remaining 6 that are decorated differently from the special rotating decorative body 3211 Twelve rotating decorative bodies 3210 that are flat and translucent made up of ordinary rotating decorative bodies 3212 are centered on the axis extending in the front-rear direction so as to decorate the outer periphery of the through-hole 3229a. The display screens of the effect display device 1600 that are arranged on the revolution circle and provided rearward from the through-hole 3229a are facing. In this state, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated by the back second drive motor 3222, the shaft portion 3210a extending rearward from each rotary decorative body 3210 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221. The rotating decorative body 3210 and the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a together with the shaft portion 3210a are on the circumference having a radius from the rotation center of the drive ring 3221 to the shaft hole 3221a (revolving circle) Move (revolve). At this time, the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b provided closer to the revolution center than the revolution circle in the unit base 3220. When the body gear 3225 revolves, the rotating body gear 3225 rolls on the fixed gear portion 3220b and rotates in the same direction as the revolving direction of the rotating body gear 3225, and the rotating body gear 3225 is rotated by the shaft portion 3210a and the rotating decorative body 3210. Together with the shaft portion 3210a, it rotates (rotates) around the shaft extending in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring 3221 by the back second drive motor 3222, a plurality (12 pieces) of the rotary decoration body 3210 revolves in the same direction while rotating, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. It can attract the player's interest strongly and can make the player think that there is something good, and raises the expectation of the game and suppresses the decline in interest Can be made.

  In addition, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 that revolve while revolving around the axis extending in the front-rear direction have a flat plate shape, the surface of the rotating decorative body 3210 is directed forward, and the entire rotating decorative body 3210 is a player. Since it is easy to see from the side, when these rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve while rotating, it is possible to show the player how the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate with each other. It can be shown to the player, and the player can have a strong impact and can be greatly enjoyed.

  Further, behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229, within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body 3210 (one stop position (one A plurality of (12) rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 divided behind the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 that have stopped revolving at a specific position (positions where the rotation decoration body 3210 stops revolving); Since the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 configured by the intermediate LED group 3255 positioned between the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 are provided, the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are stopped positions. When the LED 3241 of the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 is caused to emit light in this state, the rotational decoration body 3210 can be illuminated and the plurality of rotational decoration bodies 3210 are stopped. In state between each other, when the emit LED3241 intermediate LED group 3255 can emit light decoration rotational decorative body 3210. Therefore, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolving while rotating, if the LED 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the LED 3241 of the intermediate LED group 3255 are appropriately caused to emit light according to the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, light is emitted. Since the LED 3241 is moved together with the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 having the translucency of the light from the LED 3241 are rotated and decorated. By irradiating forward (player side) through the body 3210, the rotating decoration body 3210 can be illuminated and decorated such that the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decoration body 3210. By showing the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 rotates and revolves, the player is greatly enjoyed. The decrease in the flavor can be suppressed.

  At this time, the plurality of LEDs 3241 constituting the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 are arranged in the revolving direction of the rotating decoration body 3210 with the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group. Since the LED 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 can be finely lit according to the revolution of the rotating decoration body 3210, only the LED 3241 located behind the rotating decoration body 3210 is divided. If the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating, the player can have a strong illusion and the movement of the rotating decorative body 3210 that is decorated with light emission can be made. Can be more entertaining, and can suppress the decline in the interest of the player in the game .

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 composed of the rotation decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotation decoration body 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape. When all the LEDs 3241 except for the LED 3241 included in the upper left corner LED group 3256, the upper right corner LED group 3257, the lower left corner LED group 3258, and the prize opening LED group 3259 are caused to emit light, an annular light emitting effect is shown to the player. be able to. In addition, since the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotational decoration body 3210, the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are circumferentially connected. If the light is alternately emitted in the direction, the player can be shown a light emitting decoration in which light rotates on the circumference. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape with a predetermined width. By emitting light in order from the outside to the outside, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the ring of light spreads outward, or by causing the plurality of LEDs 3241 to emit light in order from the outside to the inside of the ring. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that converges inward. In this way, since various light-emitting effects can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when performing a light emitting effect such that light rotates in the revolution direction of the rotation decoration body 3210, each rotation decoration body LED group 3250 moves in the revolution direction of the rotation decoration body 3210, and the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252. And the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254, so that the movement of the light in the revolving direction can be made finer, so that the player can produce a light-emitting effect in which the light rotates more smoothly. Can show. Further, since the movement of the light in the revolving direction of the rotating decorative body 3210 becomes fine, the rotation speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be made slower, and it is difficult to get tired of the player by various light-emitting effects. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, by appropriately combining the light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 as described above and the movable effect of revolving while rotating the rotating decorative body 3210, an effect that could not be seen in a conventional pachinko machine is played by the player. The player can have a strong impact on the player, can attract the player's interest, and can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are grouped into the plurality of rotation decoration body LED groups 3250 and the plurality of intermediate LED groups 3255, each of the rotation decoration body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED groups 3255 is controlled to emit light. By doing so, compared to the case where the plurality of LEDs 3241 are controlled to emit light one by one, the load on the control can be reduced, and a malfunction occurs due to the occurrence of an overload. Can be avoided, the control circuit in the peripheral control board 1510 and the like can be simplified, and the cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotational decoration body 3210, for example, only the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 is provided at a constant time interval. The speed of light rotating in the circumferential direction is different between the case where light is emitted sequentially in the circumferential direction and the case where the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately emitted in the circumferential direction at the same time interval. It is possible to reduce the load on the control of the light emission effect, and to allow the player to enjoy the light emission effect in which the light rotates at different speeds, and to suppress the lowering of the player's interest it can.

  Further, since the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 having translucency are provided between the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 and the plurality of LEDs 3241, the back second outer decorative body 3228 is provided. Since the LED 3241 on the back second decorative board 3240 is difficult to visually recognize from the front by the back second inner decorative body 3229, it is difficult for the player to notice the presence of the LED 3241 provided separately from the rotating decorative body 3210. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the illusion that the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210, and it is possible to further increase the impact due to the light emitting decoration of the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating. The effect by the decoration body 3210 can be more enjoyed, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game is suppressed. Door can be.

  In addition, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 have special rotating decorative bodies 3211 provided with special decorations (three-sided decoration), the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolved while rotating. The special rotation decoration body 3211 can make the player throbbing depending on whether or not the special rotation decoration body 3211 stops revolving at a specific position. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, a rotational position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that one rotational decoration body 3210 is located at a specific position on the revolution circumference including the stop position, and one special rotational decoration body 3211 are located at the specific position. And a special rotational position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that the rotational rotational body 3212 of the plurality of rotational decorative bodies 3210 is located at a specific position, only the rotational position detection sensor 3231 is provided. When the special rotation decorative body 3211 is located at a specific position, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detect the rotation, and the detection by the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation are detected. Depending on the combination of detection by the position detection sensor 3232, the normal rotation decoration body 3212 or the special rotation decoration body 3211 is placed at a specific position. Les it is possible to detect whether located. Therefore, when one of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 is stopped from revolving at a specific position, the rotational position detecting sensor 3231 and the special rotating position detecting sensor 3232 are used, so that the normal rotating decorative body revolving while rotating. 3212 and the special rotating decorative body 3211 can be revolved and stopped at the specific position, so that it is possible to show the player whether or not the special rotating decorative body 3211 stops revolving at the specific position. The player can be excited and entertained, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, a detection piece 3221c for detecting the normal rotation decoration body 3212 and the special rotation decoration body 3211 positioned at the specific position, and a special detection piece for detecting the special rotation decoration body 3211 positioned at the specific position. 3221d is provided on the drive ring 3221, so that the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d do not rotate as compared with the case where the detection piece or the special detection piece is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210. The configuration of the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

  In addition, since a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be revolved while rotating by one back second drive motor 3222, the rotation and revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210 are driven by separate drive motors. In comparison, the structure of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be simplified, the driving mechanism can be reduced, and control of the movable effect of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be controlled. The load can be reduced. In addition, as described above, since the driving mechanism applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be reduced, a space for arranging the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be relatively widened. The rotary decoration body 3210 can be made larger to make it stand out from the player side, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210.

  Further, since the shaft portion 3210a protrudes rearward from the LED 3241, the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end is behind the LED 3241, and the fixed gear portion 3220b and the drive ring 3221 are also behind the LED 3241. The rotating body gear 3225, the fixed gear portion 3220b, the drive ring 3221 and the like do not block the light emitted forward from the LED 3241, and the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 can be surely decorated with light emission.

  In addition, a back second drive motor 3222 that rotates the drive ring 3221 is provided on the outside of the drive ring 3221, and the inside of the fixed gear portion 3220 b (inside of the through hole 3229 a) can be widened, so that it faces the inside. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be made easier to see, and the effect of the effect image can be more easily exhibited.

  In addition, since the drive ring 3221 is provided outside the fixed gear portion 3220b, and the back second drive motor 3222 is provided outside the drive ring 3221, the back side of the drive ring 3221 is substantially the same as the position in the front-rear direction. Since the two-drive motor 3222 can be provided, an increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210 can be suppressed. Further, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are formed in a flat plate shape, and the thickness in the front-rear direction applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be reduced. From these things, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the diameter of the rotating decoration body 3210 can be increased by widening the space for arranging the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 relatively. It is possible to make the player stand out from the player side, attract the player's interest strongly to the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210, and provide other members in front of and behind the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210. Thus, by using the other members provided to produce an effect, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a along the periphery from the left side is a gate as a privilege granting unit provided in the game area 5a. When the player passes the part 2003 or is received in the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 as a privilege granting unit, a predetermined lottery (for example, a normal lottery that is advantageous to the player) A lottery of a result or a special lottery result, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, etc.) are given, and the player is caused to perform a game ball B driving operation aiming at a privilege granting unit such as the gate unit 2003 You can play games.

  In this game area 5a, an upstream space 2511 is provided above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 on the right side in the left-right direction above the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and on the downstream side of the upstream space 2511. Since the game balls B are distributed through different routes according to the driving strength and the distribution passage group 2520 provided on the upstream side of the gate portion 2003 is provided, the first distribution constituting the distribution passage group 2520 is provided. The probability that the game ball B passes through the downstream gate portion 2003 differs for each of the passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522. Therefore, the game ball B is placed at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 with the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511 and the probability that the game ball B will pass through the gate portion 2003. The driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with the driving strength at which the player enters the game ball B. It is possible to give changes, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to allow the player to enter the game ball B for the desired entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of the player.

  In addition, a stop portion 1006 protrudes inward from the periphery of the game area 5a in the vicinity of the right end of the upstream space portion 2511, and an inlet of the first flow passage 2521 is provided in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006. Therefore, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 (for example, a specific or higher drive strength at which the game ball B circulates (rolls) along the periphery of the game area 5a). Then, the game ball B that has come into contact with the stop portion 1006 enters the entrance of the first flow passage 2521 in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006 in the flow passage group 2520 with a high probability. Therefore, when aiming at the first circulation passage 2521, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts against the stopper portion 1006, and when aiming at the other second circulation passage 2522, the strength does not abut against the stopper portion 1006. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven in, the game ball B drive operation can be sharpened, and the player can be entertained to prevent a decrease in interest.

  And the chance that the game ball B which circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 provided with an entrance in the vicinity of the stopper 1006 will pass through the downstream gate portion 2003 is reduced, and a privilege is given. The game ball 5 is discharged out of the game area 5a without causing the player to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B does not enter the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. Thus, it is possible to give a change to the driving operation of the game ball B, to make the player hard to get bored, and to aim at the entrance of the remaining second distribution passage 2522 for the player. The driving operation of the ball B can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player with respect to the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the distribution passage group 2520 is provided in the direction in which the game ball B is driven, the distribution passage group 2520 (the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage) distributed through different routes according to the driving strength of the game ball B. The circulation passage 2522) can be reliably realized, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, since the upstream space portion 2511 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution passage group 2520, in order for the player to enter the game ball B into the entrance of the desired first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522, It is necessary to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a with the driving strength to enter the space portion 2511 and with the driving strength to enter the desired first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. Yes, it is possible to further increase the difficulty level of the operation for driving the game ball B, and to make the player enjoy the operation for driving the game ball B so as to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the entrances thereof are adjacent to each other. Therefore, the game ball B is caused by a slight difference in the driving strength of the game ball B. Since the entrance of the distribution passage through which the player enters is easier, it is possible to increase the difficulty of the player to drive the game ball B, and to entertain the player to drive the game ball B, thereby reducing the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are aggregated to some extent. It is possible to make the inside of the accessory 2500 relatively wide, and to make the player enjoy the game in the game area 5a and the effect in the frame of the center accessory 2500, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. it can.

  In the above embodiment, the flow passage group 2520 is configured by two flow passages of the first flow passage 2521 and the second flow passage 2522. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured by two distribution passages.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided onto the second start opening guide shelf 2423 with a high probability by contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 may be guided to the attacker right lower passage 2426 with a high probability.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the back second stage production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 shows the one that revolves in the same direction as the direction in which the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be revolving in the opposite direction to the direction of rotation.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, regardless of the presence or absence of a defect that does not move to the appearance position. Although the display of the decoration image 3390 is shown when the effect using the image is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image without the decoration image 3390 is displayed in a state where there is no defect in them. The decoration image 3390 may be displayed only when a defect occurs in them.

  In the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive system. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and since these are stepping motors, they may be driven by the 2-2 phase excitation method, and high torque can be generated.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are shown as stepping motors. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a DC motor having a large starting torque may be used.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is assumed to rotate the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. Although the drive motors such as the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are shown, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be a solenoid, a rotary solenoid, or the like. .

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, a door frame effect display device 152, and a door frame sub-control based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. A display unit 185, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls display of the effect image on the effect display device 1600. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633 a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633 b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 111.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU 1310a, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids For displaying the number of game balls collected by a circuit, a setting indicator 1310g for displaying a set value and displaying an error, and an out port 1008 provided in a game area 5a formed in the game board 5 A base monitor 1310h. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this nonvolatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also includes a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as “built-in reset circuit”). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a and forces the main control MPU 1310a to be affected by electrical noise when the register changes to an inconsistent content. It is a circuit to reset. Such forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism that cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcedly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and again executes the main control-side power-on processing described later. Will be. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased ( Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, a reset signal is not output from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hardware”) to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. "Random number circuit"). The main random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 to 65535 as a minimum value is set in advance as a minimum value), and generates an initial value. The circuit configuration is such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the hard random number circuit with built-in main control first sets a clock signal (main control) to the main control MPU 1310a using an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Other values within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a are extracted one after another without overlapping, and within a predetermined numerical range Once all the values in are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value in the predetermined numerical range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random hit determination random number. It is supposed to be set as.

  The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs the various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. A mouth sensor 2402, a general winning mouth sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning mouth 2001, a general winning mouth sensor 3001, a gate sensor 2506 that detects a gaming ball B that has passed through the gate 2003, and a big winning mouth 2005 A first prize opening sensor 2404 for detecting a game ball B received by the first prize receiving port 2007 after being detected by the big prize winning hole sensor 2403; A second receiving sensor 2405 for detecting a game ball B received by the second receiving port 2008 after being detected by the mouth sensor 2403; Collected by a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects unauthorized magnetism in the game area 5a, a vibration sensor 3005 that detects unauthorized vibration in the game area 5a, and an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 A detection signal from the outlet sensor 3032 for detecting the game ball B to be played is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  A detection signal from a setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via a main control input circuit. Further, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z provided on the payout control board 633 is also input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The RWM clear button 633z includes a RAM built in the payout control MPU which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310. A function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in each predetermined area, a function as an error cancel switch for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display, and a set value And a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching. For this reason, the signal from the RWM clear button 633z input to the main control board 1310 includes a signal (RAM clear signal) that informs RAM clear as a RAM clear switch and a signal (RAM clear signal) that informs that an error has been cleared as an error clear switch ( Although there is an error release signal) and a signal (setting value selection switching signal) that conveys setting value selection switching as a setting switching button, the main control board 1310 has a RAM clear signal and setting that are important signals relating to itself. While the input of the value setting change signal is monitored, the input of the error cancellation signal that is the control target of the payout control board 633 not related to itself is not monitored.

  Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b are sent via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, a payout control input circuit and a payout control output described later). When the signals are input to the main control board 1310 without passing through the circuit, they are respectively input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The detection signals from the first start port sensor 2101 and the second start port sensor 2402 are input directly to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, via the main control input circuit. Is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a general winning opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving port sensor 2404, a second receiving port sensor 2405, a magnetic sensor 2470, a vibration sensor 3005, and an out port sensor 3032. Each detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. ing.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit. 2414, the respective drive signals are output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the status display of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display, Retention indicator, 1st special symbol indicator, 1st special reserve number indicator, 2nd special symbol indicator, 2nd special reserve number indicator, round indicator, etc. Output directly without intervention. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal that indicates that the launch of the game ball B is permitted, a launch permission signal that indicates that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the payout control board 633 is output. The logic of the launch permission signal that tells that the launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (the launch non-permission logic) is reversed when the launch is not permitted. Set to It should be noted that the logic of the firing permission signal is set as an initial value (default), and after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after power recovery), a firing permission signal setting process in a main control side timer interrupt process described later is started. The hardware including the main control output circuit with the reset function is configured so as to be set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 2101, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the big prize port sensor 2403 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. On the other hand, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general prize opening sensor 2401 and the general prize opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first start port sensor 2101 and the second start port sensor 2402 are used. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 occurs frequently. Therefore, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 2101, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big prize opening sensor 2403 Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch having a high durability and a long life is also used for the special prize opening sensor 2403. In addition, since the game ball B launched in the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5, the game ball B is also detected by the out port sensor 3032. Occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is also used for the out port sensor 3032. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls B do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 use mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Regardless of whether or not the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having a high durability and a long life may be used.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, and will format these various commands and transmit them to the peripheral control unit 1511, as will be described in detail later.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “main control side”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Capacitor ”)). With this main control side capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is input to the main control MPU 1310a as a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on. Then, it is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, the power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. The control part 633b, the error LED indicator which displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, and the RWM clear button 633z which has the press operation part which serves as a some function are provided. The RWM clear button 633z includes a RAM built in a payout control MPU that is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM (main control built-in) provided in a main control MPU 1310a that is a microprocessor provided in the main control board 1310. A function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM), a function as an error cancel switch for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display, and setting And a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching values.

  The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch is a RAM clear determination period after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (main control side power-on processing described later by the main control MPU 1310a after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on) The period from the start of the process until the determination of step S14 in the process is performed).

  The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button is a setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed (when the main control MPU 1310a passes the RAM clear determination period and the main control side power is turned on later) In the setting change process of step S37 in the process, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 To the initial position (that is, the period until it is determined that the setting key cylinder has been rotated 60 degrees clockwise) so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). Yes.

  The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error release switch is an effective period from the time when the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period have elapsed. Note that even if a signal indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the payout control unit 633a (a payout control MPU described later) in the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period, it is invalidated. Has been.

  Note that the period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button is limited to the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed, as described above. However, in this setting switching valid period, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key switch provided on the setting change board 1311 in the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process described later after the RAM clear determination period elapses. Since the processing for continuously monitoring the rotational position of the setting key cylinder is performed by the setting key inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder 1311a, the interrupt permission setting for permitting the start of the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. (Step S52 in the main-control-side power-on process) cannot be performed, and the injustice detection process in step S112 in the main-control-side timer interrupt process described later cannot be performed. In other words, the setting switch valid period is a period during which fraud detection is not possible.

  During this setting switching valid period, that is, the period during which fraud detection is not possible, the fraudster may make some unauthorized alteration to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when accessing the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, first, the back cover 640 first covers the rear side of the game board 5 as described above. In order to secure a space in which the state can be released, the main body frame 4 must be opened largely (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, in the setting switching valid period, that is, in the period during which fraud detection is not possible, the main body frame 4 is largely opened (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2, so that the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 If any illegal modification is attempted, the illegal act becomes very conspicuous in the game hall, and such countermeasures against illegal acts can be taken. Therefore, it can contribute to prevention of fraud.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the apparatus 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input.

  The payout control MPU includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “WDT with built-in payout control”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the RWM clear button 633z. In addition to a signal indicating that the pressing operation unit has been operated is input via the payout control I / O port, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, a ball-cut detection sensor 574, a payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input. A signal indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. Entered.

  The door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are paid out via the payout control input circuit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the control MPU.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 and the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. Is input. When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the game tank B is full, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display, A command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner, or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is a ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589) When the number “3” is displayed, "Specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591", and when the number "5" is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent in accordance with the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and the clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 110, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 111, and detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that informs permission to launch the game ball B is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 111 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The launch timing control circuit satisfies launch condition 1 in which a palm or a finger is touching the handle 111 based on a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and the CR unit, the CR unit connection terminal board, If the launch condition 2 that is electrically connected is established and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B Therefore, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength that matches the rotational position of the handle 111. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is inputted, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. In this manner, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “payout control side”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 633 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Capacitor ”)). With this payout control side capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM is paid out when a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the power is turned on is input to the payout control MPU. It is completely deleted (cleared) from the control built-in RAM. A signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

  In this embodiment, the discharge control board 633 includes the launch control unit 633b that performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. It may be configured. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. The power may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that is not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 111, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs presentation control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a door frame effect display based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the device 152 and the effect display device 1600.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is sent from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the panel driving board 1720 in the driving board unit 1700. The game board decoration drive board serial data is transmitted to each decoration board of the game board 5 or the drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 is provided. It is transmitted from the I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 through the panel drive board 1720, or provided on the door frame 3. Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the one lift drive motor 175b, the second lift drive motor 182 and the like, and a lighting signal, a flashing signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 or The door side light emission data for outputting the gradation lighting signal and the door side drive light emission data configured to be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, or the door frame effect display device In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the display unit 152 and the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512, the sound information is extracted from the sound ROM. For example, a control signal (sound command) is output to the sound source IC.

  A plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the back second stage production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and a left horizontal ring decoration of the back third stage production unit 3300. Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the rotation position, movement position, and the like of the body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the panel drive board 1720.

  In addition, a detection signal from the press detection sensor 165 of the effect operation unit 160 in the door frame effect device 150 provided in the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and performs various operations from the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 provided on the door frame 3. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to the performance are output. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (eg, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4ch) are transmitted to the lower speaker 153a, lower front speaker 191 and upper speaker 241 of the door frame 3 as sound information. .1ch surround signal etc. can be sent to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (seconds per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the panel drive board 1720 of the gaming board 5 are a plurality of serials different from the display command. This is performed by the input / output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The panel driving board 1720 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LEDs (LED 121a, LED 122a, LED 138a, LED 153c, LED 159a, lattice decoration LED 195) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. LED 213a, upper outer top LED 224, upper outer trough LED 225, upper outer edge LED 231, lattice decoration LED 245, etc.) or a lighting signal or flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting flashing command is provided in the game board 5 Or output to the LED of each decorative board.

  Further, the panel drive board 1720 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to each drive provided in the first elevating drive motor 175 b and the second elevating drive motor 182 provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Or output to a motor.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Although the detailed display is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a door frame effect display device 152, and an effect display. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) for controlling display of device 1600, image ROM for storing various data of screens displayed on door frame effect display device 152 and effect display device 1600, and stored in this image ROM And an image RAM to which various data are transferred and copied.

  This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the door frame effect display device 152. And rendering control of the effect display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging time-series screen data defining the screen configuration, and the order of screens to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is specified. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. This non-resident area transfer data has a sequence in which screen data drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in accordance with the progress of the schedule data. It is prescribed.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data one by one from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays it on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. In addition, when the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and drawing for one line held in the line buffer is performed. In this method, data is output to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display. This will affect the drawing speed on the apparatus 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to an image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. “Sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. For example, when various persons (characters) are displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Accordingly, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a vertical relationship (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) when the sprites are positioned on the screen or when the sprites overlap each other, and the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device are set. Rendered at 1600.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 sequentially cross from the main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel from the left to the right when viewed from the front. It is driven by sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeatedly performed in the direction to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, the front of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Are sequentially output from left to right as viewed from the left side, and output to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, the next line is displayed. Based on the drawing data of the minute, it outputs to the pixels for one line sequentially from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 as main scanning.

[6-4. Mounting of SMD type electronic components]
Next, countermeasures for discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for a board to be handled as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, a payout control board, etc., a lead type electronic component is mounted on the mounting surface which is the front side, It is necessary to solder on the solder side that is the side. However, as described above, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of pachinko machines, slots, fusion gaming machines, and other gaming machines, but other general electric machine manufacturers can be downsized. A surface mount type (so-called SMD type) is used. For this reason, the production may be stopped due to a decrease in the number of lead-type electronic components produced. Therefore, a lead-type electronic component that can be configured as an SMD-type electronic component as a lead-type electronic component can be mounted on a mounting surface of a substrate treated as a main substrate.

  However, when configured as this lead-type electronic component, the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component is larger than the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component, and some or a plurality of protrusions have protrusions. It may be formed into a distorted outer shape (shape). If a lead-type electronic component having such an external shape (shape) is mounted on a mounting surface of a substrate that is treated as a main substrate, it may be difficult to place the components on the substrate due to the positional relationship with other electronic components. For this reason, it is difficult to configure an SMD type electronic component as the lead-type electronic component described above. Therefore, in addition to such lead-type electronic components, among the lead-type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, the SMD type electronic components are limited to substrates that can be handled as the main substrate. It may be permitted to be mounted on the mounting surface.

  Here, an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115. FIG. 112 is an enlarged view (a) of a part of a region where an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and an enlarged view of the enlarged view seen from the right side of the main control board (b). FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate in which the lead type electronic component is replaced with the SMD type electronic component replaced with a predetermined area, and the lead type electronic component is replaced with the SMD. FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram (b) showing a front surface (mounting surface) and a back surface (solder surface) of a substrate that is reduced in size by integrating electronic components of a type, and FIG. 114 is a rear surface ( FIG. 115 is a perspective view of a main control board box of the main control unit. In FIG. 112 and FIG. 114, other various electronic components are omitted except for the electronic components necessary for the description, for the sake of easy viewing.

  The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is an alternative having the same function as a lead type Schmitt trigger inverter (DIP (Dual Inline Package) type), and this lead type Schmitt trigger inverter. Is disposed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is one of the main circuits constituting the main control input circuit to which the detection signals from the various sensors described above are input, and the main control is performed by some unauthorized means. When missing from the board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that there is no incoming ball for any of the sensors that transmit the incoming game ball. It is always determined that fraudulent acts such as those that convey fraudulent acts. Note that a plurality of types of electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are mounted on the main control board 1310 as lead-type electronic components.

  In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are green resists except for various land patterns. Has been.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and (b), an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as “Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30”). In addition, a lead type high frequency bypass capacitor MC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor MC30”) capable of removing noise voltage generated by the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 itself is mounted in the vicinity of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It has become so. In FIG. 112 (a), the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and the capacitor MC30 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, six Schmitt trigger inverter circuits are integrated and accommodated in one SMD package. In this embodiment, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SOP (Small having 14 pins).
(Hereinafter, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 may be referred to as “SOP14”). In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, seven leads from two opposite sides of the SMD package body have a lead-to-lead distance dimension (so-called “lead pitch”, in this embodiment, 1.27 mm) and bend outward. After being placed on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead, each lead and the surface of the main control board 1310 ( A rectangular land pattern formed only on the mounting surface 1310x is soldered. The width dimension of each lead is 0.43 mm, and the width dimension of the rectangular land pattern is 0.76 mm larger than the width dimension of each lead (the length dimension of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm). It is. In this embodiment, the SMD package body has a width dimension of 5.3 mm, a length dimension of 10.8 mm, and a height dimension of 1.5 mm. Including the length of the protruding lead, the width dimension of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm.

  Although the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in order to mount lead type electronic components on the main control board 1310, the back surface of the main control board 1310 is used as the solder surface. It is described as “the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310” (hereinafter the same).

  Capacitor MC30 has two leads protruding from a main body having a rectangular parallelepiped shape and has a distance between leads (so-called “lead pitch”, in this embodiment, 5 mm) and protrudes in a straight line parallel to the outside. It is formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) through the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the two leads. Ring-shaped land patterns (also referred to as through-holes; hereinafter the same), ring-shaped land patterns formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y. After two leads are inserted toward the ring-shaped land pattern, a shape is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. A ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder side) 1310Y of the two leads and the main control board 1310 which protrudes from the ring-shaped land pattern are soldered, respectively. The diameter of the two leads is 0.5 mm, and the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 0.7 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the two leads (the outer diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 1. 3 mm).

  Note that the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and a region other than a region where various land patterns are formed as a ground (GND). In addition to being formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground), the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 is also formed with a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and various land patterns. The area other than the area is formed as a so-called solid earth (substrate ground) where the ground (GND) is used. The solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are Holes (copper-plated) that penetrate a plurality of through holes (both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of main control board 1310) formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) The same ground (GND). The diameter of the through hole is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern, and is 0.3 mm. The through hole has a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Are used for connecting various wiring patterns to both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310 in addition to the same ground (GND). There are also several.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), a region MSLKMIC30 indicating a position (including designation of orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is white as silk printing. In addition to printing with a solid line (or black solid line), a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30 and in the lower left corner. Specifically, in the region MSLKMIC30, the lead serving as the first terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed on the lower left side and the seventh terminal (ground) so that the longitudinal direction of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is the horizontal direction in FIG. (GND) terminal) is placed on the lower right side, the lead on the 8th terminal is placed on the upper right side, and the lead on the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) is placed on the upper left side. .

  The rectangular land patterns corresponding to the leads of the first to sixth terminals and the eighth to thirteenth terminals of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are electrically connected to the respective wiring patterns for transmitting the corresponding control signals. The rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the seventh terminal (ground (GND) terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The rectangular land pattern that is electrically connected and corresponds to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to a wiring pattern that supplies power.

  The package body surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is engraved with the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols. For example, “ABC”) and the product number (the number listed in the catalog, for example, “74XYXYZZ”). Or it is printed in a predetermined color (depending on the manufacturer). However, since the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SMD package called SOP14 and is small in size, the surface area of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is small.

  The main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, and therefore prevents the main control board 1310 from those who obtain unauthorized game balls by making unauthorized modifications. The main control board box 1320 configured by a transparent cover body and a transparent base body in which a plurality of vent holes for heat dissipation are formed is housed and sealed. This heat radiating vent can release air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

  Then, when checking the product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) of various electronic components of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 is stored in the main control board box 1320. The manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) stamped or printed on the package body surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 when the mounting surface) side is visually observed through the transparent cover body. Is small and difficult to see.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 in FIG. MIC30 part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is silk so that the size is easier to see than the part number (number listed in the catalog) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as printing. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be reliably recognized.

  In addition, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (number printed in the catalog). In this case, white (or black) is used for silk printing so that the size is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferable that it is printed with. Accordingly, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably recognized.

  Further, the capacitor MC30 is disposed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 so as to be disposed in the vicinity of the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed (the direction of the capacitor MC30 is not specified because there is no polarity) is printed as a white solid line (or black solid line) as silk printing, and in the vicinity of the area MSLKMC30 In the upper right part, the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, in the region MSLKMC30, one lead is electrically connected to the wiring pattern for supplying power so that the two leads of the capacitor MC30 are in the vertical direction in FIG. The ring-shaped land pattern and the other lead are instructed to be inserted into the lower ring-shaped land pattern paired with the upper ring-shaped land pattern, respectively.

  The wiring pattern to which the upper ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected is also electrically connected to the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The lower ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310.

  Here, an advantage of mounting the SMD type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate treated as the main substrate will be briefly described. As described above, since the SMD type electronic component can be reduced in size as compared with the lead type electronic component, the electronic component mounting density when the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Can be extremely suppressed as compared with the electronic component mounting density when the lead type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. For this reason, when mounting an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the lead type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) area of the substrate on which the lead type electronic component is mounted, Since the SMD type electronic component is small, the area around the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic component is mounted can be increased, and the lead type electronic component can be changed to the SMD type electronic component. It is also possible to increase the area between the replaced components (that is, it is possible to provide an electronic component mounting mode in which there are many gaps on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate depending on the replaced components). Thereby, since the SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate can be viewed from multiple directions, unauthorized modification of the SMD type electronic component, the surface of the substrate (mounting surface) and the SMD type The state of mounting with electronic components (soldered state) and the state of various wiring patterns and various land patterns on SMD type electronic components can be confirmed. Therefore, the use of SMD type electronic components can contribute to the ease of finding unauthorized alterations.

  In addition, the area around the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic component is mounted can be increased, and the area between the lead type electronic component replaced with the SMD type electronic component is also increased. Therefore, for these regions (substrate surface (mounting surface)), the SMD type electronic component part number (number listed in the catalog) is imprinted on the surface of the package body of the SMD type electronic component. It can be printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it can be easily seen compared to the size of the printed product number (number printed in the catalog), and this product number (published in the catalog) The number of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) can be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the easy recognition of the SMD type electronic component.

  In addition, when the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate is mounted on the SMD type electronic component, the distance between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate is extremely short (for example, a Schmitt trigger). In the inverter MIC30, the distance between the back surface of the main body and the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 0.1 mm to 0.2 mm.) The back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface of the substrate ( There is a problem in that it is difficult to find such an illegal circuit even if a wrong action of forming some illegal circuit between the mounting surface and the like is performed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is employed as a method for preventing any unauthorized circuit from being formed between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

  A configuration was adopted in which each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal is not disposed at all in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). The configuration in which each wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal is not arranged at all in the region passing through the circuit is adopted.

  A configuration in which a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and a wiring pattern that supplies power is not disposed at all in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). In this configuration, a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and a wiring pattern that supplies power are not disposed at all.

  A configuration was adopted in which no through hole was arranged in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), through holes MTH are arranged at the upper right and upper left of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and the surface of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. A configuration in which no through hole MTH is arranged in the region of (mounting surface) (in other words, the region passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) is employed. As described above, this through hole MTH is electrically connected by both surfaces (holes (copper plated holes)) penetrating both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of main control board 1310. Thus, the same ground (GND) can be obtained. In addition to the through-hole MTH, a plurality of through-holes MTH ′ (not shown) are provided in the main control board 1310 in order to route various wiring patterns to both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. Although present, such a through-hole MTH ′ also passes through the lower surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). In which the through hole MTH ′ is not disposed at all.

  Of each lead of the SMD type electronic component, a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to one lead is formed in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Adopted a configuration that does not pull out the electronic parts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 with various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, a configuration in which the schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is disposed from above or below the schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 without being disposed at all in the region passing through the lower part of the main body of the schmitt trigger inverter MIC30).

  Of each lead of the SMD type electronic component, in order to shorten the wiring pattern for electrically connecting one lead to the other lead, the surface of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component (mounting surface) The configuration in which each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal is not arranged at all in the area (1). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 with various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, a configuration in which the schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is disposed from above or below the schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 without being disposed at all in the region passing through the lower part of the main body of the schmitt trigger inverter MIC30).

  Via each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern by soldering each lead of the SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 And a configuration in which the control signal cannot be taken out is adopted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out without passing through each wiring pattern electrically connected to. In other words, a configuration has been adopted in which a control signal cannot be extracted from a portion different from each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to illegally form a new circuit such as a short circuit or a disconnected circuit between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Can be difficult. Moreover, since various wiring patterns to the SMD type electronic component can be visually observed, the intention of the fraudster who intends to provide an unauthorized circuit to the SMD type electronic component is abandoned. Can do. Accordingly, fraudulent acts on the SMD type electronic component can be prevented.

  Also, by not arranging wiring patterns for transmitting control signals in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the SMD Control signal to the SMD type electronic component so that other illegal IC (SMD type electronic component) is not mounted between the back side of the main body of the type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the corresponding substrate And an illegal control signal to another IC cannot be used in combination in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component.

  Further, by not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, other illegal ICs (SMD type electronic components) As for the type of the SMD type electronic component, it is easy to arrange the control signal between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface of the substrate (mounting surface) corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. You can make it impossible to select things.

  In addition, among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to one lead is formed on the surface of the substrate (mounting surface) corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. By not pulling out the SMD type electronic component to the outside, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of the control signal for transmitting the wiring pattern drawn to the outside.

  Further, each lead of the SMD type electronic component is soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, so that each wiring pattern is electrically connected to the land pattern. Without taking out the control signal, it is not possible to take out the control signal from a part different from each lead of the SMD type electronic component so that the control signal for transmitting the wiring pattern cannot be used illegally. can do.

  Further, among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, in order to shorten the wiring pattern for electrically connecting one lead to the other lead, the surface of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component ( By not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal in the area of the mounting surface), each wiring pattern electrically connected to each lead of the SMD type electronic component can be connected from above or below the SMD type electronic component. By disposing, it is possible to prevent an illegal circuit from being formed around the lead. Of the leads of the SMD type electronic component, a lead that is not used (also referred to as “empty terminal”) is electrically connected to a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Or, when it is electrically connected to a wiring pattern that supplies power, it should be arranged from above or below the SMD type electronic component so that an illegal circuit cannot be formed around the empty terminal. Can do.

  Further, by not arranging any through holes in the area of the substrate surface (mounting surface) corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the main body of the SMD type electronic component The control signal cannot be taken out through the through hole so that another illegal IC (SMD type electronic component) is not mounted between the back surface and the corresponding surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. It is possible to prevent other illegal ICs from being fixed (soldered) to the through hole, and control signals from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate can be made through the through hole. It can be prevented from being used as a take-out.

  In addition, by not arranging a wiring pattern electrically connected to the ground (GND) and a wiring pattern for supplying power in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. An illegal other IC (SMD type electronic component) is mounted between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. As a result, it can be prevented from becoming a driving source for other illegal ICs.

[6-4a. Visibility of part number by SMD package]
Next, a configuration in which SMD type electronic components are collectively mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate handled as a main substrate will be described. Since the SMD type electronic component can be reduced in size as described above, the size of the substrate itself can be reduced by being collectively mounted. Here, the main control board 1310 will be described as a main board, and when the main control board 1310 is viewed in a state of being accommodated in the main control board box 1320, a measure for visibility of the product number by the SMD package is taken. Another configuration (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of a product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second to third embodiments”) will be described. 113 (a) and 113 (b), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) is described (hereinafter referred to as “the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment”). The components having the same functions as those shown in FIG. 6 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the setting indicator 1310g, the base monitor 1310h, and the like described above are omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

[Contrast between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, this lead is applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter which is a lead type electronic component is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the electronic component of the type, is arranged as a white solid line (or black) The part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30 and in the lower left part.

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has information on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 as described above. An area is provided, and the product number of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 within this information area. As a silk print, it is printed in white (or black) so that it can be seen easily.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), the main control MPU 1310a, which is a lead type electronic component, and various lead type connectors. The surface of the main control board 1310 ′ (mounting surface) is gathered by collecting alternative SMD type electronic components having the same function as electronic components such as various lead type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs. ) 1310x ′. The external dimensions (vertical dimensions, horizontal dimensions, and thickness dimensions) of the main control board 1310 ′ are the same as the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. .

  The main control board 1310 ′ has a straight line passing through the middle point of the upper side and the lower side thereof as a center line, and various electronic components are disposed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ on the left side of the center line. And a component placement area 1310xa ′ for placing various connectors, and a part number and a product number (published in the catalog) on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′ on the right side of the center line. Number list) is formed as a component list region 1310xb ′, which is an information region represented as a component list of electronic components configured in an aligned manner.

  Specifically, the component placement area 1310xa ′ includes a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type main control MPU 1310a included in the lead type, various lead type connectors MCN1 to MCN4 (a plurality of other connectors not shown), and a resistance MR0. MR4 (other resistors not shown), capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 (other capacitors not shown), diode D0 (other diodes not shown), Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (others not shown) IC) is mounted. In the component arrangement region 1310xa ′, a region (not shown) indicating a position (which may include designation of orientation) where these various electronic components and various connectors are disposed is a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing. In the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors, the corresponding part numbers are printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In addition, various types of connectors use lead-type connectors. This is because when wiring is connected to the connector, stress due to this wiring (this stress is caused by routing in the wiring path until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is due to the fact that the reaction force of the wiring that accompanies the connector acts on the connector.

  In the component list area 1310xb ', a component list of electronic components configured in an arrangement in which component numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in a catalog) are aligned is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The size of the part number and the part number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part arrangement area 1310xa ′. As white (or black). A separator “:” is provided between the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, the part number and the product number (numbers listed in the catalog) can be distinguished and identified.

  In addition to the product number (number printed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Further, in addition to describing such component information, notes regarding gaming machines may be described. For example, a description for the purpose of alerting such as “the main control board is a board important for security and should be handled with care” may be provided.

  As described above, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′ can be divided into the component placement area 1310xa ′ and the component list area 1310xb ′, and thus the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′. It is possible to easily recognize various electronic components and various connectors that are mounted on the board.

  In addition, it replaces with the silk printing printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x 'of main control board 1310', and the foil extraction area | region and foil extraction in the structure of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package which concerns on 5th Embodiment mentioned later Characters may be used, or a resist-extracted region using a twice-coated resist and a white resist-extracted character using a twice-coated resist in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment And may be adopted.

[Contrast between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, this lead is applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter which is a lead type electronic component is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the electronic component of the type, is arranged as a white solid line (or black) The part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30 and in the lower left part.

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has information on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 as described above. An area is provided, and the product number of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 within this information area. As a silk print, it is printed in white (or black) so that it can be seen easily.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113B, the main control MPU 1310a which is a lead type electronic component, and various lead type connectors. The surface of the main control board 1310 ′ (mounting surface) is gathered by integrating alternative SMD type electronic components having the same functions as electronic components such as various lead type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs. ) 1310x ′. By integrating the SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x 'of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310 'can be reduced. The external dimensions (vertical dimensions, horizontal dimensions, and thickness dimensions) of the main control board 1310 ′ are horizontal dimensions among the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Only the dimension is half (the vertical dimension and the thickness dimension are the same).

  Various electronic components and various connectors are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x 'of the main control board 1310'. These various electronic components and various connectors are arranged in the component arrangement region 1310xa ′ formed in the main control board 1310 ′ in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above. (I.e., the area (not shown) indicating the position where these various electronic components and various connectors are disposed (which may also include the designation of orientation) becomes the same layout and is white as silk printing (or , Black))), and part numbers corresponding to the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors are also arranged in the same manner and printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In addition, various types of connectors use lead-type connectors. This is because when wiring is connected to the connector, stress due to this wiring (this stress is caused by routing in the wiring path until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is due to the fact that the reaction force of the wiring that accompanies the connector acts on the connector.

  On the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, there is a parts list which is an information area formed on the main control board 1310 ′ in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above. The parts list of the electronic component constituted by arranging the part number printed in white (or black) as the silk print in the region 1310xb ′ and the part number (number listed in the catalog) is white as the silk print (or , Black). The size of the part number and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) is larger than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′. Large (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. A separator “:” is provided between the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, the part number and the product number (numbers listed in the catalog) can be distinguished and identified. In addition to the product number (number printed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Further, in addition to describing such component information, notes regarding gaming machines may be described. For example, a description for the purpose of alerting such as “the main control board is a board important for security and should be handled with care” may be provided.

  Further, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, each lead of the above-described ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (described as a part number “MIC1” in the drawing) and lead type electronic components are used. Leads of certain capacitors MC0 to MC5 and MC30 and resistors MR0 to MR4 protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ and are soldered to the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′. The part number and the part number (numbers listed in the catalog) are the main control board 1310 ′ so as not to overlap (to avoid) this part. Is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the component list area 1310xb ′ formed in the above.

  As described above, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ is used as an area for component placement, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ is used as a part number and a product number (published in the catalog). Are used as a component list of electronic components configured in an aligned manner, so that the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ and the back surface of the main control board 1310 ′ Since the role of (solder surface) 1310y ′ can be classified, various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ can be easily recognized.

  Further, since the SMD type electronic components are gathered and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, the size of the main control board 1310 ′ can be reduced. The number of ring-shaped land patterns required when mounting electronic components can be determined and reduced. As a result, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ has a reduced number of portions where various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude and are soldered, thereby reducing the back surface ( (Solder surface) 1310y 'can be formed as a flat surface.

  In addition, since various leads of the lead type electronic component protruding from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ are soldered, they are reflected and dazzled when exposed to light from a fluorescent lamp or the like. As described above, various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ to be soldered. Since the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ can be formed as a flat surface by reducing the number of parts formed, even if light such as a fluorescent lamp hits the flat surface, A part list of electronic parts that are arranged in an arrangement of silk-printed part numbers and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) is visible. It does not occur adverse effects of Kunar.

  In addition, instead of silk printing printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, the measure of the product number visibility by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment to be described later is taken. The foil extraction region and the foil extraction character in the configuration may be adopted, and the resist extraction region and the double application of the double coating resist in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment. You may employ | adopt the white resist extraction character using a resist.

  By the way, a general electric machine manufacturer uses a multilayer substrate on which various wiring patterns can be formed on each layer. However, main control boards and payout control boards used in gaming machines are two-layer boards ("double-sided boards") that form various wiring patterns on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the substrate to enhance security. It is necessary to mount various electronic components only on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate regardless of whether they are lead type electronic components or SMD type electronic components. For example, in order to increase security, it is necessary to mount the main control MPU 1310a of the ZIP type included in the lead type on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and it is advantageous to mount the lead type electronic component. For those having the SMD type, the lead type electronic component is mounted without using the SMD type electronic component.

  When SMD type electronic components and lead type electronic components are mounted together on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or payout control board, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or payout control board As compared with the case where only the lead type electronic component is mounted on the lead, the number of leads of the lead type electronic component protruding from the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board or the payout control board is reduced. As a result, the area used as a region for forming various wiring patterns on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board or the payout control board can be increased, and an area used as a region used for other functions can also be acquired. Can do.

  Therefore, for example, the SMD type ICs and SMD type connectors are not mounted on the main control board produced as a mass-production machine in the above-described area of the main control board where the area has been increased. It is possible to provide a mounting land pattern formation region 1310ya ′ (see FIG. 113B) in which various land patterns for mounting or pad patterns for extracting signals can be formed. In the main control board produced as a mass production machine, SMD type electronic components are not mounted on the various land patterns and pad patterns in the mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya ′. The pattern or pad pattern becomes an unmounted pattern, and the mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya ′ becomes an empty area.

  When such an unmounted pattern is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, various electronic components and various connectors on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board are formed depending on the region where the unmounted pattern is formed. However, when such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, the surface of the main control board ( The entire area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board can be used effectively without being restricted by the arrangement of various electronic components and various connectors on the mounting surface) and the routing of various wiring patterns.

  In addition, since such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, it is not visible from the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and the presence of the unmounted pattern can be hidden. It is preferable in terms of security.

  A part of such an unmounted pattern may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board for convenience. For example, the connector (SMD type connector) may be more easily connected to the wiring if it is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board.

  Further, a part of such an unmounted pattern may be formed as a lead type electronic component or a lead type connector for convenience. For example, a case where soldering strength is required, such as a connector having a large number of insertions / removals, can be mentioned.

  Next, when the main control board 1310 is viewed in a state of being housed in the main control board box 1320, the small Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an SMD package, has a small package main body surface area, so that the name of the manufacturer (abbreviations and symbols are also displayed). And other parts of the present invention in which the measure of the part number is taken with the SMD package that the part number (the number listed in the catalog) is small and difficult to see (hereinafter referred to as “fourth to sixth embodiments”). Will be described as “a configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package”). In FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) is described (hereinafter referred to as “the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment”). To those having the same function as those shown in FIG.

[Contrast between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the position (direction designation is also possible) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Area MSLKMIC 30 is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is silk printed near the area MSLKMIC 30 in the lower left. As white (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has information on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 as described above. An area is provided, and the product number of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 within this information area. As a silk print, it is printed in white (or black) so that it can be seen easily.

  In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. ) The region MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed (the capacitor MC30 has no polarity and no orientation is specified) so as to be disposed in the vicinity of the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead to be) The white solid line (or black solid line) is printed, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing near the area MSLKMC30 and in the upper right. .

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further provided with a main part as shown in FIG. A region MSLKMIC 30 ′ indicating a position (including designation of orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is disposed at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 is a white chain line as silk printing. (Or a black chain line), and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 ′ and in the upper left. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, printing can be performed with a large component number.

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the product number MSLKMIC 30p, the product number MSLKMIC 30p is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 with an information area in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 ′. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it can be seen easily compared to the size of the product number (number printed in the catalog) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be reliably recognized.

  The part number MSLKMIC 30p may be the same as or larger than the part number MSLKMIC 30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. May be. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p can be increased for printing.

  In addition, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (number printed in the catalog). In this case, white (or black) is used for silk printing so that the size is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferable that it is printed with. Accordingly, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably recognized.

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. A region MSLKMC30 ′ indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 (capacity MC30 has no polarity and no direction is specified) is a white solid line (or black solid line) as silk printing. In addition to being printed, a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of the region MSLKMC30 ′ and in the upper left. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the size of the part number is set. Although it is necessary to arrange and print near the corresponding electronic component, the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the component number is increased. This is because it can be printed.

[Contrast between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the position (direction designation is also possible) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Area MSLKMIC 30 is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is silk printed near the area MSLKMIC 30 in the lower left. As white (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has information on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 as described above. An area is provided, and the product number of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 within this information area. As a silk print, it is printed in white (or black) so that it can be seen easily.

  In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. ) The region MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed (the capacitor MC30 has no polarity and no orientation is specified) so as to be disposed in the vicinity of the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead to be) The white solid line (or black solid line) is printed, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing near the area MSLKMC30 and in the upper right. .

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further connected to the main surface as shown in FIG. A region MSLKMIC 30 ′ indicating a position (including designation of orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is disposed at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC 30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the control board 1310 is indicated by a chain line. At the same time, a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a foil cut character in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 ′ and in the upper left.

  The foil-extracted region is a chain line that is a copper foil wiring pattern except for a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and various land patterns in a layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed. This is a region formed by removing the surrounding copper foil. A region MSLKMIC 30 ′ formed as a foil removal region has a notch 1310 yMIC 30 in a part on the left side in FIG. 114 (b). As a result, the region MSLKMIC 30 ′ becomes a U-shaped Katakana, and the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310 y of the main control board 1310 and the U-shaped region MSLKMIC 30 via the notch 1310 yMIC 30. It can be in a state of being electrically connected to the inner region of '. This is because the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and therefore the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 corresponding to the mounted region. This is because it is possible to prevent the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from malfunctioning due to noise (to make it strong against noise) by securing the above area as much as possible.

  The foil-extracted character is formed as an extracted character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, and extracting the surrounding copper foil. The part number formed as the foil drawing character is formed as a foil drawing character larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased and formed as a foil letter.

  In addition, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the product number MSLKMIC 30p, the product number MSLKMIC 30p is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 with an information area near the area MSLKMIC 30 ', and within this information area, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 It is formed as a foil-extracted character so as to be a size that is easy to visually recognize compared with the size of a product number (number printed in a catalog) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body. The foil-extracted character is formed as an extracted character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, and extracting the surrounding copper foil. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be reliably recognized.

  The product number MSLKMIC 30p formed as a foil-extracted character is the same as the product number MSLKMIC 30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It may be large or large. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the part number MSLKMIC 30p is set in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Although it is necessary to arrange and print in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component in a small size, since the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p is increased. This is because it can be formed as a foil drawing character.

  In addition, the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as foil-drawing characters together with the product number (number posted in the catalog). In this case, it is formed as a foil-drawing character so as to be a size that is easy to visually recognize compared with the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Is preferred. Accordingly, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably recognized.

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. A region MSLKMC30 ′ indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed (a direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed in a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30, which is indicated by a chain line as a foil drawing region, and this region MSLKMC30 A part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed in the vicinity of 'and in the upper left as a letter without foil. The foil-extracted region is a chain line that is a copper foil wiring pattern except for a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and various land patterns in a layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed. This is a region formed by removing the surrounding copper foil. The foil-extracted character is formed as an extracted character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, and extracting the surrounding copper foil. The part number formed as the foil drawing character is formed as a foil drawing character larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased and formed as a foil letter.

  In addition, the wiring pattern for forming the foil drawing region and the foil drawing character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from various electronic components, as well as a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and various types. The land pattern and the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are electrically insulated from each other.

[Contrast between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment]
In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the position (direction designation is also possible) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Area MSLKMIC 30 is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is silk printed near the area MSLKMIC 30 in the lower left. As white (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has information on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 as described above. An area is provided, and the product number of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is imprinted or printed on the surface of the package body of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 within this information area. As a silk print, it is printed in white (or black) so that it can be seen easily.

  In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. ) The region MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed (the capacitor MC30 has no polarity and no orientation is specified) so as to be disposed in the vicinity of the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead to be) The white solid line (or black solid line) is printed, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing near the area MSLKMC30 and in the upper right. .

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, green is adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are used. ) The whole is a solid color with a green resist except for various land patterns.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further provided with a main part as shown in FIG. A region MSLKMIC 30 ′ indicating a position (including designation of orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is arranged at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC 30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the control board 1310 is white painted twice. A white resist using a white resist formed with a chain line as a white resist removal region using a resist and having a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in the upper left portion in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30 ′. It is formed as a blank character.

  In addition, in the configuration of the part number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the part number MSLKMIC 30p, the part number MSLKMIC 30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the back surface (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and below the area MSLKMIC 30 ′. It is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a white resist that has been painted twice so that the size is easier to visually recognize than the size of (number published in the catalog).

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. A region where the capacitor MC30 is disposed at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 (the direction of the capacitor MC30 is not specified because there is no polarity), and the region MSLKMC30 ′ is a white resist extraction region using a white resist that is painted twice The part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed in the vicinity of the region MSLKMC30 ′ and in the upper left as a white resist-extracted character using a white resist painted twice.

  Specifically, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is covered with a white resist as a whole of the white resist that is painted twice (that is, the white resist that is painted twice). First, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. Then, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is the second of the two-colored white resist, and is located at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC 30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. A region MSLKMIC 30 ′ showing a position (including designation of orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is masked as a white resist removal region in a chain line shape, and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is near the region MSLKMIC 30 ′ and in the upper left. And the corresponding part number are masked as white resist-excluded characters, and an information area is provided in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC 30 ′ and below, and in this information area, the product number MSLKMIC 30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is marked as a white resist-excluded character. Region where the capacitor MC30 is disposed at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (the orientation is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity). The MSLKMC 30 ′ is masked as a white resist removal region in a chain line shape, and a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is masked as a white resist removal character in the vicinity of the region MSLKMC 30 ′ and in the upper left.

  In the masked state as described above, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is covered with a white resist by solid coating with a white resist except for various land patterns. In other words, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns.

  As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the whole is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white color of the second layer. By covering the whole area except for the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area MSLKMIC 30 ′ indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is disposed is white. Part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) that are formed with chain lines as the resist removal area, the part numbers corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed as white resist removal characters, and stamped or printed on the package body surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is the character without white resist A region MSLKMC30 ′ indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is disposed (the direction of the capacitor MC30 is not specified because there is no polarity) is formed by a chain line, and a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a white resist-extracted character. Is done. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be reliably recognized.

  When the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a white resist-extracted character, it is formed to be larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form a white resist-free character.

  When forming the product number MSLKMIC 30p as white resist-extracted characters, the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. May be the same or larger. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the part number MSLKMIC 30p is set in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Although it is necessary to arrange and print in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component in a small size, since the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p is increased. This is because it can be formed as a white resist-free character.

  The manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as white resist-excluded characters together with the product number (number listed in the catalog). In this case, the characters are formed as white resist-excluded characters so that the size is easier to see than the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferable. Accordingly, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably recognized.

  When the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a white resist-extracted character, it is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form a white resist-free character.

  In the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is also formed with various white lands. You may comprise so that it may be solid-coated except a pattern. In this case, the area indicating the position (which may include the designation of the orientation) of various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is silk printed as the surface (mounting). Surface) is printed with dark solid lines such as dark green, black, gray, etc., and the part numbers corresponding to various electronic components are silk printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as dark green, black, gray, etc. Printed as dark characters. By configuring in this way, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of other substrates are solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns. The control board 1310 can be made to stand out. In addition, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (including the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) in addition to this product number) is also written. ) May be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as silk printing.

  In addition, the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solid-coated with white resist except for various land patterns, and the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 1 You may comprise so that it may print as silk printing using the resist of the different color of the 2nd application which makes the color of the resist of the second time (underground) and the second time different. After printing the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as white (silk printing) excluding various land patterns as the first time (base), then on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is used for the second time in a state in which the area indicating the position (which may include the designation of orientation) of the various electronic components to be mounted and the component number corresponding to the various electronic components are masked. The entire surface (mounting surface) may be printed as silk printing in any one of black, blue, yellow, and red except for various land patterns. Even with this configuration, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of other substrates are solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns. The control board 1310 can be made to stand out. In addition, it is possible to visually recognize an area indicating a position where various electronic components are arranged (which may include designation of orientation) and a component number corresponding to the various electronic components.

  Further, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is also formed with various white lands. You may comprise so that it may be solid-coated except a pattern. In this case, an area indicating a position (which may include designation of orientation) of various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A white resist removal region is formed by a solid line, and a part number corresponding to each electronic component is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as a white resist removal character. Also, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) in addition to this product number) is also main. You may form as a white resist extraction character on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310. FIG.

[6-4b. Measures to prevent modification of SMD type electronic components]
Next, a miniaturized electronic component called an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, so that it is exchanged with an unauthorized electronic component to obtain an unauthorized game ball. The point which prevents an action is demonstrated.

  As described above, the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, has a width dimension of 5.3 mm and a length dimension as the size of the SMD package body. 10.8 mm, the height dimension is 1.5 mm, and the width dimension of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm including the length of the lead protruding from the two sides of the SMD package body.

  Since the main control board 1310 is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from a person who obtains an illegal game ball by making an unauthorized modification. It is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body in which a plurality of pores are formed and a transparent base body. As shown in FIG. 115, the main control board box 1320 has a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 that are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of a crimping portion 1303. The crimping portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and a plurality of crimping portions 1303 are provided. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then to open the main control board box 1320 It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

  However, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some unauthorized means such as a thin wire on the main control board box 1320, and the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is illegal. If the electronic component is replaced, an unauthorized game ball may be obtained by a person who performs such unauthorized modification.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z having an inner diameter (2 mm in this embodiment) smaller than the size of the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed in the transparent cover body 1301. The configuration to adopt was adopted. Accordingly, even if the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some unauthorized means such as a thin wire on the main control board box 1320, the SMD type Schmitt The trigger inverter MIC30 cannot be taken out from the main control board box 1320 through the vent hole 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from being replaced with an unauthorized electronic component.

  Further, as described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is one of the main circuits constituting the main control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors are input, and is omitted from the main control board 1310 by some unauthorized means. Then, the main control MPU 1310a always determines that any of the various sensors that indicate the entry of the game ball is not entered, and that the illegality always indicates an illegal action such as the approach of a magnet or illegal vibration. It is determined that cheating is taking place. As a result, when the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, if the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is missing, a state in which there is no entry to the person who performs unauthorized modification. The state is maintained and no illegal game ball is acquired, and the illegal alteration is performed by notifying the illegal act, and the game computer (hall) is informed of the game and the game. You can also tell the staff in the hall. Further, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that fraudulent acts are always carried out for various types of sensors that convey fraudulent acts such as the approach of a magnet or unauthorized vibrations, as described above, the launch permission signal Is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to control the game ball so that it cannot be launched toward the game area 5a. It is in a state where it cannot be performed at all.

  In the above-described embodiment, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as an SMD type electronic component. However, as other SMD type electronic components, For example, when a resistor is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the main control board box 1320 via the vent hole 1301z. Therefore, it is necessary to make the inner diameter of the vent hole 1301z smaller than the resistance of the SMD type so as not to jump out from the inside.

  Since such an SMD type resistor is small, even if it is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is visually confirmed whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. It may be difficult to distinguish. Further, when the SMD type resistance peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 jumps out of the main control board box 1320 through the air hole 1301z, the SMD type resistance is moved to the lower inside of the main control board box 1320. Since there is no trace of the peeled off SMD type resistor, it becomes more difficult to visually determine whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, for example, when the JIS standard 1/8 watt 2012 type is adopted as the SMD type resistor, the length type is 2.0 mm and the width dimension is 1.2 mm in this 2012 type. In such a small SMD type resistor, even if a problem occurs in which the main control board 1310 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the main control board box 1320 can be used. In order not to jump out, the inner diameter of the vent 1301z is smaller than the smaller one of the length dimension and the width dimension of the small SMD type resistor (here, the width dimension is 1.2 mm). It shall be a thing (here, for example, 1.0 mm).

  Thereby, even if a small SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is reliably prevented from jumping out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the vent hole 1301z. Therefore, an opportunity to visually recognize the small SMD type resistor that has been peeled off inside the main control board box 1320 can be obtained, and if the main control board box 1320 is shaken up and down or left and right, A small SMD type resistor that is peeled off generates a sound when it collides with the inner wall of the main control board box 1320 or the main control board 1310. This sound provides an opportunity to recognize the small SMD type resistor that has been peeled off. Can be obtained. In addition to this small SMD type resistor, instead of electronic components such as lead type capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, etc., when electronic components such as SMD type capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, etc. are adopted. The inner diameter of the vent hole 1301z is smaller than the smallest dimension among them.

  In this way, even if a small SMD type electronic component is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it surely jumps out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the vent hole 1301z. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to increase a probability that a defect that the SMD type electronic component is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to the deflection of the main control board 1310 can be found.

  In the above-described embodiment (including the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first to sixth embodiments), the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. As described above, SMD type electronic components can also be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrates handled as main substrates such as the power supply substrate 630 and the payout control substrate 633.

[6-4c. Test connector]
The pachinko machine 1 is tested at a specific testing institution and cannot be shipped to the game hall unless it is approved by the specific testing institution. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k for extracting various signals relating to the game. This test connector 1310k is an SMD type electronic component. The test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged in parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board. When the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested at a specific testing institution, it is normally mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and is attached to the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k. While the test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed, the main control board 1310 is produced when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass production machine shipped to the game hall. The test harness cover body side opening 1301k is formed in the transparent cover body 1301. It is made as to not. For this reason, in the main control board 1310 produced as a mass-production machine, an area for mounting the test connector 1310k is formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested in a specific test organization, the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310, such as a land pattern formation area 1310ya. '(See FIG. 113 (b)) and a test harness base body side opening 1302k for mounting the test harness to the test connector 1310k on the transparent base body 1302 facing the test connector 1310k. The structure to be formed was adopted. Thereby, even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, and even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass production machine shipped to a game hall, the surface of the main control board 1310 Since the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is not formed as an empty area on the (mounting surface), another SMD type electronic component can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. . Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased.

  Further, with this configuration, in preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific test organization, the test operator first removes the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. Subsequently, the test harness electrically connected to the test apparatus installed in a specific test organization is connected to the main control board via the test harness base body side opening 1302k formed in the transparent base body 1302. This is electrically connected to a test connector 1310k mounted on the mounting land pattern forming region 1310ya ′ on the back surface (solder surface) of 1310. Subsequently, the test operator attaches the main control board box 1320 to the board holder 1200. In this state, the test harness can be held and held (held) by the transparent base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 and the board holder 1200, so that the test harness is directed to the test connector 1310k. By applying a load in the direction in which the test harness is pushed in, the electrical connection between the test connector 1310k and the test harness becomes unstable due to vibrations caused by a movable body operated by various electric drive sources provided in the pachinko machine 1. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the test harness from which various important signals relating to the game are extracted in the test of the pachinko machine 1 from being twisted and disconnected.

  In this embodiment, as the test connector 1310k, a straight SMD type connector (each pin of the connector is arranged in parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board. The right angle SMD type connector (type in which each pin of the connector is arranged in parallel with the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board) is used. The back surface (solder surface) of the control board is mounted in the vicinity of any one of the left side, the lower side, the right side, and the upper side, and the side wall (transparent cover body 1301) of the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k. Of the left side wall, the lower side wall, the right side wall, and the upper side wall of the tester to the test connector 1310k) to the test connector 1310k An arrangement for forming a test harness cover side opening 1301k may be employed for applying Ri. Even if configured in this way, even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested at a specific testing institution, and even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass production machine shipped to a game hall, Since the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is not formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310, another SMD type electronic component is placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Can be implemented. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased. In preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing organization, the test operator first performs a specific test without removing the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. A test harness electrically connected to a test apparatus installed in the engine is connected to the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board via a test harness cover body side opening 1301k formed in the transparent cover body 1301. It can be electrically connected to the test connector 1310k to be mounted.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine in which a test firing test terminal (connector for testing) to which a cable for transmitting game information to a test device in a specific test organization is connected is provided in the game control device (game control board) has been proposed. (For example, JP2013-128621A (paragraph [0054] and FIG. 6)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, a test connector is mounted on the surface of the game control board when tested at a specific test organization, whereas when used in a game hall. Since the test connector is not mounted on the surface of the game control board and becomes an empty area, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the game control board cannot be increased by this empty area.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine for mounting a surface-mount type electronic component on a board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, although the surface mount type electronic component in the gaming machine described in this document may have an identifier such as a part number corresponding to the surface mount type electronic component, the size of the surface mount type electronic component is large. There was a problem that it was difficult to visually recognize the identifier because of its small size.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine for mounting a surface-mount type electronic component on a board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface-mount type electronic component in the gaming machine described in this document is mounted on a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, the surface-mount type electronic component is There is a possibility that an illegal game ball is obtained by peeling it from the game control board and replacing it with an illegal electronic component.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a tact switch or the like is provided on a board that can be operated by operating a pressing operation unit to feel that the switch is turned on or off by a click feeling during operation (for example, a special feature). No. 2017-023427 (paragraph [0071] and FIG. 70)). By the way, an electronic component such as a tact switch described in this document is a lead type in which each REIT is inserted into a through hole provided in the substrate from the surface of the substrate toward the back surface and soldered on the back surface side of the substrate. It is an electronic component. When such a lead-type electronic component is mounted on a board such as a game control board that controls the progress of the game, for example, if the board bends as the lead-type electronic component is operated, this deflection causes the board to There is a possibility that an electrical failure may occur due to peeling of a soldered portion of another electronic component mounted on the board.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine in which various control boards are arranged at predetermined positions on the back of the gaming board has been proposed (for example, JP 2013-128621 A (paragraph [0032] to paragraph [0034] and FIG. 3)). By the way, the game control board for controlling the progress of the game is an important board for determining whether or not to give a profit to the player, so it is accommodated in a board case having a sealed structure and is used for illegal acts such as unauthorized modification. Preventive measures are required.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine for mounting a surface-mounted component on a board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface-mounted component in the gaming machine described in this document is mounted on a game control board that can control the progress of the game, it is within the area of the surface of the game control board on which the surface-mounted component is mounted. If the wiring pattern is routed to the surface, the distance between the back surface of the surface-mounted component and the surface of the game control board is small. A problem arises in that fraudulent acts cannot be prevented.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a main control board for controlling a game is placed on the back side in a state of being accommodated in a case (for example, JP-A-2006-214975 (paragraph [0030], paragraph [0031] and Fig. 2) By the way, as in the gaming machine described in this document, the main control board is important for controlling the game, so it is housed in a case and sealed as a security measure. It is arranged on the back side, and it is required to improve crime prevention for those important in crime prevention.

[6-5. Measures against electromagnetic noise entering through the metal casing of the setting key switch]
Next, countermeasures against electromagnetic wave noise entering through the metal casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram (a) showing the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 and a diagram (b) showing the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. The main control board box 1320 is the game board 5 (C) which shows the lower part of the left view of the game board 5 in the state attached to FIG.

  As described above, the setting key switch 1311a accommodates the setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting the setting key into the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing. As described above, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. As described above, the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is disposed substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder provided with the insertion port for inserting the setting key. As described above, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the cylindrical (or rectangular) case made of metal is arranged substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. ing.

  As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is a circuit that can extract (output) as a signal which state is the ON state or the OFF state. The signal can be taken out (output) from a pair of opposing lead terminals provided in the cylinder and projecting from a surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. Further, from the rear surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a, as described above, a pair of opposed lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder and a 90 degree rotation angle are set. A pair of opposing mounting plate pieces having a predetermined length and having a predetermined length are formed.

  The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted has vertical and horizontal directions on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 as shown in FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b). A pair of opposing mounting plate pieces projecting from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a so that the setting key switch 1311a is arranged at the center point where the center lines of A pair of opposing long through holes SLH1, SLH2 having a long slot shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 can be inserted on the center line in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311. A pair of opposing leads that can be inserted through a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. Horu SLTH1, SLTH2 are formed on the long through hole SLH1, SLH2 90 degree rotation angle has a setting change substrate 1311 on vertical center line of a pair of opposed.

  The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted has a connector MSCN and a connector connection (inter-board connection) of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Three through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, and SSTH3 through which various pin terminals (first pin terminal to third pin terminal) of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 to be inserted are formed.

  Of these three through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, and SSTH3, the upper through hole SSTH1 into which the first pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted is a pair of protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern SPTN1 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the upper through hole SLTH1 among the pair of opposing through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 through which the opposing lead terminals can be inserted. The lower through hole SSTH3 into which the third pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted can be inserted with a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. A pair of opposing arms A wiring pattern SPTN2 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the lower through hole SLTH2 of the holes SLTH1 and SLTH2, and the second pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 The middle through-hole SSTH2 through which is inserted is electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311.

  The surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 surrounds the entire long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 for the setting key switch 1311a and the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 for the setting key switch 1311a on the copper plane. A foil removal region SINSx having a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction is formed. Due to the foil drawing region SINSx, the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 are electrically connected from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. It is in an insulated state. In addition, on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, the copper plane is formed by removing the copper foil except for the periphery of the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 with respect to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A foil removal region is also formed, and this foil removal region is electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. It has become.

  On the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, the copper plane is long in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 at a position corresponding to the foil drawing area SINSx formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311. In addition to having a rectangular shape, a foil removal region SINSy is formed by removing the copper foil and excluding the periphery of the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2 described above. The foil extraction region SINSy is formed along the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2 up to the periphery of the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 with respect to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. Due to this foil removal region SINSy, the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2, the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2, and the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 are provided on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. It is in a state of being electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the substrate.

  Note that through holes STH are formed at four corners of the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. These four through holes STH are a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change substrate 1311 and a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311. And the same ground (GND).

  The entire surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 are solidly coated with a resist of a predetermined color so as to cover the copper plane except for the various through holes described above. On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, an area SSLKCN1 indicating a position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged is different from the predetermined color of the resist as silk printing on the resist of the predetermined color. The area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is silk-printed as the area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged with a color different from a predetermined color of the resist. Printed with solid lines of the same color. The size of the area SSLKSW1 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is arranged in the area SSLKSW1 and mounted (soldering on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311). ), The boundary line of the region SSLKSW1 (solid solid line) is arranged outside the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a. That is, even when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the setting key switch 1311a prevents the boundary line of the region SSLKSW1 (solid solid line) from overlapping. Similarly to the region SSLKSW1, the region SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN is arranged on the setting change board 1311 is not overlapped by the connector SMCN even when the connector SMCN is mounted. It is like that.

  A reference mark SSTD indicating the rotation position (initial position) of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch of the setting key switch 1311a is OFF is printed in the area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is disposed. ing. With this fiducial mark SSTD, when the manufacturer operator mounts the setting key switch 1311a on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned upside down (incorrect) and soldered. I have to. When the reference mark SSTD is not printed, for example, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned upside down (incorrect) and soldered, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and turned off. When taking out as a signal which state is among the current states, the content of the signal is turned over between the state where the setting key switch 1311a is ON and the state where it is OFF.

  Here, the reason why the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change substrate 1311 are formed on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 will be described. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a accommodates the setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting the setting key into the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing. As described above, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. As described above, the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is disposed substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder provided with the insertion port for inserting the setting key. As described above, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the cylindrical (or rectangular) case made of metal is arranged substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. ing. Further, in the state where the setting key cylinder is housed in the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing, as described above, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing and the setting key cylinder are It is in an electrically connected state. That is, a state in which the front surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or setting key cylinder that can be a member for electromagnetic wave noise to enter the setting change board 1311 is exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. It has become.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the metal of the setting key switch 1311a is formed by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. A pair of opposing long plate holes along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 that can be inserted through a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the cylindrical (or rectangular) casing made of steel. The long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 can be electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. Yes. In other words, in this embodiment, the board ground of the setting change board 1311 (main control board 1310) is not exposed via the setting key switch 1311a. Thus, in a state where the pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and soldered. Even if electromagnetic noise enters from the front surface of a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or setting key cylinder, the electromagnetic noise is detected on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. It is made of metal by preventing entry into the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 through the foil drawing regions SINSx and SINSy formed on the substrate. It is attenuated by the cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or the setting key cylinder itself. That is, in the present embodiment, electromagnetic noise from the front surface of a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or setting key cylinder is prevented from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311 by the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy. can do. Thereby, in this embodiment, since the intrusion of electromagnetic wave noise from the front surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder can be prevented on the setting change board 1311 side, the electromagnetic wave noise is prevented. Can be reliably stopped from entering the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game via the setting change board 1311, and the ground for transmitting the board ground (ground). There is no change to the line. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  The setting key cylinder is filled with a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) between the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is made of a metal cylinder (or rectangular shape). Even if a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) case and the setting key cylinder are not electrically connected and insulated, a configuration that can rotate with respect to the case) is adopted. Good. Even when configured in this manner, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters from a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, the electromagnetic wave noise is detected on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. The metal is prevented from entering the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 through the foil drawing regions SINSx and SINSy formed in It is attenuated by the cylindrical (or rectangular) casing itself. That is, electromagnetic noise from a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing can be prevented from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311 by the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy. Thus, intrusion of electromagnetic wave noise from a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing can be prevented on the setting change board 1311 side, so that the intrusion of electromagnetic wave noise is played through the setting change board 1311. It is possible to reliably stop the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the movement, from proceeding to the substrate ground, and the ground line for transmitting the substrate ground (ground) is not changed. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  A state in which electromagnetic noise may enter the setting key switch 1311a will be described. As described above, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder housed in the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting value in addition to changing the setting value, so only a limited number of people including the game hall manager are allowed to possess it. And is limited to 2-3 people. For this reason, when confirming the set value or changing the set value, first, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and then presses the set key. The owner has access to the setting key switch 1311a. That is, the person who opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 may be different from the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a.

  Then, an attendant such as a game hall clerk who opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is charged by itself when inserting a regular metal key into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotating it. Electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge can be transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 via a regular metal key. As described above, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to a metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, and the metal door frame reinforcement unit is connected to the frame ground via the door frame metal ground wire. The substrate 559 is electrically connected. This frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire. That is, a clerk of a game hall or the like who opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 charges itself and electrostatically discharges when inserting a regular metal key into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127. The electromagnetic noise caused by the noise is transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 through a regular metal key, so that the door lock reinforcement unit, the door frame metal ground wire, the frame ground substrate 559, the island equipment ground wire, and It can be removed from the pachinko machine 1 by being transmitted to the ground of the island facility of the game hall. On the other hand, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a does not touch the cylinder lock 127, so that the electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to charging of the cylinder key 127 is set via a regular metal key. 1311a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is accessed by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. Electromagnetic wave noise caused by charging of the person himself / herself and electrostatic discharge can be attenuated by a metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise caused by charging and electrostatic discharge to the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311.

  As described above, the door frame 3 includes various decorative portions. When electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative portions is transmitted to a metal door frame reinforcing unit via a wiring (not shown), the door frame metal It is transmitted to the frame ground substrate 559 via the ground wire, and is transmitted from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the pachinko machine 1. The various decorative parts decorate the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and are arranged on substantially the entire door frame 3, so that those who access the setting key switch 1311a are aware of the door frame 3 when accessing it. If you touch it without touching, you will touch the various decorative parts on the door frame 3, and electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge due to charging yourself will be transmitted to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall and removed from the pachinko machine 1 It has come to be.

  In the present embodiment, the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change substrate 1311 are formed on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311, and the inside of the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy. In addition, a long length along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. A pair of opposed long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a hole shape are formed, but one of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 is connected to the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 via a resistor and It may be configured to be electrically connected to a solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface). Each of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 is electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 through a corresponding resistor. You may comprise. In this way, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to charging of the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is caused through the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. By transmitting to the resistance, it can be attenuated by this resistance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise caused by charging and electrostatic discharge to the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311.

  In the present embodiment, an electrostatic removal pad capable of removing electromagnetic wave noise may be provided at a predetermined position on the front surface of the door frame 3, or when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4. The main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 are arranged such that the left side in the front view in the vertical direction is opposite to the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4. The right side in front view in the vertical direction may be provided on the open side portion of the main body frame 4. In addition, since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, when the main body frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 is opened from the outer frame 2, it faces the one pachinko machine 1 A staff of a game hall clerk or the like reaches the back side of the other pachinko machine 1 that is. When a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like releases the main body frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 from the outer frame 2 for some reason, the back of the other pachinko machine 1 opposite to the one pachinko machine 1 There is also access to the side. Therefore, since it is necessary to remove electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to charging of the clerk of the game hall, etc., an electrostatic removal pad can be used as a part that can be reached by a clerk of the game hall. It may be provided on the rear surface side of the back cover 640, may be provided on the rear surface side of the interface board cover 636, may be provided on the rear surface side of the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632, or may be provided on the rear surface of the dispensing device 580. It may be provided on the side.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, you may comprise the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 5 by shape | molding with resin which has electroconductivity. Since the main body frame base unit 500 has a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface in a front view, the main body frame base unit 500 and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 are in an electrically connected state. . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559 described above via a main body frame metal ground wire (not shown). The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown). Thereby, a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall or a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a can, for example, enter the main body frame base unit 500 on the open side of the main body frame 4 in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4. The left hand can be placed to support the body, and the right hand can be extended to the rear side of the main body frame 4 or the rear side of the game board 5, so that when the left hand is placed on the main body frame base unit 500, it is charged by itself When the electromagnetic wave noise due to the discharge is transmitted to the main body frame base unit 500 and transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit, it is transmitted to the frame ground substrate 559 via the door frame metal ground wire, and from the frame ground substrate 559 to the island equipment ground. It is transmitted to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the wire and removed from the pachinko machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3 as described above, and the metal door frame reinforcement unit is connected to the door frame metal ground. Although the frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, the frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559 via the wire. The wire is not electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559, but is electrically connected to the terminal of the power supply substrate 630 of the main body frame 4 so as to electrically connect the metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply substrate 630. It may be. The door frame 3 is used to decorate the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and includes various decorative portions. The various decorative portions may have no decorative plating at all. Among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcement unit via a wiring not shown in the figure, Although the frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the island facility ground wire, the door frame metal ground wire is not electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559, and the body frame The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board 630 may be electrically connected by electrically connecting to the terminals of the fourth power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 is supplied with 24V AC from the island equipment in the game hall. The AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board 630 to which L (line) is input is connected to the non-ground side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board 630 is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) for transiently protecting from an excessive voltage is provided on the power supply substrate 630. Although this surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and hardly flows current, when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value decreases instantaneously and current flows, and the excessive voltage disappears. In addition, it has a performance to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thereby, electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board 630 to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board 630 by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and removed from the pachinko machine 1. Is done.

  Incidentally, as described above, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. In the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, the drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear surface as described above. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320. The rear surface has a distance dimension da with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is disposed closer to the front side of the game board 5.

  Explaining this arrangement, as described above, the insertion port for inserting the setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on the same plane as the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 when the setting change board 1311 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320. That is, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a does not protrude outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. When the worker performs the work of mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility of the game hall, first, temporarily place it on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. Even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. For this reason, there is a case where the temporarily placed game board 5 is stopped during work and the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and falls down.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200, the rear face of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is A configuration is adopted in which a distance dimension da is provided with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5. As a result, when the worker places the game board 5 temporarily on or around the front surface of the pachinko machine 1, the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. The rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 has a distance dimension da with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is disposed closer to the front side of the game board 5 even if it falls down. Even if the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 come into contact with the floor of the game hall because the cover body of the drive board box 1730 protrudes compared to the control board box 1320, the setting key The front part of the setting key cylinder of the switch 1311a prevents a collision with the floor of the game hall by securely forming a space between the floor of the game hall. It is possible.

  In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wirings for electrical connection with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558. That is, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes a non-connected wiring and is suspended from the upper part of the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row across the back of the island facilities in the game hall, the unconnected wiring is provided with various boards, various motors, various solenoids and other electric drive sources, various LEDs and various lamps. Touching the light emitting means such as a short circuit may cause a short circuit (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, many of the back cover 640 are bent at or near the front end of the unconnected wiring, and the front end of the unconnected wiring is caught by the slit 641. Since it is difficult to invade toward the back side, a short circuit (short circuit) can be prevented. In a state where the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200, the rear face of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is the cover body of the drive board box 1730. Since it is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da with respect to the rear surface, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, the drive It is blocked by the cover body of the board box 1730 and cannot enter the main control board box 1320, and the tip of the unconnected wiring contacts the front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311. This can be surely prevented.

  Even if the tip of the unconnected wiring comes into contact with the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 or the front surface of the setting key cylinder, in the present embodiment, As described above, by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, the metal tube of the setting key switch 1311a is formed. A pair of opposing long through-holes having a long slot shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 that can be inserted through a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the casing (or rectangular shape) Solid ground (substrate) on which SLH1 and SLH2 are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 Since the board ground of the setting change board 1311 (main control board 1310) is not exposed through the setting key switch 1311a, the game progresses through the setting change board 1311. There is no influence on the substrate ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the control, and there is no fluctuation with respect to the ground line that transmits the board ground (ground). Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  Note that the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 are formed of a non-conductive resin. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 do not contact each other and are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction. 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially parallel to each other without contacting each other.

  In the setting key switch 1311a employed in the above-described embodiment, a predetermined number of tumbler pins are arranged in the setting key cylinder accommodated therein, but a switch in which more tumbler pins are arranged may be adopted. In this way, security can be further increased, and if it is mass-produced and widely available in the market, the unit price can be reduced and it can contribute to cost reduction. 117, the setting key switch 1311a ′ that accommodates a setting key cylinder in which more tumbler pins are arranged than the setting key cylinder that is accommodated in the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the setting change board 1311. explain. FIG. 117 is a modified example 1 (a) showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board in a state where the main control board box is attached to the game board, in which the main control board box is attached to the game board. It is the modification 2 (b) which shows the lower part of the left view of the game board. In addition, in FIG. 117, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same component mentioned above.

  When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 described above, FIG. As shown, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ protrudes from the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, and the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ is the cover body of the driving board box 1730. The rear surface of the game board 5 is disposed so as to protrude rearward with a distance dimension db. In order to protect the front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ protruding from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730, the protective cover 1304 is pivotally supported by the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320 and can be opened and closed. Is provided. The protective cover 1304 is formed with a locking projection (not shown), and a locking groove (not shown) for locking the locking projection is formed in the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320. When the locking projection of the protective cover 1304 is released from the locking groove of the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, the protection cover 1304 is pivotally supported to open from the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, and the setting key switch 1311a 'can be accessed.

  By providing such a protective cover 1304 on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, when the worker temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the worker is mistaken. Even if the leg of the game board 5 hits the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 falls to the floor of the game hall, the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board 1320 contacts the floor of the game hall. The front surface portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ can be prevented from colliding with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space between the floor of the game hall.

  In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wirings for electrical connection with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558. That is, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes a non-connected wiring and is suspended from the upper part of the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row across the back of the island facilities in the game hall, the unconnected wiring is provided with various boards, various motors, various solenoids and other electric drive sources, various LEDs and various lamps. Touching the light emitting means such as a short circuit may cause a short circuit (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, many of the back cover 640 are bent at or near the front end of the unconnected wiring, and the front end of the unconnected wiring is caught by the slit 641. Since it is difficult to invade toward the back side, a short circuit (short circuit) can be prevented. In a state where the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, a protective cover 1304 is provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board 1320. Therefore, even if the front end of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, the front end of the unconnected wiring is blocked by the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board 1320. Can be reliably prevented from coming into contact with the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ provided on the setting change board 1311. Note that the cover body of the drive board box 1730, the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320, and the protective cover 1304 are formed of a non-conductive resin.

  When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 do not contact each other and are arranged substantially parallel to each other in the vertical direction. The cover body 1301 of the control board box 1320 is arranged substantially parallel to the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover 640 and the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are They are arranged substantially parallel to the vertical direction without contacting each other.

  Compared with the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 described above, the substrate holder 1200 has a shorter length in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the depth direction) in the substrate holder 1200. When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface thereof, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a 'is the main control board. Although protruding from the cover body 1301 ′ of the box 1320, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a ′ has a distance dimension dc with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. It is arranged on the side. As a result, when the worker places the game board 5 temporarily on or around the front surface of the pachinko machine 1, the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. Even if it falls, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 has a distance dimension dc with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5. Even if the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 come into contact with the floor of the game hall because the cover body of the drive board box 1730 protrudes compared to the control board box 1320, the setting key Setting of switch 1311a 'The front part of the key cylinder is prevented from colliding with the floor of the game hall by securely forming a space between the floor of the game hall Rukoto can. In other words, when the operator temporarily places the game board 5 on or around the front surface of the pachinko machine 1, the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. The front side of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ does not come into contact with the floor of the game hall even if it falls down in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 in the board holder 1200 ′ (ie, in the depth direction). The length has been adjusted. In addition to the length of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-rear direction (ie, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 so that the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ does not contact the floor of the game hall. In addition, a recess is formed in the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100 to which the substrate holder 1200 ′ is attached, and the depth of the recess (the length in the front-rear direction (ie, the depth direction) when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1) is adjusted. Alternatively, the length of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 may be adjusted by the recess and the substrate holder 1200 ′.

  In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wirings for electrical connection with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558. That is, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes a non-connected wiring and is suspended from the upper part of the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row across the back of the island facilities in the game hall, the unconnected wiring is provided with various boards, various motors, various solenoids and other electric drive sources, various LEDs and various lamps. Touching the light emitting means such as a short circuit may cause a short circuit (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, many of the back cover 640 are bent at or near the front end of the unconnected wiring, and the front end of the unconnected wiring is caught by the slit 641. Since it is difficult to invade toward the back side, a short circuit (short circuit) can be prevented. In a state where the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200 ′, the rear face of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is the cover of the driving board box 1730. Since it is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension dc with respect to the rear surface of the body, even if the front end of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 via the slit 641, The front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ that is blocked by the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and cannot enter the main control board box 1320 and the tip of the unconnected wiring is provided on the setting change board 1311. Can be reliably prevented. Note that the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 are formed of a non-conductive resin.

  In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 do not contact each other and are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction. 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially parallel to each other without contacting each other.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 77 thru | or 79 etc. FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3 is operated by the player rotating the handle 111 of the handle unit 180 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game ball 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 111, and the game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail N. Thus, the flow velocity of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5 a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill that rotates by the contact of the game ball B is provided at a position between the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the warp inlet 2501. .

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) from the highest part, While coming into contact with the plurality of obstacle nails N, the region on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, the central release portion 2503a is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore the first probability is high. It is received in the start port 2002. When the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit There is a possibility that it will be received in the general winning opening 2001 of 2200, the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 or the like. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is located on the right side (upstream space above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500. Section 2511), it passes through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and is discharged above the gate portion 2003 of the center accessory 2500, After contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted above the portion 2003, the gate portion 2003 passes with a certain probability.

  The distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first distribution passage 2521 whose entrance is open in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006, and an entrance that opens to the left from the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. The second distribution passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that makes contact with the stopper 1006 (so-called right hit), it enters the first distribution passage 2521 and enters the upstream space 2511 and hits the stopper 1006. When the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not contact (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right hit), the player enters the second distribution passage 2522 with high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2511 flows through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

  On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 is guided to the right side of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted above the gate portion 2003, and the gate portion 2003 is not much moved. It passes through the right side of the gate part 2003 without passing through. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 is guided to the left from the right side of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted above the gate portion 2003, and is high. Pass through the gate part 2003 with probability.

  When the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. The closed second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2450 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal variation time has elapsed.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating reservations.

  The game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate unit 2003 is positioned at the right side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 with a very high probability due to a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate unit 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. Enter the attacker right passage 2422. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the gate part 2003 or the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the gate part 2003 is caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N that are implanted between the gate part 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to the left of the attacker right passage 2422 with a very high probability and enters the attacker left passage 2421 with a high probability.

  Note that a general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged on the left side of the attacker right passage 2422. When the game ball B is received in the general winning port 2001 and detected by the general winning port sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 comes into contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 and enters the second start port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with a high probability. It distributes on the second start door 2411. When the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 does not enter the second start opening guide shelf 2423, the game ball B enters the attacker lower right passage 2426 and is related to the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005. Without being discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the attacker left passage 2421 enters the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and circulates on the closed second start opening door 2411.

  When the game ball B enters the second start port guidance shelf 2423, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2003 is “normal hit”, and the second start port door 2411 is When in the open state, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B that has entered the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and has not been received by the second start opening 2004 is discharged to the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 side and rolls on the closed big winning opening door 2413. Later, it is discharged into the game area 5a and discharged out of the game area 5a through the out port 1008. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and the big prize opening guide shelf 2424, and the intermediate passage 2427 is open. The game ball B released from the shelf 2423 to the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 side enters the intermediate passage 2427 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without being related to the big prize winning port 2005.

  As described above, the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 does not pass through the gate part 2003 so much, so that the second start port 2004 is opened by the passage of the gate part 2003 of the game ball B. The normal lottery result is not often drawn, and the game ball B is not received much at the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability, and therefore the normal lottery result in which the second start port 2004 is opened by the passage of the gate portion 2003 of the game ball B ( “Normal hit”) is highly likely to be drawn, and there is a high possibility that the game ball B will be received at the second starting port 2004.

  For this reason, since the player performs a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511. In addition, the driving strength of the gaming ball B must be adjusted so that the gaming ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving strength at which the gaming ball B enters the second circulation passage 2522. Therefore, it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored by giving a change to the operation of driving the game ball B, and to make the player enter the operation of the game ball B to suppress the decrease in interest. Can be made.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “big hit” “)” Is generated and a lottery of a special lottery result is performed. Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). The special lottery results that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “15R big hit A”, “15R big hit B”, and the like. .

  The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball B can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130. Therefore, when the winning ball opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the winning ball opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the grand prize opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received, or the predetermined prize opening 2005 is predetermined. When any of the conditions for accepting the number of game balls B (for example, 10) is satisfied, an open / close pattern (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) that closes the game balls B in an unacceptable state, Repeat a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if it is “15R big hit”, 15 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the “big hit”, when the big winning opening 2005 is opened due to the big hit gaming state, when the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 is distributed to the second receiving opening 2008 by the sorting piece 2415, the big hit game After the state ends, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous gaming state. This ST is a time variation that changes the probability of changing the probability that a special lottery result such as “big hit” will be drawn for a predetermined number of fluctuations or the display time of an effect image that suggests the special lottery result. This is to maintain the state.

  In the present embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. For more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating reservations.

  As described above, when the special winning lot 2005 is opened by the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, the second distribution passage When the game ball B is operated to aim at the entrance of 2522, it is necessary to finely adjust the operation of the game ball B. Therefore, there is a risk that the interest in games will be reduced. However, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit right and circulated through the first circulation passage 2521, the right side of the gate portion 2003, the attacker right passage 2422, the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, the communication port 2425, and the first Since the game ball B can be distributed to the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 side (the big winning opening 2005 side) through the two start opening guiding shelves 2423, it is easy even without fine adjustment of the driving operation. The game ball B can be received into the big prize opening 2005 by the driving operation, and the player can enjoy the game in the advantageous gaming state, and the driving operation of the game ball B according to the gaming state is sharp. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2450 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a state in which each image sequence is changed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of images are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the image sequences are displayed in a variable manner. Are stopped and displayed in order, and the respective picture sequences are stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture sequences to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, 15R big hit game A, 15R big hit game B, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern string fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). And the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2450 are set to have a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect in which the unit 161 is operated. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 161 can be raised and made conspicuous by the first elevating drive motor 180a and the second elevating drive motor 182 and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 160. be able to.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, and the back first effect unit 3100 and the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. In addition, it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, etc. using the back third effect unit 3300 as appropriate, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the back first of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 according to the lottery special lottery result. Using the effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, the back third effect unit 3300, and the like as appropriate, it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like. It can be entertained and it can suppress that a player's interest in a game falls.

[8. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 111 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 123. 118 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 118, and FIG. 120 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process, FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process, and FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display process. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by initial value update type counter movement, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, setting value confirmation The display process will be described. In the following description, the main control MPU 1310a may be simply referred to as “main control MPU”.

[8-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control, special random numbers used to determine whether to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, and an initial value for hit judgment used to determine the initial value of this special random number A random number for determination, a random number for reach determination to be used for determining whether or not a reach (reach out of reach) is generated when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the second special The random display pattern random number for use in determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the symbol display, and the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when the big hit gaming state is generated For the determination of the symbol random number to be used for the determination of the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (determination of the hit type) derived and displayed on the symbol display and the initial value of this symbol random number Big hit symbol for the initial value determination random number or the like for there are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol determination to be used for determining whether or not the movable piece that can accept the game ball of the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed, and this normal symbol determination Normal value determination random number for normal symbol used for determination of initial value of random number for normal use and normal symbol for use in determination of variable display pattern of normal symbol variably displayed on normal symbol display of function display unit 1400 A random number for a variable display pattern is prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this hard random number circuit with built-in main control first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. After extracting other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another, and extracting all the values within the predetermined numerical range, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again to perform main control. Based on the clock signal input to the MPU, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number when the value is acquired from the main control built-in hard random number circuit. It is supposed to do.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The normal value determination random number for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating the normal symbol determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU when the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the power is turned on or in the main control side power-on process described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of various information as numerical values is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (at power-off). When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when they do not match, the normal value per-symbol determination initial value determination random number is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU. An initial value derivation that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that takes out the ID code from the counter and updates the random number for determination per normal symbol based on the extracted ID code Run the physical, fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination is derived by using the ID code, and is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process is performed when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a two-stage security measure, which is a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU, and the extracted ID code is used as an initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the counter value that is obtained illegally and updates the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are attached, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU ′ provided in the other game board 5 ′. That is, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is not useful at all on the other game board 5 ', that is, the other pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure occurs at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 at every predetermined interval, the movable ball can be opened and closed and the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. A gaming state cannot be generated.

[8-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to. This indicates the address accumulated on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). The main control built-in RAM can be updated by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clear process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, a power failure notification signal is input as a power failure notification from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S14). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch) that also has three functions, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM here. It operates as a function of a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information. In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM is not cleared when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated is HI. If the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is LOW, the RAM clearing is determined. It is determined to be performed, and it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. It should be noted that since it is extremely short in the period from the start of the main control-side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, in practice, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. The operator operates the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

  When determining in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 0 (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (that is, a main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, and game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) This flag indicates whether or not various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter is to be deleted, and is set to a value of 1 when deleting various information and a value of 0 when not deleting various information. . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts a setting key into the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a is set when the setting key cylinder is turned ON by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a). The key is turned on, and based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. It should be noted that since it is extremely short in the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18, the person who actually turns on the setting key switch 1311a is After the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  In the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and sets the key switch according to the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or a signal for setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area described later). This is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change or confirmation display of setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time when is turned ON, and setting change or confirmation of setting value A value 1 is set when display is permitted, and a value 0 is set when setting change of setting value and confirmation display are not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. When the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. ) Can receive various commands.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. In step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is an input of a power failure warning signal, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S24 again and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  If the main control MPU determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is not input, whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 or not. Is determined (step S25). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1, the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

  When the main control MPU determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG does not have a value of 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1. In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). Although the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied. It is determined that various types of information are to be deleted as in the case where a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied.

  When the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 0, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0. In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 1 (step S27). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1, the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. judge.

  In step S27, the main control MPU establishes a predetermined set value display permission condition, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the set key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. If it is determined that there is, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this setting value confirmation display process, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

  Subsequent to step S28 or in the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 1 (RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG Is determined to be 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0), a checksum is calculated (step S29). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S29, the main control MPU sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) to the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S29 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When it is (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally, an error display process is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power is turned on again. The error display process will be described in detail later. However, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is shut off. If the determination is made, an error message indicating that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Note that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). After turning on by turning 60 degrees clockwise, turning on the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, this routine is executed again. A certain main control side power-on process is started. In step S14 described above, the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and in step S16A described above, sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. At the same time, in the determination in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined based on the setting key ON signal. Is set to ON and the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above. Therefore, in the determination in step S25 described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value. 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 1, It is determined that the set value change permission condition has been established, and after the setting change process in step S37, which will be described later, in a process in step S38, which will be described later, a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. By clearing it, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and advance the game (hereinafter referred to as “first RAM error canceling method”).

  As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off and the setting key cylinder remains in the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on process which is this routine is started again. In step S14 described above, the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and in step S16A described above, sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. On the other hand, in the above-described step S18, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key is turned on by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the switch 1311a is not set to ON and the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20B described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is determined in step S26 described above. Is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 That is, the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, but it is determined that various information is erased as in the case where the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, and the main control is performed in the process of step S38 described later. By clearing all areas of the built-in RAM except for a specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter referred to as “second RAM error canceling method”). .

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, an error display in step S33 is performed, and the main control built-in RAM In order to notify that there is an abnormality in the content stored in (or cannot be trusted), two cancellation methods, a first RAM error cancellation method and a second RAM error cancellation method It can be done by. As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method using the RWM clear button 633z.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has ended normally, the main control MPU has a built-in main control at the time of power recovery. A RAM work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from a ROM (that is, main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU proceeds with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which the power is turned on after being turned off, a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and an unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person at the base of the arm). A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high-frequency output device) and the main control MPU itself is reset and then restored is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process described later is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If a value of 1 is not set in FLG, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 1, that is, a predetermined set value change. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, a setting change process is performed (step S37). This setting change process will be described in detail later, but is performed based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch) that also has three functions. Here, the setting switch for selecting and switching the setting value Acts as a button function. Each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a signal to that effect (setting value selection switching signal) is input, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a When the setting key cylinder is turned off from the ON operation, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU. .

  In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 0, that is, predetermined. If the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, but it is determined that various types of information are to be erased as in the case where the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, the specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. (Step S38). Here, the main control MPU is performed by writing the value 0 into a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the main control built-in RAM always ends when the setting change processing is terminated. The predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is excluded (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (the area excluding the specific area of all the main control built-in RAM)) is cleared. Here, the “specific area” is a count of the number of game balls collected by the set value dedicated area in which the set value is stored and the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5 a formed in the game board 5. And a dedicated area for counting out balls, in which results (total number) are stored. The setting value exclusive area stores setting values that are changed in the setting changing process described later, and the out ball counting exclusive area is a game ball collected by the out port 1008 that is counted in the ball counting process described later. The count result (total number) of numbers is stored.

  The main control MPU may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Also, the main control MPU is a logic of a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. Is a command to clear the RAM, when various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU is stored. A unique ID code stored in advance is taken out, and an initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determination per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code is performed. The fixed value is set to the normal value determination random number for normal symbol determination to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for normal symbol determination described above. Tosuru.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. In addition, the main control MPU proceeds with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU”) for setting an initial value in the main control built-in WDT for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU is operating normally. The timer setting value is set in the “WDT control register”), the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time until the main control MPU is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register (incorporated in the main control MPU) reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and time counting is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 are incorporated in the main control MPU. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control (step S48). Here, out of various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state is used. The setting such as latching and acquisition is performed, and activation of the hard random number circuit with built-in main control is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at a high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Once all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. The other values are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM transmission information storage area To remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various commands are read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored. is there. In such a case, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning voltage as described above. The The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If the main control MPU determines in step S54 that there is no power failure warning signal input, it performs non-winning random number update processing (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If this power failure warning signal has not been input, non-winning random number update processing is performed in step S56. Step S54 to step S56 are repeated. The processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including game information and other information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S12 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signals output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, and the like (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). The checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG, as described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU performs a RAM access prohibition setting (step S68). Since the RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. If the control cannot be performed, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on process again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off process. For this reason, when the main control MPU is forcedly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and again executes the main control-side power-on process. . In other words, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the main control side power-off process at the time of power-off and the checksum calculated in step S29 when a forced reset is applied by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a check sum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be completely erased (cleared).

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when a power failure occurs or is momentarily stopped, and this main control side power-on process is performed by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is normally terminated. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Further, in the determination in step S25, it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1. If so, the setting change process of step S37 is performed, and in the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for the specific area. In the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL -When FLG is value 1 and setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 0, that is, a predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, but a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied If it is determined that various types of information are to be deleted in the same manner as in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is identified in step S38. With the exception of the band to completely erase (clear). As described above, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is changed. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing, the main value can be changed even if the setting value can be changed and determined (when the main control MPU performs the setting change process). The control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 Is in a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a state in which the probability variation (probability variation) is reached), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information described above before the next business start. Therefore, an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall needs to turn on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch. In addition, when the setting value is determined to be changed, the setting value obtained by the setting value before the setting changing process is obtained even when the current setting value is maintained when the setting changing process is performed. It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current setting value in addition to changing the setting value. Only possession is allowed and limited to 2-3 people. In the present embodiment, even if the setting value is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, an attendant such as a game hall clerk erases (clears) the game backup information. When the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch when it is necessary to turn on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the game backup information is mainly stored. It can be erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, the problem in the case where it is not determined whether or not there is a power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, the problem in the case where the process after step S26 is promoted after the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described.

  As described above, when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is charged. It is applied as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous power failure. In other words, even when the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island of the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power supply to the facility is cut off until a time of about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the island facilities of the game hall In the case where the power supply from is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, a waiting time until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set.) When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs immediately before reaching the waiting time, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the electric charge charged to is applied as DC +5 V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, whereby the main control side described later Even if timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-on processing is performed. It is kicking it may not be able to complete processing upon the main control side power-off. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of power recovery this time, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or power failure. If the value calculated in the checksum based on the content of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, all of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch at the time of power recovery, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated by a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall and the game is called RAM clear. There is a problem in that the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no indication by a staff member such as a hall clerk.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. This prevents the game from progressing. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the game cannot proceed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation value stored in step S64. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and stored immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) by the progress of this game are supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, by supplying the power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2. Step that is backup processing for storing various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power-off process composed of the process of 58 to step S68 and the infinite loop, the main control MPU of the main control MPU When the computer is restarted, it is determined that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation value stored in step S64). Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and stored immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby allowing the contents of the main control built-in RAM to be reset. The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. In other words, in this embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the island facility in the game hall is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure. The charge charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the MPU, as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, in the case where the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure notification signal is input, the process returns to the determination in step S24 again. As long as it remains input power failure warning signal, by repeating the determination of the step S24, so as not be able to perform the progress of a game.

  By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the step after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is performed in step S52. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) are determined by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting and starting main control timer interruption processing described later. The system adopts a mechanism capable of avoiding updating various information) including information indicating the value of the counter for use. Thus, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment in the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) The various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for the counter), etc.) is completely covered by software so that the main control side power-off process is reliably completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and By configuring it in two parts, such as various pieces of information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter), etc., so that it is not changed at all. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are reliably prevented from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize ball information output at power-on are created and main control is built in as transmission information Store in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405. Here, first, a problem in the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starter solenoid 2404 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, A problem will be described in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in the power-on main control return destination command is not performed in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs main control in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored, so that the attacker solenoid 2405 starts to be driven and the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes. It will transfer from the state closed by the member to the open state.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the That is, for example, a main winning board 1 count display command for transmitting the number of gaming balls that are detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 when the gaming ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 is displayed on the main control board. Even if 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the short time state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it cannot be displayed at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2405 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. The main prize-winning port 1 closing display command for instructing that the state shifts from the existing state to the closed state (that is, closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100 starts during the round) is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round of the big hit gaming state (the fifth round), the attack solenoid 2405 starts to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening / closing member. To move to the current state (that is, the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the fifth round of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time reduction state, and displays it on the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, a screen (for example, a player indicating that the movable piece is open) that indicates that the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. When the peripheral control board 1510 performs display control on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start opening solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece, thereby the second start opening. When an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs while 2004 is open, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored to start driving the start port solenoid 2404 and close the movable piece. So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Thereafter, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to convey in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004). There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game he played.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers power, and then the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on A counter notification command for main prize ball number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2405 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the state closed by the opening / closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be informed of the transition to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the player is in the big hit gaming state and the attacker solenoid 2 A screen that informs that the winning prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member by starting the drive of 05 (for example, “It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. The game ball is inserted into the big winning opening. The screen that tells the player the message “Please play the game to play a ball” is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine will receive the grand prize opening 2005 after power is restored. In the above example, for example, a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 becomes advantageous to the player. When a power failure occurs after a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, driving of the start port solenoid 2404 is started to open the movable piece as a return destination of the main control board 1310. Screen indicating that the second starting port 2004 is open (for example, “A movable piece is open. Please play a game so that a game ball enters the second starting port.” Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine enters the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. A game of making a ball can be instructed.

  Thereby, when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers power, and then the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S29 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S29, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched and are always cleared in step S38 except for the specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Thereby, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating a counter notification command for output determination and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In these main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands are first sent a power-on state command, followed by a power-on main control return destination command, followed by a power-on main prize ball number. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, the power-on state command is an RWM clear button on the payout control board 633 when power is turned on (including when power is restored and when power is restored by power failure or instantaneous power failure). When the 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, Including power recovery and power recovery after a power outage or short interruption)), any of the low probability short time state, high probability short time state, low probability non time short state, and high probability non time short state Information indicating whether to return in the state (probability and short time state) and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), What kind of game specifications (for example, when the probability variation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of special symbol variations (for example, 30 times or 70 times) ), It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine) or the like that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of being played.

  In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker on the production line can select the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). The main control board for the one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among a plurality of types of works is lost or it is not known whether the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the comic F), although the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line to manufacture 1310. There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line.

  For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 corresponding to the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, an operator of the manufacturing line can use the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which copyright of the produced main control board 1310 belongs to, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs when probability fluctuation occurs).

  As a result, when the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. While 1310 is mixed, it is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, an operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreases.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is included. In step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for main prize ball number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs.

  Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[8-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control timer interruption process is repeated every interruption period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 118 and 119.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 120 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing is changed to the second register bank. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmitted in addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol and normal electric symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process described later. Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, or from the second starting opening sensor 2402. , Detection signal from the winning prize sensor 2403, detection signal from the out sensor 3032, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 Signal (This signal from the RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control timer interrupt processing which is this routine, and may be masked to omit reading), the door frame opening switch 4a A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the award ball control process described below is read, and input information of the main control built-in RAM as input information Store in the storage area. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2101 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are read, the start port winning command classified into the other corresponding to this is transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2101, a corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start port sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal, a corresponding start opening command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in a state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal process). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs), each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether or not there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that do not match the result are treated as if there is no game ball entering or the input is ignored.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal process) is performed for the first to third times. Reading twice, that is, reading twice compared for the second time and the second reading compared for the second time to the fourth time, thereby avoiding false detection due to the influence of chattering or noise. Since it is made possible, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, Detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the out mouth sensor 3032, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3005, detection from the vibration sensor 3005 Signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (The signal from the RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, so it is masked and read. ), A detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process to be described later It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that notifies the control board 633 that it has been normally received.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal failure monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have been subjected to the empty terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as a vacant terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is whether or not the logic state of the input terminal subjected to the empty terminal process among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal that has been subjected to the empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is classified into a notification display informing that a fault has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. Are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number that is updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the design random number is a random number related to the winning determination (winning determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter is incremented. Note that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination and the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determination per ordinary symbol is an initial value updating type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The normal value is determined from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random numbers for normal symbol determination, the winning determination initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update processing. The normal value determination random number for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating the normal symbol determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are set in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning random number update process and the winning random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. However, each time an interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol Also, a mechanism for updating the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU performs a ball count process (step S107). In this ball count process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the outlet sensor 3032 is input to the game area 5a which is partitioned into the game board 5 When the out-port sensor 3032 detects a game ball collected by the provided out-port 1008, the value 1 is added to the value of the collected-ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the out-port 1008. Perform (increment) operation. The main control MPU sets the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 in the out ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to storing, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, the main control MPU creates a ball collection command to notify that when the value of the collection ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches ten. And stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. The main control MPU, when the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 65535) and further adds (increments) the value of the collection ball counter by 1 to the collection ball counter. The counter value overflows to the value 0, and an operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 Or create a self-check command to confirm the connection state between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command or self-check command is transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls. Therefore, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey the fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or the prize ball When a payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. Created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process in step S108, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on this input information. In order to notify that, a main prize ball number information output command classified into others is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is obtained by reading the input information from the input information storage area described above and based on this input information, that is, the general winning port 2001 and the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5. Based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports (hereinafter referred to as “various winning ports provided on the game board 5”) such as the second starting port 2004 and the large winning port 2005, etc. The number of game balls to be released is counted, and is stored and updated in the award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number is 10 When the number of game balls is over (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to convey the fact, and as transmission information The award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of balls exceeding the value is used as the main prize ball number information output determination counter value. It is adapted to store update.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU reformats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error canceling navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, although the second start port 2411 is not in the open state, the second start port 2004 has entered the game ball B or the grand prize port door 2413 is not in the open state. First, it is checked whether there is an abnormal state related to the prize ball, such as a game ball B entering the big prize opening 2005. Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormal state related to the prize ball has occurred in the fraud detection process, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is used. Thus, the main control MPU outputs a security signal, which can contribute to an attendant such as a game hall clerk being able to find an abnormal state related to a prize ball at an early stage. Note that the security signal that is output when it is determined that an abnormal condition related to the prize ball has occurred is a security signal that is output when it is determined that a magnet is to be described later, or a vibration that is described later. This is the same signal as the security signal that is output when it is determined that the goto has been performed. In addition, the security signal is output by the main control MPU to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633. However, after the main control MPU sends a command to output the security signal to the payout control board 633, the payout control MPU sends the command to the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633. A security signal may be output to the hall computer installed in the computer.

  Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, the fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as “magnet goto”). And the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by 1 (incremented). The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that magnet got is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. When the RAM is cleared, the initial value is obtained. The value 0 (zero) is set as follows. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is an interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control timer interrupt process) .), A magnet gossip notification command classified into a notification display that informs that magnet got is performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a magnet is being performed in the fraud detection process, the main computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is When the control MPU outputs a security signal, it is possible to contribute to the fact that an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall can find the magnet goto at an early stage.

  Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the input information is read from the input information storage area and the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input, the fraudulent act due to vibration (hereinafter referred to as “vibration goto”). And the value of the vibration goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment). The value of the vibration goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that the vibration goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. When the RAM is cleared, the initial value is obtained. As a result, the value 0 (zero) is set. When the value of the vibration goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control timer interrupt process) .), A vibration goto notification command classified into a notification display that informs that vibration goto is being performed is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the vibration is performed in the fraud detection process, the main computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is When the control MPU outputs a security signal, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall can find the vibration got at an early stage.

  Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, for example, when input information is read from the input information storage area described above and a detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403 is input when the big hit gaming state is not set (big prize opening) In the case of an occurrence of a big prize opening abnormal winning (such as when a game ball enters in 2005), a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. .

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, when a magnet goat and / or a vibration goto is detected, a value 1 is set to the cheating detection flag FD-FLG as a fraud detection, while the magnet goat and the vibration goto are set. If not detected, a fraudulent act detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0 as a fraudulent act is not detected. The fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, a value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Also, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning prize opening, a value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launch of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines, based on the value of the above-described fraud detection flag FD-FLG, that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is 0, that is, that no fraud has been detected. Sometimes it is set to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above, while when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud When it is determined that the detection is detected, the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the launch permission logic is set as the logic of the launch permission signal, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. It should be noted that the logic of the firing permission signal is determined by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic is set as an initial value (default). Although it is configured, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after power is restored), it is set to the firing permission logic.

  Subsequent to step S113, the main control MPU performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is outputted to the main random number circuit with built-in main control, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main random number circuit with built-in main control when the latch signal is inputted, Obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the control MPU, and the obtained random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit) It is determined whether or not a game state is to be generated (referred to as “special lottery”)), or a counter value for updating the design random number is extracted and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type or the small hit type. It is determined (determined the hit type) whether or not the hit type determination value matches.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 2101, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2402. If it is based on the above, a variety of commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variation display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variation display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so that the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Also, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when a big hit gaming state is entered, various commands classified as jackpot related (a big hit opening command, a big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, a big winning opening 1 closing display command, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open / close the opening / closing member When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400 The lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp is turned on so that the round indicator lamp is lit. The power is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 15 times, the lighting signal to the 15 round display lamp is turned on so that the 15 round display lamp of the round display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on or off the occurrence of a short time in a predetermined color. Or stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on the input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the counter value for updating the above-described normal symbol determination random number is extracted and the main control is incorporated as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning prize information storage area of the RAM.

  The normal winning opening information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (four sections), and the normal winning opening is in order of the 0th section, the first section, the second section, and the third section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening is displayed. The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

  The information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening information is set, the normal winning opening information in the first section of the normal winning opening information storage is stored in the second section of the ordinary winning opening information storage in the second section of the normal winning opening information storage. The normal winning slot winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening prize information storage, and the ordinary winning slot winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening prize information storage is in the second section of the normal winning opening prize information storage, respectively. The third section of the normal winning opening prize information storage is shifted to an empty area. For example, when the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first to second sections of the normal winning slot winning information storage, the normal winning slot winning information in the first winning section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning prize. In the 0th section of the mouth winning information storage, the ordinary winning mouth winning information in the second section of the ordinary winning mouth winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning mouth winning information storage, respectively. The second section and the third section of the normal winning opening winning prize information storage are vacant areas. Here, when the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is set as a holding ball and the normal display of the function display unit 1400 Based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information, the output of the lighting signal of the normal holding indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on the holding indicator, and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Following the normal winning award winning process, the normal winning award winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol is extracted from the read out the normal winning award winning information and main control is performed. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is to be opened and closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, when the movable piece is in the opened state, it becomes a gaming state in which a game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is achieved. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol taken out matches the judgment value per ordinary symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect production are created and transmitted. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above, while the extracted normal When the random number for symbol determination per symbol does not coincide with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. , Create various commands that are classified as related to the usual map synchronization production, and store it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as output information To remember. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of normal winning) is ½.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. Or a drive signal is output to the starter solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece when the game is in the big hit game state. 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, start opening prize information Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633, and the launch permission logic Is a base monitor that outputs a firing permission signal set in the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633 and displays a count result (total number) of game balls collected by the out port 1008 A display signal is output to 1310h, and a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g is output.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, classified as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, and classified as related to the jackpot. Various commands to be executed (for example, a winning prize 1 count display command corresponding to a winning prize count command based on a detection signal from the winning prize sensor 2403 when a game ball having entered the winning prize opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effects, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric character effects, various commands categorized as notification displays, various types categorized as status displays Commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as other (for example, the main control board 1310 is provided in the game board 5. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls that have entered the various winning openings, the main prize ball number information output signal is sent to the outside as the main prize ball number information. The main prize ball number information output command for instructing transmission to the hall computer via the terminal board 558 and various commands classified into specific histories (for example, the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008) A ball collection command that reports that every time 10 balls are reached, a setting change command that reports that the setting value has been changed, or something that is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) stored in the main control built-in RAM An error display command that informs the user that the setting value is stored, and a setting value that conveys that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area (to be described later) in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed. Sure display command, etc.) are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, various commands are configured as main peripheral serial data, and are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, as DC +5 V when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the main control MPU must at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial manager and complete transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register. Can be done. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure after the power is turned on, this is transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. In the reservation setting of the command to be performed, in order to notify that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial data is composed of the power-on state command in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The status, mode, and sum value that are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and then constitute the main control return destination command when the power is turned on Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read out from the game backup information in accordance with the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  When the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 each time a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the received ball For each collection command, the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and ball collection information (counted value (that is, collected at the out port 1008 is stored) in a built-in RAM of a real time clock IC (not shown). The total number of game balls to be updated) and the updated date and time) are updated. Note that if the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the game hall business hours end without receiving the ball collection command, the last counted value (that is, the game ball collected at the outlet 1008). Sphere collection information in which the total number of spheres) is associated with the updated date and time is stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall is opened, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 has started the ball collection information stored and held in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the day, and the ball collection information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as the ball collection history information. The counted value stored and held as the ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be a value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. You may use both the counted value and the sum total of the counted value so far.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is started again, so that the main control MPU is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 stores the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be completed by executing the process. At the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, a power-on main control return destination command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 which are electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine. Be able to. That is, the main control board 1310 uses the main control built-in RAM of step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 118 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. In the setting of the work area, a power-on state command classified as power-on in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, configure the power-on status command as the main peripheral serial data. Send to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then send to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value constituting the main control return destination command at power-on, Subsequently, the main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and thumb value.

  For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to display effects. As a result, when a player is playing a game, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. Since the display of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, that is, in a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the player has failed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  Also, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process shown, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for the specific area. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the process shown in FIG. 119, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed, the power-on state command classified as the power-on. When the power is turned on, a main control return destination command at power-on and a main notification ball count information output judgment counter notification command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As peripheral serial data, configure the power-on status command, send it to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, then configure the power-on main control return destination command, Status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process, followed by the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command when the power is turned on. Status, mode, and sum value In order, it transmits to the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[8-4. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 121 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When this set value is acquired, it may be read out or extracted, but when the set value is extracted, the extracted set value is set in a predetermined area.

  Subsequent to step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates various values stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the sum, and the checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the same process as the calculation of.

  Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG includes game control information such as various information, a checksum value (sum value), and a backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the data is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not normally completed. Is done.

  When the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When the value is 0, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the “normal range” is a value whose setting value can be changed. In this embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. When the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is turned off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU acquires the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is the normal range. It is determined whether or not any of the values is within the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S208 that it is not within the normal range, it sets the setting value 1 that is the initial value for the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, any one of the setting values 1 to 6 in which the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is the normal range. However, the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, that the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally. In some cases, the process proceeds to step S210, and the setting value 1 that is the initial value may be set with respect to the setting value acquired in step S200. .

  In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main control-side power-off process has ended normally, or in the determination in step S208. When it is determined that the MPU is in the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

  Subsequent to step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g and displays the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

  Subsequent to step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S216). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch) that also has three functions. Here, the setting switch for selecting and switching the setting value Acts as a button function. This determination is made by reading a signal (setting value selection switching signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated, and from the setting value setting change signal from the RWM clear button 633z. It is determined whether a detection signal is input. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the selection switching signal of the set value from the RWM clear button 633z is input, while the set value from the RWM clear button 633z is When the selection switching signal is not input, it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated.

  When the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the main control MPU performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update (step S218). ). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set to.

  Subsequent to step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g and updates the setting indicator 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

  Subsequent to step S220 or in the determination in step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting key is turned OFF. Is determined (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and sets the initial position (that is, the setting key) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the switch 1311a is turned OFF, and an OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, the setting key is OFF. It is determined that it has not been operated.

  In the determination in step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key is not turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S216 again and determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. . In step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, performs the determination of step S222, and sets the key. When it is determined that is not operated, the process returns to the determination in step S216 again. When the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated until the setting key is operated, the set value is changed every time the operation is performed. The value is incremented by 1 and updated and displayed on the setting display 1310g. If the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed. Displayed on the container 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored until it is determined in step S222 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the setting value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure is the main value. Since it is not stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the control built-in RAM, it is discarded and the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S222 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU stores the updated setting value in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area Therefore, the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After completion of the processing in step S224, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and power is restored, the set value updated when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Are stored in a set value dedicated area in the specific area.

  Subsequent to step S224, the main control MPU stops the output of the lighting signal for displaying the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g and updates the setting indicator 1310g. Is not displayed (step S228).

  Subsequent to step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

  Subsequent to step S230, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, this setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. This is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change or confirmation display of setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time point), and to perform setting change or confirmation display of the setting value. The value is set to 1 when permitting, and is set to 0 when not permitting the setting change or confirmation display of the set value. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG, setting change of the setting value and confirmation display are not permitted thereafter.

  Subsequent to step S232, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as that determined in step S208. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. In the determination in step S233, the main control MPU reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value. In step S224, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is normal. It is determined whether or not the value is any one of the set value 1 to the set value 6, which is a range. When it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  In step S233, when determining that the main control MPU is within the normal range, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S234), and subsequently creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, a peripheral control board transmission command transmission process is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 119. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interruption processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44. The peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral serial data. This is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by a setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the completion of setting value storage. When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, the peripheral control MPU updates the setting value history information (information in which the setting value is associated with the date and time) stored and held in a built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown).

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S233 that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power is turned on again. The error display process will be described in detail later. However, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is shut off. If the determination is made, an error message indicating that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[8-5. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 122 (step S350). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S350, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S350 is within a normal range (step S352). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 137. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting The values up to value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are preset. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, in order to reconfirm that the set value is acquired in step S350 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). Is determined to be one of the set values 1 to 6 within the normal range, and when it is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is. To do.

  When the main control MPU determines in step S352 that it is in the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S354).

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S352 that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S356) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power is turned on again. The error display process will be described in detail later. However, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is shut off. If the determination is made, an error message indicating that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Subsequent to step S354, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is a setting key OFF operation (step S358). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and sets the initial position (that is, the setting key) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder which turns the switch 1311a OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by turning OFF the setting key cylinder. Based on the OFF signal from 1311a, when the OFF signal from setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while the OFF signal from setting key switch 1311a is input. If not, the setting key is turned off. It determined not to have.

  If the main control MPU determines in step S358 that the setting key is not turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to step S358 again and repeats the determination in step S358 until the setting key is turned OFF.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S358 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU displays the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The output is stopped and the acquired set value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S360).

  Subsequent to step S360, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S361). As described above, this setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. This is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change or confirmation display of setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time point), and to perform setting change or confirmation display of the setting value. The value is set to 1 when permitting, and is set to 0 when not permitting the setting change or confirmation display of the set value. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG, setting change of the setting value and confirmation display are not permitted thereafter.

  Subsequent to step S361, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S362), then creates a set value confirmation display command and sets transmission information (step S364), and then in step S364. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the set transmission information (set value confirmation display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S366), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S362 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 119, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S366 is shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interruption processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S362, the transmission information (setting value confirmation display command) set in step S364 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S366 is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This is done before reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to give priority to the peripheral control board 1510 by the setting value confirmation display command that the confirmation of the setting value has been completed. The set value confirmation display command indicates that the set value confirmation display process as this routine has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). ).

[8-6. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 118 (FIG. 121). ) In step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 118, and in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118 (step S356 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 122). It is the process performed in.

  When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 123 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal notifies the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launch of the game ball B is permitted. When the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch permission signal is fired. Can be informed that the launch is permitted, while if the logic is set to the launch stop logic (the launch non-permission logic) that is the reverse of the launch permission logic, the launch can be stopped (not permitted). .

  The error display process which is this routine is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process illustrated in FIG. 121) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process illustrated in FIG. 118 (specifically, the process illustrated in FIG. 122). The main control MPU can perform the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 119. Therefore, the main control timer interrupt processing shown in Fig. 120 can be performed. , It is impossible to perform firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the fire permission logic.

  Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. One process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 121) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118 (specifically, When the main control MPU is started as step S356 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 122), after the power is restored in step S400, the error display process which is this routine is started. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired, It is set to fire stop logic logic (firing unauthorized logic) to the fire control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 via the reset function main control output circuit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port.

  Subsequent to step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g and displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

  Subsequent to step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

  Subsequent to step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

  The serial communication initial setting in step S406 includes the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 121, the serial communication initial setting in step S362 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 122, and FIG. This is the same processing as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the same as that in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. Control board transmission command transmission process, peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S366 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 122, and peripheral control board transmission in step S120 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. It is the same processing as command transmission processingThe error display process that is this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118 (FIG. 121). When the processing is started and terminated as the processing performed in step S356 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 122 and the processing performed in step S356 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. By this infinite loop, the state where the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the serial communication initial setting in step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is used as the main peripheral serial data. 1510.

  The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it displays error display history information (information in which the error display command is associated with the received date and time) stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). Update.

  Further, when the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, a white background “RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant” in the blue background image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to performing control to display the message image of characters, the volume adjusted by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510 with the announcement “RAM error has occurred. Regardless of the level, the sound is forced to be set to the maximum volume and controlled from various speakers. The process of performing the RAM error notification by the error display command is the process having the highest priority. When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command to transmit another error and receives the error display command, the RAM error notification is performed. Is given the highest priority.

[9. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 161 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the payout control unit is turned on. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the continuation of processing when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 124. FIG. 126 is a payout control unit following FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[9-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIGS. 124 to 126 under the control of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. . When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is used to set the priority order of interrupts of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU performs the wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated (step S512). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch) that also has three functions. Here, the RWM clear button 633z is stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM. It operates as a function of a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information. In this determination, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is HI, it is determined that the RAM is not cleared and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z While it is determined that the RWM clear button 633z is operated, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared, and the RWM clear button 633z It determines with the press operation part being operated.

  In the determination in step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (that is, a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prize ball information storage area) The logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. This is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information relating to payout of the PRDY signal output setting information and the like to be deleted is set, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is deleted and a value of 0 when the payout information is not deleted. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete the payout information (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches a checksum value stored in a payout control unit power-off process (power-off) described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  In the determination in step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has ended normally, the payout control built-in RAM is set as the power recovery. Is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the sphere stock number PBS, the real sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “recovery” includes not only the state in which the power is turned off but also the state in which the power is turned on, but also the state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines that when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to delete the payout information, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination in step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs an interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as the power failure warning voltage when the voltage is lower than the power failure warning voltage. Is done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  In the determination at step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that the power failure warning signal is not input, it determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. The value is 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and 1 when the time has not elapsed 1 ms. Is set.

  In the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

  On the other hand, in the determination at step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control MPU sets a value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for indicating that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 (award ball command and self-check command) have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as driving information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 and LED display information displayed on the error LED display is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. The number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal. In or (embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided. The number of game balls that have been paid out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later. Is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the payout.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The value is added to the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process in step S550 described later, and the stored value is updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 has reached 10 balls, an award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (in this case, the number of balls exceeding the number is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and a display signal is output to the error LED display.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error release switch, it becomes an error release signal for notifying that the error displayed on the error LED display has been released). Detection signal from blade rotation detection sensor 590, detection signal from payout detection sensor 591, detection signal from full tank detection sensor 154, BRQ signal from CR unit, BRDY signal and CR connection signal, transmitted by command transmission processing described later The main payment board ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands have been normally received is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, a ball bite determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball bite state is generated by the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout vane 589 is not performed, and the determination condition is set when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual number It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that are not consistent with the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 are repeatedly paid out. At that time, the time management of the inconsistency counter reset determination time set with the determination condition is performed. For example, when the ball scratch determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the ball scratch determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gummy judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit, and when the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, the payout control MPU performs a momentary power failure or power failure. Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery By restoring the values to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as the payout backup information, The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery. With wear, so that it is possible to continue to do the payout of the game ball.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of various signal exchanges between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball play operation determination setting process, For example, if you are not communicating with the CR unit, you can pay for a rental ball The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thereby, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU at the next timer interruption from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power failure, the state is restored at the time of power recovery, so it is extremely early after power recovery. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, and the payout device 580 is supplied to the CR unit. It can be said that the game ball payout operation by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless rental request signal from the CR unit, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the port connection process in step S550 reads the CR connection signal from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, a pachinko machine. When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, in order to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is possible, PRDY When the logic state of the signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, it is informed that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible. For the outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW to CR unit. Note that the logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information. A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and ball break check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the above-described lower ball 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154. The number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the above-described ball guide unit 570 based on the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the game ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored is full is determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms, from the full tank detection sensor 154 in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process. When the detection signal is ON, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the last full (2 ms before) full and ball check check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the time for the full tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and ball shortage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information for notifying that the game ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored is full is stored in the state information storage area described above. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full information that informs the player that the lower tray 202 is not full is stored in the state information storage area area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interrupt period 2 ms. When the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms) full and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 574 is When transitioning from OFF to ON, the above-described ball breakage determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and ball break check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and that the ball is out of notification. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. The ball break information that informs that is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball gambling are performed, a retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area described above. To do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area, and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this ball piece information, it corresponds. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error canceling navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays based on the various information are created. To the main control board 1310. For example, when the piece of ball information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is determined when the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the piece of ball information. A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control MPU sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S540, and this power failure warning If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552. In step S554, the timer update process is performed. In step S556, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed. In step S558, a command reception process is performed. In step S560, a command analysis process is performed. In step S562, a main operation setting process is performed. Display data creation processing is performed, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU ensures the processing time so that other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU has received a power failure notice signal, the payout control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control MPU stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in this order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Note that the processing of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs a payout control unit power-on process upon power recovery thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal. In step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[9-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interruption process is repeatedly performed at every interruption period (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 124 to 126.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 127 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 161 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 132. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 130 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 131 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on a single semiconductor chip.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 128 under the control of the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting processing, processing for initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, processing for determining hot start / cold start, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, processing for transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in a very short time. Can be As a result, the peripheral control MPU enters a state in which interrupt permission is set. For example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the peripheral control MPU outputs commands from the main control board 1310 and pachinko machines related to control of game effects. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the peripheral control MPU performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current control information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Set calendar information and current time information.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. The peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the peripheral control MPU sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU to notify that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the peripheral control MPU can be received. A value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1006 again to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. Is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  In step S1006, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady process is to be executed, the peripheral control MPU first sets a value 1 in the steady process flag SP-FLG. Is set (step S1008). This steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the peripheral control MPU performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process to be described later is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the peripheral control MPU performs a presentation operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, and a press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. Based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382, the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and Various information obtained by operating the press operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and press operation) Rotation based on the RAM of the peripheral control MPU to which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set) Monitoring the presence or absence of an operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the work 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the rendering operation unit information acquisition process, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is set according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the production progresses with the adjusted volume and brightness.

  The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, based on a lamp pallet setting table composed of a specified luminance value, a normal pallet value, and a special pallet value, the luminance of the LED used as direct light, and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light, Set each. While the performance is in progress, the lamp palette setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the performance operation section 301 (the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303) to perform the first operation. When one luminance designation value ranging from the luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance is set, the above-described floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so as to become the set luminance designation value. The key information can be updated.

  Here, the brightness designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. The specified luminance value may be set to one specified luminance value in a 32-step range from the 0th (zero) specified luminance value that is the minimum luminance (off) to the 31st specified luminance value that is the maximum luminance. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. A player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable operation operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303), and the 31st luminance that becomes the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. One luminance designation value can be set up to the designated value.

  For example, a player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the clockwise direction, and the current luminance is temporarily set to the minimum luminance (lights off). When the first luminance designated value is set to the next highest luminance level after the value, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear) from the first luminance designated value toward the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance is set. The brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light change along the tone curve or the spline curve tone curve), while the rotation operation unit 302 is turned off. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness when rotating clockwise, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness) toward the first brightness specified value (for example, Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When a player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined. In the present embodiment, a case where a player (or a staff member of a game hall clerk, etc.) can set the brightness during the production is prepared in advance, and at this time, the player (or a game hall clerk) Etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when a player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the effect, the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance are obtained. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate the desired brightness of the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) as an image. It can be done. In the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

  Normally, the palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. is there. As the normal pallet value, one of the 17 levels is selected in steps of 5% from the minimum pallet value (20%) which is the minimum value to the maximum pallet value (100%) which is the maximum value. A mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve) in which a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation is predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is a designated value. , Or a spline-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is the luminance designated value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance designated value, which is the luminance designated value described above. Of the 32-step range extending to the 31st luminance specification value, the value is the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance specification.

  In this embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance as the normal pallet value for various decorative boards provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. Among various decorative boards that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and are provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light, a palette for a specific decorative board (LED that feels dazzling to the player) (not shown) A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

  In the special palette value, the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light is set as the gradation information described above. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32-level ranges from the 0th (zero) luminance specified value to the 31st luminance specified value, which are the luminance specified values described above. A palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the gradation information described above along a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is the same as that of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize a state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value at the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value at which the minimum luminance (light extinction) is obtained. The lowest possible brightness is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. While being set along the normal palette value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) rotates the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set in accordance with a special palette value corresponding to the luminance designation value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, as direct light, The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value at the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value at which the minimum brightness (lights off) is set), and this is linked. Thus, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest luminance (that is, the first luminance designated value at the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value at which the minimum luminance is turned off). However, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  Moreover, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode associated with the flow of production is set, and the flow of production by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side The normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative board that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness can exert a more effect), and other By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the whole light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable operation operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to change the first luminance from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance. Even if one luminance designation value is set up to the luminance designation value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one luminance designation value is set for a specific decorative board. For other decorative boards, the maximum specified palette value (100%) corresponding to one specified luminance value is set, so that the relationship between the light emission modes set to each other (bright or dark) is set. The brightness adjustment can be performed very easily without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, the indirect light from the light guide plate is difficult to adjust the brightness compared to the direct light, but the special pallet value that is different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value) for LEDs used as indirect light. Thus, the brightness can be set. Thereby, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is usually managed by the palette value, so that the LED used as indirect light And the brightness of an LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the peripheral control MPU performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads image data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the peripheral control MPU and generates it on the VRAM of the peripheral control MPU ( 1 frame) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thereby, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control MPU is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. Yes. As a result, the processing time can be prevented from being delayed. However, although a so-called frame drop occurs, it is possible to produce music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from various speakers by sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to production.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. Thereby, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the peripheral control MPU performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the order of the screen data from the head screen data to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU is indicated. The pointer is updated.

  In the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to indicate the number of light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, the sound command data that indicates the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, In order to instruct which sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control MPU, the pointer is updated.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data is output. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to do so. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data to be performed, it is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the peripheral control MPU performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process to be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. A random number (for example, a random number used for an effect related to holding prefetching) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In this received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Analyzes various commands. The peripheral control MPU reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed commands. Set the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

  The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And are set respectively. The peripheral control MPU analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, and reads (extracts) light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp palette setting processing. The player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value described above. When one luminance designation value up to the 31st luminance designation value is set, the above-described gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so as to become the set luminance designation value. It can be done.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU is configured such that the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing start of a start opening winning effect, the number of ordinary symbols held A normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a variation pattern command for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, It is analyzed whether or not it is a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start pending changes, and a winning prize 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is received at the winning prize opening 2005. Recognize that there is.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Analyzes various commands. The various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 tuning effects, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronous effects, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, Various commands categorized in relation to figure production effect, various commands categorized in relation to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized in notification display, various commands categorized in status display, various commands categorized in test related There are various other commands. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  In the peripheral control ROM, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1511, and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data are stored in advance. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU and a plurality of tracks in the sound source built in the peripheral control MPU. And a track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effects is to be incorporated. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the peripheral control MPU performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when various commands classified into notification display are included in the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priorities registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transferred. It is supposed to do. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred because another anomaly has occurred after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the peripheral control MPU performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the peripheral control MPU performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is converted to the peripheral control ROM. Are read out (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU.

  When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 (for one screen) 1 frame) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data is It is read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data and outputs the sound data. Set the output channel to be used according to the channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is determined based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Has been identified. The peripheral control MPU controls the sound source of the peripheral control MPU so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the peripheral control MPU uses the output channel set in the sound data creation process. Outputs sound data to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value to obtain a value of 0 to 0. The values are converted to 1024 levels up to 1023. In the present embodiment, the 1024 stage values are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. Music and sound effects flow from various speakers by controlling the sound source of the peripheral control MPU so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0-6. As described above, music and sound effects flow from various speakers by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the hall clerk, etc. of the occurrence of malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 and fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included.

  Specifically, for the production sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment switch is rotated. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. For a certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the device (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) Until 0.5 seconds elapses after the change pattern command is received after the change pattern command is received, or 0.5 seconds elapses after the stop display command is received at the peripheral control unit after the display of the decoration pattern is confirmed. The operation can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) A certain period of time (in this example, surroundings) when the variable symbol display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) From the time when the control unit receives the variation pattern command until 0.5 seconds elapses after the decorative symbol variation display starts, or after the stop control command is received at the peripheral control unit after the decoration symbol confirmation display 0.5 By operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 except for a period of time), in the sound data creation process, the resistance at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch Is converted into seven levels of substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 is further applied to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch. The sub-volume value of the production sound can be adjusted by setting the substrate volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 or It has become.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU include a plurality of sound values in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used. Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from various speakers, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data.

  In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined production sound is the maximum volume, the volume flowing from the various speakers is allowed to be the maximum allowable volume by being amplified to the master volume value. It is set to become. Specifically, for the production sound, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume is combined with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the volume of the combined performance sound is actually the volume flowing from various speakers. Amplified to the master volume value, serializes the amplified performance sound and outputs it as audio data. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sound data incorporated in the track to be used Regardless of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound Synthesized and volume, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound, indeed, amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from various speakers, and outputs the amplified notification sound as the audio data serialization.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from various speakers, a brief description will be given of the control for flowing the notification sound in order to notify the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko machine 1. The sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound are incorporated. The sound data of the track and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set to the volume flowing from various speakers. Is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, in reality, only the notification sound having the maximum volume flows from the various speakers. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data described above, although it does not flow from various speakers.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from various speakers for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the predetermined period elapses, the notification sound proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set so far. The volume of the effect sound being performed is set again as a sub-volume value by adjusting the volume adjustment switch by turning the volume adjustment switch (at this time, the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are set. When the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operation, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound), and flows from various speakers.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from various speakers, the volume of the production sound is increased when the notification sound flows in order to inform the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko machine 1. Although the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from various speakers, the sound that has been muted proceeds according to the schedule data for sound generation, so when the notification sound stops flowing from the various speakers after a predetermined period of time, The sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but starts to flow again from the point when the notification sound starts to flow according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the peripheral control MPU controls the volume of the sound from the mute to the maximum volume by the program. The sound source can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from various speakers is reduced, the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the attendant such as the store clerk of the game hall from becoming unaware of the occurrence of the malfunction or the player's fraud by the notification sound.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the peripheral control MPU performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the content stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is copied and backed up to the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the content stored in the SDRAM is provided in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the regular processing backup area.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the peripheral control MPU performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the peripheral control MPU sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1004, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1008, and the value 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer start process is started. , Step S1014,..., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, the steady process flag SP-FLG is set to 0, and the process is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is inputted from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU to the peripheral control MPU to notify that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received. A value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, and therefore the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU. To do. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 129 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. When the execution of the process is completed, the value is set to 0.

  In the determination in step S1045, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is directly executed. finish. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The value is set to 0 when the part steady process is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the process is forcibly canceled halfway and the peripheral control unit steady process starts to be executed from the beginning, the peripheral control unit of FIG. In step S1008 in the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process), a value of 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. V blank signal interrupt processing, and in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 128, the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. To have. In other words, this is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady process cannot be completed until the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called process failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 128 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. 130 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, and therefore the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times until. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  In step S1100, the peripheral control MPU determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33 ms 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started. Sometimes, this routine is finished as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is used as the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the peripheral control MPU adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, has been executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In accordance with the drive data to be driven, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the peripheral control MPU (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5) is provided. Driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the peripheral control MPU performs a movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 are input, thereby history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original information). Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU sets the original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Or acquiring the movable position, the movable position is grasped.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the peripheral control MPU performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, a rotation operation unit) 302 (rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of effect sounds output from various speakers is adjusted, or a plurality of decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are mounted. The brightness of various LEDs can be adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the peripheral control MPU performs a backup process (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are set in different areas, and the SDRAM. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in FIG. 1 and the steady processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 128, various processes related to the effects in steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. Yes. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the peripheral control unit is started again at step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process by the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control is performed when the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU takes the main peripheral serial data as 1 byte (8 bits) from the serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU. The information is taken into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interruption processing is performed. The main circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are considered as numerical values as the 3rd byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 131 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In the determination in step S1200, the peripheral control MPU receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information in the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1 byte reception period timer has not timed out. If it is determined that it is within the period to be obtained, 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). ). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data is set. When the value is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 2. When the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, after the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  In step S1206, the peripheral control MPU determines that the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has not been sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). . In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, static discharge occurs and generates noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. It is in a friendly environment.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are regarded as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Judgment is made. Thus, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to main peripheral serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  In the determination in step S1214, the peripheral control MPU determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When received, the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU (step S1216). This routine ends.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the peripheral control MPU receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period that can be received is exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the peripheral control MPU determines the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, and step S1212. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in (1) does not match, this routine is terminated.

[10-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. Determination is made (step S1302). If the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. In the determination in step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1302, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines that a power failure notification signal is not input. While sometimes this routine is terminated as it is, when it is determined that a power failure warning signal has been input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  In step S1304, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, power saving processing is performed ( Step S1306). In this power-saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing the power, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the peripheral control MPU performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the peripheral control MPU performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is copied and backed up to a steady process backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S1312). If the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312, that a power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1312 again after determining that the power failure notification signal is not input or following step S1314, and determines whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. judge. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. By continuing to make an infinite determination in this way, in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU cannot output a clear signal to the external WDT when determining that the power failure warning signal is not input, and the peripheral control While the MPU is reset, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312, that the power failure warning signal has been input, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU is not reset. If the peripheral control MPU is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 128 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal is continued in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU is not reset immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. It has become. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted because the WDT clear process is not executed. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU is reset because the WDT clear process in Step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with various noises by automatically resetting.

[11. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 133, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 2101. On condition that the detection signal is on (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S2031), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S2032). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 is on (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S2033), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S2034).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S2035). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S2039) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) becomes a mode suggesting "15R big hit A" According to the 15R jackpot gaming state A, the winning prize opening 2005 is controlled to open and close, and a sorting piece 2415 for distributing the game ball B received in the big winning prize opening 2005 to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is provided. Drive control is performed, and processing for setting the valid state in the 15th round in which the game balls B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 is executed. In addition, when the mode suggests “15R big hit B”, the big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the 15R big hit gaming state B, and the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is received as the first receiving opening. The distribution piece 2415 to be distributed to either the 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is driven and controlled, and a process of setting the valid state to the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 is executed.

  Here, the “valid state” and “invalid state” will be described. First, in the present embodiment, a “valid state” is provided as a state when the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008. Here, the “valid state” indicates that in the 15th round in which the game balls B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, the game balls B are received by the second receiving port 2008, and the high hit state after the end of the big hit gaming state. It is a state that is allowed (validated) to be controlled to a probability state. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the “valid state”, the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, the “invalid state” different from the “valid state” is set as a state in which the game ball B is not received at the second receiving port 2008. Here, the “invalid state” is a state in which the game ball B is not accepted by the second receiving port 2008 in principle, such as the 1st to 14th rounds in which the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007. Even if the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008, it is not permitted (invalidated) to be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished. Therefore, even if the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 in the “invalid state”, the high probability state is not controlled after the big hit game state is ended. In addition, the “invalid state” makes it possible to notify the hall management side of information relating to such an abnormality when the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 due to an abnormality such as an illegal act. Therefore, it is set as the period during which it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008. In the present embodiment, the game ball B is set to the “valid state” in a predetermined round (15th round) that allows the game balls B to be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, and the second receiving port 2008 has a game. When the ball B is accepted, the high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state. Further, although the “invalid state” is set for a predetermined round (1st to 14th rounds) in which the game balls B are not distributed to the second receiving port 2008, it may be set to “valid state”. Thus, even if it is set to “valid state” in all rounds in the big hit game state, the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the first to the 14th rounds. As in the case where the “invalid state” is set in the 14th round, it is important whether or not the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set in the “valid state”.

  In the big hit control process (step S2041), after performing the opening control of the big prize opening 2005, each set process of the high probability flag, the short time flag, and the short time counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state. During the execution of the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B), it is possible to distribute the game balls B to the second receiving port 2008 in the first to fifteenth rounds when the big winning opening 2005 is opened. When the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the high probability flag is set because the high probability state (high probability short-time state) is controlled after the big hit gaming state. If the game ball B is not received at the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, it is controlled to a high probability state (high probability short-time state) after the big hit gaming state ends. The high probability flag is not set. When the high probability flag is set, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144, which will be described later, when the next big hit or the counter value of the hour / hour counter reaches “0” or The high probability flag is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The time-short flag is a flag indicating that the time-short state is in effect, and is used for big hits (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) which are controlled to a short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state) after the big hit gaming state ends. Set when exiting based jackpot gaming state. The time-short flag is the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop (not shown) when the next big hit or the counter value of the time-count counter becomes “0”. Reset by processing.

  The short-time counter is a counter that shows the remaining number of times the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed as the number of times the short-time state continues, and the short-time state (high probability) When the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) is controlled to the short time state, low probability short time state, the number of times the short state continues is set, and the short time counter is Each time the special symbol variation display is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, the countdown is performed. However, when the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes “0”, FIG. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 5 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) is reset (the counter value is returned to “0”).

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0”. (Step S2036), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S2037), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S2036), the second special symbol including the lottery process concerning the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S2038). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S2032).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S2031 that the first start port sensor 2101 is in the on state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2041.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is “4” which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S2042). In the process of step S2042, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S2043 to the following are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The process of S2045 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2043, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S2044, each random number acquired in step S2041 is used as the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To store.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S2041. Whether or not is a big hit, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, the reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, or the type type of game effect to be executed ( After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S2045), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2042 that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control for the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S2043 to S2045, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first held state. While updating to correspond to the stored number, a command (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4) instructing the first reserved storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the storage process (step S20). It is supposed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S2045). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S2041, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S2061).

  Then, the specified prior determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit or execution According to the type of game effect to be performed), the type of special random number acquired (first special random number), and the number of stored storages (the value of the number of held counters) corresponding to the acquired special random number Set the prior judgment command. For example, in the effect predetermination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S2045 of the first start port passage process, the specified predetermination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the first reserved memory number (first 1 special reserved number counter value) and a first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to the value (step S2062).

  Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that it is stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of stored memory, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the start winning that has occurred is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if not, the execution display device 1600 Peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning is performed as the game effect to be executed or the advance determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed is displayed. Can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the first determination information indicated by the received previous determination command as the first (first) storage area. Store sequentially from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. And when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (to the reserved storage area) Shift the stored prior decision information). Thereby, the preliminary determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest preliminary determination information.

  When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). )) In advance, for example, can be notified at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold display. .

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S2034).

  If it is determined in the process of step S2033 that the second start port sensor 2402 is in the on state and the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, then FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2051.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second reserved memory number is set to the maximum value (upper limit value) based on the counter value. ) Is “4” (step S2052). In the process of step S2052, if it is determined that the second reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S2053 to make the second special symbol variable display control newly held. The process of S2054 will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S2053, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S2054, the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the random number acquired in step S2051. To store.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2052 that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S2053 to S2054, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the second on-hold state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed. While updating to correspond to the stored number, a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1) indicating the second reserved memory number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the storage process (step S20). It is supposed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S2037). The first special symbol process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S2080)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081) in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed (step S2082)
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S2083).
5. The first special symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop mode. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S2084)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S2080) should be performed in the processing of step S40 (see FIG. 118).

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S2080).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S2101. As a process of, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S2102 the process is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the same RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S2103 and S2104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control MPU RAM is stored in each storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  After that, as a process of step S2105, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081) (step S2106), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S2105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state) (step S2111), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a high probability state shown in FIG. 140 (A). A jackpot determination table is selected (step S2112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S2111), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) is selected (step S2113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S2114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 140 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short time state (low probability short state)). And a jackpot determination table at a high probability and used when the gaming state is a high probability (a high probability short time state). In the jackpot determination table at the low probability, 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, and the setting value is 4 1/289, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6, match with the jackpot judgment value indicating that the first special random number has been won with a jackpot probability of 1/269. The first special random numbers other than the first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with a loss determination value indicating that the first special random numbers are out of place. In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, in the second special symbol process executed in step S2038, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, Similar to the low probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the special random number, 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value is 2, and 3 when the set value is 3 1/299, the second special random number was won with a big hit probability of 1/289 when the set value was 4, 1/279 when the set value was 5, and 1/269 when the set value was 6. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the second special random numbers other than that correspond to the loss determination values indicating that they are out of place.

  Further, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 1 / 31.9 when the set value is 1, 1 / 30.9 when the set value is 2, 1 / 29.9 when the set value is 3, The first special random number (at low probability) with a jackpot probability of 1 / 28.9 when the setting value is 4, 1 / 27.9 when the setting value is 5, and 1 / 26.9 when the setting value is 6. The first special random number that is the same as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table) matches the jackpot determination value, and the other first special random numbers match the loss determination value. Each special random number is associated. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short-time state), for each set value, the jackpot determination value indicating that the big hit is won is low (normal state (low probability non-short state)) And the time-short state (low-probability time-short state)). In the second special symbol process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the high probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number Similar to the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the special random number, 1 / 31.9 when the set value is 1, 1 / 30.9 when the set value is 2, and the set value 3 1 / 29.9 when the value is 4, 1 / 28.9 when the value is 4, 1 / 27.9 when the value is 5, and 1 / 26.9 when the value is 6 The second special random number (including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the low probability) matches the jackpot determination value, and the other second special random numbers are lost. The second special random number is set to match the judgment value. It is associated.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S2115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the processing is ended (step S2116), and the first special read out in step S2102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal processing As a result of the comparison with the random number, if it is determined that they are out of place, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S2102 (step S2117). As a result of comparing the reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S2102, if it is determined that the reach is shifted (step S2118), a reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set. The process ends (step S2119).

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S2105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S2121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S2121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 140 (B). (Step S2122) The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S2123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S2121, it is determined to be an off symbol as a mode when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S2124).

  As shown in FIG. 140 (B), the symbol determination table stores symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) in association with each determination result (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B). ing. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1. Opening / closing control of the big winning opening 2005 according to the 15R big hit gaming state A, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time in the fifteenth round (opening in which the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds) and for a long time (opening that allows the game ball B to enter (easily), for example, 20 seconds), when the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008, When the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, the special hit state after the end of the big hit gaming state is set. While the variable display of the symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times, the high probability short-time state is controlled, while the game ball B is placed in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round. Unacceptable When the can, 15R jackpot A is controlled to a low probability time reduction mode until the variation display of the special symbol after the completion of the jackpot gaming state (first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times
2. Opening and closing control of the big winning opening 2005 according to the 15R big hit gaming state B, and opening the big winning opening 2005 for a short time in the fifteenth round (opening in which the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds) is set to an effective state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state), and effective in the 15th round If the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 during the state, the high display is performed until the change display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the big hit gaming state is finished. If the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round while controlling the probability short-time state, a special symbol (the first special symbol and the first symbol after the jackpot gaming state is finished). Determining 15R jackpot B which variation display of the special symbols) is controlled to a low probability time reduction until it is executed 100 times, from among the two types of jackpot to any jackpot.

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A in this example, as the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), and a predetermined time (4.5) Seconds), the special winning opening 2005 is set to be opened for a long time (20 seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the 15th round, when starting the short winning opening 2005 (0.5 seconds), the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the sorting piece 2415 is started. Then, when opening the long winning opening 2005 (20 seconds) for a long time, the long-time operation (10 seconds) of the sorting pieces 2415 is started, and the second receiving port 2008 is operated during the operating period of the sorting pieces 2415. The game ball B is set to be acceptable. Further, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, a valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished) ) Is set.

  On the other hand, in the 15R big hit gaming state B of the present example, the operation schedule of the big prize opening 2005 in the 15th round is set so that the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the 15th round, when starting the short winning opening 2005 (0.5 seconds), the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the sorting piece 2415 is started. The game ball B is set to be received in the second receiving port 2008 during the operation period of the sorting piece 2415. Further, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, a valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished) ) Is set.

  As described above, both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B are effective in the 15th round (the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008, so that the high probability state is reached after the jackpot gaming state is finished. In the 15R big hit gaming state A, the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round is opened for a long time (20 seconds), so the big winning opening 2005 It is extremely easy for the game ball B to be accepted, and further, the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during a period in which the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds). It is extremely easy for the received game balls B to be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2008. In this way, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, the probability that the game ball B will be received in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely high, so the high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished. The probability of doing is also extremely high. On the other hand, in the 15R big hit gaming state B, it is very difficult to receive the game ball B in the big winning opening 2005 because the big winning opening 2005 is only briefly opened (0.5 seconds) in the 15th round. Since the sorting piece 2415 is only activated for a short time (0.2 seconds) during the period in which the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is the second. It is extremely difficult to be distributed (accepted) to the receiving port 2008. In this way, in the 15R big hit gaming state B, the probability that the game ball B will be received in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set in the valid state is extremely low, so the high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished. The probability of doing is also very low.

  As an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415, the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) has elapsed, the sorting piece 2415 is opened for a long time (10). And when the 15th round in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and 15R jackpot gaming state B is started, the operation of such a sorting piece 2415 is performed. The schedule is started. Thus, by making the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 a single operation schedule, the amount of data related to the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 is prevented from increasing as much as possible.

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B of this example, the winning prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) as the operation schedule of the winning prize opening 2005 in each of the first to fourteenth rounds. Is set to In addition, as an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in each of the first to fourteenth rounds, the sorting piece 2415 is not operated, and the game ball B is placed in the first receiving port 2007 instead of the second receiving port 2008 during that period. Is set to be accepted. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in each of the first to 14th rounds, the invalid state (in principle, the game ball B is not accepted by the second receiving port 2008, and after the end of the big hit gaming state A state that is not controlled to a high probability state). Thus, in both the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hit gaming state B, the game balls B are distributed to the second receiving port 2008 when the big winning opening 2005 is opened as in the 15th round. A game of whether or not the game ball B is accepted is simply performed when the special winning opening 2005 is opened, without playing a game of whether or not (accepted).

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the determination value allocation is set differently compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, out of 15R jackpot A and 15R jackpot B, 15R jackpot A (15 rounds, which is relatively advantageous to the player) Distribution of 50 judgment values with respect to a big hit with a high probability that the game ball B will be received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state with the eye and a high probability of controlling to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends Is set, however, the 15R big hit B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player (the probability that the game ball B will be accepted by the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round is low, and the big hit gaming state ends. 50 determination values are assigned to a jackpot with a low probability of controlling to a high probability state later. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, among the 15R big hit A and 15R big hit B, 65 judgment value distributions are set for the 15R big hit A which is relatively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the distribution of 35 judgment values to 15R big hit B which is relatively disadvantageous to the player is set. In this way, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B, which is different in the player's advantage, is determined, so what kind of big hit is determined at the time of the first big hit Can be noticed. In addition, in the short time state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, a game on the second special symbol side (a game that allows the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004) is performed. At the time of the big hit on the symbol side, the 15R big hit game A is determined with a higher probability than the big hit on the first special symbol side. it can. Therefore, since the game characteristics change between the first big hit and the consecutive time, the game is not monotonous.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as a mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 15R big hit A is determined, the 15R big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 15R big hit B is determined, the 15R big hit B symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when 15R jackpot A is determined, 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  After the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S2125, these lottery results (indicating either the type of jackpot, the reach losing or the losing (specifying the stop symbol of the first special symbol) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the information may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082) as the process of step S2126, this process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU starts the left / middle / right decoration symbol variation display based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of left ornament symbol → right ornament symbol → middle ornament symbol. Thus, the display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU sets 15R out of jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. When the big hit A is specified, the 15R big hit A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols) is determined. When the 15R big hit B is specified, the 15R big hit B symbol (common with the 15R big hit A symbol) is determined and changed. When the variation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. As described above, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is fluctuated and stopped at either the 15R big hit A symbol or the 15R big hit B symbol, it can be determined that the decorative symbol is a big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. However, since a common symbol is used as the 15R big hit A symbol and the 15R big hit B symbol, either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B cannot be determined.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, when the reach error is specified from the received determination result notification command, the symbol with the reach is lost. (The combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative designs are the same.) When the outlier is specified, it is a non-reachable design (a combination of non-identical decorative designs. Are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S2141), the type of jackpot determined in step S2123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step If the reach flag is set (step S2143), a reach variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the current gaming state is selected (step S2144), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag are selected. If it is not set, that is, if it is a normal deviation (a deviation that does not execute reach production) To selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S 2145).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S2146), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S2147). Further, the main control MPU sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S2148). As a result, effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process. Are obtained from this table, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, the super reach effect of the reach effect is higher in the big hit expectation level than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation level for the big hit game state is increased.

  When the first special symbol variation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol variation process (step S2083) as the next step S2149. At the time of updating, this process is terminated.

  In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, the special symbol random time (first special symbol, second special symbol) is related to the special symbol random time (first special symbol, second special symbol), which is set to about 1 second when the time is short. When the time is short, the variation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a manner that the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). That is, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected at the time reduction is compared with the variation pattern at the time of failure at the time of non-time reduction so that the time required for the change display control of the special symbol is extremely short. Symbol variation time information is set.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S2083).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S2171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S2082) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S2172), the process proceeds to step S2173. That is, in the process of step S2173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S2084), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S2084).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S2181. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the time-shortage counter is set to “0” while the time-shortage flag is set and the time-short state continuation count is set. (Step S2183). If the counter value is not “0”, after the time-short counter is counted down (step S2184), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-count counter is “0” (step S2185). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, the time reduction flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S2186). If it is determined in the process of step S2183 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S2185 that the time reduction counter is not “0”. At that time, the process proceeds to step S2187.

  When the jackpot flag is set (step S2187), a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started is set (step S2189), and the jackpot gaming state is started (the jackpot round start command is set). The waiting time until the game is started (a period during which display indicating that the big hit gaming state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S2190). Next, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset. When the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset. If it is not “0”, the counter value is reset (returned to “0”), and then a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S2191), and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S2192), this process is terminated.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the jackpot type (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S2189, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. Thereby, the presentation according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot control process (step S2039).

  In step S2189, the waiting time until the big hit gaming state is started is set in the interval timer. However, in the processing of step S2401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed, FIG. As shown in the figure, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls opening / closing of the big prize opening 2005 and is in an effective state in the fifteenth round (the big hit gaming state by receiving the game ball B at the second receiving port 2008) And a winning ball opening / closing process (step S2402) set to a high probability state after the completion of the game, and the game ball B received by the big winning port 2005 in the fifteenth round to the second receiving port 2008 At the 15th round, the sorting piece 2415 is driven and controlled so that it can be sorted. Performing second receiving opening and closing process of monitoring the second receiving port 2008 whether the game ball B is received in the valid state (step S2403), in this order.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the above-described special winning opening / closing process (step S2402).

  If it is determined in step S2411 that the big prize opening 2005 is open, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds when opening for a long time, 0.5 seconds when opening for a short time) has elapsed from the open state of the special winning opening 2005 according to the operation schedule (step S2412), or When the game ball B has won the maximum number (for example, nine) of the winning balls 2005 in the opened state (step S2413), the opened large winning port 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S2414). Then, when it is determined that the current round is to be ended by controlling the big prize opening 2005 to the closed state (step S2415), the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds are transmitted as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. A big hit round end command is set according to (step S2416), and the process proceeds to step S2428.

  If it is determined in step S2411 that the big prize opening 2005 is in a closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. When it is determined to start a new round by controlling the large winning opening 2005 to the open state when it is time to open the large winning opening 2005 according to the operation schedule (step S2417). (Step S2418), a jackpot round start command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the new number of rounds is set as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2419). If it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag according to the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008, that is, the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds that open the grand prize opening 2005. If it is the start time (step S2420), the valid state flag is set (step S2421). If the valid state flag is set at the start of the 15th round in step S2420, it is necessary to reset the valid state flag at the end of the 15th round. Then, the closed winning opening 2005 or the closed winning opening 2005 in the closed state is controlled to be in an open state (step S2422), and the process proceeds to step S2428. If it is determined that a new round is not started by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to be in an open state (such as the second open in the same round) (step S2418), or a valid state flag If it is determined that it is not time to set (when it is not at the start of the 15th round) (step S2420), the closed big prize opening 2005 is controlled to be open (step S2422), and step S2428 is performed. Migrate to As a result, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like can execute effects according to the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds specified by the jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command.

  It should be noted that the valid state flag is a state set to the valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished). It is a flag to show. In the fifteenth round among the first to fifteenth rounds that open the above-mentioned big winning opening 2005, the game balls B received in the big winning opening 2005 in the second receiving / opening opening / closing process (step S2403) described later are used as the first receiving opening 2007. Alternatively, the game ball B can be received at the second receiving port 2008 by drivingly controlling the sorting piece 2415 to be distributed to any of the second receiving ports 2008, and is set to an effective state.

  If it is determined in the process of step S2428 that the game ball B has been received at the special winning opening 2005, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. As a command to be transmitted to 1510, a winning prize entry command is set (step S2429), and this process is terminated. As a result, when the winning prize entry command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the presentation display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. Can be executed.

  If it is determined in step S2417 that it is not the time to open the special winning opening 2005, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. When the number of rounds is completed by repeating the open and closed states of the winning opening 2005 (step S2423), the big hit execution flag is reset (step S2424). If it is determined that a second receiving port passage flag, which will be described later, is set (step S2425), a high probability flag is set (step S2426), the time reduction flag is set and the counter value of the time reduction counter is set. When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of the short time state (step S2427), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the second entrance passage flag is not set (step S2425), the high probability flag is not set, the time reduction flag is set, and the time reduction state is set to the counter value of the time reduction counter. When an initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of times to continue (step S2427), this process is terminated. As described above, when it is determined that the second reception pass flag is set (the game ball B has been received by the second reception 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round), the high probability flag And the short-time flag is set and the high-probability short-time state is controlled, but the second entrance passage flag is not set (the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round) If it is determined that only the short time flag is set, the low probability short time state is controlled.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second receiving opening / closing process (step S2403).

  If it is determined in step S2431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in the open state (the game ball B is distributed to the second receiving port 2008 side by the sorting piece 2415), FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 follows the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 from the opened state of the second receiving port 2008 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds when opened for a long time). When 0.2 seconds when the short-time opening has elapsed (step S2432), or when the current round (15th round) is ended by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the closed state (step 1524) S2433), the second receiving port 2008 in the opened state is closed (the game ball B is swung to the first receiving port 2007 side by the sorting piece 2415). Controlling the divided state) (step S2434).

  If it is determined in step S2431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. According to the operation schedule of 2415, when it is time to open the second receiving port 2008 (step S2435), the closed second receiving port 2008 is controlled to open (step S2436).

  Next, in the process of step S2437, if it is determined that the game ball B has been received in the opened second receiving port 2008, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is shown in FIG. Determines whether or not the game ball B has been received at the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the fifteenth round while the effective state flag is set (step S2438). If it is determined that the game ball B has been received at the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state at the 15th round (step S2438), the second acceptor is received during the valid state at the 15th round. When the second acceptance passage passing flag indicating that the game ball B has been received at the entrance 2008 is not set (step S2439), the second acceptance passage passing flag is set (step S2440), and the peripheral control board 1510 is set. When the second reception pass command is set as the command to be transmitted (step S2441), this process ends. As described above, unless the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the second receiving port passing flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S2426. Is not set, the high probability state is not controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished. Further, when a second reception pass command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, an effect display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, etc. produce an effect corresponding to the reception of the game ball B to the second reception 2008. Can be executed.

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

  Now, in the process of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in an on state and the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S2802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate section passing process such as obtaining a normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Execute.

  Next, in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal symbol normal process in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S2803).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S2804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the common symbol variable random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S2805).
4). The normal symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 is displayed so that the normal symbol variation control mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display. Normal symbol stop processing for stopping symbol variation display (step S2806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol becomes a mode suggesting “per-common”, the second start port door 2411 rotates to play the game to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing a process for controlling the acceptance of the ball B (step S2807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2803) should be performed in the process of step S40 (see FIG. 118).

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passage processing (step S2802).

  Now, in the process of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in an on state and the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S2811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the normal random number and the normal variable random number from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, the holding number of normal symbols is the maximum value “4”. It is determined whether or not (step S2812). In the process of step S2812, if it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S2813 to S2814 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S2813, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, in step S2814, each random number acquired in step S2811 is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the main control MPU RAM. .

  However, in the process of step S2812, if it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S2813 to S2814, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S2803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 150, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S2821 as It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is then processed as step S2822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S2823 and S2824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and when the variable symbol variable display stored in each storage area of the normal control storage area of the main control MPU is stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 are counted from the first (first) area. Store in order. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the random numbers extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area And when the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage is read out. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the hold of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the variable display control hold can be canceled in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). .

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the current game state is a short time state (low probability short time state, high probability short time state) (step S2826). ) Is selected (step S2826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state) (step S2825), a non-time-short normal figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2825). In step S2827, the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal symbol normal process (step S2828).

  In addition, the normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU and is used when the gaming state is a short time (low probability short time state, high probability short time state), A non-time / short-time ordinary figure determination table used when the game state is non-time / short-time (low probability non-time / short-time state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment value indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 in the time saving mode, the player always wins as per the usual figure, and the second start port door 2411 rotates to the second start port 2004. The game ball B is controlled to be received.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving ordinary figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 251 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the ordinary figure determination value indicating that each ordinary figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement judgment value indicating that the usual figure is misplaced. As described above, in the non-time saving state, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the second start opening door 2411 is rotated and the second start port door 2411 is rotated. There is no control that allows the game ball B to be received in the second starting port 2004.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal symbol normal process and determines that the normal symbol is per unit (step S2829). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won per normal symbol (step S2830), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (ordinary symbol stop symbol) The symbol is determined (step S2831). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected regular symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined to be out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-standard symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S2832). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S2804) (step S2833), this process is terminated.

  In this example, in the control of the short time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a win, and the time required for the variable symbol display control is extremely limited. It is shortened to a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). When the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the second start port 2004 is controlled with an open / close pattern that is closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . In other words, during the time-short state control, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is extremely high, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is constant and short, and the open state of the second start port 2004 is open. It is much easier to win the game ball B at the second start port 2004 due to the long time of the game, and the game ball is more efficiently aimed at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. B can be awarded. In the non-time-short state control, it is assumed that the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always hit, and the second start port 2004 is aimed. Also, the game ball B cannot be won at the second starting port 2004.

  As described above, during the non-time-short state control, even if the second start port 2004 is aimed, the second start port 2004 cannot win the game ball B. In order for the game ball B to win, the game ball B must be launched (so-called “left-handed”) aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500. Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B is placed on the obstacle nail. By contacting N, various movements are imparted to the game ball B so as to flow down. For this reason, even if the game ball B is hit on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first start opening 2002, it does not necessarily win the first start opening 2002 but wins the first start opening 2002. The game ball B that has not been discharged is discharged to the outside through an out port 1008 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, during the time-short state control, the game ball B can be won more efficiently by aiming at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. In order for the ball B to win, the game ball B must be fired (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. Further, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened and the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003 is The passed game ball B wins the second start opening 2004 with a very high probability. For this reason, during the time-short state control, the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1008), and the non-time-short state control is performed. Compared with the first start port 2002 in the middle, the game ball B wins the second start port 2004 very efficiently.

  In addition, during the time-short state control, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit when passing through the gate part 2003 is very high, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed. The time required for the control is constant and short, and the time when the second start port 2004 is opened is long, etc., so that the game ball B can easily win the second start port 2004, and further to the second start port 2004. When the game ball B wins, the time required for the variable symbol display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely short compared with the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the non-time-short state control. The special symbol variation display control (the suspension of the special symbol variation display control) can be digested. That is, when the short hit state is controlled after the big hit game state, the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 with the aim of the second starting port 2004, so that the big hit is again made in a short time. It is possible to expect a large number of game balls B by controlling to the big hit game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls B paid out by winning the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is one, so that the game to the second start port 2004 is Even if the winning of the ball B frequently occurs, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

[12. Pachinko machine behavior at power-on]
In the present embodiment, as a function of the pachinko machine 1, a function for changing a setting value and a function for performing a confirmation display of the setting value are mounted. Specifically, the setting value setting can be changed by executing the setting change process in step S37 described above, and the setting value confirmation display can be performed by executing the setting value confirmation display process in step S28 described above. Allowing to be done. When performing such setting value change, in addition to operating the power switch 630a when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 and the setting key switch 1311a. When the confirmation display of the set value is performed, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided. It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating. Note that, as described above, the RWM clear button 633z has both the function of the RAM clear switch, the function of the setting switching button, and the function of the error release switch.

  First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 151A is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. FIG. 151B is a time chart showing the power on of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 151 (C) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting value is changed sometimes. FIG. 151 (C) shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the set value is displayed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is a time chart which shows.

  As shown in FIG. 151, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10), and then performs a power failure clear process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. As described above, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait time is 200 milliseconds (ms). ) Is set.

  At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU operates the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z that operates as a function of the RAM clear switch. It is determined whether or not there is (step S14). When determining in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 0 (step S16B). Then, following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and sets the key switch according to the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or a signal for setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON is determined. The determination result is stored as operation information in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Since the period from timing t3 to timing tx is extremely short, a person who presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z while pachinko machine 1 needs to be turned on, and a person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a needs to turn on the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

  After the operation information is stored at the timing tx, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) a system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. This initialization process is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received.

  At timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined which combination the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG are (steps S25 to S27). In step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1, the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is established, a setting change process (step S37) is performed. If the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the main control built-in RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. In step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, the main control MPU permits a preset set value display. When the condition is satisfied, a set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON is determined. The determination result is stored as operation information in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, but the operation is performed until the timing ty that is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process thereafter. Information storage is to be maintained. At timing ty, based on the storage of the operation information, initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is to be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A), when initializing the main control built-in RAM, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. However, the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned on. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a. Is not operated, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. At the timing ty, it is determined to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the storage of the operation information. From the timing ty, the initialization of the main control built-in RAM ( Step S38) is to be performed.

  When initializing the main control built-in RAM, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx, but at the timing ty, the RWM clear button 633z is operated. It is not necessary that the pressing operation unit is operated. In other words, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. Therefore, even before the timing ty arrives, the RWM clear is performed. It is possible to change from the state where the pressing operation portion of the button 633z is operated to the state where it is not operated.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG only needs to be reset to 0 during the period from the timing ty until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (B), when the setting value is changed, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. The setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a. Is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the timing ty, it is determined that the setting change process (step S37) is performed based on the storage of the operation information, and the setting change process (step S37) is performed from the timing ty. . In addition, after the setting change process (step S37) is started at the timing ty, when the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting change process (step S37) is executed. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

  When changing the setting value, it is necessary that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, and the setting key switch 1311a is operated to be turned on. However, at the timing ty, it is not necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, and similarly, the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned ON. In other words, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. Therefore, even before the timing ty arrives, the RWM clear is performed. It is possible to change from the state where the pressing operation portion of the button 633z is operated to the state where it is not operated. Similarly, the state where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is changed to the state where it is turned off. It is possible to do. However, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on before the timing ty is reached, the setting change process (step S37) is started at the timing ty. It is necessary to change from the state where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on again to the state where it is turned off, and further from the state where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the state where it is turned off. This is because the main control MPU determines whether or not there is a setting key OFF operation in the determination in step S222 of the setting change process. In this determination, the setting key switch 1311a is in an ON operation. This is because an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a when the operation is turned off.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to 0 from the timing ty until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed after the setting change process (step S37). Anything to do. In this example, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, and the setting key is set at the timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed. Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is initialized after the setting change processing (step S37) from the timing ty (step S38). In the meantime, any value may be used as long as the value is reset to zero.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (C), when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. On the other hand, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a. Is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the timing ty, it is decided to perform the set value confirmation display process (step S28) based on the storage of the operation information, and from the time ty, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. To do. In addition, after the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at timing ty, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value confirmation display process ( Step S28) is to be completed (timing t4).

  Note that when the setting value confirmation display is performed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the timing tx, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing ty. There is no need. That is, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. Therefore, even before the timing ty arrives, the setting key It is possible to change the switch 1311a from being turned on to being turned off. However, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on before the timing ty, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at the timing ty. Later, it is necessary to change from the state where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on again to the state where it is turned off, and further from the state where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the state where it is turned off. This is because, in the determination in step S358 of the set value confirmation display process, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is a setting key OFF operation. In this determination, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. This is because an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a when the operation state is changed from the existing state to the OFF state.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, and at the timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is completed. Although the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is between timing ty and timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. Anything that resets to the value 0 is acceptable.

  In this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on process, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. As a condition, a value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information. In FIGS. 151B and 151C, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. It is assumed that the situation continues. In this regard, the situation in which the main body frame 4 is never opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 between the timing t3 and the timing tx. In the closed state, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is limited to not set the value 1 (set to the value 0) as the second operation information. Yes. This may be changed or set illegally when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (such as when it is difficult for the game hall manager to notice) during the game hall business hours, etc. This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in this example, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 1 in step S14 of the main control side power-on process. The situation is such that the main body frame 4 is never opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or the outer frame 2 is moved from the timing t3 to the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, when it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. According to this, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the RAM clearing is performed. It is possible to set the notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1, and to prevent the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) from being disabled. Even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to prevent at least the occurrence of trouble in the game start itself.

  In the present embodiment, at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information and the set key ON flag as the second operation information The value of CS-FLG is set, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. After the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. At the time of the timing ty, the operation information is stored. Based on this, it is determined whether initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), or setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is performed, and the determined processing. Like to do. That is, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx and before the timing ty arrives, the operation mode of the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z and the operation mode of the setting key switch 1311a are changed. Even in such a case, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained without being changed. Thereby, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the hall manager mistakenly operates the operation mode of the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a. Even if the operation mode is changed, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained so as not to be changed, so that there is no need to newly power on the pachinko machine 1 again. 1. Immediately execute the process intended by the hall manager after power-on (one of main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change process (step S37), set value confirmation display process (step S28)) can do.

  In addition, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z without operating the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting value is changed, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a. When performing the confirmation display, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. At the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information and the set key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information And the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Depending on which combination of the operation information is at the timing ty, the hall manager Is executed (any one of initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), and setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)). For example, when an operation unit is provided corresponding to the initialization of the main control built-in RAM, the setting change of the setting value, and the confirmation display of the setting value, the power switch 630a is provided. It is necessary to provide three operation units, but by changing the processing executed after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 depending on the combination of operation information, the operation unit for pressing the RWM clear button 633z in addition to the power switch 630a In addition, it is only necessary to provide two operation units of the setting key switch 1311a, and the number of parts related to the operation unit can be saved.

  In this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on process, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. As a condition, a value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information. As shown in FIGS. 151 (B) and 151 (C), the period from the timing tx to the timing ty is as follows. The setting state of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is held as the second operation information, and it does not matter whether the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty, the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be repeated any number of times. On the other hand, after the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, the main body frame 4 moves relative to the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives. When closed, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at the timing tx is reset, and the setting change process (step S37) and the setting value confirmation display process are performed at the timing ty. The setting change process (step S37) is performed at the timing ty without performing (step S28) or resetting the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at the timing tx. Alternatively, it may not be determined that the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, even when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing tx, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives. May be restricted so that setting value setting change and setting value confirmation display cannot be performed. According to this, as described above, the setting is illegally changed when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during business hours of the game hall (when the game hall manager is difficult to notice). It is possible to prevent the setting or the setting from being checked illegally.

  In this example, the RAM clear notification flag is set as the first operation information on the condition that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated even temporarily in step S14 of the main control side power-on process. Although the value 1 is set in RCL-FLG, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), that is, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed for a long time. It is good also as a condition. Similarly, in step S18 of the main control side power-on process, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 as the second operation information on the condition that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON even temporarily. However, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). As a result, when the hall manager accidentally touches the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, processing that is not intended by the hall manager is performed. It can be prevented from being executed.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is limited not to monitor fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 or fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005. . That is, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty, the hall manager changes from the state where the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to the state where it is not operated, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Although it is possible to change from being in a state of being operated to OFF, it is limited not to execute fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 or fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005. . As a result, even when the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or adds vibration when operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it is detected as an illegal act. Can be prevented, and inhibition of regular work can be suppressed.

[12-1. Modification of pachinko machine behavior at power-on]
In the above-described embodiment, the pressing operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is performed in each of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM, the change of the setting value, and the confirmation display of the setting value. The timing for determining whether or not the unit is operated is the same as the timing for determining whether or not the body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on, but the body frame 4 is opened and set. About the timing which determines whether there exists key ON operation, you may make it differ from the timing which determines whether the press operation part of RWM clear button 633z is operated. A modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a modification of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 153 (A) is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. FIG. 153 (C) is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting value is changed when the machine 1 is turned on. FIG. 153 (C) shows a confirmation display of the set value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the case of performing. Note that, as described above, the RWM clear button 633z has both the function of the RAM clear switch, the function of the setting switching button, and the function of the error release switch.

  As shown in FIG. 153, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10), and then performs a power failure clear process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. As described above, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait time is 200 milliseconds (ms). ) Is set.

  At the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated (step). S14). When determining in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 0 (step S16B). That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. ing. Since the period from timing t3 to timing tx is extremely short, a person who presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z while pachinko machine 1 needs to be turned on.

  After the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process following step S16A or step S16B (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) a system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. This initialization process is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received.

  At timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and sets the key switch according to the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or a signal for setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). That is, at timing ty1, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on, and the determination result is stored as second operation information in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. doing. As described above, in the modification, the first operation information is stored at the timing tx before the main control MPU starts the wait time standby process, whereas the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process at the time point ty1. The second operation information is stored. Note that the setting key switch 1311a is set as the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty1 because at least 10 seconds (s), which is a waiting time (boot timer) until booting in the wait time waiting process (step S22), is set. May turn on the setting key switch 1311a before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at the timing t3, but after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at the timing t3, The setting key switch 1311a may be turned on until the timing ty1 at which the control MPU completes the wait time waiting process comes.

  At timing ty2 after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU determines the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the setting key ON flag CS. -It is determined which combination the values of FLG are (steps S25 to S27). In step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1, the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is established, a setting change process (step S37) is performed. If the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the main control built-in RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. In step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, the main control MPU permits a preset set value display. When the condition is satisfied, a set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. However, the storage of the first operation information is maintained until the timing ty2 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process thereafter. On the other hand, at timing ty1, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on, and the determination result is stored as second operation information in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. However, the storage of the second operation information is maintained until the timing ty2 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process thereafter. At the timing ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing ( Step S28) is to be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (A), when initializing the main control built-in RAM, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. Must be operated. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned ON at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after the timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON at the timing ty1, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set as the main operation information. Store in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. At timing ty2, it is determined to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the storage of the operation information. From timing ty2, the initialization of the main control built-in RAM ( Step S38) is to be performed.

  When initializing the main control built-in RAM, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx. It is not necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the button 633z. In other words, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Therefore, before the timing ty2 arrives. In addition, it is possible to change from the state in which the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated.

  When the main control built-in RAM is to be initialized, the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned ON at timing ty1, but at the timing tx or timing ty2, the setting key switch 1311a is The ON operation may be performed. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. However, at the timing ty1, the second operation information is maintained. Since the information is stored, during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1, the setting key switch 1311a can be freely changed between the ON operation state and the OFF operation state. Yes.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty2. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG only needs to be reset to 0 during the period from the timing ty2 until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (B), when the setting value is changed, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. Need to be. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when the setting value is changed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after the timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set as the main operation information. Store in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty2, it is decided to perform the setting change process (step S37) based on the storage of the operation information, and the setting change process (step S37) is performed from the time of timing ty2. . In addition, after the setting change process (step S37) is started at timing ty2, when the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting change process (step S37) is executed. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx, but at the timing ty1 or the timing ty2, the RWM clear button 633z. There is no need to operate the pressing operation section. In other words, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Therefore, before the timing ty2 arrives. In addition, it is possible to change from the state in which the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated.

  Further, when the setting value is changed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at timing ty1, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at timing tx or timing ty2. It does not have to be. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. However, at the timing ty1, the second operation information is maintained. Since the information is stored, during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1, the setting key switch 1311a can be freely changed between the ON operation state and the OFF operation state. Yes.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty2. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG only needs to be reset to 0 during the period from the timing ty2 until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed. In this example, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing ty1, and the setting key is set at the timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed. Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has been initialized (step S38) after the setting change processing (step S37) from timing ty2. In the meantime, any value may be used as long as the value is reset to zero.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (C), when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. Need not be. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0 as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when the setting value confirmation display is performed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned ON at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after the timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set as the main operation information. Store in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty2, it is determined to perform the set value confirmation display processing (step S28) based on the storage of the operation information, and from the time of timing ty2, the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is performed. To do. In addition, after the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at timing ty2, when the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting value confirmation display process ( Step S28) is to be completed (timing t4).

  Note that when the setting value confirmation display is performed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at timing ty1, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at timing tx or timing ty2. It does not have to be. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. However, at the timing ty1, the second operation information is maintained. Since the information is stored, during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1, the setting key switch 1311a can be freely changed between the ON operation state and the OFF operation state. Yes.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing ty1, and the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed at the timing t4. Although the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 0 between the timing ty2 and the time when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. It only needs to be reset to.

  In this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on process, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. As a condition, a value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 in FIGS. It is assumed that the situation continues. In this regard, the situation in which the main body frame 4 is never opened with respect to the outer frame 2 before the timing ty1 arrives, or the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 between the timing t3 and the timing ty1. In the closed state, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is limited to not set the value 1 (set to the value 0) as the second operation information. Yes. This may be changed or set illegally when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (such as when it is difficult for the game hall manager to notice) during the game hall business hours, etc. This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in this example, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 1 in step S14 of the main control side power-on process. The situation is such that the main body frame 4 is never opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or the outer frame 2 is moved from the timing t3 to the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, when it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. According to this, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the RAM clearing is performed. It is possible to set the notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1, and to prevent the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) from being disabled. Even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to prevent at least the occurrence of trouble in the game start itself.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as the first operation information at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, and the first operation information is controlled by the main control. The first operation information stored in the MPU general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) and stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Further, at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after the timing tx, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set as the main control MPU. The second operation information stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) and stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. At timing ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing ( Whether to perform step S28) is determined, and the determined processing is performed. In other words, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx and until the timing ty1 when the second operation information is stored, the setting key switch 1311a is in the ON operation state and the OFF operation is performed. It is possible to change freely. At time ty1, the second operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU so as to reflect the operation state of the setting key switch 1311a changed in the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. At the timing ty2 after that, whether to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38), to perform setting change processing (step S37), or to confirm the set value based on the storage of the operation information Whether to perform the display process (step S28) is determined, and the determined process is performed. As a result, when the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is performed, the hall manager erroneously turns on the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. Even if the user forgets to operate the pachinko machine 1 by changing the setting key switch 1311a to the ON-operating state until the timing ty1 when the second operation information is stored. There is no need to turn the power on again, and the processing that the hall manager intends after powering on the pachinko machine 1 (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing Any one of (step S28) can be promptly executed. Further, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, even if the hall manager erroneously turns on the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, By changing the setting key switch 1311a to the state in which the second operation information is stored until the timing ty1 arrives, the setting value setting need not be changed again, and the pachinko machine 1 After the power is turned on, the processing intended by the hall manager (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), or setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)) is promptly executed. be able to.

  As described above, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the period until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored comes. The first operation information is configured to be longer than the period until the timing tx at which the first operation information is stored. Thereby, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is not necessary to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a at the same time, and the setting key switch 1311a is operated after the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. It is possible to perform the ON operation, and the operation of the hall manager with respect to the plurality of operation units can be facilitated.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when the initialization of the main control built-in RAM and the setting value setting are changed, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. The timing for operating the pressing operation unit of 633z is set to a timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is not set to a timing ty1 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. This is composed of a push-down switch whose operation state is not maintained for the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, and after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, until the timing ty1 arrives. Even if an attempt is made to continue to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z, it may be unclear whether or not the timing ty1 has arrived, so the hall manager may operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. There is a possibility of stopping. For this reason, about the timing which operates the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, it is set as the time of the timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated for a long period of time. There is no need to continue, and initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) and setting change processing (step S37) can be reliably executed as intended by the hall manager.

  In addition, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) is a system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty that is the time point when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process for starting (booting) is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received. At the time when the initialization processing of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed, a command for specifying that it is waiting to determine whether or not there is a setting key ON operation at timing ty1 is issued to the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). ) To complete the initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510 and until the timing ty1 arrives, the setting key switch 1311a is output depending on the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. The setting key operable notification is executed to notify that the state can be changed to the state in which ON is operated. This setting key operation possible notification includes a voice that repeats “setting key operation is possible”, a message “setting key operation is possible!”, And setting value setting key switch 1311a of 1-6 in the selection operation process is ON. Lamp light emission is executed in a color corresponding to whether or not it is being operated.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is limited not to monitor fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 or fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005. . That is, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty2, the hall manager changes from the state where the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to the state where it is not operated, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. It is possible to change from a state where the magnetic sensor 2470 is turned off to a state where it is turned off, or from a state where it is turned off to a state where it is turned on. It is restricted not to execute fraud monitoring using. As a result, even when the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or adds vibration when operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it is detected as an illegal act. Can be prevented, and inhibition of regular work can be suppressed.

[13. Behavior of pachinko machine in change permission state and confirmation display state]
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where setting value change permission and setting value confirmation display are performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. FIG. 154 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting value setting change, and FIGS. 155 and 156 are time charts showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting value confirmation display. In the state where the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are performed, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is different from the state where the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are not performed. It has become a thing. In addition, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the confirmation display of the set value is substantially the same as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting change of the set value. Since the pressing operation unit is not operated, even after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is different in that various information at the time of turning off the power is held.

  As shown in FIG. 154, when the setting value is changed, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state. In some cases, it is necessary to shut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). If the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the outer frame 2 to open the main body frame 4 (timing t1), then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by operating and turning ON (timing t2). Then, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the RAM clear switch (timing t3). The value can be changed (change permission state). In such a change-permitted state, the set value (set values 1 to 6) can be changed each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the setting switching button is pressed. After that, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF (timing t4). That is, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value is changed. It becomes a state where it is impossible to change the setting (change impossible state). Then, by removing the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the player can play a game. It becomes a state.

  When the setting value is changed, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. The setting change process in step S37 is not finished until it is set (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, In step S52, the interrupt permission setting is prohibited from being performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed as compared with normal power-on. Since the main control timer interrupt process is not started until the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control in step S114. The process, the normal symbol in step S116 and the normal electric accessory control process, etc. are not executed and are in a standby state. In other words, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state), but the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005. When a game ball B enters the gate portion 2003, the detection signal input is not validated, the special symbol variation display, the normal symbol variation display, the second start port, etc. A special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the grand prize opening door 2413, the distributing operation of the sorting piece 2415, etc. is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 155, when performing the confirmation display of the currently set value, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. If it is in the state, it is necessary to shut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). If the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the outer frame 2 to open the main body frame 4 (timing t1), then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by operating and turning ON (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to turn on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z (timing t3), it is possible to perform a confirmation display of the set value ( Confirmation display state). In such a confirmation display state, on the setting display 1310g, the current set value (the set value among the set value 1 to the set value 6 when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) is displayed. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (timing t4). ), The setting indicator 1310g is switched from the state where the set value is displayed to the state where it is not displayed. In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). After timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value is displayed. The confirmation display cannot be performed (confirmation impossible state). Then, by removing the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the player can play a game. It becomes a state.

  Note that, when the currently set value is displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, but is set at timing t4. Until the key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value confirmation display process in step S28 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S358 of the setting value confirmation display process), and from timing t3. During the period up to the timing t4, it is prohibited so that the interrupt permission setting in the subsequent step S52 is not performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in the step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. Since the main control timer interrupt process is not started until the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control in step S114. The process, the normal symbol in step S116 and the normal electric accessory control process, etc. are not executed and are in a standby state. In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state), but the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005. When the game ball B enters the gate portion 2003, the detection signal input is not validated, the special symbol variation display, the normal symbol variation display, the second start port, etc. A special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the grand prize opening door 2413, the distributing operation of the sorting piece 2415, etc. is not performed.

[13-1. Special symbols, various incoming ball detection, and payout devices]
As shown in FIG. 154, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interruption processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) has not started. State in which it is impossible to display the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 It becomes impossible state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. Thus, the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is in a state (variable state) in which the special symbol can be variably displayed.

  If the big hit game is started at the timing t6 after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the detection signal is output when the game ball B wins the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. While the input is valid, the special symbol display on the special display unit of the function display unit 1400 cannot be displayed in a variable state (variable state B). As described above, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is not possible. In A, the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, whereas in the non-variable state B, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2002 is not effective. The difference is that the input of the detection signal is made effective when the game ball B wins the two starting holes 2004.

  In addition, when the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed at the time of turning off the power at the timing t0, or when the special symbol variation display is stored as pending. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated. Subsequently, in step S38, a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is selected. Since it is cleared except for, information on the change display of the special symbol will be lost. For this reason, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, although it is in a variable state, it does not resume the change display of the special symbol that has been interrupted when the power is turned off. In addition, the special symbol stored as the hold at the time when the power supply is cut off is not displayed.

  In addition, a fraud related error (for example, a severe error at the time of magnetic detection or vibration detection) has occurred that makes it impossible to play games such as fluctuation display of special symbols in the state where fluctuation is possible In some cases, the peripheral control MPU performs display processing of fraud related error information for notifying a predetermined display (for example, the effect display device 1600) or a predetermined light emitting device (for example, a plurality of light emitting devices). LED 121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.), which performs a light emission process of a fraud related error mode for notifying that effect, or a predetermined sound output device (for example, lower speaker 153a, etc.) The fraud related error output process for performing the related error sound output process is performed, but during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. The change permission state, but is an inability to perform the variable display of the special symbols state (variation disabled state A), is not carried out the fraud-related error output processing described above. In the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is assumed that the hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and changes the setting value. This is because the work efficiency of the hall clerk is emphasized rather than the necessity of fraud related error output processing intended to suggest to the event, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. In addition, regarding the point of not performing the fraud related error output processing, do not perform all of the fraud related error information display processing, the light emission processing of the fraud related error mode, and the fraud related error sound output processing described above. However, in view of suppressing the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk, at least a part of the fraud related error output processing may not be performed. For example, it is possible to exemplify not performing the output process of the fraud related error sound that can reduce the work efficiency of the worker at a high volume while performing other processes as usual.

  Further, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) has not been started, so the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. , When a game ball B enters the winning prize opening 2005, the first receiving entrance 2007, the second receiving entrance 2008 or the like, or the gate portion 2003, the detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors are mainly controlled. The MPU does not input and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that the game ball B may not be detected by the detection sensor, or may be treated as invalid while a detection signal from the detection sensor is input. As described above, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (variation of special symbols) Display) and the payout of the game ball B will not be performed, so that the game ball B may be moved to the first start port 2002 or the second start port for some reason during the regular operation of changing the setting value. Even if the player enters the ball 2004, the progress of the game can be suppressed. Similarly, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B is performed. , The high-probability state is never given, so that the game ball B is in some cases during the regular operation for confirming and displaying the set value for the big prize opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, the first Even if the player enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

  In the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning awards and gate portions (gates). At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is not input by the main control MPU so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Thus, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008, for example, the measurement by the base monitor 1310h described above for the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change-permitted state. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (the target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a clogging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the change-permitted state and the base monitor 1310h It is possible to avoid such a situation that it is measured (added to the out number counter).

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the first start port 2002 is started. When the game ball B enters the gates 2003 and various winning ports such as the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the detection sensors corresponding to each Is detected by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective. As described above, when the detection of the game ball B is valid, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (special symbol variation display) The game ball B can be paid out. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is validated, when the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B, the high It is possible to give a probability state (when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 as described above when it is set to “valid state”).

  In this example, from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, that is, from the end time of the change permission state, the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007. When the game ball B enters the various winning entrances such as the second receiving port 2008 and the gate unit 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective, but at the timing t5, the outer frame 2 On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as effective. This is because it is difficult to fire the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is difficult to start the game substantially. Because there is.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on process and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. The game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580. In other words, the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580 in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. However, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as described above, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning awards and gate portions (gates). For example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, or the big winning port 2005 in the change-permitted state, the game ball B is not paid out. .

  Note that when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580 when the power is cut off at the timing t0, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RWM clear button 633z is input from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 while operating the. Since the entire area is cleared, information regarding the payout of the game ball B is lost. For this reason, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580, but the game ball B that has not been paid out when the power is cut off can be discharged. It will not resume.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, main control side timer interruption processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) The special symbol (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) on the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 is displayed in a variable manner. Incapable of being changed (unchangeable state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. Thus, the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is in a state (variable state) in which the special symbol can be variably displayed.

  If the big hit game is started at the timing t6 after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the detection signal is output when the game ball B wins the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. While the input is valid, the special symbol display on the special display unit of the function display unit 1400 cannot be displayed in a variable state (variable state B). As described above, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is not possible. In A, the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, whereas in the non-variable state B, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2002 is not effective. The difference is that the input of the detection signal is made effective when the game ball B wins the two starting holes 2004.

  In addition, when the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed at the time of turning off the power at the timing t0, or when the special symbol variation display is stored as pending. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z (when the setting value is changed), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. At this point, the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated, and then, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. While the information regarding the display is lost, the timing t is operated without operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (when the set value confirmation display is performed), the set value in step S28 of the main control power-on process when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4. Although the confirmation display process is ended, the process of step S38 for clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area is not executed as after the setting change process of step S37. Information will be held. For this reason, after the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, ends, the change display of the special symbol that has been interrupted when the power is turned off is resumed, triggered by the changeable state. In addition, the special symbol stored as the hold when the power is turned off is displayed.

  In addition, as described above, in a variable state, a fraud related error (for example, a serious error at the time of magnetic detection or vibration detection) that makes it impossible to perform a game such as a special symbol variation display due to some illegal act. When an error occurs, the peripheral control MPU performs a display process of fraud related error information to notify a predetermined display (for example, the effect display device 1600), or a predetermined light emitting device. (E.g., a plurality of LEDs 121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.) is subjected to a light emission process of a fraud related error mode to notify that, or a predetermined sound output device (e.g., the lower speaker 153a, etc.) The fraud-related error output process for performing the fraud-related error sound output process for notifying the effect is performed. In the confirmation display state, which is the period until the change permission state, the fraud related error output process described above is performed although it is in a state where the special symbol variation display cannot be performed (variable state A). I do not do it. In the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is assumed that the hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and performs confirmation display of the set value. This is because the work efficiency of the hall clerk is emphasized rather than the necessity of fraud related error output processing intended to suggest to the event, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. In addition, regarding the point of not performing the fraud related error output processing, do not perform all of the fraud related error information display processing, the light emission processing of the fraud related error mode, and the fraud related error sound output processing described above. However, in view of suppressing the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk, at least a part of the fraud related error output processing may not be performed. For example, it is possible to exemplify not performing the output process of the fraud related error sound that can reduce the work efficiency of the worker at a high volume while performing other processes as usual. Also, in order not to perform fraud related error output processing, processing that is prohibited according to the difference in events that hinder the work of hall clerk between the control performed in the change permission state described above You may make it differ in the kind, number, etc. of. For example, in the change permission state, if any fraud related error occurs, all fraud related error output processing is not performed. In the confirmation display state, if any fraud related error occurs, a fraud related error is output. In the change permission state, only a part of the processing is not performed, or if any fraud related error occurs, all fraud related error output processing is not performed, while the confirmation display status Then, it can be exemplified that a part of the fraud related error output process is not performed when some kind of fraud related error occurs.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is not started as in the change permission state. 2002, the second start port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008 and other various winning ports and the detection sensor corresponding to each when the game ball B enters the gate unit 2003 The detection signal from the main control MPU is not input, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that the game ball B may not be detected by the detection sensor, or may be treated as invalid while a detection signal from the detection sensor is input. As described above, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (variation of special symbols) Display) and the payout of the game ball B will not be performed, so that the game ball B may be brought into the first start port 2002 or the second start port for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the player enters the ball 2004, the progress of the game can be suppressed. Similarly, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B is performed. , The high-probability state is never given, so that the game ball B is in some cases during the regular operation for confirming and displaying the set value for the big prize opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, the first Even if the player enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

  In the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning awards and gate portions (gates). At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is not input by the main control MPU so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is measured by the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to exclude the game ball B from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a ball clogging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state, and the base monitor 1310h It is possible to avoid such a situation that it is measured (added to the out number counter).

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the first start port 2002 is started. When the game ball B enters the gates 2003 and various winning ports such as the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the detection sensors corresponding to each Is detected by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective. As described above, when the detection of the game ball B is valid, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (special symbol variation display) The game ball B can be paid out. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is validated, when the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B, the high It is possible to give a probability state (when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 as described above when it is set to “valid state”).

  In this example, from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, from the end of the confirmation display state, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big prize winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007. When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the second receiving port 2008 and the gate unit 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective, but at the timing t5, the outer frame 2 On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as effective. This is because it is difficult to fire the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is difficult to start the game substantially. Because there is.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on process and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. The game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580. That is, the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580 in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as in the change permission state. However, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as described above, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning openings and gate portions (gates). For example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, or the big winning port 2005 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B is not paid out. .

  Note that when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580 when the power is cut off at the timing t0, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. If the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 while operating (when the setting value is changed), the RWM clear button 633z is operated from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 at that time. Since a signal (detection signal) is input and the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared, information relating to payout of the game ball B is lost, whereas the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 (when the set value confirmation display is performed), the payout control built-in RAM Because it does not execute a process of clearing the area, so that the information about the payout of the game ball B is held. For this reason, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the game ball B that has not been paid out when the power is shut off is triggered by the fact that the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580. The payout is resumed.

  In the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting indicator 1310g displays the current setting value (setting value 1 to setting value when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. 6 is set), but in the confirmation display state that the game ball B that has not been paid out is being paid out when the power is turned off as described above, the payout such as a broken ball When a related error occurs, the payout control MPU notifies a payout related to a display device (for example, a 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board 633) different from the setting indicator 1310g. Error information display processing or for a predetermined light emitting device (for example, a plurality of LEDs 121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.) And to perform a payout associated error output processing for light emission processing notifications to payout related errors manner. As a result, in the confirmation display state, whether the payout of the game ball B that has not been paid out when the power is turned off has been completed, or a payout-related error such as a broken ball has occurred and the game ball B has been paid out. It is possible to determine whether or not there is a loss, and it is possible to prevent the player from causing a loss. Since the payout-related error processing is an important event for smoothly playing the game later, payout maintenance is emphasized regardless of the work efficiency of the hall clerk. The same processing as normal time is performed without any restriction and without any suppression.

  As described above, when the game ball B has entered the various winning holes and the game ball B has been paid out from the payout device 580 when the power is cut off at the timing t0, the RWM clear button 633z If the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation unit (when the set value confirmation display is performed), at that time, the game ball that has not been paid out when the power is shut off The payout of B can be resumed. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, a special symbol (first special symbol display) on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. , The second special symbol) is in a state in which it is impossible to display the variation (unvariable state A), and the special symbol change in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 when the power is shut off at timing t0. When the display is performed, or when the change display of the special symbol is stored as the hold, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z If it is (when confirming the set value), at that time, the display of the special symbol that has been suspended when the power is turned off is resumed, Never or performs variable display of the special symbols are stored as pending at the time of the cut off. In other words, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the change display of the special symbol that has been interrupted when the power is turned off is resumed, or is stored as a hold when the power is turned off. It is a period during which only the game ball B that has not been paid out can be paid out at the time when the power supply is cut off, while the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and the progress of the game is prevented. . For example, when the hall is closed, when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, when the power is turned off, the power is turned off. Loss will occur to the player for the game balls B that have not been paid out, but after that, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and put into a confirmation display state to prevent the progress of the game after the power is turned off. However, it is possible to only pay out the game balls B that have not been paid out when the power is turned off, and it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  As a modification of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Until the setting key is turned OFF, the special symbol variation display is disabled, the progress of the game after the power is shut off is prevented, and the game ball B that has not been paid out when the power is turned off is displayed. While the period during which only payout can be performed is set, the setting value confirmation display may not be performed. In addition, when an operation unit different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided and the hall clerk turns the operation on, the time until the operation is turned off. Only the payout of the game ball B that has not been paid out when the hall clerk turns on the operation while the hall clerk turns off the operation after the hall clerk turns the operation on is made impossible. It is good also as a period which can perform. Also in such a case, for example, when the hall is closed, the game clerk B who has not been paid out when the hall clerk turns on the operation while preventing the progress of the game during the period when the hall clerk turns the operation on is paid out. It is possible to prevent the loss of the player.

  As described above, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable symbol state in which the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be displayed is changed. The special symbol stored as the hold is not displayed when the power is turned off. On the other hand, after the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, is finished, the state becomes variable. In response to this, the special symbol stored as a hold when the power is turned off is displayed. More specifically, when a ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 during the special symbol fluctuation display, a special random number is stored as a hold in the main control built-in RAM. If a special random number is stored as a hold in the main control built-in RAM at the time of shutting off, the special random number is stored and held as game backup information in the main control side power-off process. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on after the power is turned on at the timing t3, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4 and stored in the main control built-in RAM when the change permission state is finished. Since the game backup information is cleared, the special random number stored as the hold is also lost.

  In the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special random number stored as the hold before the power is turned off is deleted. The on-hold display on the on-hold number display is hidden. In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. No special random number is stored as a new hold.

  By the way, when the change permission state ends, if the special random number stored as a hold before the power is shut off is not erased, the following adverse effects occur. In this example, the higher the set value among the set values 1 to 6, the greater the number of jackpot determination values set in the jackpot determination table so that the jackpot probability is higher. When changing the setting value in the permission state, if the setting value is changed from a low setting value (for example, setting value 1) to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6), the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. Therefore, there is a possibility that the special random number that was out of the setting value before power-off will become a big hit in the setting value after the end of the change permission state. On the other hand, when the setting value is changed in the change permission state, if the setting value is changed from a high setting value (for example, setting value 6) to a low setting value (for example, setting value 1), the result of the big hit determination is Since the special random number that is regarded as a big hit decreases and the probability of the big hit decreases, the special random number that was a big hit at the setting value before power-off may be missed at the setting value after the end of the change permission state . In this example, in this example, when the change permission state ends, the special random number stored as the hold is deleted, so that the result of the jackpot determination is changed before the power is turned off and after the change permission state ends. It is possible to prevent a situation that lacks fairness from occurring. In particular, when a person who is not a hall manager changes a setting value in a change-permitted state due to fraudulent behavior, the person tries to change the setting value to a higher setting value (for example, setting value 6). For example, even when the setting value is changed to the setting value 6), the result of the jackpot determination is not changed to the jackpot, and it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from performing an illegal act. If the hall administrator changes the setting value while the change is permitted, the special random number stored as a hold before the power is turned off will be deleted, so that the player will not be penalized. It is preferable to shut off the power supply in a state where there is no hold and then change the setting value in the change permission state.

  In addition, when changing the setting value in the change-permitted state, not only when the setting value is changed from a low setting value (for example, setting value 1) before power-off to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6), Even when the set value before power-off is maintained, the special random number stored as a hold is erased at the end of the change permission state. For example, when a person who is not a hall administrator changes a setting value in a change-permitted state due to fraudulent behavior, the person tries to change the setting value to a higher setting value (for example, setting value 6). There is a possibility that it is not necessary to change the high setting value. Even in such a case, the special random number stored as a hold before turning off the power is deleted at the end of the change-permitted state. Since the opportunity to perform the jackpot determination based on the loss is lost, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from performing an illegal act.

  On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 and then shifts to the confirmation display state, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 and stored in the main control built-in RAM when the confirmation display state ends. Since the game backup information is not cleared, a special random number stored as a hold before power-off is held. In the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. No special random number is stored as a new hold. In such a confirmation display state, only the setting value setting confirmation is performed, and the setting value is not changed unlike the change permission state. In other words, even if a person who is not the hall administrator performs setting confirmation of the set value in the confirmation display state due to fraud, the special random number stored as the hold will be Because the result of jackpot judgment will not change after the end, and profits will not be gained by fraudulent behavior, hold a special random number stored as a hold before turning off the power even at the end of the confirmation display state It is said.

  In addition, when a person who is not the hall administrator checks the set value in the confirmation display state due to fraudulent behavior, he or she accesses the back of the pachinko machine 1 in some way while pretending to be playing normally. If the setting value confirmed illegally is an unfavorable setting content (for example, the setting value 1 having the lowest jackpot probability), an advantageous setting content ( For example, it is conceivable that a pachinko machine 1 having a setting value 6) having the highest probability of jackpot is obtained and immediately left. In this case, in this example, when checking the setting value in the confirmation display state, the hold is held without erasing. It is possible to make it difficult to take an uncomfortable action such as “get away”, and it is possible to easily catch a person who performs an illegal setting check by monitoring such a strange action. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting confirmation from being performed by anyone other than the hall administrator.

  In addition, in order to further increase the deterrence of fraud, in the confirmation display state, the function display unit is added to the hold display on the effect display device 1600 while holding the special random number stored as the hold before the power is turned off. The hold display on the hold number display 1400 is also temporarily hidden, and is displayed as if the special random number stored as the hold does not exist as in the change permission state. This makes it possible for the fraudster to misunderstand that the hold has disappeared, and to abandon the continuation of the game after the unauthorized setting confirmation. In addition, in order to effectively exhibit such a fraud deterrent effect, not only in the confirmation display state but also after the confirmation display state ends, a predetermined return timing (for example, when the body frame 4 is closed or for a predetermined time) The on-hold display may be in a non-display state over a period until the elapse (e.g.).

[13-2. About jackpot games and launchers]
As shown in FIG. 154, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interruption processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) has not started. The grand prize opening door 2413 that can open and close the big prize opening 2005 and the sorting piece 2415 that distributes the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 are operated. It becomes impossible. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. Then, the grand prize opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. Thus, when the big hit game is started at the timing t6 after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated as the big hit game. The game ball B can be made to enter the big prize opening 2005, or the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 can be distributed to the second reception opening 2008.

  When the power is cut off at the timing t0 and the big prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operating during the big hit game, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. Then, the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated, and subsequently, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. Information regarding the winning prize opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 is being lost. For this reason, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it becomes possible to operate the prize winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415, but is interrupted when the power is shut off. The big hit game that has been made is not resumed, and the grand prize winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are not operated.

  As described above, in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) has not started, so the first start port 2002, the second When a game ball B enters the winning port such as the start port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, and the gate unit 2003, detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors Is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big prize opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, Neither the payout nor the high probability state is given, so that the game ball B can be used for some reason during the regular operation of changing the setting value for the big prize opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, Even if the player enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the prize winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, that is, from the end of the change permission state. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the special winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. It is good also as a state in which it is possible. This is because it is difficult to fire the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is difficult to start the game substantially. Because there is.

  In the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interruption process (the firing permission signal setting process in step S113) is not started, but the firing by the handle 182 in the change permission state. In consideration of performing an operation check or the like, during that period, the logic of a launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launch of the game ball B is permitted is set. When the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B can be launched. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (fire permission signal setting process in step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the change permission state Even after the end of, the state in which the game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated is continued. In this way, it is possible to prepare for the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5. The game can be started immediately after closing.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, main control side timer interruption processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) Since the game has not started, the prize winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the prize winning opening 2005 and the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2005 are distributed to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008. The sorting piece 2415 cannot be operated. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. Then, the grand prize opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. Thus, when the big hit game is started at the timing t6 after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated as the big hit game. The game ball B can be made to enter the big prize opening 2005, or the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 can be distributed to the second reception opening 2008.

  When the power is cut off at the timing t0 and the big winning game door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operating during the big hit game, the timing while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at t3 (when the setting value is changed), the setting of step S37 in the main control power-on process is performed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. Since the change process is ended, and then, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, so that the big hit game is being executed (the operation of the big prize door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415) While the information on the middle) is lost, the pachinko machine 1 does not operate at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. If the power source is turned on (when the setting value confirmation display is performed), the setting value confirmation display processing in step S28 of the main control power-on processing is terminated when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4. However, since the process of step S38 that clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area is not executed as in the case of the setting change process of step S37, the big hit game is being executed (the big prize door 2413 And information on the operation of the sorting piece 2415). For this reason, as shown in FIG. 156, after the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, is ended, it becomes possible to operate the special prize opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415. As a trigger, the big hit game that has been interrupted when the power is cut off is resumed, and the grand prize winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. Further, as described later, it is possible to prepare for the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before restarting the big hit game that was interrupted when the power was cut off at the timing t5. Immediately after resuming the game, it is possible to efficiently enter the game ball B into the big winning opening 2007 or the second receiving port 2008.

  As described above, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) has not started, so the first start port 2002, the second When a game ball B enters the winning port such as the start port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, and the gate unit 2003, detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors Is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big prize opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, Neither the payout nor the high probability state is given, so that the game ball B can be used for some reason during the regular operation of confirming and displaying the set value for the big prize opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, Even if the player enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the prize winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, from the end of the confirmation display state. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the special winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. It is good also as a state in which it is possible. This is because it is difficult to fire the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is difficult to start the game substantially. Because there is. In addition, when the big hit game suspended from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, from the end of the confirmation display state when the power is cut off, before the big hit game is resumed. Although it is difficult to prepare the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182, it is possible to delay the restart of the big hit game that was interrupted when the power was turned off, before restarting the big hit game. It is easy to prepare the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182, and it is possible to efficiently enter the game ball B into the grand prize winning port 2007 and the second receiving port 2008 immediately after resuming the big hit game. .

  Further, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as in the change permission state, the main control side timer interrupt process (the firing permission signal setting process in step S113) has not started, but the confirmation display In consideration of performing the check of the launch operation by the handle 182 in the state, the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted during that period. The logic is set so that the game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (fire permission signal setting process in step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the change permission state Even after the end of, the state in which the game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated is continued. In this way, it is possible to prepare for the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5. The game can be started immediately after closing.

[13-3. About production devices and production members]
As shown in FIG. 154, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and a predetermined display is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to display an image. And in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the symbol display (decorative symbol display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image from the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and speaker are used. The setting change notification for notifying that the setting value setting is being changed is executed. As a notification of the setting change, a sound that repeats “setting change”, a message “setting change!”, And lamp emission in a color corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 in the selection operation process are executed. I am going to do that. The notification during setting change is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the change-permitted state, and is executed with priority over the body frame opening notification performed when the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. . That is, when the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release notification (such as display of “frame open” or sound) is normally performed, but in the change permission state, the main body frame release notification is performed. The setting change notification is executed with the highest priority without performing the above. Note that the body frame release notification and the setting change notification are executed in parallel, and the setting change notification has priority over the body frame release notification, and the body frame release notification is performed after the setting change notification ends. A form can also be illustrated. Then, after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4, until a predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, the variation of the symbol or the big hit game is caused by the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the speaker. A game start notification for notifying that it is possible to start a game such as is executed.

  In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, in addition to the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker, notification by the function display unit 1400 is also given as the above-described setting change notification. Running. Specifically, in the function display unit 1400, although not shown, a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special indicator In addition to the design indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, the setting change indicator, which consists of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change-permitted state), A confirmation display indicator that includes one LED for indicating that confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state) is provided. In the change permission state, only the LEDs of the display unit during setting change in the function display unit 1400 are turned on, and all the LEDs of the other display units are turned off. Thereby, in a change permission state, it can grasp | ascertain that a game does not advance by the notification by the function display unit 1400. FIG.

  Further, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, various winnings such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, and the like. When the game ball B enters the mouth or gate part 2003, even if the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, various winning awards and gates are displayed even if the game is not in a change-permitted period due to the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. The warning effect A for notifying that the game ball B has entered the club is executed. This warning effect A is executed with priority over the setting change notification and the main body frame release notification. That is, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without performing the setting change notification or the body frame opening notification.

  Further, the normal time when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 is a period in which the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON state, but such a setting key ON state is set. In such a case, the warning effects B and C for notifying that the setting key has been turned on illegally by the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker are executed. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the state where the setting key is turned ON while the symbol variation is being performed in a normal state, the setting key switch 1311a is returned until the setting key is turned OFF. Warning effect B is being executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state in which the setting key is turned on in a state where the symbol variation is not performed at normal time, the warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. C is running. The warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effect being executed. In other words, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority by stopping the effect being executed regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is being performed. The warning effects B and C are executed in the same manner, but the effects may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and detects the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). In other words, the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 can be adjusted stepwise. That is, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) can be detected, and the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, and the effect display device 1600 can be detected. The amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the screen can be adjusted stepwise. Specifically, an image for adjustment (a volume gauge image representing a five-stage adjustment status depending on the time of long press) and a light amount are displayed on the effect display device 1600 by long pressing the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). After displaying the gauge image), the volume and amount of light are adjusted step by step (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2) each time the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is pressed for a short time. ..), And the volume and the amount of light can be determined by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) for a predetermined time. However, during the period in which an effect using the effect operation unit 160 is being performed during symbol variation, the effect operation unit 160 is in a state of waiting for the effect operation unit 160 to be operated for that effect. Even if the operation is performed, the prohibition period in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted is set.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 (For example, the initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is performed. In other words, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is in a state in which it is not possible to perform the variable symbol display (variable incapable state A), An initial operation of a production member (for example, the production operation unit 160 or a plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210) mounted on the frame 4 or the game board 5 is performed. Each such production member is a member that can operate between an initial position and an operation position. In the initial operation of the production member, the production member normally operates from the initial position toward the operation position. Such as confirmation, and accurate alignment is performed so that the production member waits at the initial position. Then, after the change permission state ends at the timing t4, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect member. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set is transmitted during symbol variation, The effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the change.

  If the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, the change permission state or the confirmation display state is displayed. As described above, since the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is not delayed and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting, immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the function display unit It becomes a state (variable state) in which the special symbol variable display of the 1400 special symbol display can be performed. However, in such a case, since the transition to the variable state is possible without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, for example, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In the initial operation of the effect member, when a variation pattern in which an effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the design variation, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern. In some cases, the opportunity to operate the production member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in a change permission state that is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, a state in which the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot be performed (unvariable state A However, since the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is performed, the initial operation of the effect member is completed when the change permission state is entered after the change permission state ends. The possibility is high. Thereby, after the change permission state is finished, even if the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol variation, the initial operation of the effect member is not affected. Based on the variation pattern, the effect member can be moved from the initial position to the operation position, and information obtained from the effect content is not missed.

  However, the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 requires a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to be completed. For this reason, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 before the initial operation of the rendering member is completed, the initial stage of the rendering member Waiting for the completion of the operation, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect member. That is, the timing at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4 may be before or after the completion of the initial operation of the effect member. In any case, the setting key switch 1311a at the timing t4. When 1311a is turned OFF, it is possible to perform symbol variation.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and a predetermined display is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to display an image. Then, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display (decorative symbol display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased and the image of the effect display device 1600 is displayed as in the change permission state. A notification during confirmation display for notifying that the setting value confirmation display is being performed is executed by the output from the lamp and the speaker. As the notification during confirmation display, a sound that repeats “confirmation display”, a message display “confirmation display!”, And lamp emission in a color corresponding to the set values 1 to 6 are executed. It is going to be. Further, the notification during confirmation display is notification (effect) performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the body frame release notification performed when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. . That is, when the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release notification (such as “frame open” or sound) is normally performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame release notification is performed. The notification during confirmation display is executed with the highest priority without performing the above. The body frame release notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, and the confirmation display notification is given priority over the body frame release notification, and the body frame release notification is performed after the confirmation display notification is completed. A form can also be illustrated. Then, after the confirmation display state at the timing t4 is over, until a predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, depending on the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker, the symbol variation and the big hit game A game start notification for notifying that it is possible to start a game such as is executed.

  Further, after the confirmation display state at the timing t4 is over, the big hit that has been interrupted when the power is shut off is triggered by the fact that the grand prize opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. It is possible to resume the game and operate the grand prize winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415. As shown in FIG. 156, when such a big hit game is resumed, the images and lamps of the effect display device 1600, A jackpot game restart notification is issued to notify that the jackpot game 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 that are interrupted when the power source is shut off and resume the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 by the output from the speaker. Before resuming the big hit game, the output from the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker are waiting for execution of the big hit game, which is interrupted when the power is cut off, that is, the big prize opening door 2413 and the swing winning game. A big hit game standby notification for notifying that the operation of the segment 2415 is in progress may be executed. Thus, it is possible to prepare for the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before resuming the big hit game, and the game can be efficiently made to the big prize winning port 2007 and the second receiving port 2008 immediately after the big hit game is resumed. Sphere B can be entered.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, in addition to the output from the display of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker as the above-mentioned confirmation display notification as in the change permission state, Notification by the function display unit 1400 is also executed. Specifically, in the function display unit 1400, although not shown, a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special indicator In addition to the design indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, the setting change indicator, which consists of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change-permitted state), A confirmation display indicator that includes one LED for indicating that confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state) is provided. In the confirmation display state, only the LEDs of the display during confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 are turned on, and all the LEDs of the other displays are turned off. Thereby, in the confirmation display state, it can be grasped that the game does not proceed by the notification by the function display unit 1400.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, various winnings such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, and the like. When the game ball B enters the mouth or gate part 2003, even if the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, various winning awards and gates are displayed even though it is not a period in which the game is to be played in the confirmation display state due to the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600. The warning effect A for notifying that the game ball B has entered the club is executed. This warning effect A is executed in preference to the notification during confirmation display and the body frame release notification. That is, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without performing the notification during confirmation display or the main body frame opening notification.

  Further, the normal time when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 is a period in which the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON state, but such a setting key ON state is set. In such a case, the warning effects B and C for notifying that the setting key has been turned on illegally by the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker are executed. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the state where the setting key is turned ON while the symbol variation is being performed in a normal state, the setting key switch 1311a is returned until the setting key is turned OFF. Warning effect B is being executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state in which the setting key is turned on in a state where the symbol variation is not performed at normal time, the warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. C is running. The warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effect being executed. In other words, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority by stopping the effect being executed regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is being performed. The warning effects B and C are executed in the same manner, but the effects may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and detects the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). In other words, the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 can be adjusted stepwise. That is, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) can be detected, and the volume output from the speaker In addition, it is possible to adjust the light amount output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 in a stepwise manner. Specifically, an image for adjustment (a volume gauge image representing a five-stage adjustment status depending on the time of long press) and a light amount are displayed on the effect display device 1600 by long pressing the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). After displaying the gauge image), the volume and amount of light are adjusted step by step (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2) each time the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is pressed for a short time. ..), And the volume and the amount of light can be determined by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) for a predetermined time. However, during the period in which an effect using the effect operation unit 160 is being performed during symbol variation, the effect operation unit 160 is in a state of waiting for the effect operation unit 160 to be operated for that effect. Even if the operation is performed, the prohibition period in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted is set.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 (For example, the initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is performed. That is, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as in the change-permitted state, the special symbol display on the special symbol display unit of the function display unit 1400 cannot be changed (unvariable). In the state A), the initial operation of the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Each such production member is a member that can move between an initial position and an operation position. In the initial operation of the production member, each of the production members is sequentially or simultaneously arranged in a predetermined operation pattern. By making it operate, it is determined whether or not the effect member operates normally from the initial position toward the operation position, and correct alignment is performed so that the effect member stands by at the initial position. And after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, an effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set is transmitted during symbol variation, The effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the change.

  If the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, the change permission state or the confirmation display state is displayed. As described above, since the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is not delayed and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting, immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the function display unit It becomes a state (variable state) in which the special symbol variable display of the 1400 special symbol display can be performed. However, in such a case, since the transition to the variable state is possible without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, for example, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In the initial operation of the effect member, when a variation pattern in which an effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the design variation, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern. In some cases, the opportunity to operate the production member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is impossible to display the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (non-variable state A However, since the initial operation of the production member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is performed, the initial operation of the production member is completed when shifting to the variable state after completion of the confirmation display state. The possibility is high. Thereby, even after the end of the confirmation display state, even when the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol variation, it is not affected by the initial operation of the effect member, Based on the variation pattern, the effect member can be moved from the initial position to the operation position, and information obtained from the effect content is not missed.

  However, the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 requires a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to be completed. For this reason, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 before the initial operation of the rendering member is completed, the initial performance member is displayed. Waiting for the completion of the operation, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect member. That is, the timing at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4 may be before or after the completion of the initial operation of the effect member. In any case, the setting key switch 1311a at the timing t4. When 1311a is turned OFF, it is possible to perform symbol variation.

  In addition, when each production member is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, at least the initial operation of the production member mounted on the game board 5 is executed in advance and is mounted on the main body frame 4. The initial operation of the effect member that has been performed may be delayed until “after closing of the main body frame 4 at timing t5”. This is because the body frame 4 is opened during setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display, and the body frame 4 is closed by the closing operation of the body frame 4 after the setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display ends. An impact is generated on the frame 4. For this reason, during the closing operation of the main body frame 4, there is a possibility that a production member mounted on the main body frame 4 will not operate normally, or a situation such as a displacement of the initial position may occur, The initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 can be dealt with even when such a situation occurs by starting after the main body frame 4 is closed.

  In addition, after each of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is sequentially or simultaneously initialized, the initial operation of each effect member is not normally completed (each effect member The initial detection is performed again when there is an effect member that is not detected at the initial position at a predetermined time by the origin detection sensor that detects the initial position of the current position, or when there is an effect member that is not detected at the initial position at the predetermined time. When there is a production member that is not detected at the initial position even at a predetermined time after the operation or retry operation is performed), the production using the production member that has not been completed normally is executed during symbol variation. It is supposed to be restricted so as not to. Here, as described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is not set to ON when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, the pachinko machine Immediately after the machine 1 is turned on, the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be displayed in a variable state (variable state), and the initial operation of the effect member is performed. . In this example, if the initial operation of the effect member under such circumstances is not completed normally, the player feels uncomfortable that the effect member remains stopped at a position different from the initial position during the special symbol variation display. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, and the setting value setting is changed and the setting value confirmation display is performed. If there is not, any effect member is detected at the initial position at a predetermined time after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 (time when the initial operation of each effect member is finished and is assumed to be located at the initial position). When it is not, an initial position error notification to the outside is performed by an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker.

  On the other hand, when the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation during the setting value setting change (change permission state) or the setting value confirmation display (confirmation display state), the normal setting change or confirmation display is performed. In order to avoid the hindrance to the work, even if the effect member remains stopped at a position different from the initial position, the initial position error notification is not performed. Then, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, an initial position error notification to the outside is performed by an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker. The initial position error notification is started after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. However, the initial position error notification is a specification that starts in advance from the time when the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation. May be. In addition, at the time when the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation, notification of a mode that does not hinder the normal setting change or confirmation display work among the images, lamps, and speakers output from the effect display device 1600 ( For example, the specification may be executed in advance only for the lamp).

  As a modification of the above, if the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, It is in a state in which it is impossible to display the symbols in a variable manner, and while preventing the progress of the game, the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are prevented. While the initial operation is performed, the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display may not be performed. Further, when an operation unit different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided, and the hall clerk turns the operation on, the operation unit is turned off. When the special symbol change display is disabled, the hall clerk prevents the progress of the game after the operation is turned on, and the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is performed. It is good also as a period to be called. Even in such a case, after the hall clerk turns off the operation, even if a variation pattern in which an effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the pattern change, the initial operation of the effect member is affected. Accordingly, the effect member can be moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern, and information obtained from the effect contents can be prevented from being missed.

  As described above, the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 include the volume output from the speaker and the light amount output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to adjust. More specifically, when the setting value is changed or the setting value is confirmed, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3. Prior to the start of the setting change process in step S37 and the set value confirmation display process in step S28, the wait time waiting process in step S22 is performed. In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) performs an initialization process for starting (booting) a system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. It is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received. Thus, at the start of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU has already completed the initialization process for starting (booting) the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510. The operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) can be detected, and the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 can be adjusted. It has become.

  In addition, regarding the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600, the volume before the power is shut off when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. Information regarding the amount of light is not retained, and the initial state (for example, a state in which the volume and the amount of light have a median value) is restored. For this reason, the volume and light amount after power-on change to a state different from the volume and light amount adjusted before power-off.

  Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the change permission state and the confirmation display state are terminated, and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are terminated, the special symbol display in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is completed. It has shifted to a variable state where it is possible to perform a variable display of symbols. That is, prior to the player being able to start playing in a variable state, the sound is output from a light output member such as a volume output from a speaker, a lamp, or a screen of the effect display device 1600. The amount of light to be adjusted can be adjusted. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, a variation pattern in which a predetermined effect is set during symbol variation is used. In the case of transmission, a sound (game sound) is output from the speaker based on the information set for the effect during the design variation, or light is emitted from a light emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600. If such an effect is started before the adjustment of the light quantity and volume, the volume and light quantity are output in the initial state, and the player may feel uncomfortable. In this example, in this example, the player can start the game by adjusting the volume and the amount of light before the player can start the game in the variable state. In the meantime, the volume and light quantity can be changed from the initial state, and after the game is started by the player, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable due to the volume and light quantity in the initial state.

  In this example, an image for adjustment on the effect display device 1600 by long-pressing the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) (a volume gauge image representing a five-stage adjustment state depending on the time of long press, After displaying the light intensity gauge image), the volume and light intensity are adjusted step by step (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 →) each time the effect operation section 160 (press operation section 161) is further pressed. 2), and the volume and the amount of light can be determined by not operating the production operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) for a predetermined time. In the changeable state, when the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker as the volume and light amount are changed. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to change the volume and the amount of light when the presentation operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated. The change sound is not output. This is because it is assumed that the hole manager is changing the setting value or confirming the setting value in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4. This is because the work efficiency of the hall manager is emphasized rather than the necessity of outputting a change sound notifying that the volume or the amount of light has been changed, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. In addition, when the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated, the light amount is changed and light is output from a light emitting member such as a lamp or a screen of the effect display device 1600 with the changed light amount. Since it is not an event that hinders the work of the hall manager, it is not prohibited even in the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

  Further, in this example, when an operation for changing the volume and the amount of light is performed using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) in the variable display state, the output is performed at the adjusted volume and amount of light at that time. It reflects immediately. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation of changing the volume or the light amount using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), but at that time, It is not reflected to output with the adjusted volume and light quantity, but is reflected to output with the adjusted volume and light quantity after completion of the change permission state and the confirmation display state. In other words, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as will be described in detail later, a warning notification is given to the outside so that a person other than the hall manager does not perform an illegal act. Although the output from the effect display device 1600 being executed as such a warning notice, the output from the lamp or speaker is set to a fixed volume or light amount that cannot be adjusted to the adjusted volume or light amount. I am doing so. As a result, even in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, even if an operation for changing the volume or the light amount is performed using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), it is difficult to notice the warning alert being executed. Can be prevented and weakening of the fraud monitoring system can be prevented.

  As described above, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, warning notifications are executed to the outside so that non-hall managers do not cheat, but the details are changed as described later. Even after completion of the permission state or the confirmation display state, the warning notification can be extended and executed. Then, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the sound volume or the sound volume can be controlled using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) even during the execution of the extended warning notification. It is possible to perform an operation to change the amount of light, but at that time, it is not reflected to output with the adjusted volume and light amount, and after adjustment of the extended warning notification, the adjusted volume and light amount This is reflected in the output. In other words, the warning display is extended and the image, lamp, and speaker output of the effect display device 1600 being executed are also set to a fixed volume and light amount, making it impossible to set the adjusted volume and light amount. . Thereby, similarly to the change permission state and the confirmation display state, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the volume or Even if an operation for changing the amount of light is performed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to notice the warning alert being executed by extension, and it is possible to prevent the fraud monitoring system from becoming weak.

  Further, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation of changing the volume and the light amount using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished. However, some of the multiple lamps are reflected at the adjusted volume and light amount when an operation to change the volume and light amount is performed. You may reflect so that it may output. For example, among the multiple lamps, the lamp used for warning alerts is reflected to output with the adjusted volume and light quantity to maintain the fraud monitoring system when the operation to change the volume and light quantity is performed. In this case, all or a part of the lamps that are not used for warning notification may be reflected so as to be output with the adjusted volume and light amount when an operation for changing the sound volume and light amount is performed.

[13-4. About fraud monitoring]
In the present embodiment, various frauds are monitored in the fraud detection process of step S112 described above. Specifically, various winning awards and gates (gates) provided in the game board 5 by changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed in the game board 5 by bringing the magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 ) Is provided, and the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraud based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, and monitors the fraud by the magnet. The monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU so that the peripheral control MPU performs fraud related error processing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5 a formed in the game board 5 to change to the game board 5. The main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraud based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor by providing a vibration sensor that detects fraud such as entering various winning holes and gates (gates) provided, A fraudulent act due to vibration is monitored, the monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is caused to perform fraud related error processing. Regarding monitoring of these fraudulent activities, the normal state (the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is not performed), the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is performed, Thus, the monitoring mode is different.

  In this example, as a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent acts by a magnet, a place where magnetism is generated (whether it is a setting change board 1311 or a setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or One magnetic sensor capable of specifying whether the game area 5a is located in front of the game area 5a is provided. In a normal state, the magnetic sensor 2470 generates magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not occur in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It monitors whether it has occurred (whether the magnet is approaching), monitors fraudulent acts such as setting change or confirmation display by a person other than the person who performs setting change or confirmation display of the set value, and moves forward of the game area 5a. The game board is monitored by monitoring whether or not magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated has occurred in the area (whether the magnet has approached), and changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a 5 is monitored for illegal activities such as entering various winning gates and gates (gates). In addition, as an illegal act with respect to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet, for example, a metal fraudulent instrument in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed) The magnet and the metal fraud are made through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility or an opening that has destroyed a part of the pachinko machine 1 with a magnet that indirectly manipulates the metal fraudulent instrument. It is conceivable to operate the instrument and illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the fraud detection process in step S112, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, it is determined that a fraud using a magnet is being performed. If it is determined that an illegal act using the magnet is being performed, the main control MPU sends a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. Is output so that the hall clerk can grasp that the cheating is being carried out.

  Further, although not shown, the magnetic sensor 2470 of the present example is constituted by a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and is a first magnetic detection having a directivity that is highly sensitive in the vertical direction with respect to the side surface on one side. Magnetic detection within the region and magnetic detection within the second magnetic detection region having a directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to the other side surface, which is the opposite side, can be performed. ing. “High sensitivity in the vertical direction” means that the sensitivity is higher in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The magnetic sensor 2470 is arranged such that the first magnetic detection region and the second magnetic detection region that are emitted from the side surface of such a sensor body spread in the front-rear direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1, and one magnetic detection region Includes the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and the magnetic detection area is a winning port such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the normal winning port 2003, the big winning port 2005, etc. on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and others. It is possible to monitor a plurality of main parts of the spherical flow path, and the other magnetic detection region includes the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be monitored. With such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet has approached the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether the magnet has approached the area in front of the game area 5a. .

  Further, in this example, as the vibration sensor 3005 for detecting an illegal act due to vibration, vibration capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration in the vicinity of the sorting piece 2415 inside the special winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5. A sensor 3004 is provided. In addition, during the big hit game during normal times, the fraudulent act is monitored using the vibration sensor 3005, and other than the big hit game, the fraudulent act is not monitored using the vibration sensor 3005. This is because, in the big hit game, the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 by the distribution piece 2415 and distributed in the inside is distributed to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008. When vibration is applied to the sorting piece 2415, it becomes possible to change the course of the game ball B inside the special winning opening 2005 and to allow the game ball B to enter the second receiving port 2008. This is to prevent such fraud. That is, during the big hit game during normal times, the vibration sensor 3005 applies vibration that should not occur (vibration due to unauthorized access) to the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 inside the big prize opening 2005. It is monitored whether the game ball B has changed the course of the game ball B inside the special winning opening 2005 and the game ball B enters the second receiving port 2008.

  Note that in the fraud detection process in step S112, when a detection signal is input from the vibration sensor 3005, it is assumed that a fraudulent act due to vibration is performed around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big prize opening 2005. Deciding. And when it is judged that the fraudulent act by vibration is performed around the distribution piece 2415 inside the winning prize opening 2005, it is installed on the game hall side through the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer so that the hall clerk can grasp that the fraudulent act is being performed.

  Also, the security signal that is output when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is performed is the same signal as the security signal that is output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is performed. . However, when a security signal is output because it is determined that a fraudulent act is caused by vibration, and when a security signal is output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed, The notification mode when external notification is performed in the fraud related error processing controlled by the control MPU is different. That is, when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is being performed and a security signal is output, in a manner corresponding to the fraudulent act due to vibration, from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600 When a security signal is output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed while a notification is made by an output, an effect display is performed in a manner corresponding to the fraudulent act by a magnet. By performing notification by an image from the apparatus 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker, it is possible to distinguish which fraud is being performed.

  Next, monitoring of fraudulent behavior during setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraud during the setting value setting change, and FIG. 158 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraud during the confirmation display of the setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 is not executed. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting of the setting value operates the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button. This is because there is no room for an illegal act using a magnet other than a regular worker who changes the setting. In addition, when a setting change is made to a set value, even if an authorized worker who changes the setting has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act using a magnet. Inhibition of regular setting change work can be suppressed.

  Further, in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. This is because, in the change-permitted state, a regular operator who changes the setting value operates the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button, and the setting is performed. This is because there is no room for unauthorized conduct by vibration other than a regular worker who makes changes. In addition, even when a regular operator who changes the setting value applies vibration when changing the setting value, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act due to vibration, and Inhibition can be suppressed.

  In this example, the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, and the power switch 630a is operated to operate the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. The state in which the change can be performed (change permission state) is entered, but when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, that is, when the change permission state is started, the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is used. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. In addition to this, even when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state is terminated, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is used. On the other hand, the main control MPU outputs a security signal. That is, when the setting value is changed, the security signal is output twice to the hall computer after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. This security signal is detected when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input in a state in which the magnetic sensor 2470 is used to monitor a fraudulent act by a magnet, In the state where the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor a fraudulent act due to vibration, when a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input and it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is being performed, It is the same signal as the output signal. However, the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, is a state in which monitoring of cheating using the magnetic sensor 2470 and monitoring of cheating using the vibration sensor 3005 are not performed. Even if the monitoring of such illegal activities is not performed, the security signal is output to the hall computer to warn the pachinko machine 1 to be monitored through the hall computer. The hall clerk can be informed through the hall computer that the setting has been changed. That is, the hall clerk can monitor, through the hall computer, that the setting value has not been changed by a person who performs fraud through the hall computer. In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, the main control MPU outputs a second security signal, and the setting change of the setting value is completed by the second security signal. Can be grasped by the hall clerk through the hall computer.

  The security signal only needs to be output to the hall computer for a time that can be recognized by the hall computer, and the time from timing t3 to timing t3 ′ is short (for example, 1 second or less). It may be long time (for example, 10 seconds or more). However, if the output time of the security signal is long, the first security signal output when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, that is, when the change permission state is started, There is a possibility that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned off at the timing t4 when the setting key is turned off, that is, when the change permission state is finished. That is, there is a possibility that the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4 before the timing t3 'at which the first security signal output ends. As described above, when the output of the first security signal is not completed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state is finished, the first security signal is not finished. After the output of the signal is completed, a second security signal is output after a predetermined interval time (for example, 1 second). That is, the second security signal output is delayed until the first security signal output ends. As a result, even if the output of the first security signal is not completed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state is terminated, the hall computer is not terminated. The security signal can be reliably output twice.

  As another example of the case where the predetermined interval period is not provided, the following may be performed. That is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state is finished, if the first security signal output is not finished, a new security signal is started from that point. (The timer for counting the signal output time is set again) and the first security signal and the second security signal may be output in a continuous manner. In this case, the security signal is output over a long period exceeding the predetermined maximum output time (the output time of the first security signal), and the set value is the same as when the second security signal is output. It is possible to let the hall clerk know that the setting change has been completed through the output of a security signal over a long period of time. If it is not necessary for the hall clerk to know through the hall computer that the setting change has been completed using the security signal output mode depending on the gaming hall environment, etc., based on the operation of a predetermined changeover switch, etc. It may be possible to cancel without outputting the second security signal itself.

  As shown in FIG. 158, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 is not performed as in the change permission state. This is because, in the confirmation display state, an authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and an unauthorized act using a magnet is performed by a person other than the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display of the setting value. This is because there is no room to perform. In addition, when performing a confirmation display of the set value, even if a legitimate worker performing the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act using a magnet. Inhibition of regular confirmation display work can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed as in the change permission state. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a regular operator who performs confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is a room for a person other than the regular worker who performs the confirmation display to perform fraud due to vibration. This is because there is not. In addition, even if the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display adds vibration when performing the confirmation display of the set value, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act due to vibration, and the regular confirmation display work Inhibition can be suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, the power switch 630a is operated without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Although the confirmation display can be performed (confirmation display state), the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, that is, when the confirmation display state is started, the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is connected. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side. On the other hand, at the end of the change permission state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, the main computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 While the control MPU outputs a security signal, at the end of the confirmation display state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, the control MPU outputs the security signal to the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU does not output a security signal to the installed hall computer. That is, when the setting value is changed, the security signal is output twice to the hall computer, whereas when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, the security signal is 1 for the hall computer. Will be output only once. As a result, the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which monitoring of cheating using the magnetic sensor 2470 or monitoring of cheating using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. Yes, even though the monitoring of such fraudulent activity is not being executed, a security signal is output to the hall computer to warn the monitoring of the pachinko machine 1 through the hall computer and set it properly The hall clerk can be made aware through the hall computer that the value is being displayed. That is, the hall clerk can monitor through the hall computer that the setting value confirmation display is not performed by a person who performs an illegal act through the hall computer. Note that when the setting key switch 1311a is set to OFF at the timing t4, the main control MPU does not output the second security signal unlike the change permission state. It is possible to distinguish which of the confirmation display was performed.

  In addition, when a security signal is output to the hall computer because it is determined that an illegal act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, the peripheral control is performed based on the transmission of the monitoring result from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. As an external notification in an error-related process controlled by the MPU, notification is performed by an output from the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker, whereas a setting value setting change (change permission state) or a setting value When a security signal is output to the hall computer at the time of setting confirmation (confirmation display state), no information related to the monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU, and errors related to control by the peripheral control MPU As an external notification in the process, all notifications are made by the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. It is as in no. This also prevents the change of the normal setting and the confirmation display work from being hindered.

  As a modification of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, Until the key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF, it is a period in which the monitoring of the fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed, while the setting value setting change and the setting value confirmation display are not performed You may do it. Further, when an operation unit different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided and the hall clerk turns on the operation of the other operation unit, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 are provided. It is good also as a period which does not perform the monitoring of the fraudulent act using. Even in such a case, even when a regular operator who performs the inspection work approaches the magnet or applies vibrations when performing the inspection work of the pachinko machine 1, it is detected as an illegal act due to the magnets or vibration. Can be prevented and inhibition of regular inspection work can be suppressed. In addition, at least at the start of a period during which fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed, a security signal is output to the hall computer, similar to the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. Thus, the monitoring to the pachinko machine 1 is warned through the hall computer, and the hall clerk can be informed through the hall computer that the inspection work is being carried out normally.

  In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal act by a magnet, a place where magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or the game board) 1 is provided in front of the game area 5a). However, a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided, for example, on the front side of the game board 5. In the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located in front of the game area 5a located and on the rear side of the game board 5, each magnetic sensor may be capable of detecting the generation of magnetism. In such a configuration, as in the configuration of the single magnetic sensor 2470 described above, monitoring of fraud using a plurality of magnetic sensors is performed in a normal state, whereas a change permission state or a confirmation display state is performed. However, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, some of the magnetic sensors (for example, setting change) may not be executed. It is also possible to monitor for fraud using only the magnetic sensor provided around the substrate 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a.

  Similarly, in this example, it is possible to detect the occurrence of vibration in the vicinity of the sorting piece 2415 inside the special prize opening 2005 provided in the game board 5 as the vibration sensor 3005 that detects fraud by vibration. Although one vibration sensor is provided, a plurality of vibration sensors are provided. For example, in addition to the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 in the big prize opening 2005, the big prize opening located on the front side of the game board 5 Each vibration sensor may be able to detect the occurrence of vibration also in the vicinity of the entrance other than 2005, or in the vicinity of the setting change board 13111 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. In such a configuration, in a normal time, monitoring of fraudulent activity using a plurality of vibration sensors is executed (however, with respect to the vibration sensors provided around the sorting piece 2415 inside the special prize opening 2005, In the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it may be possible not to execute the fraud monitoring using a plurality of vibration sensors, but in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, You may make it perform monitoring of fraud using only some vibration sensors (for example, the vibration sensor provided in the periphery of the setting change board | substrate 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a) among several vibration sensors.

  In addition, fraudulent acts due to magnets or vibration may be detected during security signal transmission immediately after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends (immediately after the start of fraud monitoring). There is concern over the occurrence of a situation in which an important security signal based on the detection of an action cannot be output and the fraud monitoring system is weakened. In order to prevent such a situation, the following may be performed. In other words, the security signal output timing based on the detection of fraud is delayed so that the second security signal output period in the change permission state or the first security signal output period in the confirmation display state elapses. It can be exemplified that the output timing of the security signal based on the detection of fraud does not overlap. Specifically, although monitoring of fraud is immediately started after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the second security signal output period in the change permission state or the first security signal in the confirmation display state If a trigger for detection of a new security signal (detection of fraud) occurs within the output period of, the output of the security signal that was output in advance without discarding the output of the new security signal It is also possible to store and hold the output information of a new security signal until the process is completed, and to output a new security signal in a form delayed from the original output timing. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraud is not discarded and the fraud monitoring system is weakened. As another example, the start time of fraud monitoring itself may be extended until the second security signal output period in the change-permitted state or the first security signal output period in the confirmation display state ends. It is good. Even in such an embodiment, the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraud is not discarded, and the occurrence of a situation where the fraud monitoring system is weakened can be suppressed.

[14. About command transmission processing]
As described above, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. Among these, the main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310. Specifically, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a predetermined storage area (stores commands in the main control built-in RAM) at various times using information related to control of game effects and information related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands. Information in the pachinko machine 1 and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the peripheral control board 1510 side by sequentially transmitting the set commands to the peripheral control board 1510. I can grasp it. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the setting value is changed or the installation value is confirmed, the main control built-in RAM is used as various commands for information related to the control of the game effect and the state of the pachinko machine 1. While the change permission state or confirmation display state is being executed, only some commands are immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 while the remaining commands are in the change permission state or confirmation display state. After completion, the data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  First, command transmission timing when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 (A) is a time chart showing command transmission timing when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (when setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display is not performed). These are the time charts which show the transmission timing of the command in the case of performing the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In this example, at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, at least the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process is started, and the game ball B is placed in various winning openings and the gate unit 2003. It is described that the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each when entering the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 159, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Then, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty, as described in [Pachinko machine behavior at power-on] described above, the processing of steps S10 to S24 of the main control-side power-on processing is executed. When ty arrives, it is determined which combination is the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (steps S25 to S27). In step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 1, the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is established, the process shifts to the setting change process in step S37 to enter the setting permission state. If the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the main control built-in RAM in step S38. After the initialization, the variable state is made possible. In step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, the main control MPU permits a preset set value display. When the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the set value confirmation display process in step S28 to enter the confirmation display state. In step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value 0, the main control built-in RAM in step S38. The variable state is made possible without initializing the. As described above, the variable state is a function display by starting the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. This is a state in which the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the unit 1400 can be performed.

  As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) is activated by a system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. Since the initialization process for performing (booting) has been completed, various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received after the timing ty.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (A), the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON at the timing t3, and the setting value setting change and the setting value confirmation display are not performed assuming that the power is normally turned on. In this case, if the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing t3, the main control built-in RAM is initialized from the timing ty to the variable state after the initialization. On the other hand, if the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing t3, the changeable state is made from the timing ty without initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38. In such a variable state, the main control MPU can set information relating to control of game effects and information relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the command buffer of the main control built-in RAM. As soon as is set, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened at the timing ty, the main control MPU sets a door opening command for specifying that the main body frame 4 is opened in the command buffer, and opens the door. As soon as the hour command is set, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the door opening command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), and in the period until the timing t5 when the main body frame 4 is closed arrives, the effect display device A door opening notification for notifying that the main body frame 4 is open is executed by an image from 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker. As the notification when the door is opened, a voice that repeats “door is open”, a message “door is open!”, And lamp emission with higher brightness than normal are executed. Thus, while the main body frame 4 is opened, the hall manager can immediately know that the main body frame 4 is open by performing a notification when the door is open toward the outside. While 4 is open, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring system so that no one other than the hall administrator will engage in fraud.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (B), when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing t3, and the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is performed, the RWM is also performed at the timing t3. When the pressing operation portion of the clear button 633z is operated, a change permission state in which the setting value can be changed is set from the timing ty, while the RWM clear button 633z is pressed at the timing t3. If the unit is not operated, a confirmation display state in which the confirmation display of the set value can be performed from the point of time ty. In the change permission state, the change permission state is ended at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the main control built-in RAM in step S38 is initialized after the timing t4. Make it possible. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state ends at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and the main control built-in RAM in step S38 is not initialized from the timing t4. Make it possible.

  In the change permission state and the confirmation display state described above, the main control MPU sets information related to control of game effects and information related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. The storage area of the main control built-in RAM to be set differs depending on the type of the command. Specifically, at least in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, as the storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM, the first storage area (first command buffer) and the second storage area (second command buffer) When a command is set in the first command buffer, the command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. On the other hand, when a command is set in the second command buffer, the set command is The command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, without being immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. At the time t4, the second command buffer is held. Send the command set to the peripheral control board 1510 . That is, at least in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, a command that needs to be immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 is set in the first command buffer, while the change permission state or the like is set in the second command buffer at timing t4. A command that needs to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 after the confirmation display state is completed is set.

  Except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets information related to control of game effects and information related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the first command buffer, and stores them in the first command buffer. When a command is set, the command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the command is set in either the first command buffer or the second command buffer, but all commands except the change permission state and the confirmation display state are displayed. A command is set only in the first command buffer so that it is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. However, except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the first command buffer and the second command buffer are not divided, and if a command is set in the undivided command buffer, the command is immediately You may make it transmit to the periphery control board 1510. FIG.

  First, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, as a command set in the second command buffer, as a command related to fraud monitoring, a command at the time of opening the door for specifying that the main body frame 4 is open, and various winning awards When the game ball B enters the gate unit 2003 (first start port 2002, second start port 2004, grand prize winning port 2005, etc.), the detection itself (abnormal pitch) ) Command for abnormal entry to specify that there was. Specifically, the door opening command is set in the second command buffer when the body frame 4 is open at the timing ty, which is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the second command When the door opening command is set in the buffer, the door opening command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and at the timing t4. The door opening time command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The abnormal entry command is set in the second command buffer when the game ball B is detected (abnormal entry) in the change permission state or the confirmation display state from the timing ty to the timing t4. When the abnormal entry command is set in the second command buffer, the abnormal entry command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. At time t4, the abnormal entry command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the door opening command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that the timing t5 that is the timing for closing the main body frame 4 arrives. Performs the door opening notification to notify that the main body frame 4 is opened by an output from the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or a speaker. As the notification when the door is opened, a voice that repeats “door is open”, a message “door is open!”, And lamp emission with higher brightness than normal are executed. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives an abnormal ball entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that images, lamps, and speakers of the effect display device 1600 are displayed for a predetermined period from the timing t4. In response to the output from, a notification at the time of abnormal entry is executed for notifying that there has been an abnormal entry at various winning openings and the gate unit 2003. As this abnormal entry notification, a voice that repeats “abnormal entry”, a message display “abnormal entry is present!”, And lamp emission with higher brightness than normal are executed. As described above, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is monitored whether the main body frame 4 is opened and whether there are abnormal balls in the various winning entrances and the gate unit 2003, and the change permission state and the confirmation are confirmed. After the display state is finished, notification to the outside when the door is opened or abnormal entry is executed, so that the main body frame 4 is opened, or abnormal entry is made at various winning openings or the gate unit 2003. The hall manager can grasp what happened. In addition, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished, it is possible to simultaneously execute a notification when the door is opened or a notification when abnormally entering, but a notification suspected of serious fraud (for example, when abnormally entering) Notification) may be executed with priority.

  As described above, commands related to fraud monitoring such as a door opening command and an abnormal winning command are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, and the set command is immediately stored in the peripheral control board 1510. The command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF without transmission, and the command set in the second command buffer is The data is transmitted to the control board 1510. As a result, when changing the set value or displaying the confirmation of the set value, it is possible to prevent the notification at the time of door opening or the abnormal entry from being performed due to an unauthorized detection unintended by the hall manager. Can be inhibited.

  On the other hand, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, as a command set in the first command buffer, a setting change command for specifying that the change permission state is started or a confirmation display state start as a command related to the setting Setting confirmation command that identifies the time, setting change completion command that identifies when the change permission state ends, setting value confirmation display completion command that identifies when the confirmation display state ends . Specifically, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty when the change permission state starts, and the setting confirmation command is set at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts. The first command buffer is set, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. Similarly, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer at the timing t4 when the change permission state ends, and the set value confirmation display completion command at the timing t4 when the confirmation display state ends. At this point, the command is set in the first command buffer, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set.

  The peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command and the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives. During the period, warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by an output from the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or a speaker. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. . The warning notification corresponding to the setting change command includes a voice that repeats “setting is being changed”, a message “setting is being changed!”, And lamp emission in the color corresponding to the setting change. It is said. In addition, the warning notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command includes the sound “Setting confirmation in progress”, the message “Setting confirmation in progress!”, And the lamp emission in the color corresponding to the setting value confirmation (setting value). The light emission mode is different from the lamp light emission with the corresponding color during the setting change. In this way, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the hall manager indicates that it is possible to perform setting change of the set value and confirmation display of the set value by executing a warning notification to the outside. The monitoring system can be immediately grasped, and the monitoring system can be strengthened so that only a hall manager can perform an illegal act in a change permission state or a confirmation display state.

  As described above, commands related to settings such as the setting change command and the setting confirmation command are set in the first command buffer at the timing ty, which is the start time of the change permission state and the confirmation display state. Immediately after transmission to the peripheral control board 1510. In the change permission state and the confirmation display state, even when the main body frame 4 is opened or there is an abnormal ball entry in various winning gates or the gate unit 2003, notification is given when the door is opened until after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. Because it delays the execution of notifications at the time of abnormal entry or abnormal entry, it is not a normal fraud monitoring system. However, setting change commands, setting confirmation commands, etc. precede the commands set in the second command buffer. By sending a command (special command for warning) related to the setting to the peripheral control board 1510, the monitoring system is strengthened so that no person other than the hall manager will perform fraud even in the change permission state and the confirmation display state. be able to.

  Further, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the peripheral control MPU executes a warning notification corresponding to the type of the command. In the change-permitted state, the setting value can be changed. Compared with the confirmation display state, a monitoring system is in place to prevent unauthorized setting changes by non-hall administrators. However, by executing a warning notification corresponding to the type of command, the hall manager can accurately determine whether or not the monitoring system needs to be strengthened.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU receives a door opening command or abnormal entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, the peripheral control MPU performs door opening notification or abnormal entry notification. However, in these notifications, not only a predetermined message content is notified by an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from the lamp, and a speaker, but also a warning sound such as “BeeBee” is added to the sound from the speaker. Output (“Door is open, BB, Door is open,...”) Is executed with a combination of “message + warning sound”. On the other hand, when a setting change command or a setting confirmation command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, a warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed. In the notification, a predetermined message content is notified by an output from the effect display device 1600, a lamp, and a speaker, but the sound output from the speaker is executed only by voice without outputting a warning sound. ing. As a result, even when a warning effect corresponding to the type of command is executed when setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display is performed, it is directed to the outside as compared to a door opening notification or abnormal entry notification. Appeal can be suppressed and inhibition of regular work can be suppressed.

[14-1. Game information command transmission timing]
In the above-described embodiment, when the confirmation display of the set value is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the process of steps S29 to S36 is performed after the set value confirmation display process of step S28. That is, at the end of the confirmation display state (at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information, and game information commands corresponding to the various information are incorporated in the main control. By setting the RAM in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) and sequentially transmitting the set game information commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 also grasps information related to the game before the power is shut off. be able to. Thereby, after the confirmation display state is finished, the peripheral control board 1510 shows the current gaming state, the change display of the special symbol that is interrupted when the power is shut off, the number of holdings stored when the power is shut off, and the like. As the peripheral control MPU recognizes the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control MPU restores the effect by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600. For example, the decorative pattern is interrupted when the power is turned off. The display can be resumed, or the display of the stored number of suspensions when the power is turned off can be resumed.

  In this regard, for the game information command, the second command buffer is not at the end of the confirmation display state (at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) but at the start of the confirmation display state (at the timing ty). If the game information command is set in the second command buffer, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. The game information command set in the second command buffer may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at time t4. The set timing and transmission timing of the game information command when such game backup information is transmitted as a game information command will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 161 (A) is a time chart showing game information command transmission timings when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated). 161 (B) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the confirmation display of the set value is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  In this example, the case where the push operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the game backup information is transmitted as a game information command has been described. When initializing the main control built-in RAM or changing the setting value by operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z when the power is turned on, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is specified. Since it is cleared except for the area, game backup information is lost, and game backup information is not transmitted as a game information command.

  As shown in FIG. 160, in the main control power-on process of this example, in the determination of step S26, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 1 and the set key ON flag CS-FLG When it is determined that the value is not 0, first, the processes of steps S29 to S36 are performed. Among the processes of steps S29 to S36, in step 32, various information is read from the game backup information, and game information commands corresponding to the various information are set in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. Yes. Then, following the processing of steps S29 to S36, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 (step S27). In step S27, the main control MPU establishes a predetermined set value display permission condition, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the set key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. If it is determined that there is, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). That is, the processing of step S32 is performed before the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 is performed, various information is read from the game backup information, and game information commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. (Command buffer) is set. In addition, when the processing of steps S29 to S36 is performed after the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28, the time for calculating the checksum in step S29, or the checksum value (sum value) in step S30. The restart of the game will be delayed by the amount of time to determine whether or not it matches the stored checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power-off process (power-off). By performing the processing of steps S29 to S36 before performing the set value confirmation display processing of step S28, the time until the game is resumed after performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 is shortened. Will be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (A), when the power is normally turned on, that is, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated at the timing t3, the timing ty is changed. From the point of time, the main control built-in RAM in step S38 is brought into a variable state without being initialized. At timing ty, which is the start of such a variable state, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and immediately after setting the game information command. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU quickly restores the effect (the output from the effect display device 1600, the image from the lamp, and the speaker) at the timing ty, which is the start of the variable state. be able to.

  When the peripheral control MPU receives a game information command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the peripheral control MPU provides an effect member (for example, an effect operation) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. The initial operation of the unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is performed. That is, from the point of time ty, which is the start of the changeable state, the initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Has been done. Each such production member is a member that can operate between an initial position and an operation position. In the initial operation of the production member, the production member normally operates from the initial position toward the operation position. Such as confirmation, and accurate alignment is performed so that the production member waits at the initial position. Thereby, even if the production member is at a position deviated from the initial position at the timing ty that is the start of the variable state, the production member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation. If the production member does not return to the initial position in one initial operation, the production member waits at a position shifted from the initial position by repeating the control for returning the production member to the initial position several times. Can be prevented. Then, after the initial operation of the effect member is finished, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set is transmitted during the pattern variation, a predetermined change during the symbol variation is transmitted. At this timing, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (B), when the setting value confirmation display is performed, that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing t3, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. If there is not, a confirmation display state in which a confirmation display of the set value can be performed is made from the timing ty. In the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state is terminated at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the main control built-in RAM in step S38 is not initialized from the timing t4. Make it possible. In such a case, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in the second command buffer at the timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, and stores the game information command in the second command buffer. Is set, the game information command set is not immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, but the game set in the second command buffer until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives. The information command is held, and the game information command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t4. As a result, the peripheral control MPU can restore the effect (the output from the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker) at the time of timing ty, which is the start of the variable state. it can.

  As described above, the game information command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, and the set game information command is not immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The game information command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the game information command set in the second command buffer is peripherally controlled at timing t4. The data is transmitted to the substrate 1510. As a result, when the setting value confirmation display is performed, it is possible to prevent the effect (the output of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp and the speaker) from returning when the power is turned off, and to prevent the normal work from being interrupted. Can be suppressed. Since the game backup information has already been set as the game information command in the second command buffer at the timing ty that is the start of the confirmation display state, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 Even if the game backup information is destroyed due to noise, the game information command can be reliably transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The setting confirmation command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, and the set setting confirmation command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the peripheral member (for example, the effect operation) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 The initial operation of the unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is performed. That is, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Has been done. Each such production member is a member that can operate between an initial position and an operation position. In the initial operation of the production member, the production member normally operates from the initial position toward the operation position. Such as confirmation, and accurate alignment is performed so that the production member waits at the initial position. Thereby, even if the production member is at a position shifted from the initial position at the timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, the production member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation. If the production member does not return to the initial position in one initial operation, the production member waits at a position shifted from the initial position by repeating the control for returning the production member to the initial position several times. Can be prevented. And after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, an effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set is transmitted during the pattern variation, a predetermined change during the symbol variation is transmitted. At this timing, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  As described above, after the confirmation display state at the timing t4 is completed, the variation pattern command can be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, while the period is from the timing ty to the timing t4. In the confirmation display state, the variation pattern is not transmitted. For this reason, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the effect member does not operate by transmitting the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the symbol variation, It cannot be determined whether or not the product is not operating due to a failure of the effect member. In this respect, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are initially displayed. By performing the operation, it is possible to notify the outside that “the production member is normal but not accompanied by a game”, and it is possible to determine that the production member is not a failure. In this example, in the confirmation display state that is a period from timing ty to timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member is performed, but the operation is performed to notify that the effect member is not a failure. For example, in the confirmation display state that is a period from timing ty to timing t4, only the provisional operation of the effect member is performed separately from the initial operation, and after the confirmation display state at timing t4 ends. The initial operation of the effect member may be performed. The temporary operation of the effect member may be an operation different from the initial operation, or may be the same operation as the initial operation.

  When the setting value setting is changed, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty that is the start time of the change permission state, and the set setting change command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Is sending to. When the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 in the same manner as when the setting confirmation command is received. The initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210) being performed is performed. As described above, in the change permission state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4 as well as the confirmation display state, the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of production operation units 160 are mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5). By performing the initial operation of the rotating decorative body 3210), it is possible to notify the outside that “the production member is normal but not accompanied by the game”, and it is not a failure of the production member. Can be determined.

[14-2. About the extension of warning alerts after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state]
In the above-described embodiment, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the warning notification corresponding to the type of the command is output by the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. Although it is executed, the warning notification may be extended and executed even after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. A case where the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a time chart illustrating a case where the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the details have been described above, but when the change permission state is started at the timing ty, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer, and at the end of the confirmation display state at the timing ty, the first command is set. A setting confirmation command is set in the buffer, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. The peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command and the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives. During the period, warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by an output from the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or a speaker.

  At the end of the change permission state at timing t4, a setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer. At the start of the confirmation display state at timing t4, a setting value confirmation display completion command is set in the first command buffer. Any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command and a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that a predetermined time (for example, from the timing t4) During the period until the timing t4 ′ that has passed (30 seconds) has passed, the warning display that is being executed from the point of time ty is continuously executed by the image from the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. Yes. That is, the warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, but the timing is also displayed after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state. The warning notification is extended and executed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) that is a period from t4 to timing t4 ′. The extension of the warning notification ends when a warning notification extension end condition is set and the set extension end condition is satisfied. Specifically, when the warning notification is extended for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in a specific timer unit, and the timer unit counts the predetermined time. The process ends when the time expires. As another example, when a predetermined number of voice notifications (for example, a loop of five message voices) is ended as an extension period of the warning notification, the predetermined number of times is set in a specific count unit, and the count is counted. The unit may start when the number of times starts and the number of times expires.

  As described above, when the change permission state and the confirmation display state are executed, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 but also the timing t4 ′ at which a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the timing t4. The warning alert has been extended for the period up to. For example, when the warning notification is executed only when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, the warning notification is executed in a short time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) from the timing ty that is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the warning execution time, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, is shortened. Therefore, a person other than the hall manager can change the setting value or change the setting value in a short time. If a confirmation is displayed, the hall manager may not be aware. In particular, when setting value confirmation display is performed, it is not necessary to change the setting value, so it is possible for a person other than the hall administrator to perform a setting value confirmation display in a short time. May not notice. On the other hand, when the warning notification is extended and executed even after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, a short time (for example, 1) from the timing ty that is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. Even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF in (˜2 seconds), a period from the timing t4 to the timing t4 ′ is secured as the time for executing the warning notification. For this reason, even if a person other than the hall administrator makes a setting value change or confirms the setting value in an unauthorized manner in a short time, it is easy for the hall administrator to notice, and a person other than the hall administrator performs an illegal act. The monitoring system can be strengthened so that

  Further, as described above in detail, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from timing ty to timing t4, the warning corresponding to the type of command is output by the image, lamp, and speaker output of the effect display device 1600. Information is being executed. The warning notification corresponding to the setting change command includes a voice that repeats “setting is being changed”, a message “setting is being changed!”, And lamp emission in the color corresponding to the setting change. It is said. In addition, the warning notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command includes the sound “Setting confirmation is in progress”, the message “Setting confirmation is in progress!”, And lamp emission in the color corresponding to the setting value setting confirmation. I am going to do that. When the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the message content of the warning notification in the change permission state or the confirmation display state may be maintained. The message content may be different from the status and confirmation display status. For example, in the warning notification after the change permission state or confirmation display state is finished, the message content that is different from the message content in the change permission state or confirmation display state is "Setting change completed" or "Setting confirmation completed. It may be configured to output a message such as “I did”. As a result, not only the above-mentioned countermeasures against fraud, but also when the change permission state and the confirmation display state are properly terminated, it is possible to make the hall manager easily aware of this. In addition, when maintaining the warning alert message content in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, make sure that the alert notification is not temporarily divided at t4, which is the switching timing of the alert alert extension. Also good. For example, for at least the alert output that is executed in response to the command type in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the sound output from the speaker is continuously output until the sound is completed so that it does not end midway For example, the voice in the warning notification that is controlled to be extended may be executed again from the beginning of the voice after completion of the continuously output warning notification voice.

  As for the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the image display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker, but the sound output from the speaker is notified when the door is opened or abnormally entered. The warning sound such as “Bee-Bee” is not output, but is executed only by voice. In addition, the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, are in a non-variable state in which it is impossible to display the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. On the other hand, after the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing ty to timing t4, is in a variable state in which special symbols can be displayed on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. For example, when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, various effect sounds are output from the speakers. In this regard, even if the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is completed, a warning sound is not output from the speaker as a warning notification, so a limited number is provided to output sound. When there is no vacant channel (unused channel) when allocating to a finitely provided channel in order to output various performance sounds, the given channel can be afforded Can be avoided as much as possible.

  Further, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the peripheral control MPU performs a door opening command or abnormal entry from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4. The time command is received, but the door is opened from the time t4 ′, which is the end time of the warning information that has been extended without performing the door opening notification or the abnormal entry notification at the timing t4. Time notification and abnormal entry notification are executed. That is, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the extended warning notification is executed in preference to the door opening notification or abnormal entry notification. As a result, even if a person other than the hall administrator makes a setting value change or a setting value confirmation display illegally in a short time, the hall administrator can preferentially execute the extended warning notification, It is easy to notice and the monitoring system can be strengthened so that no one other than the hall manager can perform fraud. In addition, about the alert | reporting (for example, alerting | reporting at the time of abnormal entering) about the serious injustice, it is not in the time of timing t4 'which is the time of completion | finish of the alert warning performed extended, but the warning alert extended is being performed. However, it may be executed at the timing t4.

  As for the notification when the door is opened or when the abnormal entry occurs, not only a predetermined message content is notified by an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from the lamp, or the speaker, but also a warning sound such as “Bee Bee” from the speaker. Is output and executed with a combination of “message + warning sound”. The door opening notification or abnormal entry notification is output continuously during execution of the door opening notification or abnormal entry notification, but is output only for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It is good. However, in this example, since the alarm at the time of opening the door and the alarm at the time of abnormal entry are executed from the timing t4 ′, which is the end of the alarm alarm that has been extended, for example, the alarm alarm extension time (timing) If the period from t4 to timing t4 ′) is longer than or equal to the output time of the door opening notification or abnormal entry notification (for example, 10 seconds), the door opening notification or abnormality The notification at the time of entering the ball will not be output. In view of the problem due to the decrease in the notification frequency, the warning notification extension time (period from timing t4 to timing t4 ′) is longer than or equal to the warning sound output time (for example, 10 seconds). The door opening notification and abnormal entry notification may be configured to output the door opening notification and abnormal entry notification only during the remaining time after the warning notification extension time. . Moreover, you may comprise so that the alerting | reporting at the time of a door opening and an abnormal entry may be newly started after the extended time of alerting alerting | reporting.

  Further, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the door opening notification is executed from the timing t4 ′ which is the end of the extended warning notification. When the timing t5 when the main body frame 4 is closed comes before the timing t4 ′, the notification when the door is opened is not executed. That is, when the main body frame 4 is closed during the execution of the extended warning notification, the notification when the door is opened is not executed. However, when the main body frame 4 is closed during the execution of the extended warning notification and the main body frame 4 is opened again before the timing t4 ′, the extended warning notification is terminated and the notification at the time of opening the door is performed. Running. Normally, after the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is performed, the main body frame 4 is only closed and the main body frame 4 is not opened again. If an incomprehensible situation occurs in which the main body frame 4 is opened again immediately after changing the setting or confirming the set value, the door opening notification consisting of a combination of “message + warning sound” is used as a warning notification. By giving priority to execution, it is easy for the hall manager to notice that the main frame 4 is open due to an incomprehensible situation that is suspected of fraud, and the main frame 4 is open. The monitoring system can be strengthened so that

  In addition, as described above in detail, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is not executed. On the other hand, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished, the fraudulent behavior is monitored using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 (however, regarding the fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005) , Only during jackpot games). If it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, a fraud notification is output as an external notification by an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker. At this time, even if the warning notification is extended and executed after completion of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the unauthorized notification is executed in preference to the extended warning notification. In this way, for fraud alerts that are suspected of serious fraud, such as magnets and vibrations, priority is given over extended warning alerts, making it easier for hall managers to notice, and other than hall managers to perform fraudulent acts. The monitoring system can be strengthened so that there is no such thing.

  Further, in the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by an output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. For example, the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the lamp and the speaker, and the effect display is performed. The image of the device 1600 may not be output. Thus, in the structure which performs warning alerting | reporting using a part of some alerting | reporting members (effect display apparatus 1600, a lamp | ramp, a speaker), alert alerting is extended and performed after completion | finish of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. In this case, it is not output from the image of the effect display device 1600 as a warning notice during extension, but when it is determined that an illegal act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, it is output as a warning notice during extension. The unauthorized notification may be executed only by an image of the non-production display device 1600 (by notification using only a notification member that is not used among a plurality of notification members). As a result, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the hall manager can be notified of the unauthorized notification suspected of fraud without stopping the extended warning notification. it can. Similarly, the door opening notification and the abnormal winning notification are also based only on the image of the effect display device 1600 that has not been output as the warning notification being extended (only the notification members that are not used among the plurality of notification members are used). Depending on the notification used, the door opening notification or abnormal winning notification may be executed.

  In this example, the warning notification is extended and executed even after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, but only after the confirmation display state ends, the warning notification is extended and executed. It is good also as composition to do. For example, when the setting value is changed, the main control built-in RAM is initialized after the change permission state ends (in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area). However, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t4. In a period until the timing t4 ′ arrives, a configuration in which a RAM clear notification that notifies that the RAM has been cleared is executed is not an extension of the warning notification by an output from the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or a speaker. It is good. Thereby, after the end of the change permission state, the hall manager can grasp that the RAM has been cleared.

[14-3. Regarding the case where the initial operation of the production member is performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished]
In the above-described embodiment, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the production member (for example, the production operation unit 160 or the plurality of production operation units 160) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is displayed. Although the initial operation of the rotating decorative body 3210) is performed, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. A case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is a time chart illustrating a case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 163, when the change permission state ends at timing t4, a setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and when the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, the setting value confirmation is confirmed in the first command buffer. A display completion command is set, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 by receiving a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4. The initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is started. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, without performing the initial operation of the production member, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4 are finished, the production member The initial operation is performed.

  The effect members described above include an effect operation unit 160 and a plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 as members that can move between the initial position and the operation position. In such an initial operation of the effect member, a return process for performing an accurate alignment so that the effect member stands by at the initial position and a confirmation of whether the effect member operates normally from the initial position toward the operation position are performed. The confirmation process is executed in order. For example, if the effect member is operating when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the effect member stops at a position deviated from the initial position, and the effect member is initially set even when the power is turned on thereafter. It is in a position shifted from the position. In this regard, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, even if the effect member is at a position deviated from the initial position at the timing t4 when the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the return process is performed. The production member can be returned to the initial position, and if the production member does not return to the initial position in one return process, the return process for returning the production member to the initial position is repeated several times. The production member can be prevented from waiting at a position deviated from the initial position. Further, in the confirmation process, it is possible to confirm whether or not the effect member operates normally by operating so that the effect member moves from the initial position to the operation position and then returns from the operation position to the initial position again. If the effect member does not return to the initial position even if the return process is repeated several times, or if the effect member does not operate normally at the operation position or the initial position in the confirmation process, the effect member is abnormal. Is informed outside. Then, after the initial operation of the effect member is finished, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set is transmitted during the pattern variation, a predetermined change during the symbol variation is transmitted. At this timing, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  In addition, the effect member includes a light guide plate 3110 capable of emitting and decorating the first pattern and the second pattern by light irradiation. In such an initial operation of the light guide plate 3110, a confirmation process for confirming whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally decorated with light emission is performed. In other words, in the confirmation process, the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light so as to decorate the first pattern and the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light so as to decorate the second pattern are repeated several times. Thus, it can be confirmed whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally decorated with light emission. The initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 and the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 are executed in parallel from the time t4 when the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. I have to. Then, after the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 is finished, an effect using the light guide plate 3110 can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using the light guide plate 3110 is set during the symbol variation is transmitted, At a predetermined timing, the light guide plate 3110 is decorated with the first pattern and the second pattern.

  As described above, in this example, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 are set without performing the initial operation of the effect member. Only the setting change of the value and the confirmation display of the setting value are performed, and the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4. For example, when the initial operation of the effect member is performed in the change permission state or the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, when the confirmation work is performed at the factory, the setting change of the setting value or the setting value At the same time as confirming whether the confirmation display functions normally, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the directing member operates normally by the initial operation of the directing member. . However, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4 are finished, by performing the initial operation of the effect member, the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 are set values. Only the setting change and the confirmation display of the set value are performed, and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4 are finished, only the confirmation of whether the effect member operates normally by the initial operation of the effect member is performed. It is possible to increase the certainty of confirmation because there is no need for confirmation at the factory.

  In the above description, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, the peripheral control MPU performs the initial operation of the effect member. However, apart from the setting change completion command and the setting value confirmation display completion command, the initial operation command for performing the initial operation of the effect member is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4. At this time, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed. Such an initial operation command is set in the first command buffer at the timing t4 when the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after the initial operation command is set. And On the other hand, the initial operation command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty which is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the set initial operation command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The initial operation command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the initial operation command set in the second command buffer at the timing t4. May be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In such a case, while the initial operation command is set at the timing ty, which is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives. The initial operation of the effect member can be delayed, and the initial operation of the effect member can be performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends.

  Further, when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 but also the period until the timing t4 ′ when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the timing t4. When the warning notification is extended and executed, the warning notification extension time is set so that the time becomes longer than the time when the initial operation of the effect member is performed. That is, the initial operation of the effect member performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished before the warning notification that is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished. . As described above, after completion of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the state shifts to a variable state in which the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be performed, and the player plays the game. Although it is possible to perform the warning notification while extending the warning notification, the notification by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 is executed and the external warning is enhanced. It is said. For this reason, the period in which the warning notification is extended and executed is not a period in which the player is hesitant to start the game and the player is about to start the game. In this regard, when the warning notification is extended and executed, the initial operation of the effect member is terminated, so that the warning notification executed by the extension is ended and the player tries to start the game. The initial operation of the production member has already been completed. For this reason, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect member without being affected by the initial operation of the effect member after the end of the warning notice that is extended after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended. , It is possible to avoid missing information obtained from the production contents. In addition, in order to promote that the player does not start the game during the period when the warning notification is extended and executed, the content of the warning notification that is extended and executed is "Please wait a little longer for the game start", etc. It may be executed in such a manner as to include a special message that prompts the game waiting.

  In addition, when performing the initial operation of the production member after the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the production member is not returned to the initial position even if the return process is repeated several times, If the operation position or the initial position does not operate normally, an abnormality in an accessory due to an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker so as to notify the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the effect member. Notification is being executed. At this time, even when the warning notification is extended and executed after completion of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the accessory abnormality notification is executed in preference to the extended warning notification. As described above, the accessory abnormality notification is prioritized over the extended warning notification, so that the hall manager can easily recognize whether or not the effect member operates normally.

  Further, in the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by an output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. For example, the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the lamp and the speaker, and the effect display is performed. The image of the device 1600 may not be output. Thus, in the structure which performs warning alerting | reporting using a part of some alerting | reporting members (effect display apparatus 1600, a lamp | ramp, a speaker), alert alerting is extended and performed after completion | finish of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. In this case, the warning display is not output from the image of the effect display device 1600 as an extension warning, but if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the effect member, the effect is not output as an extension warning notification. The accessory abnormality notification may be executed only by an image of the display device 1600 (by notification using only a notification member that is not used among the plurality of notification members). As a result, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, the hall manager can be made aware of the accessory abnormality notification without stopping the extended warning notification.

  Further, in this example, as the initial operation of the effect member after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is completed, a return process for performing accurate alignment so that the effect member waits at the initial position, and the effect member operates from the initial position. The confirmation process for confirming whether or not it normally operates toward the position is executed in order, but the return process may be executed in advance in the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In other words, from the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing ty, only the return process is executed in the initial operation of the production member, and after the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing t4 ends, the production member Of these initial operations, the confirmation process may be executed. Here, as for the return process, if the effect member does not return to the initial position in one return process, the return process for returning the effect member to the initial position is repeated several times. There is a case. In this regard, even if a long time is required for the return process by executing the return process in advance in the change permission state or the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the change It does not affect the time until the confirmation process as the initial operation of the effect member is completed after the end of the permission state or the confirmation display state. For this reason, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect member can be completed relatively quickly, and then the effect using the effect member based on the variation pattern can be executed.

  Further, in this example, the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing t4 is ended, regardless of whether the state is shifted to the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing ty. However, when shifting to the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed in advance in the confirmation display state. That is, when shifting to the change permission state, the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4, whereas when shifting to the confirmation display state, the timing is changed. The initial operation of the effect member may be performed from the start of the confirmation display state at ty. Here, in the confirmation display state, the setting value setting is not changed as in the change permission state, but only the setting value setting confirmation is performed. Therefore, the confirmation display state can be finished in a relatively short time. Is possible. In this regard, when shifting to the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect member is completed in the confirmation display state until the confirmation display state ends by performing the initial operation of the effect member in advance. Can be made. For this reason, after the confirmation display state is finished, an effect using the effect member based on the variation pattern can be executed, and the initial operation of the effect member is completed while the confirmation display state is finished in a relatively short time. The situation where it is difficult for the player to start playing can be prevented.

[14-4. About a variation of fraud monitoring]
In the above-described embodiment, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent acts by the magnet, the location where the magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or the game board 1 is provided in front of the game area 5a), but a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided, and are located on the front side of the game board 5. In the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located in front of the game area 5a or on the rear side of the game board 5, each magnetic sensor may be able to detect the generation of magnetism. In the change permission state and the confirmation display state, an illegal act using only a part of the plurality of magnetic sensors (for example, a magnetic sensor provided around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a). Monitoring may be executed. With reference to FIG. 164, a description will be given of a modification example of the monitoring of fraud during the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display. FIG. 164 is a time chart illustrating a modified example of the monitoring state of fraud during setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display.

  In this example, as a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal act by a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 A magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area magnetic sensor 2470b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. In a normal state, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is used to monitor an illegal act on a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, in the normal state, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a uses a magnetic field that is not supposed to be generated (due to unauthorized access) to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. (Magnetism) has occurred (whether the magnet is approaching), and unauthorized activities such as setting change or confirmation display by anyone other than the person who changes the setting value or confirmation display are monitored. Examples of fraudulent acts on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet include, for example, a metal fraudulent instrument in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed) A magnet for indirectly operating a metal fraudulent instrument is charged, and a magnet and a metal fraudulent instrument are passed through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility or an opening that has destroyed a part of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to act to illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by operating. In the fraud detection process in step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a, the fraudulent act using the magnet for the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is judged that has been done.

  Similarly, at the normal time, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor an illegal act on a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, during normal times, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b monitors whether or not magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not have occurred in the area ahead of the game area 5a has occurred (whether the magnet has approached). In addition, the illegal action such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to enter various winning holes and gate portions (gates) provided in the game board 5 is monitored. In addition, in the cheating detection process of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, it is determined that cheating using a magnet is being performed on the area in front of the game area 5a. doing.

  In this example, two magnetic sensors, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area unit magnetic sensor 2470b, are provided as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal act by a magnet. The sensors 2470a and 2470b may have the same performance. That is, although not shown, the two magnetic sensors 2470a and 2470b are formed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and have a directivity that is highly sensitive in the vertical direction with respect to the side surface on one side. It is possible to perform magnetic detection in the magnetic detection region and magnetic detection in the second magnetic detection region having high directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to the opposite side surface. It has become. “High sensitivity in the vertical direction” means that the sensitivity is higher in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The game area magnetic sensor 2470b is arranged such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area that are emitted from the side surface of the sensor body extend in the left-right direction or the vertical direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1. , A wide range on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a plurality of winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the normal winning port 2003, the big winning port 2005, etc., and other main parts of the ball channel) Can be monitored). On the other hand, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is configured such that the first magnetic detection region and the second magnetic detection region that are emitted from the side surface of the sensor body are spread in the front-rear direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1, and One magnetism detection area is arranged so as to include the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be monitored.

  As shown in FIG. 164, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is used to monitor fraudulent acts on a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent acts on a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. This is because, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, a regular worker who performs setting change of the set value or confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, there is no room for illegal activities using magnets other than such regular workers, whereas the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is in a position that cannot be visually recognized by regular workers. This is because there is a possibility that a person other than such a regular worker may perform an illegal act using a magnet. In addition, when an authorized worker who changes the setting value or confirms and displays the setting value has something that can generate magnetism, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b may detect the occurrence of magnetism. However, the possibility that the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the occurrence of magnetism is high, but the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the occurrence of magnetism as an illegal act using a magnet. It is possible to prevent the hindrance to the change of the regular setting and the confirmation display work.

  In addition, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. This is because, in a change permission state or a confirmation display state, when a regular operator who performs setting change of a setting value or confirmation display of a setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key switch 1311a is set to a pachinko machine. This is because vibration may be transmitted to the vibration sensor 3005 provided on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 although it is provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, even if a regular operator who performs setting change or setting value confirmation display applies vibration, the vibration sensor 3005 is prevented from detecting the occurrence of vibration as a fraudulent act caused by vibration. It is possible to suppress the change of the setting and the obstruction of the confirmation display work. In this example, monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005 is executed only during a big hit game during normal times, but during a big hit game, similar to the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects a fraud with a magnet. Not only in a variable state, but also the fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 may be executed. Even in the case of executing the fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 during the changeable state or the big hit game, the change permission state or the confirmation display state before the transition to the changeable state is performed. In addition, monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state that are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the game area unit magnetic sensor 2470b is monitored for illegal acts related to magnetism, whereas the vibration sensor 3005 is used. Monitoring of fraudulent actions related to vibration using

  In this example, two magnetic sensors, that is, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area magnetic sensor 2470b, are provided, but only the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is provided, and the front side of the game board 5 is provided. It may be possible to detect only the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located in the area. In such a configuration, similarly to the configuration of the two magnetic sensors described above, not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the game area unit magnetic sensor 2470b is used to detect the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. Monitors fraud in certain areas. In addition, a plurality of magnetic sensors instead of one magnetic sensor are provided as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, and the entire area in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 is provided by the plurality of magnetic sensors. You may make it monitor. For example, at a plurality of locations such as a winning port such as a first starting port 2002, a second starting port 2004, a normal winning port 2003, a large winning port 2005, and other main parts of the ball channel on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 On the other hand, the occurrence of magnetism can be detected so that each magnetic sensor of the plurality of magnetic sensors corresponds, and illegal activities are monitored. In such a configuration, not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the entire area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is used by using all of the plurality of magnetic sensors as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b. Monitors fraud. However, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, only a part of the plurality of magnetic sensors as the game region magnetic sensor 2470b is used, and an important region (for example, the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, In addition, it is possible to monitor only the illegal act on the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the normal winning port 2003, the big winning port 2005, etc.

  In addition, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is detected. Judging that cheating is taking place. In addition, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is magnetic at that time. When a magnetic generation command that specifies the detection of the occurrence of a magnetic field is set in the second command buffer and the magnetic generation command is set in the second command buffer, the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF has arrived. Until this time, the magnetic generation command set in the second command buffer is held, and at the timing t4, the magnetic generation command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Also, the peripheral control MPU receives a magnetism generation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that the peripheral control MPU can receive images, lamps, and speakers from the effect display device 1600 over a predetermined period from the timing t4. Is output at the time of occurrence of magnetism for notifying the occurrence of magnetism to a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. As notification at the time of occurrence of magnetism, sound that repeats “magnetic detection abnormality”, a message display of “magnetic detection abnormality!”, And lamp emission with higher brightness than normal are executed. As described above, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the occurrence of magnetism is detected in the predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished. When the hall manager detects that the main body frame 4 is open or the occurrence of magnetism is detected in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 by performing notification at the time of magnetic detection toward the outside. I can grasp it. It should be noted that after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished, it is possible to simultaneously execute the above-mentioned notification when the door is opened or abnormal entry, but the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism. In such a case, it is possible to preferentially execute the notification at the time of occurrence of magnetism, assuming that a serious injustice is suspected.

  As described above, commands related to fraud monitoring such as a command at the time of occurrence of magnetism are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state and the confirmation display state in the same manner as the door opening command and abnormal winning command, and the command Without sending the set command immediately to the peripheral control board 1510, the command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and at time t4, The command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, even when the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the occurrence of magnetism as a fraudulent act using a magnet when changing the setting value or performing a confirmation display of the setting value, a notification at the time of occurrence of magnetism is executed. This can prevent the inhibition of regular work.

  In the above, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the change permission state or the confirmation display state is not executed at that time without performing the notification when the magnetism occurs. The notification at the time of occurrence of magnetism is executed after the end, but if it is a notification that does not hinder regular work, it may be executed in advance during the period of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. . For example, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU, etc. ) Side delays the notification by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600, but does not output from the speaker but only displays an error on 7 segments provided on the payout control board 633. For example, simple notification on the control board 1310 (main control MPU) side can be executed in advance without delay.

  Further, in this example, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the gaming area unit magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraud for a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, but only in the confirmation display state, The gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b may be used to monitor fraud in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform confirmation display of the set value by short-term work, so that the possibility that the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism due to a regular worker is low, While the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to strengthen the monitoring of fraudulent acts on the predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the change of the setting value is changed by long-term work in the change permission state. The gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is highly likely to detect the occurrence of magnetism due to a legitimate worker, and the pachinko machine 1 using the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is emphasized with emphasis on the workability of the legitimate worker. It is also possible not to execute monitoring of fraudulent acts on a predetermined area on the front side of the screen.

[15. Suggestion of setting value]
In this embodiment, based on a variation pattern determined using a predetermined variation pattern table, the effect display device 1600 executes a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that can suggest a value. And as for the suggestion effect, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the special symbol change display (decorative display change display) is performed 100 times in the subsequent game. It is possible to suggest the current setting value. Specifically, if the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it will be specified every time a special symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display) is performed 100 times in subsequent games. The variation pattern table in which the execution of the suggestion effect is set is determined from the specific variation pattern table. The transition of the variation pattern table after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 169. FIG. 165 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the first variation pattern setting process. FIG. 166 is a table showing the transition of the fluctuation pattern table after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, FIG. 167 is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects based on the fluctuation pattern, and FIG. 168 is a pachinko machine. FIG. 169 shows a specific effect example of the roulette effect as the suggestive effect A2. FIG. 169 shows the change pattern table C used when the number of changes of the special symbol after power-on of the machine 1 is 500 times.

  As shown in FIG. 165, in this example, the first variation pattern setting process (and the second variation pattern setting process) is different from the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 96 in steps S2144 and S2145. Have Specifically, when selecting the variation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach detachment) in step S2144, in addition to the current gaming state, a special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z. The table corresponding to the number of fluctuations is selected. Similarly, when selecting the fluctuation pattern table at the time of deviation in step S2145, in addition to the current gaming state, according to the number of special symbol fluctuations after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z. A table is selected. “Powering on the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z” means that the RWM clear button 633z is operated but the setting key switch 1311a is not operated, and the main control is performed without changing the setting. When only initialization of the built-in RAM is performed (when only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed, the setting value before power-off is maintained), the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are The case where the operation is performed and the setting value is changed is included.

  In addition to the above, when selecting a variation pattern table according to the number of variations of the special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The number of times the special symbol fluctuates after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is 500 times, depending on whether the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without changing the setting. The variation pattern table selected at a certain time is made different. Further, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on depends on which of the setting values is 1 to 6. The variation pattern table selected when is 500 times is different.

  After “turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z”, the fluctuation of the special symbol after the power on of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on using the fluctuation counter stored in the main control built-in RAM. I know the number of times. That is, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z is turned on, every time the special symbol fluctuation display is performed, the fluctuation counter is incremented by 1 (counting up), and the pachinko accompanying the operation of the RWM clear button 633z When the machine 1 is turned on, the fluctuation counter is cleared. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the variation counter is not cleared. In addition, after “turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z”, whether the setting value has been changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Information on whether only initialization of the RAM has been performed is also stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 166, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine is used as a fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach deviation) and a fluctuation pattern table at the time of deviation. The fluctuation pattern table A when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the power-on of the machine 1 is 1 to 99 times, the fluctuation pattern table B when it is 100 times, the fluctuation pattern table A when it is 101 to 199 times, Variation pattern table B when 200 times, variation pattern table A when 201-299 times, variation pattern table B when 300 times, variation pattern table A when 300 times, and variation pattern table A when 400 times Fluctuation pattern table B when, and fluctuation pattern table A when 401 to 499 times 500 times the fluctuation pattern table C in accordance with the set value when it has been decided to select in order. The variation pattern table C according to the set value includes a variation pattern table C1 when the set value is 1, a variation pattern table C2 when the set value is 2, and a variation pattern when the set value is 3. When the set value is 4, the change pattern table C4 is selected when the set value is 4, the change pattern table C5 is selected when the set value is 5, and the change pattern table C6 is selected when the set value is 6.

  A plurality of types of variation patterns are set in each of the variation pattern tables described above. Each variation pattern has a variation time of a special symbol and an effect display device 1600 that is executed within the variation time of the special symbol. Fluctuation effects such as a decorative display variation display are set. In such a variation effect, the effect of determining whether or not the lottery result is a hit is performed after the decorative symbol variation display is started and stopped. Further, as the variation pattern table, there are variation pattern tables A to C at the time of reach (at the time of detachment) and variation pattern tables A to C at the time of detachment, and the variation pattern at the time of reach (at the time of reach detachment). In the tables A to C, a variation pattern for forming reach in the decorative symbol variation display and executing the reach effect is set, whereas in the variation pattern tables A to C at the time of detachment, the variation of the decorative symbol is set. A variation pattern that does not form reach in the display is set. In other words, the variation pattern tables A to C at the time of reach (at the time of the detachment of the reach) are different from the variation pattern tables A to C at the time of the detachment whether or not the reach is formed in the variation display of the decorative symbol (whether the reach effect is executed). Different variation patterns are set in terms of whether or not. However, with respect to the fluctuation pattern table C at the time of reach (at the time of reach deviation), a fluctuation pattern table C common to the fluctuation pattern table C at the time of loss may be used. As will be described later in detail, when the variation pattern table C is selected, an effect (such as reach effect) whether or not the lottery result is a win at any time of reach (when reach is lost) or not. Since the suggestion effect A2 (roulette effect) is executed based on the change pattern without being executed, the common change pattern table C is set so as to determine the change pattern in which execution of the suggestion effect A2 is set. Can be used.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (A), in the variation pattern table A, variation patterns in which the execution of the suggestive effect is not set are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. That is, the variation pattern table A is a “variation pattern table that does not depend on the setting value” that can be used in common for any setting value. A2 is not executed. In addition, the game period using the variation pattern table A is set longer than the game period using the other variation pattern table, thereby limiting the frequent occurrence of the suggestion effects A1, A2, etc. in the game progress process, and the suggestion effect. Increases the rarity of A1 and A2. In addition, the fluctuation pattern table A is provided as a table that can be used in common for any set value, thereby suppressing the compression of the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 1 due to the increase of the fluctuation pattern table. it can.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), in the variation pattern table B, variation patterns in which execution of the suggestive effect A1 is set are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. In addition, in the variation pattern table B, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is added for 3 seconds is set as compared with the plurality of types of variation patterns set in the variation pattern table A, and the variation pattern table B is set in the added 3 seconds. The suggestion effect A1 is executed. And in suggestion effect A1, it is made to suggest whether the present setting value is a high setting or a low setting by the light emission frequency (1-3 times) of the light-guide plate 3110. FIG. However, in the variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion effect A1 is set, the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 that is the effect content of the suggestion effect A1 is not set. Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestive effect A1 is set, the light emission number of the light guide plate 3110 is any one of 1 to 3 based on the current set value. However, when the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 is determined, the light emission number of the light guide plate 3110 is increased as the current setting value is higher. Note that at the timing when the variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a change pattern command, the current setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command. It is possible to grasp which of the set values 1 to 6 is the value. Thereby, in suggestion effect A1, when there are many light emission times of the light-guide plate 3110, it can be anticipated that the present setting value is a high setting.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B, the variation display of the decoration symbol is started, and the effect of whether or not the lottery result is successful is executed. Although the display is temporarily stopped and then the decorative symbol variation display is stopped, the suggestion effect A1 is executed between the temporary stop of the decorative symbol variation display and the stoppage. As described above, since the suggestion effect A1 is executed after the effect whether or not the lottery result is a win, the visual recognition of the effect whether or not the lottery result is a hit may be hindered. Absent.

  Note that, as with the variation pattern table A, the variation pattern table B is also a “variation pattern table that does not depend on the set value” that can be used in common for any set value. Thereby, suppression of the compression of the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 1 due to an increase in the variation pattern table can also be achieved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), a variation pattern in which execution of the suggestive effect A2 is set is set in the variation pattern table C as a plurality of types of variation patterns. In addition, the variation pattern for which execution of the suggestion effect A2 is set is a variation pattern that is not set in the variation pattern table A or the variation pattern table B, and instead of the effect whether or not the lottery result is a win. The suggestion effect A2 is set to be executed. Then, in the suggestion effect A2, the roulette effect is executed, and the current setting is determined depending on whether the roulette effect is stopped at “even”, “odd”, “high setting”, “setting value 6”, or “?”. I try to suggest a value.

  As shown in FIG. 168, in the variation pattern table C, as a plurality of types of variation patterns, a variation pattern 1 that stops at “even” as a result of the roulette effect, a variation pattern that stops at “odd”. 2. Fluctuation pattern 3 that stops at “high setting”, fluctuation pattern 4 that stops at “set value 6”, and fluctuation pattern 5 that stops at “?” Are prepared. Specifically, since the current setting value is 1 in the fluctuation pattern table C1, the fluctuation pattern 2 is set so as to stop at “odd number” as a result of the roulette effect. In addition, since the current setting value is 2 in the variation pattern table C2, the variation pattern 1 is set so as to stop at “even” as a result of the roulette effect. In the variation pattern table C3, since the current set value is 3, the variation pattern 2 is set to stop at “odd number” as a result of the roulette effect. In the variation pattern table C4, since the current set value is 4, the variation pattern 1 is set to stop at “even” as a result of the roulette effect, and the variation pattern is set to stop at “high setting”. 3 is set. In the fluctuation pattern table C5, since the current set value is 5, the fluctuation pattern 2 is set to stop at “odd number” as a result of the roulette effect, and the fluctuation pattern is set to stop at “high setting”. 3 is set. In the fluctuation pattern table C6, since the current set value is 6, the fluctuation pattern 1 is set to stop at “even” as a result of the roulette effect, and the fluctuation pattern is set to stop at “high setting”. 3. A variation pattern 4 is set so as to stop at “set value 6”. As described above, the suggestion effect A2 includes a mode that specifically indicates a set value such as “high setting” or “setting value 6” than the suggestion effect A1, so that attention should be paid to the result of the roulette effect. Thus, in the suggestion effect A2, when the roulette effect is stopped at “high setting” or “setting value 6”, the lottery result has a high probability of winning, so that the game can be performed with expectation.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, the variation display of the decoration symbol is started, the variation display of the decoration symbol is temporarily stopped, and then the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed. However, during the period from the start of the decorative display of the decorative symbol until the temporary stop, the display of the decorative symbol is displayed without performing an effect as to whether or not the lottery result is a win. The roulette effect is executed as the suggestion effect A2 in a state where the display device 1600 is displayed in a small corner. Thus, since the suggestion effect A2 is executed in a situation where the effect of whether or not the lottery result is winning is executed, whether or not the decorative symbol variation display or the lottery result is winning is determined. The visual effect on the suggestion effect A2 is not hindered by the effect, and the degree of attention to the suggestion effect A2 can be increased.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, in the roulette effect, a roulette display divided into five parts of “even number”, “odd number”, “high setting”, “setting value 6”, and “?” Appears on the effect display device 1600. With the signal “Start roulette production!”, The lighting location moves clockwise. Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed, the movement of the lighted portion of the roulette display slowly decelerates, and the results of the roulette effect (“even”, “odd”, “high setting”, “setting value 6”, “ The lighting part stops at any of “?”. At this time, when stopping at “even” as a result of the roulette effect based on the variation pattern, it is recognized that the current setting value is 2, 4, or 6 and stopped at “odd” Allows the user to recognize that the current setting value is 1, 3, or 5, and when it stops at “high setting”, it recognizes that the current setting value is any of 4 to 5. If it stops at “set value 6”, it recognizes that the current set value is 6, and if it stops at “?”, Which of the current set values is 1 to 6? Can be recognized. Regarding the variation patterns 1 to 5, the variation time of the special symbol is varied, and in the roulette effect executed within the variation time of the special symbol, the time until the result stops is different.

  The variation pattern table C is different from the variation pattern table A and the variation pattern table B, and differs depending on the set value, and is “a variation pattern table depending on the set value”. Thereby, the execution time of suggestion effect A2 (roulette effect) can be varied according to the set value, and the degree of freedom of effect design that suggests the set value can be increased.

  As described above, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern table B is selected every time the variation display of the special symbol in the subsequent game is performed 100 times. The suggestion effect A1 is executed based on the change pattern, and when the special symbol change display is performed 500 times, the suggestion effect A2 is executed based on the change pattern selected from the change pattern tables C1 to C6. . Further, when the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the change pattern tables C1 to C6 corresponding to the set value are used when the change display of the special symbol is performed 500 times. The suggestive effect A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 corresponding to the set value. As described above, when the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, every time the special symbol change display in the subsequent game is performed 100 times, the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 Since the set value is suggested, the game can be performed with expectation until the suggested effect A1 and the suggested effect A2 are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 166, when only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is out of the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach off) As the variation pattern table, the variation pattern table A when the number of variations of the special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is 1 to 99 times, the variation pattern table B when the number of variations is 100 times, and 101 to 199 times. Fluctuation pattern table A when 200 times, Fluctuation pattern table B when 200 times, Fluctuation pattern table A when 201-299 times, Fluctuation pattern table B when 300 times, 301-399 times Fluctuation pattern table A, sometimes 400 times Fluctuation pattern table B, 401-499 times It is set to be selected in the order of the variation pattern table C0, when a change pattern table A, 500 times in a certain time.

  As described above, in the variation pattern table B, variation patterns in which execution of the suggestive effect A1 is set are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. After the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the suggestion effect A1, when the light guide plate 3110 emits light 1 to 3 times, the light from the LED 3121 is first applied to the light guide plate 3110. In contrast to the fact that the design emits light, only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The light guide plate 3110 is caused to emit the second pattern once by light. For this reason, when the suggestion effect A1 is executed, has the setting value been changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on depending on whether the first design or the second design emits light on the light guide plate 3110? It is possible to grasp whether only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting. That is, in the suggestion effect A1, when the second pattern emits light on the light guide plate 3110, information on the current set value cannot be grasped like the number of times the first pattern emits light (1 to 3 times). It can be ascertained that the set value has not been changed since the power was shut off and the previous set value is maintained.

  Further, as described above, in the variation pattern table C, variation patterns for which execution of the suggestive effect A2 is set are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. Of these, when only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern table C0 is selected. Regardless of whether the current set value is 1 to 6, the variation pattern 5 is set so that it stops at “?” As a result of the roulette effect. In this regard, after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect A2 does not stop with “?” As a result of the roulette effect. By stopping at “?”, It is possible to know that the main control built-in RAM has been initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. That is, in the suggestion effect A2, when the roulette effect stops as “?”, Information on the current set value such as “even number”, “odd number”, “high setting”, “setting value 6” is displayed. Although it cannot be grasped, it can be grasped that the setting value has not been changed since the power was shut off and the previous setting value is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 166, when the set value confirmation display is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power is turned on normally (power is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a). Shows the variation pattern table according to the number of variations of the special symbol since the last time the pachinko machine 1 was turned on with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z. You are going to choose. That is, when the power is shut off, the fluctuation counter stored in the main control built-in RAM is retained (backed up), and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z. Is continuously used without being cleared, and each time a special symbol is displayed, the variable number counter is incremented by one (counted up). In this way, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the fluctuation counter is not cleared, so the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is When it is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times, the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are not necessarily executed. For this reason, whether the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed in addition to when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times I can draw attention with expectations.

  In addition, the variation counter is incremented by 1 every time the variation display of the special symbol is performed, but when the variation number of the special symbol after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 becomes 500 times, The fluctuation counter is cleared, and then 1 is added (counted up) every time the special symbol fluctuation display is performed again. That is, when the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern table A (1st to 99th) → B (100th) → A (101 to 199th) → B (200 To repeat A) → A (201-299th) → B (300th) → A (301-399th) → B (400th) → A (401-499th) → C1-C6 (500th) On the other hand, when the main control RAM is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern table A (1st to 99th time) → B (100th time) → A (101st to 199th time) → B ( 200th) → A (201-299th) → B (300th) → A (301-399th) → B (400th) → A (401-499th) → C0 (500th) Yes.

  In addition, even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is 500 times, if the lottery result is a win, the variation number counter is cleared and then the special symbol is again displayed. Each time the variable display is performed, 1 is added (counted up). In other words, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are executed when the lottery result is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times. As a result, even if the lottery result is not successful over 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect A1 or It can be expected to perform the suggestion effect A2.

  Further, as described above, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the suggestion effect A1, the current number of times of light emission (1 to 3 times) of the first pattern of the light guide plate 3110 is set. In the case where only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the light guide plate 3110 is informed in the suggestion effect A1. Information on the current set value of the light emitting second pattern is not notified. When the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the result of the roulette effect is “even”, “odd”, “high setting”, “setting value 6” in the suggestion effect A2. In the case where only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 In the suggestion effect A2, information on the current setting value is not notified by stopping at any of the ?? For this reason, if the hole manager thinks that he / she does not want to notify the player of information on the current set value when the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine is again set. By turning on the power after the power of the machine 1 is turned off and only initializing the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, information on the current set value is given to the player. To avoid notification.

  Further, in the normal state (non-short-time state), the variation pattern tables A to C are used in the above-described order every time the special symbol variation display is performed, whereas the short-time state is entered after the lottery result is hit. In this case, the variation pattern table at the time-short state is used as a table different from the variation pattern tables A to C. In this variation pattern table in the short state, variation patterns in which the variation time of the special symbol is shortened as compared with those in the normal state are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. And even if it becomes a short time state after the lottery result is won, by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern table when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the start of the short time state becomes a predetermined number of times, From the specific variation pattern table, the variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion effect is set is determined, and the suggestion effect is executed based on the variation pattern. At this time, for example, in the short-time state, by performing the suggestion effect more frequently than in the normal state, not only whether the lottery result is a win, but also whether or not the suggestion effect is executed is expected to pay attention. be able to. At the end of the time-saving state, the fluctuation number counter is cleared, and thereafter, 1 is added (counted up) every time a special symbol fluctuation display is performed.

  In addition, when the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The variation pattern table B and the variation pattern table C are used when the number of variations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times. In this case, a specific variation pattern table may be used. For example, a specific variation pattern table may be used when the variation display of the special symbol after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is the first time. As described above, when the variation display of the special symbol after the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is the first time, by selecting the specific variation pattern table, execution of the suggestion effect is set from the specific variation pattern table The variation pattern is determined, and the suggestion effect can be executed based on the variation pattern. In this respect, most of the setting value setting change and initialization of the main control built-in RAM without setting change are performed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the hall is opened. By performing the suggestion effect at the first time of the special symbol variation display after the machine 1 is turned on, it is possible to generate a willingness to actively start the game immediately after opening the hall.

  In addition, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the main control RAM is initialized without changing the setting, the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on When the number of changes is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times, the suggested effect A1 and the suggested effect A2 are executed using the change pattern table B and the change pattern table C. For example, using the effect display device 1600, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is added based on the fluctuation number counter (1 fluctuation → 2 fluctuation → 3 fluctuation →... The number of times of the remaining display of the special symbol until the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed is displayed as a change counter. Based on the subtraction may be or notification in the form of going to (and will reduce the fluctuation count display by the remaining 500 change → 499 change → 497 change → ··· and "-1"). Further, in such notification, the remaining number of times of display of the special symbol is 10 times until the execution timing of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 approaches, for example, until the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are executed. You may make it perform from the stage. Thereby, the player can grasp whether or not the execution timing of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 is approaching, and information on the current set value is obtained until the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are executed. The game can be continued with expectation as expected.

  In addition, when the execution timing of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 approaches, the execution of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 is approaching as a separate effect from the notification of the number of changes in the special symbol. A special precursor effect that informs the person may be executed. For example, at the stage where the remaining number of times that the special symbol change display until the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed is 10, the effect display device 1600 is used to indicate “setting suggestion in 10 more times!” Or the like. By displaying the display and prompting the player to continue the game, the game can be continued with the expectation that information on the current set value can be obtained. In addition, the notification of the number of changes in the special symbol is made only when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or without changing the setting value. In such a case, the notification content may be reset to the initial state along with the initialization of the variation counter. As a result, there is no deviation between the number of times of change notified to the player and the time when the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed using the change pattern table B or the change pattern table C, and the suggestion effect A1 or suggestion The reliability with respect to execution of production A2 can be improved.

[15-1. About a variation of the change of the fluctuation pattern table when the main control RAM is initialized]
In the above-described embodiment, when the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach deviation) As each of the variation pattern tables, the variation pattern table is selected in the order of the variation pattern table different from the case where the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the variation pattern table B or the variation pattern table C0 is selected. In the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 when selecting, information on the current set value is not notified. As another embodiment, when the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine is based on the set value that has already been set. The suggested effect A1 when the change pattern is selected from the change pattern table B or the change pattern tables C1 to C6 is selected in the same order as the change pattern table when the set value is changed when the power is turned on. In the suggestion effect A2, information on the current set value may be notified. Hereinafter, transition of a special variation pattern table when only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a table showing a modified example of the transition of the variation pattern table after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 170, when the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value that has already been set is referred to. Based on the value, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach deviation) and the fluctuation pattern table at the time of deviation are set. Specifically, as in the case where the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is used as the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach detachment) and the fluctuation pattern table at the time of detachment. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after power-on is 1 to 99, the fluctuation pattern table A is 100 times, the fluctuation pattern table B is 100 times, and the fluctuation pattern table A is 200 times when 101 to 199 times. Fluctuation pattern table B when it is 201, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 201-299 times, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 300 times, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 301-399 times, 400 times Fluctuation pattern table B, sometimes 401-499 times Fluctuation pattern table A, 50 Is set to be selected in the variation pattern table C, the order of corresponding to the set value when a round. The variation pattern table C according to the set value includes a variation pattern table C1 when the set value is 1, a variation pattern table C2 when the set value is 2, and a variation pattern when the set value is 3. When the set value is 4, the change pattern table C4 is selected when the set value is 4, the change pattern table C5 is selected when the set value is 5, and the change pattern table C6 is selected when the set value is 6.

  After the initialization of the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Similarly, in the suggestion effect A1 when the variation pattern table B is selected, when the light guide plate 3110 emits light 1 to 3 times, the light from the LED 3121 causes the light guide plate 3110 to emit the first pattern. That is, in the suggestion effect A1, whether the current set value is a high setting or a low setting is suggested by the number of times of light emission (1 to 3 times) of the light guide plate 3110. In addition, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion effect A1 is set, the light emission number of the light guide plate 3110 is determined to be 1 to 3 based on the current set value. However, when the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 is determined, the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 is increased as the current setting value is higher. As a result, even when the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without changing the setting value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the suggestion effect A1, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Information about the current setting value can be grasped in the same manner as after the setting value has been changed. When the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 is large, it can be expected that the current setting value is a high setting. .

  After the initialization of the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Similarly, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is 500, the fluctuation pattern table C corresponding to the set value is selected. That is, as the variation pattern table C corresponding to the setting value, the variation pattern table C1 when the setting value is 1, the variation pattern table C2 when the setting value is 2, and the variation pattern table C2 when the setting value is 3. C3, the variation pattern table C4 when the set value is 4, the variation pattern table C5 when the set value is 5, and the variation pattern table C6 when the set value is 6. In the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, the roulette effect is executed as the suggestion effect A2, and the result of the roulette effect is stopped at any of “even”, “odd”, “high setting”, and “setting value 6”. The suggested variation patterns 1 to 4 are set, and in the suggestion effect A2, the current set value is suggested by the result of the roulette effect based on the change pattern. As a result, even when the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without changing the setting value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the suggestion effect A2, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Information about the current setting value can be grasped in the same way as after the setting value has been changed, and when the roulette effect is stopped at “high setting” or “setting value 6”, the lottery result is a hit. Since the probability is high, the game can be performed with expectation.

  As described above, when only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value setting is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. As in the case where the special symbol in the subsequent game is performed 100 times, the suggestion effect A1 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B every time the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times. When the display is performed 500 times, since the suggestion effect A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, there is no effect difference between the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2. Therefore, depending on the execution of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2, whether the setting value setting was changed when the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, or only initialization of the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting value setting. I can't figure out if I did it.

  In the present modification, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, notification of the completion of setting is executed by an output from the effect display device 1600, an image from the lamp, and the speaker, and the setting value is set. Notifying that changes have been made. Similarly, when only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initial display is based on the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. When the initialization is completed, a notification is executed to notify that the main control built-in RAM has been initialized. As a result, whether the setting value setting was changed when the pachinko machine 1 was turned on by executing the setting completion notification or the initialization completion notification, or the initial setting of the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting value setting. It is possible to grasp whether or not only In addition, as notification when the setting is completed or notification when the initialization is completed, for example, the initial display mode of the decorative symbols (such as the initial symbol combination before the start of the first variation) on the effect display device 1600 is changed. For example, the display mode may be different from that in the case where only initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed. These notifications are made when a special symbol change display is started after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off again and turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z). Is turned on), and when the notification is finished, the setting value setting is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the main control built-in RAM is not changed without changing the setting value setting. It becomes impossible to know whether only initialization has been performed. As a result, the player is notified whether the set value has been changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or only the main control built-in RAM has been initialized without changing the set value. If you do not want to do so, for example, the hall manager again shuts down the pachinko machine 1 and turns on the power (turns on the pachinko machine 1 without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z). In addition, it is possible to arbitrarily create a state in which notification is not executed when initialization is completed.

  Moreover, in this modification, when the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value before the power is shut off is maintained. Since the value before the power interruption is reset for the variation counter, when the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation counter is selected thereafter, the variation counter starts from the beginning (variation pattern table corresponding to the first variation). It will be. In other words, when the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without changing the setting value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the hall administrator maintains the same setting value as before the power cut-off. Thus, only the variation counter can be reset, and when the number of variations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times since the power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the suggestion effect A1 Information about the current set value can be notified by the suggestion effect A2. On the other hand, in the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value. While the value is maintained, the fluctuation counter is reset, but when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times since the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on Information regarding the current set value is not notified by the effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2. For this reason, it is suggested that the number of changes in the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times since the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 while maintaining the same set value as before the power is turned off. In order to notify the information about the current set value by the effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2, the hall manager operates to change the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is necessary to reset the set value. In this regard, in this modification, it is not necessary to change the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value setting. , It is possible to save the trouble of “resetting the same set value as before the power is shut off”.

  Also in this modified example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the execution timing of the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 approaches, the suggestion effect A1 or You may make it perform the special precursor effect which notifies a player that execution of suggestion effect A2 is approaching immediately. For example, at the stage where the remaining number of times that the special symbol change display until the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed is 10, the effect display device 1600 is used to indicate “setting suggestion in 10 more times!” Or the like. By displaying the display and prompting the player to continue the game, the game can be continued with the expectation that information on the current set value can be obtained. In addition, the notification of the number of changes in the special symbol is made only when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or without changing the setting value. In such a case, the notification content may be reset to the initial state. As a result, there is no deviation between the number of times of change notified to the player and the time when the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed using the change pattern table B or the change pattern table C, and the suggestion effect A1 or suggestion The reliability with respect to execution of production A2 can be improved.

[15-2. Suggestion effect B executed at a different timing from the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2]
In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are executed in accordance with the passage of the variation time of the decoration symbol in the variation effect such as the variation display of the decoration symbol in the effect display device 1600. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect B that can suggest the current set value at a different timing from the execution of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2, regardless of the passage of the variation time of the decorative symbol. Execution of the suggestion effect B will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, with regard to the suggestion effect B, a lottery for determining whether or not the suggestion effect B is executed is performed with a predetermined probability when the handle 111 that is not operated is operated in a situation where there is no operation instruction of the handle 111. ing. Specifically, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the operation of the handle 111 and a detection signal is input to the payout control board 633, the fact that the detection signal is input is transmitted via the main control board 1310. It is inputted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 performs lottery as to whether or not the suggestion effect B is executed with a predetermined probability (in this embodiment, lottery winning at 1/50). This lottery is set to win with a higher probability than at least jackpot lottery, and by making it appear frequently, it is easier for a plurality of players to experience the suggestion effect B, or it is suggested to one player. The experience B is experienced a plurality of times to improve the game continuation motivation. And in the lottery of whether to perform the suggestion effect B, when the execution of the suggestion effect B is determined (when winning), one of the plurality of types of suggestion patterns is selected according to the current set value. The suggestion pattern is determined, and the suggestion effect B is executed based on the determined suggestion pattern. Further, in the suggestion effect B, the current set value is suggested by the output from the lamp and the speaker provided in the main body frame 4 regardless of any suggestion pattern. It should be noted that when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (when the setting change of the setting value or the confirmation display of the setting value is completed), the current setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command. On the peripheral control board 1510 side, information on the current setting value is held, and it is possible to grasp which of the setting values 1 to 6 is the current setting value. However, as described above in detail, the current set value is also transmitted as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing when the variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a change pattern command. It is possible to grasp which of the set values 1 to 6 is the current set value also by the command. Thereby, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, when execution of the suggestion effect B is determined (when winning), one of the plurality of types of suggestion patterns is determined according to the current set value. be able to.

  More specifically, in the suggestion effect B, the voice from the speaker may be “setting value 1”, “setting value 2”, “setting value 3”, “setting value 4”, “setting value 5”, The current set value is suggested depending on whether “set value 6 may be output”. Further, when outputting “set value 1 may” as the sound from the speaker, the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 is made to emit light once, and when outputting “set value 2 may”, it is provided on the main body frame 4. When the lamp is caused to emit light twice at a predetermined interval and “set value 3 may” is output, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is emitted three times at a predetermined interval and when “set value 4 may be” is output. When the lamp provided in the frame 4 emits light four times at a predetermined interval and “set value 5 may” is output, the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 emits light five times at a predetermined interval. Is output, the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 is caused to emit light the number of times according to the suggestion of the set value so that the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 emits light six times at predetermined intervals. Further, for example, “setting value 6 may be” can be output when the current setting value is not 6, that is, any of 1 to 5; ”Is output, there is a case where the current setting value is a value other than 6. In addition, in the suggestion effect B, other than these, it is suggested that the current setting value is “even” of 2, 4, 6, or “odd” of 1, 3, 5 Or, it may be suggested that the “high setting” is 4 to 6.

  In addition, the suggestion effect B can be executed regardless of whether or not it is within a fluctuating effect such as a decorative display variation display in the effect display device 1600, except for the execution period of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2. I have to. As shown in FIG. 167 (A), when the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table A is executed, execution of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 is not set. The suggestion effect B can be executed within the variation time of the special symbol based (the variation time of the decorative symbol). However, in the present embodiment, if the suggestion effect B for which the execution condition has been satisfied is still being executed, the execution condition for the new suggestion effect B is not satisfied, and the duplicate execution of the suggestion effect B is prohibited ( Limit). Specifically, during the execution of the suggestion effect B, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the operation of the handle 111 and a detection signal is input to the payout control board 633, and the main control board indicates that the detection signal is input. Even if it is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the suggestion effect B is being executed, and does not perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect B. Is prohibited (restricted).

  In addition, the suggestion effect B of the present embodiment is executed by combining the sound from the speaker and the light emission of the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 as described above, and after the sound from the speaker is finished. In the case where the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 continues to emit light at a predetermined interval (for example, even when the sound of “set value 6 may be” is output, the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 is caused to emit light at a predetermined interval. When the process remains, or when the sound from the speaker continues even after the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 has finished emitting (for example, the “set value 1 may be” sound has not been output yet) (When the process of causing the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 to emit light) is completed. For this reason, as the period for which it is determined that the suggestive effect B is being executed, the sound output period from the speaker is associated with a long period of the light emission periods of the lamps provided in the main body frame 4. . Thereby, as the target period of the lottery prohibition during the suggestion effect B, the duplicate execution of the suggestion effect B is surely prohibited (restricted).

  Moreover, even if it is under the above-mentioned prohibition, if the execution interval between the suggestion effect B executed first and the suggestion effect B executed later is short, the front and rear suggestion effects B will be continuous. There is a concern that the player may misrecognize the suggested content due to the mixed emission of the lamps provided in No. 4. In the present embodiment, in consideration of such points, a predetermined limit extension period (for example, 5 seconds) is generated after execution of the suggestion effect B, regardless of which execution pattern the suggestion effect B is executed, It is prohibited (restricted) not to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect B over a period obtained by adding a limit extension period to the execution period of the suggestion effect B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from misrecognizing the suggested content by executing the suggestion effect B executed earlier and the suggestion effect B executed later.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), when the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B is executed, the suggestion is made in 3 seconds added to the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table A. Since the execution of the effect A1 is set, the suggestion effect B is executed in the execution period of the suggestion effect A1 within the variation time of the special symbol (decoration time of the decorative symbol) based on such a variation pattern. On the other hand, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect B except for the execution period of the suggestion effect A1.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (C), when the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C is executed, substantially all of the variation time of the special symbol (decoration time of the decorative symbol) is used as the suggestion effect A2. Since the execution of the roulette effect is set, it is prohibited to execute the suggestion effect B within the special symbol variation time (decorative symbol variation time) based on such a variation pattern.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), when the special symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display) based on the variation pattern is not performed, the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect B in a period in which such special symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display) is not performed.

  As described above, unlike the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2, the present set value is suddenly suggested when the handle 111 is operated, and thus the player is surprised. Can do. In addition, during the execution period of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2, the execution of the suggestion effect B is prohibited, and the execution of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 is prioritized over the suggestion effect B. It is possible to prevent visual recognition of the suggestion effect A2 from being disturbed, and to actively focus on the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2. In this regard, for the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2, it is preferable to make the suggestion reliability higher than that of the suggestion effect B, such as by eliminating the haze like the suggestion effect B.

  Further, as described above, the suggestion effect B is executed even within a variation effect such as a variation display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600, except for the execution period of the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2. It is possible. In this regard, for the suggestion effect B, the current setting value is suggested by the output from the lamp and the speaker provided in the main body frame 4, so that it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the variation effect from being hindered. it can. In addition, outside the changing effects such as the decorative symbol variation display in the effect display device 1600, the special symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display) is not performed, and it is a boring time, but the handle 111 Since there is a possibility that the suggestion effect B is suddenly executed when the button is operated and the current set value is suggested, it is possible to generate a willingness to start the game by operating the handle 111.

  In this example, when the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the handle 111 is operated after a predetermined condition such as closing the main body frame 4 is satisfied. , Suggesting effect B can be executed. However, if the operation of the handle 111 is continued from after the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect B can be executed even after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Absent. Therefore, when the operation of the handle 111 is continued from before the predetermined condition is satisfied and after the predetermined condition is satisfied, in order to execute the suggestion effect B, the handle 111 is temporarily set after the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is necessary to release the hand and operate the handle 111 again. It should be noted that not only when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but also when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, when the main control RAM is initialized, the normal power-on (RWM) The same applies to the case of turning on the power without operating the clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a.

  Further, in this example, although the suggestion effect B can be executed when the handle 111 is operated, the suggestion of the current set value is notified when the suggestion effect B is executed by arbitrary selection of the player. It is possible not to. That is, when the player selects not to notify the suggestion of the current set value, the current output is output from the lamp or speaker provided in the main body frame 4 at the timing of executing the suggestion effect B thereafter. The setting value is not suggested. This allows players who do not need suggestions about the current set value to choose not to notify the suggestion, so that they will not be confused by the suggestion about the current set value, You can concentrate on the production of whether or not. In addition, it may be configured not to notify only a part of the output from the lamp and the speaker provided in the main body frame 4 in the suggestion effect B by the player's arbitrary selection, for example, provided in the main body frame 4 The notification may be made depending on the output from the lamp, but the notification may not be made depending on the output from the speaker. In addition, regarding the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 that are executed in the change effect such as the decorative symbol change display in the effect display device 1600, when the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed, the suggestion of the current set value is suggested. So that the player cannot make any selections.

  Further, as described above in detail, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished, the warning notification can be extended and executed by the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. In the period of executing such warning alerts, when the suggestion effect B is executed by operating the handle 111, the mode output from the lamps and speakers provided in the main body frame 4, You may comprise so that it may differ from other periods (after completion | finish of the extended warning alert | report). For example, it may be configured not to notify only a part of the output from the lamp and speaker provided in the main body frame 4 in the suggestion effect B. For example, depending on the output from the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 The notification may be made, but the notification may not be made depending on the output from the speaker. In this way, during the period in which the warning notification is extended and executed, priority is given to the warning notification over the suggestion effect B, so that recognition of the warning notification is prevented from being disturbed. It is possible to maintain a situation where the monitoring system has been strengthened so as not to do so.

  Further, in this example, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect B when the handle 111 is operated. However, after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the handle 111 is first moved. The suggestion effect B that is executed when the operation is performed is configured such that the effect is different from the suggestion effect B that is executed when the handle 111 is operated for the second time or later. For example, the suggestion effect B that is executed when the handle 111 is first operated after changing the setting value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is suggested more than the second and subsequent times. It is configured to increase the reliability of the. Further, although the suggestion effect B can be executed with a predetermined probability when the handle 111 is operated, it may be as the time elapses (as the number of special symbol fluctuations increases). The probability of executing the suggestion effect B is lowered, and it is difficult to execute the suggestion effect B even if the handle 111 is operated. In this respect, since the hall manager often performs setting change of the set value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on before opening the hall, the game 111 is started by operating the handle 111 immediately after opening the hall. Can be motivated. It should be noted that not only when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but also when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, when the main control RAM is initialized, the normal power-on (RWM) The same applies to the case of turning on the power without operating the clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a.

  In this example, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect B when the handle 111 is operated. However, instead of operating the handle 111, the suggestion effect B is executed when the effect operation unit 160 is operated. It may be configured to be possible. When the production operation unit 160 is used as an opportunity to execute the suggestion effect B, for example, the production operation unit 160 is used as an opportunity to execute the suggestion production A1 and the suggestion production A2, and the production operation unit 160 is operated. In some cases, the suggestion effect B may be executed while the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are started. Further, as an opportunity to execute the suggestion effect B, instead of operating the handle 111, after changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after confirming the setting value and displaying the main control) After initialization of the RAM, it may be after normal power-on.) First, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 (the entrances involved in the lottery for winning or not) It is configured such that when entering a game, entering a game entrance that does not participate in the lottery of whether or not it is a general winning entrance 2001, when a specific date and time is reached using a real-time clock IC, etc. May be. Even in such a configuration, at the timing when the suggestion effect B may be executed, it is possible to generate a willingness to obtain information on the setting value by the suggestion effect B.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game control board having the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 111 as the game control central processing unit capable of controlling the progress of the game is shown in FIG. A control board 1310 is provided. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k shown in FIG. 115 that can be electrically connected to a test harness as wiring for taking out an output signal from the main control MPU 1310a and transmitting the output signal to a test apparatus that tests the pachinko machine 1. It can be prepared.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is tested by a test apparatus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x which is the front side of the main control board 1310, whereas the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y which is the back surface side of the main control board 1310.

  As described above, since the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific test engine, and when the pachinko machine 1 is a game hall Even in the case of being produced as a mass-produced machine that is shipped to the factory, an area for mounting the test connector 1310k is not formed as an empty area on the surface side of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of various electronic components on the surface of the main control board 1310 can be increased.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 ′ of FIG. 113 (a) as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game. . The plurality of electronic components include a ZIP type main control MPU (described as a part number “MIC1” in the drawing) included in the lead type of FIG. 113A as a lead type electronic component, and a surface mount type. The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 shown in FIG. 113 (a) as electronic components is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′.

  The main control board 1310 'includes a parts list area 1310xb' shown in FIG. 113A as an information area. This component list area 1310xb 'can describe information corresponding to an identifier of a surface mount type electronic component. Examples of information described in the component list area 1310xb 'include the name of a manufacturer of surface mount type electronic components (including abbreviations and symbols), and the product number of the surface mount type electronic component.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), the parts list area 1310xb ′ has a parts list of electronic parts configured in such a manner that part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned. Is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The size of the part number and the part number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part arrangement area 1310xa ′. As white (or black). A separator “:” is provided between the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, the part number and the product number (numbers listed in the catalog) can be distinguished and identified. In addition to the product number (number printed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing.

  Thus, even when the display mode of the identifier attached to the surface mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310 ′ is difficult to see, information corresponding to this identifier (manufacturer name, product number, etc.) ) Is displayed in the component list area 1310xb ′ provided on the main control board 1310 ′. Therefore, the identifier of the surface mount type electronic component can be reliably recognized.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 in FIG. 111 as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game. The control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 115 as a sealed board box having sealing means.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z formed in the transparent cover body 1301 in FIG. 115 as holes having a shape smaller than that of the surface mount type electronic component among the plurality of electronic components. It has been.

  As described above, since the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of vent holes 1301z having a shape smaller than the shape of the surface-mount type electronic component, the surface-mount type electronic component is obtained by some unauthorized means. Even if an attempt is made to peel off the main control board 1310 and replace it with an unauthorized electronic part, the surface mount type electronic parts cannot be taken out from the vent hole 1301z which is a plurality of holes provided in the main control board box 1320. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the surface mount type electronic component from being replaced with an unauthorized electronic component.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the winning control circuit includes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 as the setting device. ing. The main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities, and the setting key switch 1311a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities by an external operation.

  Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a uses various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, Big hit symbol determination table that defines the percentage of decision value for decision, small hit judgment table that defines the proportion of small hit judgment value that indicates winning for small hit, and the percentage of decision value for decision of small hit symbol A small hitting symbol determination table, a normal transition determination table in which the ratio of determination values for transition determination from the probability change to the normal time is specified), and used at various distribution rates associated with set values Select various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid) . The setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting the setting key, and can switch the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, and the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF as an initial position at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the position (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening extends in the vertical direction). In this state, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. ing.

  The main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a are mounted on different substrates and are electrically connected.

  As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 are mounted on different boards, the force accompanying the external operation to the setting key switch 1311a is set by the setting key switch. Since the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted can be made difficult to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted, the main control MPU 1310a is mounted by a force accompanying an external operation to the setting key switch 1311a. This can contribute to preventing the main control board 1310 from being bent. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing the deflection of the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted.

  Also, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 on which the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 71 is mounted as the winning probability control circuit is a surface-mounted component that is an SMD type electronic component. The setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 on which the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 is mounted as a setting device is a lead-type electronic component. This is an insertion mounting component mounting board on which only the insertion mounting component can be mounted. In this way, the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted is a surface mountable component mountable board on which a surface mount component (SMD type) can be mounted, and the setting change on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted The substrate 1311 can be an insertion mounting component mounting substrate on which only insertion mounting components (SMD type) can be mounted. As a result, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern in the solder portion where the insertion mounting component (lead type) is soldered to the solder surface of the substrate can be reduced as compared with the surface mounting component (SMD type). For this reason, it is possible to strengthen the peeling of the solder part.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71 as the surface mountable component mountable board and the setting change board 1311 in FIG. Each case is housed in a transparent main control board box 1320 in FIG. The transparent main control board box 1320 is sealed by a caulking portion 1303 in FIG. 115 with its exterior as a sealing device. 71 is provided as a connector electrically connected to the main control MPU 1310a in FIG. 71 as a winning probability control circuit on the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71 as a surface mountable component mountable board. In addition, a connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 is provided as a connector electrically connected to the setting key switch 1311a in FIG. 71 as a setting device on the setting change board 1311 in FIG. . Connector MSCN of main control board 1310 and connector SMCN of setting change board 1311 are electrically connected. In this way, the main control board 1310 that is a surface mountable component mounting board and the setting change board 1311 that is an insertion mounted component mounting board can be accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320 sealed by the crimping portion 1303. Therefore, the deterrence against fraud on the main control board 1310, which is a surface mountable component mountable board, and the setting change board 1311, which is an insertion mounted parts mounting board, can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as the connector provided on the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as the connector provided on the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 as the mounting board, and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 are electrically connected by a connector connection provided with a floating mechanism capable of absorbing the fitting axis shift. Has been. Specifically, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are electrically connected by a special connector having a floating mechanism. A special connector equipped with this floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug. When the socket is inserted into the plug and pushed in, the socket and the plug are fitted together. By moving a predetermined distance range in the vertical direction (for example, up and down direction) with respect to the inserting and pushing direction, an error (fitting axis shift) generated when pushing can be absorbed.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 is provided as the game control board, and the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 is provided as the setting change board. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. The setting change board 1311 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and is electrically connected to the main control board 1310, and can change a set value in which a probability that is advantageous to the player is set. The setting key switch 1311a shown in FIG. 71 is provided as a lead-type electronic component.

  In the lead type setting key switch 1311a, a setting key capable of changing a setting value is inserted and removed. As the setting key is inserted into and removed from the lead type setting key switch 1311a, the setting change board 1311 may bend while the main control board 1310 is not bent.

  Thus, since the lead type setting key switch 1311a is provided on the setting change board 1311 which is separate from the main control board 1310, an operation of inserting / removing a setting key capable of changing the set value ( Even if the setting change board 1311 is bent along with the operation, the main control board 1310 is not bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being bent due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, from the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 that are pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 of FIG. 2 and to which the game board 5 of FIG. 70 is attached. A front frame is provided. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 70 as a setting device. The setting key switch 1311a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities by an external operation. Specifically, the setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting the setting key, and is capable of switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. At a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port extends in the vertical direction), the setting key switch is set as an initial position. 1311a is in the OFF state, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the first ON operation by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position. Can be done.

  A setting key switch 1311 a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is disposed on the pivotal support side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5.

  Specifically, the outer frame 2 includes a body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the body frame 4 constituting the front frame by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side when viewed from the front, the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge The left side of the main body frame 4 in which the assembly 52 is disposed is a shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 on the opposite side is the main body frame 4. It becomes the open side of the frame 4. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame.

  As described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is disposed on the pivotal support side of the front frame composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 on the rear surface of the game board 5. If any unauthorized alteration is made to the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened, and the illegal act is caused in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Become a prominent presence. Therefore, it can contribute to prevention of fraud.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the rear side of the game board 5 is a cover body that is pivotably supported on the open side that is opposite to the pivotal support side of the front frame as shown in FIG. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is covered with the back cover 640, and is disposed on the shaft support side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5, and is covered with the back cover 640. If the back cover 640 is not opened after opening, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated. In this way, the rear side of the game board 5 is covered with the back cover 640 that is pivotally supported on the open side that is opposite to the pivotal support side of the front frame. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is disposed on the shaft support side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 and is covered by the back cover 640. After the front frame is opened, the back cover 640 is removed. Unless it is opened, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated.

  Specifically, the outer frame 2 includes a body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the body frame 4 constituting the front frame by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side when viewed from the front, the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge The left side of the main body frame 4 in which the assembly 52 is disposed is a shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 on the opposite side is the main body frame 4. It becomes the open side of the frame 4. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. A back cover 640 that can be opened and closed on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4. Is. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640. In addition, the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis, and the left side is a payout Since it is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, the right side when viewed from the front is the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640. The left side of the front view on the opposite side is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is disposed on the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640. Thus, the setting change board 1311 is disposed on the back cover open side. Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered with the back cover 640. In order to access the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to perform an operation of opening the back cover 640. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to perform an operation of opening the main body frame 4 larger than the outer frame 2 (approximately 90 degrees).

  Accordingly, the back cover 640 must be opened so that the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated, and the front cover can be opened so that the back cover 640 can be opened. The frame must be opened. For this reason, if any unauthorized modification is made to the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened so that the back cover 640 can be opened. The illegal act can be made conspicuous in the game hall where the machine 1 is installed.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 112 (a) is provided as a game control board for controlling the progress of the game. On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 of FIG. 112A as an insertion mounting component (lead type electronic component) and the surface mounting component (surface mounting type electronic component) shown in FIG. The SMD type electronic component (surface mount) shown in FIG. 112 (a) can be mounted with the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 of FIG. 112A as a non-circuit forming area. Each wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and through-holes are not arranged at all in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the electronic component of the type).

  As described above, the capacitor (MC30) as the insertion mounting component and the Schmitt trigger inverter (MIC30) as the surface mounting component can be mixedly mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The region where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a component, is mounted can be configured as a circuit non-formation region where a circuit such as a wiring pattern or a through hole is not formed. As a result, even if the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mount component, is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the circuit to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mount component, excludes the circuit non-formation region. Therefore, the circuit to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mount component, can be visually observed. Therefore, fraudulent acts on the surface mount component can be prevented.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be performed, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. Further, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 are operated as the second operation unit, and then the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 is provided as setting change means capable of changing a set value for setting a probability that is advantageous to the player. The RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided separately from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. This pachinko machine 1 is further provided with notation or the like serving as location information that can inform the location of the RWM clear button 633z as guidance means for guiding information related to the operation of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633.

  In this way, information related to the operation of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 is guided, so the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 are separated. Even if it is provided on the body, a person who operates the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 does not have to be confused by the operation procedure. By providing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 separately, crime prevention can be improved. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a setting control unit related to preparation settings for starting a game, 71. As a game control means having a progress control unit related to the progress control, a main control board 1310 in FIG. 71, a setting change board 1311, and a payout control board 633 in FIG. The setting control unit includes a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71, a setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71, an RWM clear button 633z in the payout control board 633 in FIG. It consists of the determination in step S14 in the input process, the process in step S16A, and the like. The progress control unit includes a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71, a main control side main process in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 118, a main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. . Main control board 1310, setting change board 1311 and payout control board 633 as game control means are main control MPU 1310a of main control board 1310 in FIG. 71, Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, capacitor MC30 in FIGS. 71 includes a plurality of electronic components such as a setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 and an RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3, and includes a setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 in FIG. Electronic components related to setting control such as the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are provided separately on a plurality of boards such as the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 and the payout control board 633 in FIG.

  As described above, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z, which are electronic components related to setting control, are provided separately on a plurality of boards such as the setting change board 1311 and the payout control board 633, respectively. Can be increased. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be performed using a game ball as a game medium, and is illustrated as a game control unit that performs game preparation control and game control. 71 main control boards 1310 are provided. The game control includes a main control side main process in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 118, a main control side timer interruption process of FIG. 120, and the like. The game preparation control includes step S14 in the setting change process in FIG. 121 as the second game preparation control, such as the determination in step S14 in the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. 118 as the first game preparation control and the process in step S16A. And the process of step S218. In the first game preparation control, as the first operation unit, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 (when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure)) When power is restored at the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. As a “predetermined setting value change permission condition” that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on when the key is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed, the RWM clear button is further provided. In the case where it is a condition that an operation signal is input by operating the pressing operation unit of 633z, the RW of the payout control board 633 in FIG. Clear button 633z to include. Probability be advantageous for the player based on the operation) is what may be a configurable state capable of changing the setting value set. The second game preparation control is switched to any one of a plurality of set values based on the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 as the second operation unit following the first game preparation control. It is something that can be done. The RWM clear button 633z is arranged on the payout control board 633 which is another board different from the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged.

  As described above, the security function can be improved by arranging the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 on different boards. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged are illustrated as separate board cases. 115 main control board box 1320 and payout control board box 632 in FIG. 3 are housed in main control board box 1320 in which setting change board 1311 in which setting key switch 1311a is placed is housed, and RWM clear. The security can be further improved by separating the payout control board box 632 in which the payout control board 633 in which the button 633z is disposed is housed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 115 and the payout control board box 632 in FIG. In order to modify the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311 accommodated in the board box 1320, and the payout control board 633 accommodated in the payout control board box 632, this caulking portion must be destroyed, and the trace of the modification Can leave.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game arranged on the back side of the game board 5 of FIG. 70, and the setting key switch 1311a is The setting change board 1311 to be arranged is housed in the main control board box 1320 as a caulking case together with the main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z in FIG. 4 controls the payout placed on the main body frame 4 in FIG. 4 and is housed in the payout control board box 632 as a caulking case. Therefore, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is placed is provided. Arranged on the back side of the game board 5 while being accommodated in the main control board box 1320 as a caulking case together with the main control board 1310 Since the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is placed can be placed in the payout control board box 632 as a caulking case in the main body frame 4 as the frame side, the setting key switch 1311a Is separately arranged on the main body frame 4 side with the game board 5 side and the RWM clear button 633z as the frame side, the crime prevention property of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the door frame 3 of FIG. 4 is provided on the front side as a door that can be opened and closed, and is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 70 as a board on which electronic components are mounted. The main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by operating the main control board 1310 and the first key (regular metal key possessed by an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall). As a first device that can perform the operation of opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3, the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 of FIG. 1 and the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 of FIG. And a second key (setting key) different from the first key can be used to perform a second operation (when changing a setting value, when checking a set current setting value). The signal line by the operation of the second key is electrically connected to the electronic component Includes a setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change substrate 1311 to be housed together with the main control board 1310 to the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 70 as a second device to be continued, the. The setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities (when setting values are changed), and is capable of confirming a set current setting value (can be set). (When checking the current setting value). The cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is provided on the front side of the door frame 3, and the casing of the cylinder lock 127 is electrically connected to the ground side. The setting key switch 1311a is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3, and the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side.

  Specifically, a metal cylindrical cylinder body that is a housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is electrically connected to a frame ground on the door frame side or a ground side that is N (neutral) of AC 24V. Has been. Further, by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a is made of a metal cylinder ( Or a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 having a long slot shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 that can be inserted through a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the casing. The SLH 2 can be electrically insulated from a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. For this reason, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing that is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is a solid ground (substrate) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. It is electrically isolated from the ground.

  Thus, since the metal cylindrical cylinder body which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 provided on the front side of the door frame 3 is electrically connected to the ground side, the metal cylindrical cylinder body is temporarily provided. Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) enters, the ground line of main control board 1310 that is a board on which electronic components are mounted is not affected by escaping the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) to the ground side, and Since the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing, which is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side of the door frame 3, is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side. Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invades into the cylindrical (or rectangular) case made of metal, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is attenuated by the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) case itself. By electronic Goods can be prevented giving the variation of the ground line in the main control board 1310 is a board mounted. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  Further, a metal cylindrical cylinder body which is a housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is a frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or an AC (24V N) (neutral) supplied to the pachinko machine 1. While being electrically connected to the ground side, a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing which is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 It is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side which is N (neutral) of AC 24V. Thereby, the metal cylinder body is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the ground side which is N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1; On the other hand, a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing has a frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and a ground side that is N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1 It can be in an insulated state without being electrically connected.

  Further, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4 (that is, the front frame constituted by the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is used as the outer frame 2). After the release, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 accommodated in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310 can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities. (When the set value is changed), and the current set value that has been set can be checked (when the set current set value is checked). Thus, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4 (that is, the front frame composed of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is removed from the outer frame). Otherwise, the setting key switch 1311a is accessed to operate the setting key switch 1311a and the setting value can be set (when the setting value is changed) or the setting value can be checked (set). In the case of confirming the current setting value), the security for the setting key switch 1311a can be improved.

[16. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 36 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 171 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 172 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 173 is a view taken along arrow B in FIG. 172, and FIG. FIG. 175 is a silk print (No. 2) of an electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. Here, first, the circuit configuration of the power supply board will be described, and then the identification method of electronic parts having the same shape and the fusing check of the fuse will be described.

  As described above, the island facility in the game hall has a transformer (not shown), which reduces the AC 100V commercial power supply voltage to the AC 24V gaming machine power supply voltage. When a plug of power supply wiring (not shown) is inserted into a power outlet of AC24V, which is a power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island facility of the game hall, AC24V is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc.) from the AC24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies them from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 doing.

[16-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 171, the circuit of the power supply board 630 mainly includes a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, and a power destruction circuit 630g. Has been.

  AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 through a power supply wiring (not shown). When AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 through a power line (not shown), the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm). (The support terminals at both ends are made of metal) and are input to the input-side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a through the B-type fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. Specifically, an AC 24V line 1 (hereinafter referred to as “AC24V1”) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a, and an AC 24V line 2 is input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. (Hereinafter referred to as “AC24V2”) is input. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

  When a staff member such as a game hall clerk operates to turn on the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 are electrically connected to each other, and AC24V1 is supplied to various circuits of the power supply board 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically conductive, and the supply of AC24V2 is started to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 become electrically non-conductive, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. While the supply is cut off, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically non-conductive, and the supply of AC24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. Thereby, the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 can be cut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

  In addition, with the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall turned on, a staff member such as a game hall store clerk operates the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. There are cases where the power is turned on all at once, and there are cases where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off simultaneously by turning off the breakers of the game hall.

[16-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against common mode noise, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against normal mode noise, and a choke coil L1, and is output from the power switch 630a. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

  The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC includes capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. Capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers), and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

  One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. Electrically connected. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is connected via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the earth connection terminal DCN5 as the frame ground FG2. The ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559 via a power supply ground line (not shown).

  The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC includes a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in the AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

  One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a.

  AC24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24VA. The AC24V2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24V. . The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise disturbance. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 37, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the CR unit that is not connected, and AC24VA and AC24V are supplied to the CR unit (not shown).

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[16-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q1 and Q2, and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and Zener diodes.

  AC24V1 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, respectively.

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified to DC by switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2 2 and output respectively. The package types of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type, and are fixed to the radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 172). ing. The heat dissipating fins HS1 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  As described above, AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c, the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. Are respectively input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  The rectified direct currents output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d through the choke coil L2.

[16-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q3 and Q4 and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and inductors.

  The direct current whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and is directly connected to the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without going through the peripheral circuit 630da. Respectively. A gate signal for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit is input to the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

  The direct current from which the common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is controlled by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to suppress the generation of higher harmonics, the power factor is improved, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. Are output respectively. The package types of the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the package types of the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above). It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 172). The heat radiating fin HS2 is disposed in parallel with the above-described heat radiating fin HS1 by a predetermined distance, and is soldered to the power supply board 630 and fixed to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. Yes.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[16-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The plurality of electrolytic capacitors have their negative terminals grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, respectively, and their positive terminals are input with direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smooths) the pulsating current from the direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, and the fuse FUSE3 (this embodiment) In the form, it is the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, through a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals on both ends are made of metal), B-type fusing stipulated by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law) Then, DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[16-1-5. Power generation circuit]
When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply generation circuit 630f generates direct current + 12V and direct current + 5V from the input direct current. The power generation circuit 630f outputs the generated DC + 12V from the + 12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board in the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the generated DC + 5V from the + 5V terminal to output the generated DC + 5V from the power board 630. 1 is supplied to each substrate inside.

  The power generation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da in the power factor correction circuit 630d by performing control to output a power factor correction gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. To suppress the generation of harmonics.

  In the power generation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via the diodes D5 and D6. The power generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal and determines whether or not to output a power destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power destruction circuit 630g.

  The plug of the power supply wiring (not shown) is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the game hall. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than DC + 35V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  The power generation circuit 630f has a predetermined value (threshold value: this embodiment) based on the power supply voltage in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. In this case, the power supply breakdown circuit gate signal can be output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g.

  When the power generation circuit 630f outputs a power destruction circuit gate signal to the power destruction circuit 630g, the power destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters a short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g enters the short mode, when the power supply switch 630a is in the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied to the power supply via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By flowing into the CGND terminal of the creating circuit 630f all at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

  The GND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630.

[16-1-6. Power destruction circuit]
The power supply breakdown circuit 630g includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as “FET”) Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 that is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal.

  When the power destruction circuit gate signal is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 is activated and the source terminal is connected to the source terminal of the FET Q5. When a large current flows toward (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become an overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, thereby maintaining a short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive. Is done. The FET Q5 is the same package type (TO-220F described above) as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. , Q2, Q3, Q4, unlike Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, they are arranged at positions where they are not in contact with the radiation fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are respectively fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 that are arranged in parallel and separated by a predetermined distance. In contrast, the backsides of the packages of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are parallel to each other. The FET Q5 is disposed while the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 are disposed, and the back side of the package of the FET Q5 is the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 and the Schottky barrier diode D1, Positions perpendicular to each other with respect to the back surface of the package in D2, D9, and D10 It has become not at all fixed to the radiating fin HS1, HS2 (see Figure 172, and Figure 173). The purpose of this is to absorb and cool the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 through heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2 so that they are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, the FET Q5 is short due to heat generation when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent). This is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

  In other words, the plug of the power supply wiring is not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. When inserted, the power supply generation circuit 630f has a predetermined value (threshold value) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. : In this embodiment, it is set to about 50 V.), the power supply breakdown circuit gate signal is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g to control the FET Q5 to self-destruct. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conducted is maintained, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the power supply circuit 630f is turned on, the current flowing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the FET Q5 in the short mode state in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply breakdown circuit 630g. By flowing into the CGND terminal all at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted, so that only the power supply board 630 is destroyed and the plug of the power supply wiring is commercial. AC that is the power supply voltage Even inserted incorrectly into a power outlet of 00V, so that the can be reliably prevented that the pachinko machine 1 within each substrate except the power substrate 630 is broken.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet that is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall, and the AC 100V power outlet that is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V that is the gaming machine power voltage is mistakenly set. In the state where FETQ5 of power supply destruction circuit 630g was destroyed, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 were replaced, and the plug of the power cord was inserted into the power outlet of AC24V which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the game hall island facility. However, since the FET Q5 of the power destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power destruction circuit 630g In short mode When a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f through the FET Q5 that is in a state, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown again. It becomes. In other words, if the power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is not replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has not been destroyed, the plug of the power supply cord is a pachinko machine equipment The game cannot be started even if it is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game.

[16-2. Method for identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 include the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETs Q3 and Q4 of the power factor correction circuit 630d and the Schottky. The barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FETQ5 of the power supply breakdown circuit 630g have the same package type (TO-220F), and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 have the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, long Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal).

  FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different types of electronic components, but FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic parts that are not destroyed, and the FETQ5 is the only electronic part that is destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the only electronic components that are destroyed among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630. In order to make it easy to identify the components, the silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has a different characteristic from the others.

  Specifically, for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, which are electronic components that are not destroyed, as shown in FIG. Lines and white thick lines indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged are silk-printed with respect to Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10, and silk-printed TSLK1 to 4, and FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4. TSLK5-8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. The white thick line is the side fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 172, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 need to be disposed adjacent to each other to fix the radiation fins HS1 and HS2, and the radiation fins HS1, It is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so that the white outline silk print on which the HS2 is arranged and the white thick line portions of the silk prints TSLK1 to 8 are connected.

  On the other hand, for the FETQ5, which is the only electronic component that is destroyed, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), a white outline and a plurality of white oblique lines arranged at equal intervals in the outline Silk printing TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630, with ad1 and a white thick line indicating the direction in which the electronic component is arranged as silk printing. That is, the white diagonal line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 have the same shape, the silk print printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 By visually observing the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern among TSLK 1 to 9, which electronic component among different types of electronic components having the same shape is compared with other electronic components. The electronic component can be identified. This makes it possible to very easily identify which electronic component is the only electronic component that is destroyed among different types of electronic components having the same shape.

  In addition, when a person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the FETQ5 to a staff member such as a game hall clerk by telephone, the silk print TSLK9 having the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern is displayed. By instructing to search, the staff of the game hall clerk and the like can accurately grasp the position of the FETQ5, so that the person in charge of the service center and the staff of the game hall clerk and the like can easily communicate with each other. Become.

  As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the FETQ5 to a staff member such as a game hall clerk by telephone, In addition, it is possible to identify a notable FET Q5 among a plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630. Therefore, the notable FET Q5 among the plurality of electronic components can be identified from the other electronic components FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  In the above example, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are electronic components having the same shape, and FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 are Schottky. Of the barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, a silk pattern with a characteristic pattern is printed only within the outline of the FET Q5, and the outlines of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. In the figure, the one that does not perform silk printing is shown, but the FETQ5 that is the only electronic component to be destroyed is shown by the arrangement method. That is, since the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are respectively fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 that are arranged in parallel by being separated by a predetermined distance, The rear surface side of the package is parallel to each other with respect to HS1 and HS2. On the other hand, the back surface side of the package in the FET Q5 is mutually opposite to the back surface of the package in the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. The position is perpendicular to the position. Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 have the same shape, the FETQ5 that is the only electronic component that is destroyed is the FETQ1, Since Q2, Q3, and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are arranged at right angles, among the different types of electronic components having the same shape, which electronic component is the other electronic component It is possible to identify whether the electronic component is to be watched compared to the component. This makes it possible to very easily identify which electronic component is the only electronic component that is destroyed among different types of electronic components having the same shape. Further, the FETQ5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, is arranged at a right angle to the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10. Even if Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic parts having the same shape, the person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of pachinko machine 1 serves as a staff member of the game hall. When instructing FETQ5 by telephone, it is possible to know the location of FETQ5 accurately by a staff member such as a game hall clerk by instructing to search for a package arranged at a right angle. This makes it easier to communicate with the person in charge of the game and the staff of the game hall. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the FETQ5 to a staff member such as a game hall clerk by telephone, In addition, it is possible to identify a notable FET Q5 among a plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630. Therefore, the notable FET Q5 among the plurality of electronic components can be identified from the other electronic components FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  In the above example, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5, which are electronic parts having the same shape, silk printing is performed with a characteristic pattern only within the outline of the FET Q5, and the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and Schottky In the outlines of the barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, those that are not silk-printed are shown, but the FETQ5 that is the only electronic component to be destroyed is shown by the arrangement method. Therefore, for example, another method for indicating a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components having the same shape by an arrangement method will be described. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components having the same shape by an arrangement method. As a specific electronic component arrangement method, for example, as shown in FIG. 176, FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 as electronic components having the same shape are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. The TQ1 is disposed so that the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1) is parallel to the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 with respect to the power supply substrate 630 having a rectangular shape, TQ2 is arranged on the right side of TQ2 so that the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ2) of TQ2 is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of power supply substrate 630, and on the right side of TQ2 The heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ3) is rotated by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the horizontal line of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. It is allowed to place TQ3 diagonally. The heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1) and the heat sink mounting surface of TQ2 (the rear surface of TQ2) are arranged in parallel to each other. The part numbers of the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are aligned with the heat sink mounting surfaces (the rear surface of TQ1, the rear surface of TQ2, the rear surface of TQ3) of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 when silk printing is performed. It may be arranged near each of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 (for example, TQ1 part number rotates TQ1 part number counterclockwise by 90 degrees along TQ1 heat sink mounting surface (rear face of TQ1) It is arranged in the vicinity of TQ1 in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630, and the TQ2 component number is opposite to the TQ2 component number along the TQ2 heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ2). It is rotated by 90 degrees in the clockwise direction and is arranged in the vicinity of TQ2 in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The part number of TQ3 is the heat sink mounting surface (T 3 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) to counterclockwise the straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. It may be arranged in the vicinity of TQ3 after being rotated by a predetermined angle α (45 degrees in this case)) or in the same direction in the vicinity of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3. (The part numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are all in the same direction, and the part numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are directed in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 without rotating counterclockwise at all. May be arranged in the vicinity of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, or by rotating the part numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 by 90 in the counterclockwise direction, the surface (mounting surface) 6 of power supply board 630 Toward vertical 0x TQ1, TQ2, may be disposed in the vicinity respectively of TQ3). As described above, even if the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are electronic parts having the same shape, since TQ3 is disposed obliquely with respect to TQ1 and TQ2, the TQ3 is disposed obliquely and a specific TQ3 is specified. By setting it as an electronic component, it is possible to identify which electronic component of the same type of electronic component having the same shape is an electronic component to be watched as compared with other electronic components. This makes it possible to very easily identify which electronic component is the specific electronic component among the same type of electronic components having the same shape. Further, since TQ3 is arranged obliquely with respect to TQ1 and TQ2, the person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can play the game by using TQ3 arranged obliquely as a specific electronic component. When a staff member such as a hall clerk is instructed to TQ3, which is an FET, by telephone, the staff member, such as a game hall clerk, determines the position of the TQ3, which is an FET. Since it can be accurately grasped, it becomes easy to communicate between the person in charge at the service center and a staff member such as a store clerk at the game hall. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the TQ3, which is an FET, to the clerk of the game hall by telephone, the clerk of the game hall is in charge of the person in charge of the service center. As shown in the instruction, TQ3 which is a noticeable FET among a plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 can be specified. Therefore, TQ3 which is a notable FET among the plurality of electronic components can be identified from TQ1 and TQ2 which are FETs of other electronic components. For the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, the white outline and white thick line shown in FIG. 174 (a) are printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing. For the TQ1 and TQ2 which are FETs, the white outline shown in FIG. 174 (a) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing, while the FETs For TQ3, the white outline shown in FIG. 174 (b), a plurality of white oblique lines ad1 arranged at equal intervals in the outline, and a white color indicating the direction in which the electronic component is arranged The thick line may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing.

  For the TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, which are FETs, the white outline shown in FIG. 174 (b), a plurality of white oblique lines ad1 that are arranged at equal intervals in the outline, and the electronic component A white thick line indicating the arrangement direction may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing. Since the white diagonal line ad1 shown in FIG. 174 (b) is a straight line inclined 45 degrees to the right, the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1) is the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. TQ1 is arranged so as to be parallel along the vertical direction of the TQ2, and the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ2) of the TQ2 is parallel to the right side of the TQ1 along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. TQ2 is arranged so that the heat sink mounting surface (the rear surface of TQ3) on the right side of TQ2 faces counterclockwise with respect to the straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of power supply board 630. When TQ3 is arranged obliquely by rotating it by a predetermined angle α (here 45 degrees), the white slanted line ad1 silk-printed with respect to TQ1 becomes a straight line that is inclined to the right by 45 degrees, with respect to TQ2. T Becomes linearly to click printed white shaded ad1 are is inclined 45 degrees to the right upward, white diagonal lines ad1 that is silk printing is the lateral direction line (horizontal line) with respect to TQ3. As a result, when the person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the TQ3, which is an FET, to the staff of the game hall, etc., the staff of the game hall, for example, Find the electronic component whose white diagonal line is a straight line (horizontal line) in the left-right direction. A certain TQ3 can be specified. Therefore, TQ3 which is a notable FET among the plurality of electronic components can be identified from TQ1 and TQ2 which are FETs of other electronic components.

  For the TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, which are FETs, the white outline shown in FIG. 174 (b), a plurality of white oblique lines ad1 that are arranged at equal intervals in the outline, and the electronic component When the white thick line indicating the orientation to be arranged is printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing, the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ1) of TQ1 is assumed to be the surface of the power supply substrate 630. TQ1 is arranged so as to be parallel along the vertical direction of surface (mounting surface) 630x, and the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ2) of TQ2 is on the right side of TQ1 of surface (mounting surface) 630x of power supply substrate 630x. TQ2 is arranged so as to be parallel along the vertical direction, and the heat sink mounting surface (the rear surface of TQ3) of TQ3 is parallel to the right side of TQ2 along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of power supply substrate 630. In other words, when the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and Tq3 are arranged parallel to each other along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630, TQ1 and TQ2 The white slanted line ad1 silk-printed is a straight line inclined 45 degrees to the right while the white slanted line ad1 silk-printed with respect to TQ3 is a straight line in the left-right direction (horizontal line). It's okay. Even when the same type of electronic components having the same shape are arranged in parallel to each other, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 calls the staff of the game hall, etc., by telephone using an FET. When instructing a certain TQ3, a staff member such as a game hall clerk said, “Please find an electronic component in which the silk-printed white diagonal line is a horizontal line (horizontal line)”. As indicated, it is possible to specify TQ3, which is a notable FET, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630. Therefore, even when the same type of electronic components having the same shape are arranged in parallel to each other, of the plurality of electronic components, TQ3 which is a noticeable FET is changed to TQ1, which is an FET of another electronic component. It can be identified from TQ2.

  In addition to FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 as a plurality of electronic components having the same shape, for example, a plurality of ICs having the same shape in which circuits such as an AND circuit, an OR circuit, and a Schmitt trigger inverter circuit are integrated, respectively. When IC1, IC2 and IC3 are arranged on the substrate, the longitudinal directions of IC1 and IC2 are arranged along the vertical direction of the substrate and arranged parallel to each other, while the longitudinal direction of IC3 is a straight line in the horizontal direction of the substrate. On the other hand, by rotating it by a predetermined angle α (45 degrees in this case) in the counterclockwise direction and arranging it diagonally, which electronic component of the same type having the same shape is a specific electronic component. It can be identified very easily. Further, since the IC 3 is disposed obliquely with respect to the IC 1 and the IC 2, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can play the game by using the IC 3 disposed obliquely as a specific electronic component. When an IC3 is instructed to a clerk such as a hall clerk by telephone, the clerk such as a game hall clerk can accurately grasp the position of the IC3 by instructing to search for an IC arranged obliquely. This makes it easier to communicate between the person in charge at the service center and the staff at the game hall. Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the IC3 to the staff in the game hall by telephone, the staff in the game hall in accordance with the instruction of the person in charge in the service center. In addition, among a plurality of electronic components mounted on the board, it is possible to specify IC3, which is a notable IC. Therefore, IC1 and IC2 can be identified from IC1 and IC2 which are ICs of other electronic components among a plurality of electronic components. For IC1, IC2, and IC3, white outlines may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate as silk printing, and for IC1 and IC2, white outlines may be printed. On the other hand, for the IC 3 which is an IC, a white outline and a white diagonal line formed along the outer periphery of the outline are printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate as silk printing, and the IC 3 It may be possible to notify that is a specific electronic component. Further, the longitudinal directions of IC1 and IC2 are arranged along the vertical direction of the substrate and arranged in parallel with each other, while the longitudinal direction of IC3 is directed in a counterclockwise direction with respect to a straight line in the horizontal direction of the substrate and a predetermined angle α ( Here, it is rotated by 45 degrees and arranged obliquely, but the longitudinal direction of the IC 3 may be arranged along the vertical direction of the substrate. In this case, the longitudinal direction of IC3 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of IC1 and IC2.

  The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different electronic components as described above, whereas the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a kind of electronic component, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island facilities of the game hall, and AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines Is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of the power supply, as described above, the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed and the short mode is maintained, and a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 Blows out. In other words, as a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, the fuse FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 and then one or both of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 are destroyed. Yes. Therefore, in this embodiment, printing is performed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so that the electronic components to be destroyed among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 can be easily identified as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630. The silk printing with different characteristics from others is adopted.

  Specifically, the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not destroyed even if the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, is white as shown in FIG. 175 (a). Are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk printing.

  In contrast, FIG. 175 (b) shows fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are destroyed as traces when the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage. As described above, the white outline and the area ad <b> 2 in which the outline is painted white are printed as silk, and the silk prints FSLK <b> 2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. That is, the white area solid ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are soldered to the power supply board 630, a support fitting (not shown) is soldered to the area inside the white outline and the periphery of the support fitting in white. The area ad2 can be visually observed, and the area ad2 solid in white corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is transparent inside the white outline. It can be surely seen through a transparent glass tube.

  Thus, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, the white color represented as a characteristic pattern among the silk prints FSLK1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. By visually observing the solid-coated region ad2, it is possible to identify which electronic component of the same type of electronic component having the same shape is an electronic component to be watched as compared with other electronic components. It has become. As a result, among the same types of electronic components having the same shape, it is extremely easy to determine which electronic component is an electronic component that shows a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage. Can be specified.

  In addition, when a person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 points the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 over the phone to a staff member such as a game hall clerk, a solid white area is displayed as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for silk-printed FSLK2,3 with ad2, the staff of the game hall can accurately grasp the position of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, so the person in charge at the service center and the game hall This makes it easier to communicate with staff such as store staff.

  As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 points the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 over the phone to the staff of the game hall, etc., the staff of the game hall, for example, As described above, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to be noted can be identified. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 from the fuse FUSE3 which is another electronic component among the plurality of electronic components.

  In addition, as described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are detachably attached to a support fitting (also referred to as a fuse holder) that is soldered to the power supply board 630. It can be exchanged. In the above-described example, the white slanted line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern and the solid white area ad2 are silk-printed on the area inside the white outline and the area around the support fitting. However, as another example 1, at least the area inside the white outline and the area corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding the periphery of the support fitting may be silk-printed with a characteristic pattern. In other words, the inner region of the white outline may not be silk-printed with a characteristic pattern around the support fitting, or the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and the like without silk printing the outline of the support fitting. Only the outer shape of the region corresponding to the glass tube of FUSE3 (which is not limited to the region matching the shape of the glass tube and may overlap with a part of the glass tube) may be silk-printed. For example, an elliptical outline different from a normal outline is printed on the area corresponding to the glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and silk printing is performed by solidly painting the inner area of the outline on white, and the glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 You may be allowed to perform silk printing in which a normal rectangular outline and a white area inside this outline are solidly applied to the corresponding area, and in this case, among the plurality of electronic components depending on the outline shape of the silk print, Remarkable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be distinguished from fuses FUSE3 which are other electronic components.

  Further, in the above-described example, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, a silk pattern having a characteristic pattern is printed only in the outline of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and no silk printing is performed in the outline of the fuse FUSE3. However, as another example 2, fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE2, as long as it is easy to identify a destroyed electronic component among fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 as electronic components having the same shape to be mounted on power supply board 630. Silk printing may be performed within all outlines of FUSE3. In this case, the outer shape of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 as electronic components to be destroyed is made different from the outer shape of the fuse FUSE3, and silk printing is performed so that the inside of the outer lines is solid white. May be.

  Further, in the above-described example, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, a silk pattern having a characteristic pattern is printed only in the outline of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and no silk printing is performed in the outline of the fuse FUSE3. However, only the outline for placing the respective support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 is silk-printed, and among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the transparent glass of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 Silk printing may be used by utilizing a fusing confirmation region formed in the region of the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the tube. FIG. 177 shows examples (a) and (b) in which the fusing confirmation area is difficult to use, and examples (part 1), (c) and (d) in which the fusing confirmation area can be used, and the fusing confirmation area can be used. Example (2) (e) and (f).

  As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown, but the fuse FUSE3 is not blown. Therefore, the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 is not shown in FIG. As shown in 177 (a), since there are one fixed terminal and one connection terminal in the support metal fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuse FUSE3, a total of four terminals are inserted and soldered. 4 through holes 630xs, and one wiring pattern 630xn is formed in a region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, and around the four through holes 630xs and the wiring pattern 630xn A foil removal region is formed. Further, a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “solid ground”) is formed on the copper foil surface 630 xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630 x side of the power supply substrate 630. A region of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is a fusing confirmation region 630xc. Of the four through holes 630xs, the two through holes 630xs through which the connection terminals are inserted are connected to each other by forming a wiring pattern (not shown) on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) side of the power supply substrate 630. Yes. When a dark color (for example, green or black) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), this dark color resist A silk print FSLK1 ′ is printed on the outer shape having a white rectangular shape indicating the arrangement position of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 as silk printing. The reason why this dark resist solution is used is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because colors with different contrasts make it easier to check for blown fuses. Note that the silk print FSLK1 ′ as a silk print which is an outline having a rectangular shape may surround the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. A part of the outer shape may be enclosed, or the outer shape of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. Thus, for the fuse FUSE3 that does not blow when the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, the surface of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 (mounting) Surface) The wiring pattern 630xn can be routed to the fusing confirmation region 630xc in the region 630x. The wiring pattern 630xn is not limited to a single wiring pattern, and may be a plurality of wiring patterns. Even when a bright color (for example, white) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 instead of a dark color (for example, green or black). It is also possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, a silk-printed FSLK1 ′ is printed on the light-colored resist as a silk-printed outline having a dark color (for example, green or black) rectangular shape indicating the arrangement position of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. (This silk-printed FSLK 1 ′ may surround the outer shape of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE 3, or may surround a part of the outer shape of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE 3. Alternatively, the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed. In addition, after a resist solution of a predetermined color (for example, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630, silk is applied in a bright color (for example, white) so as to cover the entire resist. It may be printed. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by contrast between the bright color silk printing and the color of the metal element (fuse line) of the fuse. In this case, an outline having a rectangular shape represented by a bright (for example, white) chain line indicating an arrangement position of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 is silk-printed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the power supply substrate 630. The silk print FSLK1 ′ is printed as (this silk print FSLK1 ′ may surround the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. It may enclose a part or may not be silk-printed without showing the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3).

  On the other hand, the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 with respect to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 that melts when the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V that is a commercial power supply voltage. As shown in FIG. 177 (c), 630xp has one fixed terminal and one connection terminal on the support brackets (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively. Among the support metal fittings (fuse holders), two through holes 630xs1 each having a land pattern in which two terminals are inserted into the support metal fittings (fuse holders) at one end and soldered, and 2 are attached to the support metal fittings (fuse holders) at the other end. Two through hoses with land patterns through which one terminal is inserted and soldered 630xs2, and a foil punching region 630xa1 having a rectangular shape so as to surround the two through holes 630xs1, and a foil cutting region 630xa2 having a rectangular shape so as to surround the two through holes 630xs2. Is formed. Further, a solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 630x on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630. The area of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is a fusing confirmation area 630xc, and a fusing confirmation area between the foil extraction area 630xa1 and the foil extraction area 630xa2 630xc is formed, and a solid ground is formed. Of the two through holes 630xs1, the through hole 630xs1 through which the connection terminal is inserted and the through hole 630xs2 through which the connection terminal is inserted through the two through holes 630xs2 are copper on the back surface (solder surface) side of the power supply substrate 630. On the foil surface, wiring patterns (not shown) are formed and connected. When a dark color (for example, green or black) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630, as shown in FIG. 177 (d), the dark color resist Silk prints FSLK2 ′ and FSLK3 ′ are respectively printed as silk prints on the outlines having white rectangular shapes indicating the positions of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. The reason why this dark resist solution is used is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because colors with different contrasts make it easier to check for blown fuses. In addition, silk printing FSLK2 'and FSLK3' as silk printing which is the outline which has a rectangular shape may have the same magnitude | size as the silk printing FSLK1 'mentioned above, and have a different magnitude | size. Also good. Further, these silk-printed FSLK2 'and FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. May be enclosed respectively, or the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. In this way, for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 that blow when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Since no wiring pattern is routed around the fusing confirmation area 630xc of the surface (mounting surface) 630x, the flaw confirmation area 630xc has no unevenness due to the wiring pattern and the foil removal area around the wiring pattern. A flat surface can be formed without forming. As a result, the fuse wire (metal element) accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be easily seen with the fusing confirmation region 630xc which is a flat surface as a background. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse wire (metal element) accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. It may be described as “Modification (1)”). Even when a bright color (for example, white) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 instead of a dark color (for example, green or black). It is also possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, silk prints FSLK 2 ′ and FSLK 3 ′ are printed on the light-colored resist as silk prints with outlines having dark rectangular shapes that indicate the positions of the support brackets (fuse holders) for the fuses FUSE 1 and FUSE 2. (The silk-printed FSLK2 ′ and FSLK3 ′ may enclose the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. It may be a part of each of them, or it may not be printed at all without showing the outer shape of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2). Variation (2) with no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area ” There is a case to be described). In addition, after a resist solution of a predetermined color (for example, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630, silk is applied in a bright color (for example, white) so as to cover the entire resist. It may be printed. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by contrast between the bright color silk printing and the color of the metal element (fuse line) of the fuse. In this case, the silk-printed FSLK2 ′ and FSLK3 ′ are formed as silk-printed outlines having a rectangular shape represented by chain lines of bright colors (for example, white) indicating the arrangement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. (The silk prints FSLK2 ′ and FSLK3 ′ may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 Each part of the outer shape may be enclosed, or the outer shape of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all, and may not be silk-printed at all. Modified example (3) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area of the board ” There is a case to be mounting).

  In addition, with respect to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 that blow when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power substrate 630 As shown in FIG. 177 (e), since there are one fixed terminal and one connection terminal on the support fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, a total of four terminals are inserted and soldered. Four through-holes 630xs having a land pattern to be formed and a foil punching region 630xa having a rectangular shape so as to surround the four through-holes 630xs are formed. Further, a solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 630x on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630. Of the foil removal region 630xa, the surface (mounting surface) 630x region of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is a fusing confirmation region 630xc. Of the four through holes 630xs, the two through holes 630xs through which the connection terminals are inserted are connected to each other by forming a wiring pattern (not shown) on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) side of the power supply substrate 630. Yes. When a resist solution of a dark color (for example, green or black) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630, as shown in FIG. 177 (f), this dark color Silk prints FSLK2 ′ and FSLK3 ′ are printed on the resist as white prints with white rectangular shapes indicating the arrangement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. The reason why this dark resist solution is used is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because colors with different contrasts make it easier to check for blown fuses. In addition, silk printing FSLK2 'and FSLK3' as silk printing which is the outline which has a rectangular shape may have the same magnitude | size as the silk printing FSLK1 'mentioned above, and have a different magnitude | size. Also good. Further, these silk-printed FSLK2 'and FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. May be enclosed respectively, or the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. In this way, for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are blown out when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, a foil punching region 630xa is formed and a recess is formed. Since the foil pattern 630xa has no wiring pattern routed to the fusing confirmation area 630xc of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, this fusing confirmation area For 630xc, a flat surface can be formed without forming any irregularities due to the wiring pattern and the foil-extracted region around the wiring pattern. As a result, the fuse wire (metal element) accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be easily seen with the fusing confirmation region 630xc which is a flat surface as a background. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse wire (metal element) accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. It may be described as “Modification (4)”). Even when a bright color (for example, white) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 instead of a dark color (for example, green or black). It is also possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, silk prints FSLK 2 ′ and FSLK 3 ′ are printed on the light-colored resist as silk prints with outlines having dark rectangular shapes that indicate the positions of the support brackets (fuse holders) for the fuses FUSE 1 and FUSE 2. (The silk-printed FSLK2 ′ and FSLK3 ′ may enclose the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. It may be a part of each of them, or it may not be printed at all without showing the outer shape of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2). Variation (5) with no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area ” There is a case to be described). Further, after a resist solution of a predetermined color (for example, green or yellow) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630, a bright color (for example, white) so as to cover the entire resist. May be silk printed. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by contrast between the bright color silk printing and the color of the metal element (fuse line) of the fuse. In this case, the silk-printed FSLK2 ′ and FSLK3 ′ have silk-printed outlines having a rectangular shape represented by chain lines of bright colors (for example, white) indicating the arrangement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. (The silk prints FSLK2 ′ and FSLK3 ′ may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 Each part of the outer shape may be enclosed, or the outer shape of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all, and may not be silk-printed at all. Modification example (6) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation region of the board ” There is a case to be mounting).

  Further, in the above-described example, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, a silk pattern having a characteristic pattern is printed only in the outline of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and no silk printing is performed in the outline of the fuse FUSE3. However, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuse that is most easily blown may be indicated by the arrangement method. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing, by an arrangement method, a fuse that is most easily blown out of the three fuses. For example, as shown in FIG. 179, when the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630, the power supply substrate 630 having a rectangular shape can be used. In contrast, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is directed to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. The fuse F1 is disposed, and the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is along the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is the surface of the power supply substrate 630 (mounting surface) 630x). The fuse F2 is arranged (toward the left-right direction), and the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 is set to the straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. The predetermined angle α toward the clockwise direction (in this case, 45 degrees) is only rotated to place the fuse F3 diagonally. The fuse F1 and the fuse F2 are arranged at right angles to each other. The part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 may be arranged in the vicinity of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 along the respective longitudinal directions of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 when silk printing is performed. (For example, the fuse F1 part number is the fuse F1 part number rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise along the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 so that the fuse board F1 faces the surface (mounting surface) 630x in the vertical direction. Arranged in the vicinity of F1, the part number of the fuse F2 is in the horizontal direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 without rotating the part number of the fuse F2 counterclockwise along the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2. The part number of the fuse F3 is counterclockwise from the part number of the fuse F3 along the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3. Is rotated by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees), and is rotated by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the straight line in the horizontal direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. It may be rotated and arranged in the vicinity of the fuse F3.) Alternatively, it may be arranged in the same direction in the vicinity of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 (part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are all the same). In the vicinity of each of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 toward the left and right directions of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 without rotating the part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 in the counterclockwise direction at all. The fuses F1, F2, and F3 may be arranged by rotating the part numbers by 90 in the counterclockwise direction, and moving the fuses toward the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. F1, F2, may be disposed in the vicinity respectively of the F3). Thus, even if the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are electronic components having the same shape, the fuse F3 is disposed obliquely with respect to the fuse F1 and the fuse F2, and thus the fuse F3 disposed obliquely. By using the fuse that is most easily blown, it is possible to identify which electronic component of the same type of electronic component having the same shape is an electronic component to be watched as compared with other electronic components. As a result, among the same types of electronic components having the same shape, it is very easy to determine which electronic component is an electronic component that shows a trace that the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage. Can be specified. Further, since the fuse F3 is arranged obliquely with respect to the fuse F1 and the fuse F2, the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be obtained by making the fuse F3 arranged obliquely most easily blown. When the person in charge instructs a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall over the telephone by calling the fuse F3, the staff member such as a clerk of the game hall positions the fuse F3 by instructing the search for a fuse that is arranged obliquely. This makes it easy to communicate between the person in charge at the service center and a staff member such as a store clerk at the game hall. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 points the fuse F3 over the telephone to a staff member of the game hall, the staff member of the game hall is instructed by the person in charge of the service center. As described above, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the noticeable fuse F3 can be specified. Therefore, of the plurality of electronic components, the noteworthy fuse F3 can be identified from the fuses F1 and F2 which are other electronic components. For the fuses F1 and F2, the white outline shown in FIG. 175 (a) may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 as silk printing (in this case, as described above) Other examples 1 and other examples 2 may be adopted.) The wiring pattern 630xn may be routed without forming the fusing confirmation region shown in FIGS. 177 (a) and 177 (b). For the fuse F3, the white outline shown in FIG. 175 (b) and the area ad2 in which the outline is solid white are applied to the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing. The fusing confirmation region 630xc, which is a flat surface shown in FIGS. 177 (c) and (d) and FIGS. 177 (e) and (f), may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply substrate 630. May be.

  Further, for the fuses F1, F2, and F3, the white outline shown in FIG. 175 (b) and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are the surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing. (Mounting surface) It may be printed on 630x. The fuse F1 has a longitudinal direction along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 faces the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630). And the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is along the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is directed to the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630). The fuse F2 is disposed, and the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 is rotated by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the horizontal line of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. In the case where the fuse F3 is disposed obliquely, the white area solidly printed on the fuse F1 is white and the area ad2 is oriented 90 degrees in the vertical direction. Thus, the white area solidly painted on white for the fuse F2 is oriented to 0 degrees (zero degrees) in the left-right direction, and the white area solidly painted on the fuse F3 is ad2 Is oriented 45 degrees. As a result, when a person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member such as a game hall clerk to call the TQ3 that is an FET by telephone, Follow the instructions from the service center representative, "Please find an electronic component with a solid white area facing 45 degrees." Among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, select the notable fuse F3. It can be specified. Therefore, of the plurality of electronic components, the noteworthy fuse F3 can be identified from the fuses F1 and F2 which are other electronic components.

  Further, for the fuses F1, F2, and F3, the white outline shown in FIG. 175 (b) and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are the surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing. In the case of printing on (mounting surface) 630x, the fuse F1 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630, and this fuse F1 The fuse F2 is arranged on the right side of the fuse F2 so that the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 is placed on the right side of the fuse F2 When the fuse F3 is arranged so as to be parallel along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the 630, that is, the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are mutually connected to the power supply substrate 630. When the surface (mounting surface) 630x is arranged in parallel along the vertical direction, the white area solidly ad2 is directed to 90 degrees in the vertical direction, so the white area solid ad2 It is difficult to specify electronic components only by Therefore, in such a case, instead of the solid white area ad2, silk printing may be performed with a plurality of white oblique lines ad1 'arranged at equal intervals in the outline. In this case, for example, the white diagonal lines ad1 ′ silk-printed with respect to the fuses F1 and F2 are both straight lines inclined to the right by 45 degrees, while the white diagonal lines silk-printed with respect to the fuse F3. ad1 ′ may be a straight line (horizontal line) in the left-right direction. Thus, even when the same type of electronic parts having the same shape are arranged in parallel to each other, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 calls the staff such as a store clerk of the game hall over the fuse F3. In response to the instructions from the service center staff, please tell the staff of the game hall, such as “Please find the electronic parts where the silk-printed white diagonal line becomes a horizontal line (horizontal line)”. In addition, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the noticeable fuse F3 can be specified. Therefore, even when the same type of electronic components having the same shape are arranged in parallel to each other, the notable fuse F3 among the plurality of electronic components is identified from the fuses F1 and F2, which are other electronic components. can do.

[16-3. Fuse blow check]
Next, fusing confirmation of the same type of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals at both ends are made of metal). When fusing, fuse wires (metal elements) accommodated in the transparent glass tubes are disconnected. Soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, as described above, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show the trace that the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage. If the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, it will melt. Therefore, in this embodiment, the silk printing FSLK2, 3 described above is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing for the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 so that the state of the fused fuse wire (metal element) can be easily confirmed. ing. As described above, the silk-printed FSLK2, 3 corresponds to a transparent glass tube except for both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, because the white area solidly ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. By visually observing the solid white area ad2 through the transparent glass tube, it is easily confirmed whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is broken. be able to.

  Accordingly, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall or an operator who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) plugs a power cord for supplying a power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630 by mistakenly inserting it into an AC100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, instead of the power outlet of the power supply, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 Among them, fuse wires (metal elements) housed in one or both of the transparent glass tubes are broken and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tubes. Insisting that "Isn't it an initial failure because the power coat cannot be turned on even if the power cord plug is plugged into the power outlet?" , Its own work miss (wiring miss), it is so that it can not (can not excuse) to cheat.

  On the other hand, as described above, silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing for the fuse FUSE3. In the present embodiment, green is used as the resist for the power supply substrate 630. In the present embodiment, a green resist is solidly applied to the region of the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the silk print FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. In the area of the solid green register corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, no wiring pattern is laid out (that is, the solid green register corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid this area, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is because the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 by visually observing the area of the solid green resistor corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 through the transparent glass tube. The visibility of the state of (metal element) is improved, and the presence or absence of disconnection of this fuse wire (metal element) can be confirmed.

  As described above, the power line connector DCN2 of the power board 630 is connected to the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 37, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1 and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 has a function as a means for supplying power to a CR unit (not shown) in addition to a function as a means for relaying various signals. As a trace that the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V that is a commercial power supply voltage, the interface board 635 has a fuse FUSE (not shown) having a transparent diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm. The silk tube shown in FIG. 175 (a) for the above-described fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 is provided with only one glass tube (support terminals on both ends are made of metal) and B-type fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. The print is printed on the mounting surface. The area of the mounting surface of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solidly coated with green resist. In the area of the solid green register corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), the wiring pattern is not laid out at all (that is, the solid coating corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green register area, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually observing, through the transparent glass tube, a solid green resistor region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown). The visibility of the state of the fuse wire (metal element) is improved, and the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse wire (metal element) can be confirmed. A fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 is provided on one of the AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630.

  Note that the surface (mounting surface) of the interface board 635 corresponding to a transparent glass tube of a fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 which melts when the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V which is a commercial power supply voltage. It may be replaced with silk printing by using a fusing confirmation region formed in the region. FIG. 178 is an example (part 1) (a) and (b) in which the fusing confirmation area can be used, and examples (part 2) (c) and (d) in which the fusing confirmation area can be used.

  A fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 that melts when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “fuse not shown”). The copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635 has one fixed terminal and one fixing terminal (fuse holder) on both ends of a fuse (not shown) as shown in FIG. 178 (a). Since there are two connection terminals, two through holes having a land pattern in which two terminals are inserted into the support bracket (fuse holder) at one end of the support bracket (fuse holder) at both ends of the fuse (not shown) and soldered. Two terminals are inserted into the hole 635xs1 and the support bracket (fuse holder) at the other end Through-holes 635xs2 having a land pattern to be soldered are formed, and a foil punching region 635xa1 having a rectangular shape and two through-holes 635xs2 are surrounded so as to surround the two through-holes 635xs1. In this way, a foil punching region 635xa2 having a rectangular shape is formed. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 635x on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635. An area of the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to a transparent glass tube of a fuse (not shown) is a fusing confirmation area 635xc, and a fusing confirmation area 635xc is provided between the foil drawing area 635xa1 and the foil drawing area 635xa2. And a solid ground is formed. Of the two through holes 635xs1, the through hole 635xs1 through which the connection terminal is inserted and the through hole 635xs2 through which the connection terminal is inserted out of the two through holes 635xs2 are the copper on the back surface (solder surface) side of the interface board 635. On the foil surface, wiring patterns (not shown) are formed and connected. When a resist solution of a dark color (for example, green or black) is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635, as shown in FIG. Silk printing IFSLK is printed as an outline line having a white rectangular shape indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support (fuse holder) (not shown) on the top as silk printing. The reason why this dark resist solution is used is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because colors with different contrasts make it easier to check for blown fuses. Note that the silk print IFSLK as the silk print that is an outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as the silk print FSLK1 ′ of the power supply substrate 630 described above, or a different size. Also good. Further, the silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown). Alternatively, the outer shape of the support metal (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown) may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. In this way, for a fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 that melts when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, a transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) and Since no wiring pattern is routed around the fusing confirmation area 635xc of the corresponding surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635, the wiring pattern and the foil drawing area around the wiring pattern are separated from the fusing confirmation area 635xc. A flat surface can be formed without forming any irregularities due to. Thereby, it is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of disconnection of a fuse wire (metal element) accommodated in a transparent glass tube of a fuse (not shown) with the fusing confirmation region 635xc which is a flat surface as a background ( This mode may be described as “variation (1) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation region of the interface board”). Even when a bright color (for example, white) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635 instead of a dark color (for example, green or black). It is also possible to confirm the fuse blown by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, a silk-printed IFSLK is printed on the light-colored resist as a silk-printed outline line having a dark-colored rectangular shape indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support (fuse holder) (not shown). May surround the outer shape of a fuse support bracket (fuse holder) (not shown), or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support bracket (fuse holder) (not shown). The outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse that is not shown may not be silk-printed at all, and may not be silk-printed) (this modification is referred to as “variation (2) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation region of the interface board”) May be listed). In addition, after a resist solution of a predetermined color (for example, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635, silk with a bright color (for example, white) so as to cover the entire resist. It may be printed. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by contrast between the bright color silk printing and the color of the metal element (fuse line) of the fuse. In this case, a silk-printed IFSLK is printed as a silk-printed outline having a rectangular shape represented by a light-colored (for example, white) chain line indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support (fuse holder) (not shown). The silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown). However, the outer shape of the fuse support (fuse holder) (not shown) may not be silk-printed at all. ) ").

  Also, a fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 that melts when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “fuse not shown”). On the other hand, on the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, as shown in FIG. 178 (c), one fixed terminal is provided for the support fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuse (not shown). 4 through holes 635xs having a land pattern through which a total of 4 terminals are inserted and soldered, and a foil punching region having a rectangular shape so as to surround the 4 through holes 635xs 635xa. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 635x on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635. Of the foil removal region 635xa, the surface (mounting surface) 635x region of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to a transparent glass tube of a fuse (not shown) is a fusing confirmation region 635xc. Of the four through holes 635xs, the two through holes 635xs through which the connection terminals are inserted are connected by forming wiring patterns (not shown) on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) side of the interface substrate 635. Yes. When a resist solution of a dark color (for example, green or black) is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635, as shown in FIG. A silk-printed IFSLK is printed on the resist as a silk-printed outline having a white rectangular shape that indicates the arrangement position of a fuse support bracket (fuse holder) (not shown). The reason why this dark resist solution is used is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because colors with different contrasts make it easier to check for blown fuses. Note that the silk print IFSLK as the silk print that is an outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as the silk print FSLK1 ′ of the power supply substrate 630 described above, or a different size. Also good. Further, the silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown). Alternatively, the outer shape of the support metal (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown) may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. In this way, for the fuse (not shown) provided in the interface board 635 that melts when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, a foil removal region 635 xa is formed and a recess is formed. Although formed, the wiring pattern is not routed at all to the fusing confirmation region 635xc of the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) in the foil-extracted region 635xa. A flat surface can be formed on the fusing confirmation region 635xc without forming irregularities due to the wiring pattern and the foil-extracted region around the wiring pattern. Thereby, it is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of disconnection of a fuse wire (metal element) accommodated in a transparent glass tube of a fuse (not shown) with the fusing confirmation region 635xc which is a flat surface as a background ( This mode may be described as “variation (4) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation region of the interface board”). Even when a bright color (for example, white) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635 instead of a dark color (for example, green or black). It is also possible to confirm the fuse blown by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, a silk-printed IFSLK is printed on the light-colored resist as a silk-printed outline line having a dark-colored rectangular shape indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support (fuse holder) (not shown). May surround the outer shape of a fuse support bracket (fuse holder) (not shown), or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support bracket (fuse holder) (not shown). The outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse not to be shown may not be silk-printed at all, and this aspect may be referred to as “variant (5) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation region of the interface board”. May be listed). In addition, after a resist solution of a predetermined color (for example, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635, silk is brightly colored (for example, white) so as to cover the entire resist. It may be printed. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by contrast between the bright color silk printing and the color of the metal element (fuse line) of the fuse. In this case, a silk-printed IFSLK is printed as a silk-printed outline having a rectangular shape represented by a bright (for example, white) chain line indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support (fuse holder) (not shown). The silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown). However, the outer shape of the fuse support (fuse holder) (not shown) may not be silk-printed at all. ) ").

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, and the power destruction circuit 630g are provided on one board called the power board 630. Although various electronic components and the like have been provided, it may be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 includes a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuits of the second power supply substrate 630B are the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , L3, L4, fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, the input is input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, the output is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power supply generation circuit 630f. It will be. Various DC voltages, such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc., created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 excluding the first power supply board 630A. The

  Incidentally, a gaming machine having a board such as a power board capable of creating various power sources necessary for a gaming device based on an external power source supplied from outside the gaming machine has been proposed (for example, JP-A-20142014). -008221 publication (FIG. 2)). By the way, when a person in charge at a service center of a gaming machine manufacturer instructs a staff member such as a game hall clerk to specify a specific electronic component of the board by telephone, it is mounted on the board as instructed by the person in charge at the service center. Among the plurality of electronic components, there is a problem that it is difficult to specify a notable electronic component.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a board such as a power board that can create various power sources necessary for the gaming apparatus based on an external power source supplied from outside the gaming machine (for example, JP-A-20142014). -008221 publication (FIG. 2)). By the way, even if a person in charge at a service center of a gaming machine manufacturer instructs a staff member such as a clerk at a gaming hall to confirm whether or not the fuse wire of the fuse provided on the board is blown out by telephone. Therefore, it was difficult to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire was broken.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrangement ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums ( The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a rotating drum or a reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 180, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box body) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the rotation center, the front door (front frame) 6002 is inserted into the main body by inserting a key into the key hole 6005 of a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turning it clockwise. The portion (box) 6004 can be opened.

  The metal locking device is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and in cooperation with the locking unit (not shown) It is used for opening and closing locking with the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to the rear side of the cylinder body, a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction, a metal key hole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body. A rotation transmission member (not shown) that rotates together with a normal metal key that is inserted into the key hole 6005 and rotates. The cylinder body of the metal locking device has a rear end attached to the front piece portion through the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear. The rotation transmitting member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and from the rear end toward the front side at a position facing the central axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. When the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004, the rotation transmission member is inserted such that a metal transmission cylinder 654 of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. The rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) is transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. Can do. If the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit are in contact with each other in a state where the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004, the metal The manufactured locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

  The door frame reinforcement unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to give rigidity, and the main body portion (not shown) via the door frame metal ground wire ( (Box) 6004 is electrically connected to a grounding board provided in the interior. That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit is a frame ground on the door frame side. This earth substrate (not shown) is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (earthing) the island equipment of the game hall, and via the island equipment ground wire (not shown) It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

  An opening switch (not shown) that can detect the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 is disposed on the main body portion (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. Yes. This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal by an opening / closing operation by a metal locking device. Instead, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 is detected with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 independently of the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not arranged in the vicinity of the metal locking device and is positioned below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An opening switch is arranged on the part (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. As described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decoration portions. Some of these various decorative portions are not subjected to decorative plating at all, and some are subjected to decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so that electromagnetic noise may enter. Among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit constituting the front door 6002 via a wiring (not shown). (There are some decorative parts that are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit through a wiring (not shown), and the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. Some are electrically connected). Thereby, electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative portions is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative portions from entering the substrate ground. In addition, electromagnetic noise that has entered the decorative parts of the various decorative parts that are decorated with plating on both the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via a wiring (not shown). Then, it is transmitted to the ground substrate provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, and is transmitted from the ground substrate to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as a frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

  In addition, an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, or when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box body) 6004, You may provide an electrostatic removal pad as a static elimination part in the part which becomes an open side on the opposite side to the side (closed side) where a hinge is arrange | positioned. The electrostatic removal pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

  Further, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative portions. Some of the various decorative portions are not subjected to decorative plating at all. Some of the decorative parts are decorated with plating on the entire front and back, and the metal door frame reinforcement unit is electrically connected to the metal door frame via a wiring (not shown). The ground substrate provided inside the main body (box) 6004 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the island facility ground wire. The metal door frame reinforcement unit and the power supply board are electrically connected to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit 620c provided inside the main body (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground board. It may be hermetically connected to each other. The power supply board is supplied with 24V AC from the island facility in the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (line) is input is connected to the non-ground side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) for transiently protecting from an excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. Although this surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and hardly flows current, when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value decreases instantaneously and current flows, and the excessive voltage disappears. In addition, it has a performance to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thereby, electromagnetic wave noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and removed from the slot machine 6000. .

  The upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is formed with a protrusion protruding forward from the game panel 6006. In the protruding portion, a medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. In addition, a storage and settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are disposed in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. The bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, the storage settlement button 6022, and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004.

  The main control board box 1320 also accommodates a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing the set value is mounted. That is, as described above, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided in the main body portion (box body) 6004. Therefore, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. The power supply unit 620c provided inside the portion (box) 6004 may be attached and fixed. On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, in addition to the setting key switch 1311a described above, a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) A setting indicator 1310g configured as a single unit, the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above, and the like may be mounted.

  The setting key switch 1311a has substantially the same configuration as that provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above. The setting key switch 1311a is rotated by inserting a setting key into the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing. The setting key cylinder is accommodated. A surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is arranged substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder provided with the insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the metal cylindrical shape ( Alternatively, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the casing of the rectangular shape is disposed substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. In a state where the setting key cylinder is housed in a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing, the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected. It has become.

  The configuration of the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board box 1320, etc. (including other configurations (modifications)) is substantially the same as that provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above. However, the description thereof will be omitted. However, for example, an electromagnetic wave caused by electrostatic discharge by charging a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a will be described. Even if noise enters the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or the front of the setting key cylinder, the surface of the setting change board 1311 (as described above) The foil removal regions SINSx and SIN of the setting change board 1311 in the copper plane on the mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) By forming y, the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted A pair of opposing long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long slot shape extending along the line electrically from a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 Since it is in an insulated state, electromagnetic waves caused by electrostatic discharge due to charging of the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a themselves are caused by a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a or It can be attenuated by a setting key cylinder. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise caused by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from being charged and electrostatically discharged from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, has no influence on the board ground, and the ground line for transmitting the board ground (ground) does not change. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

  The setting key cylinder is filled with a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) between the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is made of a metal cylinder (or rectangular shape). Even if a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) case and the setting key cylinder are not electrically connected and insulated, a configuration that can rotate with respect to the case) is adopted. Good. Even when configured in this manner, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters from a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, the electromagnetic wave noise is detected on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. The metal is prevented from entering the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 through the foil drawing regions SINSx and SINSy formed in It is attenuated by the cylindrical (or rectangular) casing itself. That is, electromagnetic noise from a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing can be prevented from entering the substrate ground of the setting change substrate 1311 by the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy. Thus, intrusion of electromagnetic wave noise from a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing can be prevented on the setting change board 1311 side, so that the intrusion of electromagnetic wave noise is played through the setting change board 1311. It is possible to reliably stop the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the movement, from proceeding to the substrate ground, and the ground line for transmitting the substrate ground (ground) is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Three variable rotators (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through the display window are provided. You can see through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. On the other hand, the rendering device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

  On these variable rotators, translucent symbol bands on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information are affixed to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motor, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from top to bottom from the display window described above. It has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. Peripheral control unit 1500 is based on various commands from main control board 1310, such as operation control of a plurality of movable effects, drawing control of effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, and the like. The progress of the production is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

  The main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of medals as game media into the medal slot 6008, and starts to display symbol information variation based on the operation of the start lever 6014. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right Based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time, the change display of the symbol information is stopped. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as gaming media to the tray 6026.

  According to this slot machine 6000, a front door 6002 is provided on the front side as an openable / closable door, and a main control board 1310 accommodated in a main control board box 1320 as a board on which electronic components are mounted, and a first key (game hall) The first operation (when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004) can be performed by the operation of a regular metal key possessed by a staff member such as a store clerk. As a first device, a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a second operation (setting value) by operating a second key (setting key) different from the first key. When changing, the main control board box can be used as a second device in which the signal line by the operation of the second key is electrically connected to the electronic component. 13 0 and a, a setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change substrate 1311 to be housed together with the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities (when setting values are changed), and is capable of confirming a set current setting value (can be set). (When checking the current setting value). The metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002, and the housing of the metal locking device is electrically connected to the ground side. ing. The setting key switch 1311a is provided behind the front door (front frame) 6002, and the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side.

  Specifically, the metal cylindrical cylinder body which is the housing of the metal locking device of the front door 6002 is electrically connected to the ground side of the frame ground on the door frame side or N (neutral) of AC 24V. Connected to. Further, by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a is made of a metal cylinder ( Or a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 having a long slot shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 that can be inserted through a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the casing. The SLH 2 can be electrically insulated from a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. For this reason, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing that is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is a solid ground (substrate) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. It is electrically isolated from the ground.

  As described above, since the housing of the metal locking device provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002 is electrically connected to the ground side, the metal locking device is temporarily subjected to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Even if it intrudes, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is released to the ground side, so that the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, is not changed, and the front door (front frame) Since the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing which is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side of 6002 is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side, it is assumed that the metallic cylinder is temporarily connected. Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invades the shape (or rectangular shape) of the case, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is attenuated by the metal cylindrical (or rectangular shape) case itself, so Parts mounted It is possible to prevent giving the variation of the ground line in the main control board 1310, that is a substrate. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

  Also, a metal columnar cylinder body which is a housing of the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 is supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the slot machine 6000 with an AC voltage of 24V. While being electrically connected to the ground side which is N (neutral), a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing which is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is a frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000. In addition, it is insulated without being electrically connected to the ground side, which is N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000. As a result, the metal cylindrical cylinder body is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the ground side which is N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000; On the other hand, a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing has a frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 and a ground side that is 24 V N (neutral) of AC 24 V supplied to the slot machine 6000. It can be in an insulated state without being electrically connected.

  Further, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by a metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a locking unit (not shown) (that is, the front door (front frame) 6002 is changed to a main body portion (box) 6004. After the release, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 accommodated in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310 can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities. (When the set value is changed), and the current set value that has been set can be checked (when the set current set value is checked). Thus, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and the locking unit (not shown) (that is, the front door (front frame) 6002 is the main body (box). Otherwise, the setting key switch 1311a is accessed to operate the setting key switch 1311a and the setting value can be set (when the setting value is changed) or the setting value can be checked (set). In the case of confirming the current setting value), security for the setting key switch 1311a can be improved.

  In the fusion gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008 ′, and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls thrown in the ball slot 6008 ′ as a game medium to operate the start lever 6014. The symbol information variation display is started based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as gaming media to the tray 6026.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame lower unit 120 The bulging part 123 The apparatus arrangement | positioning part 130 Top plate (storage plate)
131 Storage area 131a Front area 131b Side area 132 Bottom wall 133 Rear peripheral wall (peripheral wall)
134 Front peripheral wall 135 Supply port 136 Delivery port 137 Alignment part 138 Storage light emission decoration part (light emission decoration part)
138a LED
150 Door frame effect device (effect device)
1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1120 Panel holder 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board (effect control means)
1511 Peripheral control unit (production control means)
1512 Production display control unit (production control means)
1600 effect display device (effect display means)
3000 Back unit 3200 Back second production unit (front decoration)
3210 Rotating decorative body (front decorative body)
3228 Back second outer decorative body (front decorative body)
3229 Back second inner decorative body (front decorative body)
3230 Back second inner decorative body (front decorative body)
3300 Back third stage production unit 3310 Upper unit 3311 Upper vertical ring ornament (movable ornament)
3312 First decorative body 3313 Second decorative body 3320 Back third upper drive motor (drive motor)
3330 Lower unit 3331 Lower vertical ring decorative body (movable decorative body)
3332 First decorative body 3333 Second decorative body 3340 Back third lower drive motor (drive motor)
3350 Left unit 3351 Left side ring decorative body (movable decorative body)
3352 First decorative body 3353 Second decorative body 3360 Back third left drive motor (drive motor)
3370 Right unit 3371 Right side ring decorative body (movable decorative body)
3372 First decorative body 3373 Second decorative body 3380 Back third right drive motor (drive motor)

Claims (1)

A game board where a game ball is played on the front side, and
A frame body to which the game board is detachably attached from the front;
A gaming machine that is provided on the rear side of the frame main body, and that receives a gaming ball from outside the gaming machine and guides it downstream,
The game ball supply unit
A ball reservoir for receiving game balls from outside the gaming machine;
A ball guiding portion formed with a discharge hole that can guide the game ball stored in the ball storing portion to the downstream side and allow foreign substances to fall;
A plurality of boards are provided on the rear side of the gaming machine,
The specific board located below the discharge hole among the plurality of boards is arranged to be located in front of the discharge hole on the rear side of the gaming machine,
Further, below the discharge hole, a hole lower member having an upper surface portion for receiving the foreign matter dropped from the discharge hole is located,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the upper surface portion of the hole lower member is provided above the specific substrate located in front of the discharge hole.